Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
1. Aim and Principles of Response
(introduction...)
Definition and Aim
Responsibilities
Principles of Response
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
1. Aim and Principles of Response
Figure
Definition and Aim
1. The majority of UNHCR's operations begin as a result of an
emergency caused by a sudden influx of refugees1. The organization
and procedures of UNHCR reflect this; much of UNHCR's normal work is in effect
an emergency response. There are, however, situations that are clearly
exceptional. This handbook addresses the needs of such situations.
Definition of
2. The distinction is one of degree: a definition of a refugee
emergency for the purposes of UNHCR and this handbook might be:
any situation in which the life or well-being of
refugees will be threatened unless immediate and appropriate action is taken,
and which demands an extraordinary response and exceptional
measures.
3. What is important is less a definition than the ability to
recognize in time the development of situations in which an extraordinary
response will be required of UNHCR in order to safeguard the life and well-being
of refugees.
4. Much of the handbook is concerned with guidelines on the
protection and material assistance likely to be needed when large numbers of
refugees cross frontiers to seek asylum i.e. an emergency caused by a sudden
influx of refugees.
5. Such emergencies are, of course, not the only situations
which demand an extraordinary response of UNHCR. Equally swift action will be
required in other types of emergency. For example, an emergency can develop in
an existing operation, such as when events suddenly place in danger refugees who
had previously enjoyed asylum in safety (discussed in chapter 2 on protection).
It can also erupt during the final phase of an operation as in the case of a
large-scale repatriation (discussed in chapter 19 on voluntary repatriation). In
addition there are complex emergencies, which are humanitarian crises involving
the competence of more than one UN agency (see chapter 7 on coordination for a
full definition). The general guidance provided in this handbook will be useful
to these types of emergencies as well.
Aim
The aim of UNHCR's emergency response is to provide
protection to persons of concern to UNHCR and ensure that the necessary
assistance reaches them in time.
1For convenience, "refugee" is used
in this handbook to refer to all persons of concern to UNHCR. The different
categories of persons of concern, including refugees, are defined in chapter 2
on
protection.
Responsibilities
Governments and UNHCR
6. Host governments are responsible for the security and safety
of, assistance to, and law and order among refugees on their territory.
Governments often rely on the international community to help share the burden,
and UNHCR provides assistance to refugees at the request of governments.
The statutory function of providing international protection
to refugees and seeking permanent solutions for their problems is however,
always UNHCR's responsibility.
7. The role of UNHCR in emergency operations is primarily to
protect refugees. UNHCR assists and complements the work of the government by
acting as a channel for assistance from the international community, and by
coordinating implementation of the assistance. Whatever the organizational
manner in which UNHCR provides emergency assistance in response to a government
request, UNHCR is responsible for ensuring that the protection and immediate
material needs of the refugees are met in an effective and appropriate manner.
UN Organizations
8. The material needs of refugees are likely to cover sectors
for which other organizations in the UN system have special competence. In
particular, the World Food Program (WFP), with which UNHCR has established a
close partnership, provides the major part of the emergency food needs of
refugees. In recognition of each organization's comparative advantages and
skills, and with the aim of giving consistency and predictability to the
relationships between them, UNHCR has concluded Memoranda of Understanding
(MOUs) with a number of UN organizations. These MOUs also cover issues related
to emergency preparedness and response, such as joint contingency planning,
joint assessments and development of standards and guidelines, as well as
programme implementation. Notable among these are the MOUs with WFP, the United
Nations Development Programme (UNDP) and the United Nations Children's Fund
(UNICEF), which are contained in Appendix 3. UNHCR has also signed MOUs with the
United Nations Population Fund (UNFPA), the United Nations Development Fund for
Women (UNIFEM) and the World Health Organization (WHO).
9. Responsibility for coordinating the response of the UN system
to a refugee emergency normally rests with UNHCR.
10. The UN body charged with strengthening the coordination of
humanitarian assistance of the UN to complex emergencies is the Office for the
Coordination of Humanitarian Affairs (OCHA)2, through coordination,
policy development and advocacy. Complex emergencies are defined and discussed
in more detail in chapter 7 on coordination.
Non-Governmental Organizations
11. Large numbers of non-governmental organizations (NGOs)
provide assistance to refugees in emergencies. These organizations often act as
UNHCR's operational partners. The division of responsibilities is determined by
the implementing arrangements agreed between them, the government and UNHCR
regardless of whether funding is from UNHCR or elsewhere. This is discussed in
more detail in chapters 7 and 8 on coordination and implementing arrangements.
Other Organizations
12. A number of other organizations also act as operational
partners in the provision of assistance to refugees in emergencies. In
particular, the International Committee of the Red Cross (ICRC), the
International Federation of Red Cross and Red Crescent Societies (IFRCS) with
the National Red Cross and Red Crescent Societies, have long provided such
assistance. The ICRC mandate requires a high degree of operational neutrality
and independence, which sometimes limits their participation in coordination
mechanisms and the exchange of information between them and other organizations.
13. Other operational partners could include inter-governmental
organizations, for example the International Organization for Migration (IOM).
The objective of IOM is to ensure the orderly migration of persons who are in
need of international migration assistance. IOM works subject to the agreement
of both (or all) the states concerned with the migration. IOM has worked closely
with UNHCR, notably by assisting with voluntary repatriation.
2This was formerly known as the
Department of Humanitarian Affairs (DHA).
The Refugees
14. Beyond the right to international protection under the
Statute of UNHCR and under the 1951 Refugee Convention and 1967 Protocol, all
refugees, as indeed all persons, have certain basic human rights. These are
enshrined in the Charter of the United Nations and in the Universal Declaration
of Human Rights: the fundamental right to life, liberty and security of person;
protection of the law; freedom of thought, conscience and religion; and the
right to own property. Refugees have the right to freedom of movement. However,
it is recognized that, particularly in cases of mass influx, security
considerations and the rights of the local population may dictate restrictions.
15. Refugees and displaced persons also have, of course,
responsibilities towards the country where they have sought refuge. These are
set out in Article 2 of the 1951 Convention: "Every refugee has duties to the
country in which he finds himself, which require in particular that he conform
to its laws and regulations as well as to measures taken for the maintenance of
public order." The civilian nature of refugee status must be respected.
Defining Responsibilities
16. All those involved, both inside and outside the UN system,
should have clearly defined responsibilities within a single overall operation.
This can be achieved through the establishment of an appropriate coordinating
structure at various levels to ensure that duplication of effort and gaps are
avoided. In certain situations, the coordinating role of UNHCR may need to be
more direct and operational, both in planning and executing the emergency
response, and in providing expertise in specific
sectors.
Principles of Response
Introduction
17. Whatever the framework of responsibility for a particular
refugee emergency, certain principles of response are likely to be valid. Many
of these are common themes in the chapters that follow.
18. By definition, the needs of a refugee emergency must be
given priority over other work of UNHCR. This is essential if the aim of
ensuring protection and timely assistance to refugees is to be met. Leadership
and flexibility are required of UNHCR in an emergency.
Get the Right People to the Right Place at the Right Time
19. The single most important factor in determining whether or
not sufficient emergency assistance reaches the refugees in time will probably
be the people involved in organizing and implementing the operation.
Enough UNHCR and implementing partner staff of the right
calibre and experience must be deployed to the right places, and equipped with
the authority, funds, material and logistical support needed.
No amount of expertise and experience can substitute for
organizing ability, flexibility, a readiness to improvise, ability to get on
with others, ability to work under pressure no matter how difficult the
conditions, tact, sensitivity to other cultures and particularly to the plight
of refugees, a readiness to listen, and, not least, a sense of humour.
Ensure the Measures are Appropriate
Identify Needs
20. An appropriate response in the provision of protection and
material assistance requires an assessment of the needs of refugees that takes
into account not only their material state and the resources available, but also
their culture, age, gender and background and the culture and background of the
nationals in whose country they are granted asylum. The provision of protection
and of essential goods and services must be provided to refugees in ways which
actually meet their needs.
Be Flexible and Respond to Changing Needs
21. What is appropriate will vary with time. In the early stages
of a major emergency special measures that rely heavily on outside assistance
may be necessary. However, as a general principle, the response should draw to
the extent possible on local resources, materials and methods, and should, for
example, avoid regimented refugee camps. Solutions that can be readily
implemented with existing resources and simple technologies should be sought.
Identify Standards
22. It is an important responsibility of UNHCR to determine with
the government and operational partners the standards of assistance that are
appropriate. This requires expertise in a number of disciplines. The guidelines
in Section III of this handbook suggest general considerations, to be modified
in light of the circumstances of each emergency. Appendix 2 (Toolbox) also
contains standards. What is to be decided for each sector is the correct level
of total assistance from all sources.
23. As a general principle, the standards of assistance must
reflect the special needs of the refugees based on their condition, physical
situation and experiences. At the same time account must be taken of the
standards planned for and actually enjoyed by the local population.
24. If the standards have been correctly determined, they cannot
later be lowered without harm to the refugees. The refugees must, for example,
receive a minimum basic food ration. Outside contributions required to reach the
standards will, however, naturally be reduced as the refugees become more
self-reliant.
Always Remember the Longer Term Objectives
25. A final general principle in considering the appropriateness
of measures is that, from the start, resources must be divided between immediate
needs and action aimed at longer-term improvements and the prevention of
problems. For example, resources must be devoted to general public health
measures as well as to the treatment of individual diseases, which will include
many that could be prevented by better water and sanitation. Emergency
assistance is to be allocated to the maximum extent possible to activities which
will be of lasting benefit, thus keeping any relief phase as short as possible.
26. From the beginning of an emergency, and even during
preparations for an emergency, planning must take into account the post
emergency phase as well as the envisaged durable solutions.
Involve the Refugees and Promote Self-reliance
27. In order to ensure that the assistance provided to refugees
is appropriate, the refugees must be involved from the outset in the measures
taken to meet their needs. In addition, all components of the operation must be
planned in such a way as to promote their self-reliance. Obvious as this
principle is, the pressures of an emergency often make it easier to organize an
operation from the outside for, rather than with, those whom it is to benefit.
28. If the emergency operation involves the refugees in this way
from the start, its effectiveness will be greatly enhanced. Furthermore, such an
approach will allow the refugees to maintain their sense of dignity and purpose,
encourage self-reliance and help avoid dependency. In emergencies, refugees are
often regarded as helpless and passive recipients of external assistance. In the
long term this sets a pattern of dependency. Refugees must be encouraged to help
themselves by using their own skills and resources from the beginning of an
emergency.
It is important to encourage refugee participation at all
stages of planning and implementation.
29. Refugees are often most able to help themselves, and thus be
least reliant on outside assistance, if they are not grouped together in highly
organized camps, but rather reside in small, less formal groups.
30. The interests and needs of specific groups of refugees,
particularly vulnerable ones, are better cared for and such efforts are more
sustainable if community support and involvement is harnessed right from the
start. In addition, refugee involvement helps ensure that the emergency response
addresses social, human and emotional needs, and goes beyond the provision of
material relief.
Be Aware of Social and Economic Roles
To plan and manage an emergency response effectively, the
social and economic roles of refugee women, men and children must be properly
analyzed and understood to see how these roles will affect and be affected by,
planned activities3.
31. It is essential to understand socio-economic factors when
planning and implementing the emergency response to avoid unintentionally
depriving some refugees of the benefits of assistance. This is often true for
women, children, the elderly and the disabled. UNHCR pays particular attention
to the needs of these groups, especially in emergencies. It is important that
the basic needs of vulnerable groups (physically, mentally, or socially
disadvantaged) are met. Thus in the ning and implementation of an emergency
response, vulnerable groups must be identified and monitored systematically to
ensure that they are not further disadvantaged. If necessary, special measures
should be taken to meet their particular needs.
32. Even in an emergency, refugees are likely to have some form
of representation, through a community or group organization.
It is important to find out exactly what kind of leadership
structure exists.
It is also through an effective use of their representation that
refugees' rights can be better promoted. However, be aware that leaders may
sometimes not be representational, or may have an agenda or objectives which
could have adverse consequences on other refugees.
3 In UNHCR this method for
assessment and planning is known as "People Oriented Planning", and discussed in
detail in A Framework for People-Oriented Planning in Refugee Situations
Taking Account of Women, Men and Children, UNHCR, Geneva
1992
Do Not Treat Issues in Isolation
33. In all stages of an emergency, the problems and needs of
refugees must be seen comprehensively, and sector-specific tasks be set within a
multi-sectoral framework, since action in one area is likely to affect others.
For example the real solution to a health problem might be found in improving
the water supply. Ensure the correct balance in resource allocation between the
different sectors.
A multi-sectoral approach must be a fundamental feature of an
emergency response.
Ensure Environment is Considered at an Early Stage
34. Similarly, issues which are cross-cutting in nature should
not be neglected. This is often the case with issues concerning vulnerable
groups, children, women, and the environment. Environment concerns must be taken
into account from the earliest stage. In an emergency involving large-scale
population displacements, some environmental damage is unavoidable. Such damage
can have an adverse effect on the health and well-being of the refugees and
their host community. The emergency phase is therefore, a critical time to
institute measures which limit environmental degradation. Environmental problems
created at this stage become increasingly difficult and costly to redress. Every
effort should be made to prevent, or at least minimize, irreversible
environmental impacts caused by the emergency response activities and the
presence of refugees.
Work for Durable Solutions
35. When an emergency occurs, actions taken at the very outset
can have important longer-term consequences. Clear and consistent policies from
the beginning will have an important long-term effect. Similarly, the immediate
response of the international community to a major influx of refugees must take
into account the ultimate aim of promoting a durable solution to the problem.
This requires that the response both encourages the self-reliance of the
refugees and reduces prolonged dependency on outside relief, and that it does
nothing to prevent the promotion of a long-term solution as soon as possible.
36. As a general principle, the best solution is voluntary
repatriation. Where this is not possible, assimilation within the country of
asylum (local settlement) is in most circumstances preferable to assimilation
within another country (resettlement), particularly for large groups and in
cases where resettlement would take place in a cultural environment alien to the
refugees. There may, however, be situations in which resettlement is the only
way to ensure protection.
Monitor and Evaluate the Effectiveness of Response
37. Whatever the nature of the emergency, the action required of
UNHCR is likely to vary with time and as circumstances change.
It is essential that the effectiveness of the response be
kept constantly under review and action adjusted as necessary and in time.
This will require sound monitoring, reporting and evaluation
systems, including indicators, to detect deterioration or change, and also a
continuous review of the aims of UNHCR's assistance, both in terms of bringing
the emergency to an early end and for the promotion of a durable solution.
38. Such monitoring must also ensure that the funds provided
voluntarily to UNHCR by governments and others are being used to the best
advantage. This is inherent in the principle of appropriate response. It should
be borne in mind that whatever funds may be available in the early stages of an
acute humanitarian emergency, the passage of time will produce financial
constraints. Thus it is important that actual and potential donors see that the
action proposed is indeed essential, and that its impact is effective.
Finally, an emergency response must address fully the
specific needs of children, be gender sensitive and cognizant of the impact of
its policies and practices on the environment.
Figure
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
2. Protection
(introduction...)
Introduction
Protection in Emergencies
Initial Actions
Physical Safety of Refugees
Emergencies as a Result of Changes in Government Policy
Other Persons of Concern to UNHCR
Durable Solutions
Key References
Annexes
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
2. Protection
Figure
Introduction
UNHCR's Mandate
1.
UNHCR's fundamental responsibilities are to:
i. Provide international protection to refugees; and
ii. Seek permanent solutions for their problems.
2. The need for international protection arises from the fact
that refugees, unlike ordinary aliens, no longer have the protection of their
home country. International protection is a temporary substitute for the
protection normally provided by States to their nationals abroad until the
refugee can again benefit from national protection.
In an emergency it must first be established that the persons
endangered are of Concern to UNHCR and thus entitled to protection.
3. The legal basis for securing this protection, the aim of
protection, and the means to provide it, must be clearly understood. This
chapter addresses these questions.
Legal Instruments
4. All UNHCR staff must be familiar with the key international
instruments covering the protection of refugees. Of fundamental importance are
the following:
i. Statute of the Office of the United Nations High
Commissioner for Refugees;
ii. 1951 Convention Relating to the Status of
Refugees and its 1967 Protocol;
iii. 1969 Convention Governing the Specific Aspects
of Refugee Problems in Africa of the Organization of African Unity (OAU); iv.
1984 Cartagena Declaration on Refugees, and 1994 San Jose
Declaration.
5. Annex 1 lists these and other relevant international
instruments and their main purpose(s).
6. Refugees enjoy basic human rights set out in instruments such
as the Universal Declaration of Human Rights, and other instruments listed in
Annex 1, as well as the rights they have as refugees which are described in the
various refugee instruments.
Refugee Definition
7. A refugee is defined as:
any person who is outside his/her country of origin and who
is unwilling or unable to return there or to avail him/herself of its protection
because of:
i. a well-founded fear of being persecuted for
reasons of race, religion, nationality, membership of a particular social group
or political opinion; or
ii. a threat to life or security as a result of
armed conflict and other forms of widespread violence which seriously disturb
the public order.
Whether a person is a refugee is not dependent on formal
recognition, but on the fact of meeting the definition of
refugee.
Protection in Emergencies
8. On the spot presence and quick action are generally crucial
to the attainment of UNHCR's objectives, particularly where there is danger of
refoulement or abuses such as arbitrary detention or mistreatment.
The aim of international protection in emergencies is to:
i. Ensure admission and at least temporary asylum;
ii. Prevent forcible return ("refoulement");
iii. Ensure refugees are treated according to basic human
rights standards.
Admission and Non-refoulement
9. The first and most urgent priority is to ensure refugees'
right to asylum is respected, and to ensure they are not forcibly returned
(refouled).
Non-refoulement
10. Of cardinal importance is the principle of non-refoulement.
This principle is set out in Paragraph 1 of Article 33 of the 1951 Convention
which states that:
"No Contracting State shall expel or return
("refouler") a refugee in any manner whatsoever to the frontiers of territories
where his life or freedom would be threatened on account of his race, religion,
nationality, membership of a particular social group or political
opinion".
Non-refoulement includes not rejecting or turning away a
refugee at the border, as well as not returning him/her subsequent to admission
to a country where he/she could face persecution.
11. The 1951 Convention provides for very limited exceptions to
the principle of non-refoulement of refugees, namely, for those reasonably
regarded as a danger to the security of the country where they are, or for those
who, having been convicted by a final judgement of a particularly serious crime,
constitute a danger to the community of that country.
12. The principle of non-refoulement has found specific
expression in a number of international instruments adopted at the universal and
regional levels.
13. Because of its fundamental and universally accepted
character, the principle of non-refoulement has been recognized as a principle
of customary international law, and hence binding on all states.
Non refoulement is a principle of international law and
binding on all States irrespective of whether or not they are party to the 1951
Convention or other international refugee instrument
Admission
14. Asylum seekers must be admitted to the state in which they
seek refuge, without discrimination as to race, religion, nationality, political
opinion or physical incapacity. The Universal Declaration of Human Rights states
that:
"Everyone has the right to seek and to enjoy in
other countries asylum from persecution".
15. The General Assembly, on adopting the UNHCR Statute, called
on governments to cooperate with the High Commissioner in the performance of
his/her functions by, admitting refugees to their territories.
16. Refugees may not be able to meet normal immigration
requirements because of their flight. The 1951 Convention obliges states not to
penalize refugees for having entered their host country without the legally
required formalities.
Status Determination
17. Refugees may be recognized either on the basis of "prima
facie" group determination, or following individual status determination.
18. At the outset of an emergency when asylum-seekers arrive in
large numbers over a short period of time, it is often impractical to resort to
an individual determination of refugee status for each member of the group. In
most emergencies those seeking refuge may be of concern to UNHCR, and the
Statute calls for action on their behalf. When protection is clearly an urgent
humanitarian need, the benefit of the doubt has to be accorded at least until a
considered opinion is available.
In the case of mass influx, the aim is to secure treatment in
accordance with universally recognized humanitarian principles not necessarily
directly linked to the legal status of those in heed. Speed of intervention to
secure protection is thus the first priority.
19. In such circumstances, UNHCR and states usually resort to
refugee status determination for the entire group based on their knowledge of
objective conditions in the country of origin. Every member of the group is thus
considered a refugee prima facie, i.e. a refugee in the absence of
evidence to the contrary.
Persons Excluded From Refugee Status
20. Certain persons do not fall under the High Commissioner's
competence and are excluded from protection. These are persons with respect to
whom there are serious reasons for considering that they have committed a crime
against peace, war crimes (e.g. torture or execution of prisoners), crimes
against humanity (e.g. genocide), serious non-political crimes (e.g. murder or
rape) outside the country of refuge, or acts contrary to the purposes of refuge,
or that they have been guilty of acts contrary to the purposes and principles of
the United Nations.
21. Headquarters must be informed immediately of such situations
and as a rule, criteria for decisions on exclusion should be taken in
consultation with Headquarters. Note that asylum seekers can be given prima
facie recognition as refugees on a group basis, but can only be excluded from
refugee recognition on an individual basis.
UNHCR and States' Responsibilities
22. The High Commissioner's universal protection
responsibilities have been placed on him/her by the General Assembly (Statute of
UNHCR). The exercise of the international protection function by UNHCR is not
dependent upon a request by the government concerned.
23. In countries that are parties to the relevant legal
instruments, UNHCR's protection function is facilitated. The 1951 Convention
obliges States which are parties to the Convention to cooperate with UNHCR in
the exercise of its functions and in particular to facilitate UNHCR's duty of
monitoring the application of the Convention's provisions. The 1969 OAU
Convention contains a similar clause.
24. Even when an emergency occurs in a country not party to the
relevant international instruments, some of the principles embodied in the
Convention are considered customary international law and hence are binding on
all states. Foremost amongst them is the principle of non-refoulement. In
addition, the moral strength and standard setting value of the conclusions of
UNHCR's Executive Committee (EXCOM) is not limited to states which are members
of the Executive Committee (see chapter 9 on external relations for more details
on EXCOM members).
Basic Refugee Standards
25.A set of internationally recognized basic standards of
treatment applicable in refugee emergencies has been agreed1.
a) Refugees and asylum seekers should not be
penalized or exposed to any unfavourable treatment solely on the ground that
their presence in the country is considered unlawful; they should not be
subjected to restrictions on their movements other than those which are
necessary in the interest of public health and public order;
b) They should enjoy the fundamental civil rights
internationally recognized, in particular those set out in the Universal
Declaration of Human Rights;
c) They should receive all necessary assistance and
be provided with the basic necessities of life including food, shelter and basic
sanitary and health facilities; in this respect the international community
should conform with the principles of international solidarity and
burden-sharing;
d) They should be treated as persons whose tragic
plight requires special understanding and sympathy. They shoud not be subjected
to cruel, inhuman or degrading treatment;
e) There should be no discrimination on the grounds
of race, religion, political opinion, nationality, country of origin or physical
incapacity;
f) They are to be considered as persons before the
law, enjoying free access to courts of law and other competent administrative
authorities;
g) The location of asylum seekers should be
determined by their safety and well-being as well as by the security needs of
the receiving State. Asylum seekers should, as far as possible, be located at a
reasonable distance from the frontier of their country of origin. They should
not become involved in subversive activities against their country of origin or
any other State;
h) Family unity should be respected;
i) All possible assistance should be given for the
tracing of relatives;
j) Adequate provision should be made for the
protection of minors and unaccompanied children;
k) The sending and receiving of mail should be
allowed;
l) Material assistance from friends or relatives
should be permitted;
m) Appropriate arrangements should be made, where
possible, for the registration of births, deaths and marriages;
n) They should be granted all the necessary
facilities to enable them to obtain a satisfactory durable
situation;
o) They should be permitted to transfer assets which
they have brought into a territory to the country where the durable solution is
obtained; and
p) All steps should be taken to facilitate voluntary
repatriation.
1These were adopted by UNHCR's
Executive Committee in 1981, Conclusion No 22.
Temporary Protection
26. Some countries adopt a narrow definition of the term
"refugee" which does not encompass those persons who are fleeing from armed
conflict (such persons are considered refugees within the definition contained
in, for example, the OAU Convention). In countries with a narrow definition, the
term "temporary protection" has been used to describe protection extended to
categories of persons clearly in need of international protection, but in
respect of whom recognition as refugees would present difficulties, either
because they would not fall under the narrow definition, or because individual
status determination would not be practical in view of the numbers of persons
involved.
27. The basic elements of temporary protection include:
i. Admission to the country of refuge;
ii. Respect for basic human rights, with treatment
in accordance with internationally recognized humanitarian standards (e.g. those
basic refugee standards listed above);
iii. Protection against refoulement;
iv. Voluntary repatriation when conditions in the
country of origin allow. Persons admitted to a country under a temporary
protection scheme generally are not provided access to the full range of
benefits accorded to individuals who are recognized as
refugees.
Initial Actions
Introduction
28. The legal basis on which UNHCR intervenes to secure the
protection of refugees is contained in the instruments mentioned above.
Frequently the practical course of action to be adopted is, however, of more
concern than the legal instruments themselves.
Often protection depends less on the fine print of a statute
and more on swift appropriate action by UNHCR field staff.
29. In order for UNHCR to effectively discharge its protection
mandate, the staff of the organization must have free and unhindered access to
all refugees and asylum seekers irrespective of their location.
30. It should be borne in mind that action taken at the outset
of an emergency may have significant long-term consequences, both for continued
protection, including perhaps for other groups of refugees within the country,
and for the promotion of durable solutions.
Rapid Deployment, Continuing Presence and Free Access
31. The first priority is rapid deployment of staff.
A continuing UNHCR presence with direct and unhindered access
to refugees should be established in the area concerned for as long as
required.
Free access and continuing presence are the vital practical
support to ensuring UNHCR's mandate. Sufficient female staff must be present as
this will help ensure that women refugees can express protection problems, and
that these problems are recognized and dealt with appropriately.
Assessment
32. Good protection requires good information. UNHCR staff,
often together with local officials, should visit all points of influx and
refugee locations to gather information from refugees regarding the issues and
questions set out in Annex 1 to chapter 5 on initial assessment (in particular
those relating to who the refugees are, where they are from, why they have fled
and identification of vulnerable groups). In addition, the refugees should be
asked about the situation along the flight route and any problems encountered
upon entering the country of refuge.
33. Sources of information must be developed and direct
communication with contacts established in the field to ensure that UNHCR is
quickly informed of any new influx or protection problem. Such open lines of
communication are especially important for border regions which are remote from
the capital, where UNHCR may not yet have a local presence.
34. Potential sources of information include:
Asylum seekers
themselves;
Local or central government
authorities;
Community and religious
leaders;
National and international
NGOs;
ICRC, if
present;
Other UN and international
organizations;
National (particularly local
language) and international news media.
35. If possible the central authorities should participate in
fact finding missions, as this reduces the risk of misunderstanding between
UNHCR and the central authorities and between the central and local authorities.
Ensuring Respect for Non-refoulement
36. The best way to ensure respect for the principle of
non-refoulement and basic human rights is to create awareness among national
authorities at all levels. In a crisis situation, it may not be possible to
provide formal training, but in daily contacts with camp authorities, local
authorities, army personnel and border officials, the principle of
non-refoulement must be made clear. Give concrete examples to the authorities of
what can happen to a refugee who is returned: it can mean loss of life.
Awareness may also need to be raised in the local population -the media may
provide a forum - and public opinion can be an important influence.
Ensuring an Understanding of UNHCR's Mandate
37. The basis for UNHCR's concern and involvement should be
explained in as practical terms as possible. Local officials may not know of
UNHCR's mandate, nor of the assistance which UNHCR may already be giving
elsewhere in the country.
The approach Should stress that the work of the High
Commissioner is of an entirely non-political character and is strictly
humanitarian and social.
Border Presence
38. Develop good contact with border authorities and monitor
cross border movements: this also helps provide contact with the refugees, and
gives information about what is happening in the country of origin as well as
potential problems in border crossings on both sides of the border. If it is not
possible for staff to be present at all border crossing points on a permanent
basis, each crossing point should be checked frequently.
39. Any protection problems relating to the admission or
treatment of refugees at the border should be brought immediately to the
attention of the competent authorities in the host country and any other country
involved, for urgent remedial action.
Location of Refugees
40. Refugees should be accommodated sufficiently far away from
the borders of the country of origin to avoid security problems.
Maintaining Contact with Local Authorities
41. At both the local and central level, there must be assured
access at all times to those officials whose decisions will affect the refugees'
situation. Establish who they are, contact them and if possible request home
telephone numbers and other means of communication so that if a protection
problem arises it can be brought to the right official's attention at once.
Refoulements often take place very rapidly.
42. The most senior local official directly responsible should
be approached and requested to allow (at least temporary) asylum. In some cases
this may be the local military commander for a region.
43. NGOs may be able to advise on the local infrastructure and
decision-making process, and influential local personalities, such as community
or religious leaders, may be helpful.
44. Local authorities should be kept informed of demarches UNHCR
has made or intends to make in the capital - these should not only be the
demarches of a political or formal nature, but also those covering practical and
assistance aspects of the programme.
Protection and Assistance
45. Protection and material assistance should be planned as
complementary parts of a single UNHCR operation. Assistance cannot be provided
without assured asylum and without life-sustaining material assistance,
protection alone will not preserve the lives and well-being of the refugees.
There should be an early indication that UNHCR's intervention may result in
material assistance - in other words, that the granting of asylum and meeting of
immediate needs will not be a burden on local authorities' budgets. Field
Officers must receive early guidance contained in section III on the extent to
which commitments on material assistance may be given, in order to communicate
this information with local authorities. If the influx consists of additional
asylum seekers clearly belonging to a group already assisted by UNHCR, a firm
assurance of material assistance within the means available is usually given.
Although the link between such assistance and protection responsibilities is
self-evident to UNHCR, it should be borne in mind that the connection is not
necessarily so clear to local or central authorities.
Registration
46. A registration exercise should be conducted at the earliest
possible stage of an emergency operation (for more details see chapter 11 on
population estimation and registration).
Women and Children
47. Refugees, and in particular women and children, travelling
alone or in small groups in remote border areas, are very vulnerable to
extortion, abuse and sexual violence. A proactive approach is needed to ensure
that protection needs are met.
UNHCR considers a child to be:
a person below the age of 18 years, unless, under
the law applicable to the child, majority is attained earlier,
as defined in the Convention on the Rights of the Child.
Note that gender-related persecution can be considered a ground
for recognition under the definition of refugee.
UNHCR's Guidelines on the Protection of Refugee Women, and
Refugee Children: Guidelines on Protection and Care (see key references) are
essential reading for those designing a protection programme. More information
on the procedures noted below is contained in section III of the Handbook, in
particular chapter 10 on community services.
48. Prevent protection problems for refugee women and children
through good programme design in all sectors, including:
Obtaining a good knowledge of
the population profile, especially the breakdown by sex and age;
Preserving the original
family and community structures;
Consulting women on the
design of the assistance programme, in particular on the design of the refugee
camp and on the commodity distribution system;
Locating services so as not
to expose refugee women to additional risk when using them;
Providing lighting in the
camp especially along paths to latrines;
Ensuring an adequate number
of women staff, particularly protection, community services and health
staff;
Forming security patrols
among the refugees themselves having the protection of women as a
priority;
Providing training for police
and military personnel on the rights of women and children, especially in
circumstances where there is a heavy military or police presence;
Initiating tracing as soon as
possible. Appropriate measures must be taken for identification, documentation,
tracing, interim support and family reunion of separated children (see chapter
10 on community services for more information on unaccompanied
children);
Providing structured
activities and primary schools for children (this can be important as a
protection tool as it can help reduce recruitment into armed
forces);
Targeting assistance to
remove the need for child labour;
Issuing birth certificates.
Birth registration may be a prerequisite for obtaining nationality, enrolling in
school and may be a vital tool for tracing. It can also be important in
preventing military recruitment and other forms of exploitation.
Help Children by Helping the Family; Support Women to
Preserve Family Unity.
The single best way to promote the protection, well-being and
safety of children is to support their families.
Actively work to preserve family unity. Measures to promote the
health and physical security of refugee women can help prevent separation of
mother and child. A family, whose members have become separated or who are under
serious stress, puts children at particular risk. Give priority to helping
parents and other child care-givers meet the needs of their children. Also,
recognize the parents' own needs. Families may need assistance in using their
own coping techniques and rebuilding their support networks. Make every effort
to preserve or reconstitute family help networks. Family groups wishing to live
together should be helped to do so.
Monitoring and Reporting
49. Once immediate protection is secured, arrangements must be
made to monitor the situation and ensure continuing respect of the rights of the
refugees.
50. Immediate, clear and regular reports of developments, action
taken and intended to be taken are important, whether from the Field Officer to
the Head of Office or from the latter to Headquarters. Guidance must be
requested as necessary and Headquarters level interventions recommended as
appropriate. See Annex 3 to chapter 8 on implementing arrangements, for a
standard situation report.
51. A prerequisite for intervention with a government, or for
mobilization of international support, is accurate situation reporting.
Field staff at the site, anxious to provide immediate help,
must remember that unless information gathered locally is shared, its usefulness
is Iimited.
Formalizing Arrangements and Written Demarches
52. Any temporary or ad hoc agreements with the authorities
should be formalized, as for example that covering the local UNHCR presence.
Reference should be made to protection and durable solutions in any formal
exchanges governing the provision of material assistance.
53. As a general rule, a written demarche should be made as soon
as possible to the central authorities at the highest appropriate level. This
level, and the form of the demarche, will be determined by the nature of UNHCR's
presence in the country. A demarche by a newly arrived mission would normally be
addressed to the Minister of Foreign Affairs (or perhaps Interior; the advice of
UNDP and/or embassies should be sought). The communication might:
i. Refer to the information available to UNHCR on
the influx or problem (qualifying it as necessary: the government will often
know more than UNHCR);
ii. State UNHCR's view that persons involved are or
may (as applicable) be of concern to the High Commissioner;
iii. Refer to the government's protection
responsibilities;
iv. Request (confirm understanding, express
gratitude for, etc.) assurances that persons will be granted (at least
temporary) asylum (if appropriate: pending determination of status and
longer-term arrangements);
v. Offer, where persons are found to be of concern
to UNHCR, commitment in principle to provide material assistance (for example,
"every effort" formula).
54. The text of representative level demarches should be
communicated to Headquarters at once both for information and in order that they
may be shared with the permanent mission and/or referred to in any subsequent
Headquarters level demarches. Likewise, the texts of the latter should of course
be shared at once with the field.
55. Representatives should immediately recommend action at the
Headquarters level if they are in doubt that their interventions alone will
secure protection.
56. New oral and written demarches must be made if there are any
grounds for concern that protection is still not adequately assured
(refoulement, abduction, arbitrary detention, mistreatment, abuse of women and
children etc.). Complementary action at the local level should both closely
monitor developments affecting protection, and concentrate to the extent
possible on assisting the authorities to meet the practical problems of the
influx.
Public Relations
57. In certain circumstances tensions in relations between
neighbouring countries may make it necessary to stress even at the local level
that the granting of asylum is a purely humanitarian act.
Emphasize that the granting of asylum is purely humanitarian
and therefore not a hostile ad, and that UNHCR's presence and involvement may
help reduce tension.
58. Particular attention should be paid to briefing other UN
organizations and the diplomatic community, especially those interested
governments whose influence may be able to facilitate protection (for example,
by an early indication of support for UNHCR and/or of intent to contribute
financially to the UNHCR operation).
59. Visits by national and international media and the
diplomatic corps may help achieve a broader appreciation of UNHCR's protection
function. The position to be taken with regard to the media will depend very
much on the circumstances and whether or not publicity would help protect
persons of concern to UNHCR. Close coordination within the various levels of
UNHCR is necessary. Where UNHCR is already represented, previously established
good contacts with the locally based (and especially local language) media may
prove a valuable source of information and is useful in advancing an
understanding of UNHCR's role. General guidance regarding media relations is
provided in chapter 9 external
relations.
Physical Safety of Refugees
Introduction
60. Even after they have been admitted to a country of refuge,
refugees may still face serious threats to their safety. In emergencies, some
basic human rights are particularly threatened and will need to be specially
protected by law as well as by action. These threats may originate from the
country of origin or of asylum or from groups among the refugees themselves.
Camp Security
61. Threats of military attacks originating from the country of
origin may be reduced by locating or relocating camps or settlements a
reasonable distance from the border (see chapter 14 on site planning). In
addition the authorities of the country of asylum may have to increase their
military presence in the border area and around refugee settlements. However,
military presence inside refugee camps or settlements should be avoided.
62. In the country of refuge, threats to physical safety of
refugees (refoulement, unlawful detention, sexual violence, etc.) may emanate
from officials dealing with the refugees.
The authorities of the country of asylum must be made aware
of the fact that they retain primary responsibility for security and must ensure
the safety and well-being of refugees.
63. Corrective action is in the hands of the authorities and
must be taken resolutely. UNHCR must maintain contact with the refugees and the
authorities to ensure that there is adequate response.
64. Criminal attacks and banditry against refugees should be
addressed by civil authorities and security forces of the host country in close
cooperation with UNHCR and the refugee community.
65. In situations where armed individuals are part of the
refugee population, UNHCR should encourage the screening of the whole population
and the separation of refugees from armed individuals, as well as their
disarmament.
66. In all cases of military and police presence, general
measures as described in paragraph 48 such as awareness campaigns and training
for protection of the rights of refugee women and children are important in
order to prevent sexual violence against them.
67. In cases of internal conflicts among the refugee population
UNHCR should initially encourage a mediation by the refugee community. If this
fails, UNHCR should request the authorities of the host country to resolve the
conflict.
Reducing Tension Between the Refugee and the Local
Community
68. In situations which may give rise to tension and conflict
between the refugee community and the local population, the following measures
may be considered in addition to action to address the specific causes of the
problem:
i. Arranging regular meetings between the
representatives of the refugees and the leaders of the local
community;
ii. Sensitizing the local population to the plight
of the refugees through local media (programmes on radio and TV, articles in
newspapers) and community leaders;
iii. Sensitizing refugees to local customs and
traditions;
iv. Ensuring that sufficient assistance is mobilized
so that the presence of refugees does not impact negatively on scarce local
resources;
v. Benefiting the local community through
improvements in infrastructure in the areas of water, health, roads,
etc.
69. As a measure of protection, UNHCR staff should encourage and
support the organization of the refugee community and ensure its involvement
alongside local authorities and communities, in all aspects of the
administration of the refugee settlement. Women and adolescents should be
included in such organizations, particularly those dealing with issues affecting
their security. Other actions should include UNHCR presence in refugee camps and
special training in international refugee standards and norms for all officials
dealing with refugees.
Physical Safety in Areas of Conflict
70. International humanitarian law2 provides
protection to civilians including refugees in situations of armed conflict. In
non-international conflicts (i.e. internal armed conflict but not police
operation), all parties to the conflict are bound by the 1949 Geneva Conventions
to respect all persons not taking an active part in the hostilities, and in
particular:
i. To treat them humanely and without distinction as
to race, religion, sex, birth, wealth or any other similar
criteria;
ii. To refrain from violence to life and
person;
iii. Not to take hostages;
iv. To respect personal dignity;
v. Not to pass sentences or carry out executions
without due process of law;
vi. To collect and care for the wounded and
sick.
71. The International Committee of the Red Cross (ICRC) is the
agency charged with supervising the implementation of international humanitarian
law in situations of armed conflict. In most situations of armed conflict or
civil strife, the ICRC offers its services to all parties to assist victims and
ensure the protection of civilian populations - including, where applicable,
refugees and other displaced populations - as well as detained combatants.
72. UNHCR staff should seek the cooperation of the ICRC,
wherever it is present, and benefit from its expertise in dealing with state and
non-state parties alike in situations of armed conflict.
2The four Geneva Conventions of 1949
and their two Additional Protocol of 1977 deal with protection of civilians in
armed conflicts.
Operations in Areas Controlled by Non-state Entities
73. In situations of civil strife or internal armed conflict,
particular difficulties may arise from the fact that UNHCR's interlocutors are
not states or regular armed forces answerable to states, but insurgent groups
and other non-state entities. UNHCR may have no choice but to deal with these
groups as they exercise de facto control over a refugee population. It will be
important to highlight the impartial, non-political and humanitarian role of
UNHCR and to exercise public pressure in order to convince these groups of the
importance of adhering to humanitarian and refugee law. However, when dealing
with these groups, UNHCR should not imply, through any of its actions or
correspondence, a formal recognition of these non-state entities by the United
Nations.
Forced Recruitment
74. Another protection issue likely to arise where refugees find
themselves in or near a conflict zone is that of forcible recruitment of
refugees by one or more parties to the conflict. In confronting this issue,
UNHCR staff must remember - and remind the authorities -that:
i. The civilian character of refugee camps and
settlements must be preserved and respected in all circumstances. Therefore
recruitment of any age group for military and paramilitary purposes is
unacceptable;
ii. Recruitment by force may amount to cruel,
inhuman or degrading treatment, which is prohibited in all
circumstances;
iii. Recruitment and direct participation in
hostilities of minors under 15 years of age is prohibited, and UNHCR advocates
the non-involvement of all children under 18, whether they are required to
participate directly in hostilities or to perform support tasks;
iv. Where refugees are forced or coerced to return
to their country of origin to fight, this is tantamount to refoulement, which is
prohibited in all circumstances.
Combatants
75. UNHCR is not competent to intervene on behalf of combatants.
Combatants placed hors de combat (sick, wounded, shipwrecked and prisoners of
war) are primarily protected by international humanitarian law, and fall under
the competence of the ICRC.
76. An ex-combatant may qualify as a refugee if a well-founded
fear of persecution can be established, and if there are no serious reasons for
considering that the person should be excluded3.
77. Finally, note that simply because a person is carrying a
weapon does not mean that he/she is a combatant - in some societies, carrying
weapons e.g. knives, is traditional.
3 See Note on the Application
of Exclusion clauses, IOM/83/ 96 FOM/93/96, UNHCR,
1996.
Emergencies as a Result of Changes in Government Policy
78. A special type of protection emergency can occur as the
result of a sudden change, for whatever reason, in government policy towards
persons of concern to UNHCR already on its territory. Those affected may include
both persons known to UNHCR and recognized as refugees, and others who have
hitherto neither formally requested asylum nor made themselves known to UNHCR,
but who may nevertheless fall within the High Commissioner's competence.
79. The action to take in protection emergencies of this type
will vary greatly in each case and only very general guidance can be given.
Accurate information, a UNHCR presence where needed, and a clear and consistent
policy in defence of the rights of the refugees will always be required. The
guidelines that follow must be modified as necessary in light of the actual
situation. Some of the considerations discussed in the previous sections may
also be relevant.
80. UNHCR should immediately try to identify and if possible
establish a list of persons who are, or may be at risk but were not previously
known to UNHCR staff. This list must be constantly updated. Sources of
information include the diplomatic community (some persons may approach or even
seek asylum in embassies), the ICRC, the national Red Cross or Red Crescent
society, churches and NGOs. Care should be taken to ensure the confidentiality
of individual cases when establishing contacts with Embassies. Early
identification, and, if possible registration of, these new cases by UNHCR can
often be a very important source of protection.
81. UNHCR must maintain (or in the case of a new regime
establish) close and continuing cooperation with the authorities. If the country
has acceded to the relevant international instruments, these obligations remain
binding, whatever new policies may be adopted. If the country is not a party to
any of the refugee instruments, the Statute and universal instruments must be
invoked.
82. The government is, of course, responsible for the physical
security of the refugees. Every effort must be made to encourage the government
to protect refugees, particularly during any periods of civil tension. The
immediate aim is that refugees should be able to remain in safety in their
present country of asylum. Respect of the principle of non-refoulement is of
paramount importance.
83. There may be circumstances in which movement of the refugees
to another country is necessary as a last resort. Such moves are quite different
from large-scale resettlement as a durable solution. They may be necessary
either as a result of a direct request from the government or where no other way
of protecting the refugees exists. Immediate approaches to potential countries
of asylum must be made at both local, embassy, and Headquarters levels. Receipt
of resettlement offers may have an important influence on the government's
attitude towards the refugees. Operational partners must be identified. In
addition to locally-based NGOs, the assistance of the ICRC (for example, with
travel documents) and the International Organization for Migration (IOM) may be
sought.
84. In extreme and tense situations where refugees lives were
threatened, there were cases where some form of "safe Haven" for refugees have
been established. However, UNHCR's experience with "safe havens" demonstrated
that refugees often could not be provided with adequate protection and continued
to be exposed to high risks. It is therefore not recommended to formally
establish "safe
havens".
Other Persons of Concern to UNHCR
85. In addition to refugees as defined by the relevant
international instruments (see paragraph 7 above), UNHCR has also been empowered
to extend protection to the following categories. Refugees, as well as the
categories of persons described below, are often referred to as "persons of
concern to UNHCR".
Returnees
86. Returnees are refugees who return voluntarily to their
country of origin and who formally cease to be refugees as soon as they cross
the border. UNHCR has been entrusted by the UN General Assembly to protect and
assist returnees, both during the journey and once back in the country of origin
and to facilitate finding durable solutions to their problems.
Stateless Persons
87. A stateless person is a person who is not considered as a
national by any country. The Universal Declaration of Human Rights states that
everyone has a right to a nationality and no one should be arbitrarily deprived
of his/her nationality or of the right to change his/her nationality. The main
international instruments dealing with statelessness are listed in Annex 1.
UNHCR has been designated as the body which can assist stateless persons in
presenting their claims to appropriate authorities, and in providing technical
and advisory services to states on the preparation and implementation of
nationality legislation.
Internally Displaced Persons (IDPs).
88. IDPs can be broadly defined as persons who have been forced
to flee their homes suddenly or unexpectedly in large numbers
Considerations Regarding UNHCR Involvement with
IDP's.
89. The main requirements for UNHCR's involvement with the
internally displaced4 are :
i. A specific request from the UN General Assembly,
the Secretary General or other competent principle organ of the UN;
ii. The consent of the concerned state or other
relevant entity;
iii. The relevance of UNHCR's expertise to assist,
protect and seek solutions for internally displaced persons in the particular
situation;
iv. The availability of resources for the activities
in question.
4See; UNHCR's Role with
Internally Displaced Persons, IOM87/97, FOM 91/97, UNHCR, 1997. as a result
of armed conflict, internal strife, systematic violations of human rights or
natural or man-made disasters and who are within the territory of their
country.
Criteria for Involvement
Certain situations may demonstrate the usefulness of UNHCR's
involvement. These are situations which present a clear link with activities
UNHCR undertakes in fulfillment of its mandate, for example where internally
displaced populations are, or are likely to be, mixed with returnee populations,
or where the same causes have produced both internal displacement and a refugee
flow, or where there is a risk of cross-border expansion of the internal
displacement. Where the link with mandated activities is not present, UNHCR may
consider involvement with IDPs to attenuate the causes of internal displacement
and contribute to conflict resolution through humanitarian action.
Measures to Assist IDPs
Measures to assist IDPs are broadly similar to those used for
refugees. However, by definition, IDPs remain within their own country, and it
is the national laws of that state which provide the framework for their
protection and rights, rather than specific international legal instruments.
Universal human rights instruments, of course, also apply to IDPs.
The presence of UNHCR staff and the staff of other international
organizations in the areas where IDPs have sought safety has proven helpful in
encouraging authorities and parties to the conflict to respect national laws and
universal human
rights.
Durable Solutions
From the outset of an emergency, UNHCR must bear in mind the
ultimate objective of refugee protection: to help refugees to overcome
displacement and achieve a solution whereby national protection is
re-established and they will no longer be refugees.
Voluntary Repatriation
90. Most large scale refugee emergencies are eventually resolved
through the voluntary repatriation of refugees once the danger they have fled
from has been removed or significantly reduced. See chapter 19 on voluntary
repatriation.
Local Settlement
91. Local settlement means assimilation within the country of
asylum. In the case of prolonged conflicts, refugees often at least de facto
integrate into the host society. It is important in such situations that they
should have official status in the country of asylum, a starting point for which
should be recognition as refugees under the 1951 Convention.
Resettlement
92. Resettlement (meaning assimilation within another country)
should be considered when refugees cannot repatriate or cannot settle in the
country of first asylum, or are at risk in their country of refuge. The decision
to resettle is taken when there is no other way to eliminate the danger to the
legal or physical security of the persons concerned. Resettlement under the
auspices of UNHCR is strictly limited to mandate refugees who have a continued
need for international protection.
Emergency Resettlement
93. Emergency resettlement can be considered where there is:
i. An immediate threat of refoulement to the country
of origin;
ii. An immediate threat of expulsion to another
country from where the refugee may be refouled;
iii. A threat of arbitrary arrest, detention or
imprisonment;
iv. A threat to physical safety or human rights in
the country of refuge analogous to that under the refugee definition and
rendering asylum untenable.
94. Categories of refugees who can be considered for emergency
resettlement include: survivors of violence and torture, refugees with serious
medical conditions which cannot be treated in the country of asylum,
women-at-risk, children and adolescents. Priority attention should be given to
those refugees with acute legal and physical protection needs such as
women-at-risk, and unaccompanied children for whom a determination has been made
that resettlement is in their best interests.
Emergency Resettlement Procedures
95. Emergency resettlement must be used selectively and on the
basis of a thorough and objective assessment of both refugee status and urgency
of removal. Emergency resettlement is undertaken when the immediacy of security
and/or medical threat faced by the refugee necessitates the person's removal
from the threatening conditions within a few days, or even within hours. For the
sake of simplicity a notional limit of a maximum of five days is understood.
96. The following information should be sent to Headquarters
immediately:
i. Full name, date of birth, place of birth, sex,
nationality and ethnic origin;
ii. Detailed status determination
analysis;
iii. Whether accompanied by family (if so,
size);
iv. Details, as per (i), of each family member to
accompany the candidate;
v. Explanation of the need(s) for
resettlement;
vi. Justification for emergency categorization, and
required time-frame for departure;
vii. Whether valid travel documents are held by all
the refugees concerned;
viii. In case of medical emergency: diagnosis,
prognosis, current condition of refugee (and family members if relevant), and
whether an escort is needed;
ix. Recommendation on countries of resettlement and
reasons, including third country links.
97. Detailed data in a duly completed Resettlement Registration
Form (RRF) with supporting documentation must follow as soon as possible.
98. The RRF can be obtained from the Resettlement and Special
Cases Section at Headquarters. This is the section of the Division of
International Protection that is responsible for processing emergency
submissions. In addition, the Section helps coordinate and support the
resettlement of difficult protection and special needs cases. It should be
contacted for advice.
99. Additional information may be found in the UNHCR
Resettlement
Handbook.
Key References
Collection of Conclusions on the International Protection of
Refugees adopted by the Executive Committee of the UNHCR Programme, UNHCR
Geneva, 1995.
Collection of International Instruments Concerning
Refugees, UNHCR, Geneva, 1995.
Guidelines on the Protection of Refugee Women, UNHCR
Geneva, 1991.
Guidelines on Policies and Procedures in dealing with
Unaccompanied Children Seeking Asylum, WHO, Geneva, 1997.
Handbook for Determining Refugee Status, UNHCR, Geneva
1979.
International Legal Standards Applicable to the Protection of
Internally Displaced Persons, UNHCR, Geneva, 1996.
Refugee Children: Guidelines on Protection and Care,
UNHCR, Geneva 1994.
Sexual Violence Against Refugees: Guidelines on Prevention
and Response, UNHCR, Geneva, 1995.
UNHCR Resettlement Handbook, UNHCR, Geneva, 1997.
UNHCR's Role with Internally Displaced Persons, IOM
87/97, FOM91/97, UNHCR, Geneva,
1997.
Annexes
Annex 1 - International Instruments Concerning Refugees and
Related Instruments
International Instruments Concerning Refugees
Short Name
Full Name
Description
1951 Statute
Statute of the Office of the United Nations High Commissioner
for Refugees.
The Statute of the High Commissioner's office, adopted by
General Assembly Resolution 428 (V) of 14 December 1950. This sets out UNHCR's
function and responsibility to provide international protection and to seek
permanent solutions to the problem of refugees. It serves as UNHCR's
constitution and includes a definition of persons who are of concern to the H.C.
The mandate has been modified over time through subsequent General Assembly and
ECOSOC resolutions.
1951 Convention 1967 Protocol
1951 Convention Relating to the Status of Refugees, and 1967
Protocol Relating to the Status of Refugees.
An international treaty which is binding upon the signatory
states. It sets out the responsibilities of states which are parties to the
Convention vis-a-vis refugees on their territories, and sets out the obligations
of the refugees.
OAU Convention
OAU Convention governing the specific aspects of refugee
problems in Africa (Organization of African Unity, Addis Ababa, 1969).
A regional complement to the 1951 Convention and 1967 Protocol.
It contains an expanded refugee definition as well as provisions on safe and
peaceful asylum, burden-sharing and voluntary repatriation.
i. Cartagena Declaration
ii. St. Jose Convention
i. Cartagena Declaration on Refugees, 1984. ii. American
Convention on Human Rights, "Pact of San Jose, Costa Rica", 1969.
Non binding declarations which have greatly influenced regional
policies on refugees and asylum seekers, and contain an expanded refugee
definition.
Excom Conclusions
Various conclusions on international protection adopted by
UNHCR's Executive Committee.
Contain important guidance to States and UNHCR.
Related Instruments
The UN Charter
The Charter of the United Nations, 1945.
Places certain general obligations on member states of the
United Nations of particular relevance to UNHCR's international protection
function.
Universal Declaration of Human Rights
Universal Declaration of Human Rights, 1948.
Universal instrument setting out the basic human rights of all
persons, including refugees.
Convention Relating to the Status of Stateless Persons
Convention Relating to the Status of Stateless Persons, 1954.
Grants a recognized status to stateless persons who are lawful
and habitual residents. Similar to the 1951 Convention Relating to the Status of
Refugees.
Convention on the Reduction of Statelessness
Convention on the Reduction of Statelessness, 1961.
Contains measures to ensure that persons do not become
stateless.
Covenant on Civil and Political Rights
International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights 1966.
Obliges states which are parties to the Covenant to respect and
ensure the rights set out in the Covenant to all individuals (within the state's
territory and jurisdiction), without distinction such as race, colour, sex,
language, religion, political or other opinion, national or social origin,
property, birth or other status.
Convention Against Torture
Convention Against Torture and Other Cruel, Inhuman or Degrading
Treatment or Punishment 1984.
Includes the principle of non-refoulement.
Convention Relating to the Rights of the Child
Convention Relating to the Rights of the Child, 1989.
A comprehensive code of rights for all children (defined as 18
years or under).
Geneva Conventions and additional protocols
Geneva Convention Relating to the Protection of Civilian Persons
in Time of War (Geneva, 1949).
Covers the treatment of civilians in time of war, including
refugees.
Declaration on Territorial Asylum
United Nations Declaration on Territorial Asylum, 1967.
Includes the principle of non-refoulement.
Final Act of the United Nations Conference on the Status of
Stateless Persons, 1954
United Nations Conference on the Status of Stateless Persons.
Includes the principle of non-refoulement.
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
3. Emergency Management
(introduction...)
Introduction
The Key Emergency Management Functions
Stages in Refugee Emergency Operations
Key References
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
3. Emergency Management
Figure
Introduction
1. There is no single blueprint for refugee emergency
management; each refugee emergency is unique. However, experience shows that
emergencies tend to evolve according to certain recognizable and documented
patterns.
Good emergency management relies on knowledge of these
patterns and of the effective measures to deal with them.
Emergency situations do not necessarily result in tragedy. The
chance of this occurring will be greatly reduced if the emergency is well
managed from the stage of preparedness onwards.
2. While emergency management shares many of the characteristics
of good management in general, there are a number of distinguishing features:
i. The lives and well-being of people are at
stake;
ii. Reaction time is short;
iii. Risk factors are high and consequences of
mistakes or delays can be disastrous;
iv. There is great uncertainty;
v. Investment in contingency planning and other
preparedness activities is crucial;
vi. Staff and managers may be under particularly
high stress because of, for example, security problems and harsh living
conditions;
vii. There is no single obvious right
answer.
Organization of this Section
3. This section of the handbook (chapters 3 to 9) is structured
to reflect the phases of emergency preparedness and response. Firstly, the
preparedness activities of contingency planning and early warning are dealt with
(chapter 4), followed by initial needs and resources assessment and immediate
response (chapter 5). Operations planning, coordination and site level
organization are dealt with in chapters 6 and 7. Next, implementing arrangements
are discussed, including procedures for operations implementation and control
(chapter 8). Finally, chapter 9 on external relations covers relations with the
host government (including establishing a formal presence in the country of
operations), relations with the donor and diplomatic community and handling
media interest. Note that certain activities cut across the phases of emergency
preparedness and response. This is particularly the case with external
relations, coordination, and planning.
4. Figure 1 shows some of the considerations discussed in this
section in diagrammatic form, in particular in relation to emergency response.
The response activities of problems and needs assessments, operations planning,
implementing arrangements and programme formulation are all very closely
related. Some aspects treated separately may be indivisible in practice, and
there is no single correct order or way in which an emergency operation should
be formulated (but it must conform to established UNHCR procedures governing
project submission and control).
Figure 1 - Considerations in
Emergency Management
Capacity and Resources
5. Emergency management can be defined as:
the organization of capacities and resources to
meet threats to the lives and well-being of refugees.
6. Preparing for and responding to refugee emergencies are tasks
which require the availability of the right resources at the right time as well
as the capacity to use these resources effectively.
7. Capacity is the internal organizational capability which
includes planning, staffing, structure, systems, procedures, guidelines,
information flow, communication, decision-making and administrative support.
Resources are the financial and human resources, relief materials, support
equipment, tools and facilities.
8. If capacity is weak, then the emergency response is likely to
be weak, even if resources are adequate.
Strong capacity can sometimes alleviate resource shortfalls
by making more effective use of limited resources.
9. Capacity is an aspect of emergency management which is
sometimes not given adequate priority. Resources are often given more emphasis
during both the planning and operational stages since they are a more tangible
element. But it is capacity that determines the quality of an emergency
response. A well-capacitated organization is more likely to be able to mount a
credible and effective operation, attracting the necessary resources.
10.
Effective emergency management requires that the development
and use of capacity be accorded correct priority throughout the different phases
of an operation.
While much of the required capacity must be pre-existing,
capacity can also be developed during an
operation.
The Key Emergency Management Functions
Introduction
11. Certain management functions are essential throughout a
refugee emergency. These are:
Leading;
Planning;
Organizing and
coordinating;
Controlling.
12. These will be required of UNHCR as an organization and also
from individuals, at all levels, within UNHCR.
If these functions are not being performed : then
it is likely that there will be serious deficiencies in the management of the
emergency operation.
They always remain the responsibility of the person in overall
charge of the operation, though they may be delegated to other staff.
Leading
13. This can be defined as:
the process of creating and communicating a
vision for the emergency operation, and providing a clear strategic direction
for actions even in situations of great uncertainty and risk.
14. Successful management requires leadership; subject to the
role of the government, leadership may be the most important single contribution
of UNHCR to the emergency situation. Leadership requires that once decisions are
reached, they are properly implemented. This discipline is essential in
emergencies when there is often no time to explain the considerations involved.
As far as possible, those directly concerned should contribute to decisions that
affect them, but final responsibility rests with the UNHCR officer in charge.
Planning
15. This can be defined as:
setting in place the process of assessing the
situation, defining immediate objectives and longer term goals and the
activities to accomplish them.
16. Planning is vital both before and during an emergency, and
operations planning must be based on detailed needs and resources assessments.
Organizing and Coordinating
17. This can be defined as:
establishing systems and mechanisms to achieve a
given objective, and coordinating people and organizations so that they work
together, in a logical way, towards the common objective.
18. It involves selecting, training and supervising staff,
assigning and clarifying roles and responsibilities of all those involved, and
structuring communication and information flow. In an emergency, coordinating is
a crucial aspect of organizing.
Delegation of Authority and Responsibility
19. Emergency management should be organized so that
responsibility and authority are delegated to the lowest appropriate level, and
should be exercised as close to the operation or beneficiaries as is practical.
Clear and unambiguous lines of authority and reporting should be established and
communicated to all staff.
20. The management structure should be organized so that
accountability for actions, including management decisions, is clear. Those who
make a decision should be those with the appropriate level of knowledge to
enable them to make that decision and should be responsible for ensuring its
implementation and follow up (including monitoring). The involvement of
unnecessary layers of management, and unnecessary numbers of people, in
decisions as well as in responsibility for implementation, confuses and diffuses
accountability. Ambiguity and lack of simplicity in the definition of
responsibilities also slows action.
Controlling
21. This can be defined as:
monitoring and evaluating performance in
comparison with plans and initiating changes where necessary.
22. Note that the key management functions are important not
only during emergency response, but also in the preparedness phase, although
their relative importance in each phase may vary. Organization and coordination
mechanisms, for example, should be developed during contingency
planning.
Stages in Refugee Emergency Operations
23. The table below depicts one model of activities as they may
occur in refugee emergencies. It is important to understand that the stages and
activities of a refugee emergency operation could overlap, or occur
simultaneously.
24. A final phase of an emergency operation is the transition
from emergency response to longer-term support (care and maintenance) and
durable solutions (voluntary repatriation, local integration and resettlement).
The time spent providing emergency relief should be kept to a minimum, and
planning and implementation should always take account of the longer term. The
importance of the balance between short term and long term is seen in a number
of the vital sectors.
Stage
Typical Activities
Emergency
· Prevention;
preparedness
· Early warning;
· Contingency planning;
· Development of emergency
response systems;
· Generation of support among
potential host and donor governments;
· Provision of stand-by
resources;
· Pre-positioning of supplies;
·Training.
Emergency response
· Problem, needs and resources
assessments;
· Resource mobilization;
· Handling donor relations and
media interest;
· Operations planning;
· Implementation and
coordination;
· Monitoring and evaluation;
· Transition to the post
emergency operation.
25. Assisting governments in seeking durable solutions for the
problem of refugees is a mandated function of UNHCR. Durable solutions must
always be kept in mind, starting at the contingency planning stage. It is in
this period that choices are made concerning how, how much, and for how long,
aid will be delivered. These choices often have repercussions on the prospects
for durable solutions that last long after the emergency has ended.
Emergency Preparedness
26. The best way to ensure an effective emergency response is by
being prepared. Emergency preparedness can be defined as:
planning and taking act/on to ensure that the
necessary resources will be available, in time, to meet the foreseen
emergency needs and that the capacity to use the resources will be in
place.
27. The scope of emergency preparedness is broad and the
activities at that stage can be undertaken at the global, regional and country
levels.
The preparedness measures should enable an organization to
respond rapidly and effectively to an emergency.
28. At the global level, UNHCR maintains centrally a range of
stand-by emergency response resources. These resources have been developed on
the basis of past experience in emergencies. They include staff support, human
and financial resources, operational support items and services, and a centrally
managed emergency stockpile. The resources are available for deployment at short
notice to any area where the need arises. They ensure a minimum and predictable
level of global preparedness for emergencies. Moreover, there are also training
activities available which can be used for capacity building.
29. For details of these resources, see the Catalogue of
Emergency Response Resources, Appendix 1.
30. Contingency planning reduces the lead time necessary to
mount an effective response and is a crucial tool to enhance the capacity to
respond.
At the country and regional levels, early warning and
contingency planning are the key preparedness measures;
31. The contingency planning process (see chapter 4) will allow
the identification, in advance, of gaps in resources. A realistic plan may
encourage donors and others to provide the missing resources.
32. Contingency planning helps predict the characteristics of
the impending emergency - it increases the institutional analytical capacity
which can be drawn upon should an emergency occur. It also helps identify the
additional preparedness activities which may be required. These may include
development or restructuring of the UNHCR organization in the country, emergency
staffing, stockpiling, pre-positioning supplies and training. Priority should be
given to activities requiring longer lead times.
Emergency Indicators
33. An emergency may start with a sudden large influx of
refugees, with several thousand persons crossing a border, causing a highly
visible life threatening situation. More often however, the onset of an
emergency is not so dramatic or obvious, and a situation requiring an
extraordinary response and exceptional measures may develop over a period of
time. It is therefore essential to be able to recognize if a situation exists
(or is imminent) which requires an emergency response, and what are the likely
key characteristics (see table 1).
34. The following indicators are measurable and are therefore
commonly used as thresholds above (or below) which an emergency situation
clearly exists, or to signal whether a situation is under control and whether
there is a need for urgent remedial action. The most important of these
indicators is the mortality (or death) rate (see chapter 14 on health for
information on how to calculate the mortality rate. More details of the other
indicators are given in the respective chapters and in Appendix 2 Toolbox).
Table 1 - Emergency Indicators
Indicator
Emergency Levels
MORTALITY RATE
> 2 per 10,000 per day
Nutritional
> 10% with less than 80%
Status of children
weight for height
Food
< 2,100 calories/person/day
Water Quantity
< 10 litres per person per day
Water Quality
> 25% of people with diarrhoea
Site Space
< 30 sq. meters per person (this figure does not include any
garden space)
Shelter space
< 3,5 sq. meters per person
35. Other indicators may not be so easily quantifiable but may
be just as critical, for example, the presence of a physical threat to the
refugees or to the standards of human rights which they enjoy. In particular,
threats of refoulement should be considered as an indicator of a need for an
emergency response.
Emergency Response
36. Emergency response can be defined as:
immediate and appropriate action to save lives,
ensure protection, and restore the well-being of refugees.
37. Once safe asylum is assured, the priority of emergency
management will be life saving activities. Timely and rapid problem, needs and
resources assessments will help confirm or identify areas where gaps still exist
from the contingency planning stage, both in terms of expertise and resources
required.
38. Identification of problems requiring-specialist expertise is
essential. Most refugee emergencies will require, in addition to protection
specialists, one or more technical experts to coordinate the crucial technical
sectors, such as health, food, nutrition, sanitation, water, shelter and
infrastructure.
Key References
A Framework for People-Oriented Planning in Refugee
Situations Taking Account of Women, Men and Children, UNHCR, Geneva, 1992.
Contingency Planning - A Practical Guide for Field Staff,
UNHCR, Geneva, 1996.
Coordination Among International Organizations in Complex
Emergencies, Disaster Management Training Programme, UN, 1997.
Initial Assessment in Emergency Situations - A Practical
Guide for Field Staff, UNHCR, Geneva, 1998.
Supplies and Food Aid Field Handbook, UNHCR Geneva, 1989.
UNHCR Handbook; People-Oriented Planning at Work: Using POP
to Improve UNHCR Programming, UNHCR, Geneva, 1994.
Partnership: A Programme Management Handbook for UNHCR's
Partners, UNHCR, Geneva,
1996.
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
4. Contingency Planning
(introduction...)
Introduction
Planning as a Process
Contingency Planning Tasks
Characteristics of a Good Plan
Key References
Annexes
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
4. Contingency Planning
Figure
Introduction
1. Contingency planning can be defined as:
A forward planning process, in a state of
uncertainty, in which scenarios and objectives are agreed, managerial and
technical actions defined, and potential response systems put in place in order
to prevent, or better respond to, an emergency.
2.
It is important to consider contingency planning as a
planning process from which a: contingency plan is drawn.
The planning process involves a group of people or organizations
working together on an ongoing basis to identify shared objectives and define
respective responsibilities and actions.
3. Contingency planning is a pre-requisite for rapid and
effective emergency response. Without prior contingency planning much time will
be lost in the first days of an emergency. Contingency planning builds
organizational capacity and should become a foundation for operations planning
and emergency response.
When to Plan
4. In most cases field workers will know simply from experience
and good knowledge of the current situation when it is prudent to plan.
5. There is no rule as to when to start contingency planning -
except that, when in doubt, develop a contingency plan.
It is better to plan when it is not needed than not to have
planned when; it was necessary.
Early Warning
6. Early warning signs of a potential critical event should
trigger a contingency planning process. Early warning is the collection,
analysis and use of information in order to better understand the current
situation as well as likely future events. The particular focus is on events
which might lead to population displacement. Early warning can come from a wide
range of sources: governments, local population, political leaders, media,
academia, refugees, international and national organizations.
7. The collection and analysis of early warning information
should be integrated into the routine work of UNHCR offices. Regular monitoring
and reporting, in a consistent format, is an important means to ensure that
trends and patterns are recorded and that any changes indicating population
displacements are spotted.
8.
Where early warning information indicates the threat of a
refugee emergency, contingency planning should be started automatically.
9. The most common emergency threat for UNHCR is a new influx or
sudden increase in a refugee population. However, contingency planning should
also take place in the midst of an existing operation. For example, contingency
plans may be needed for a possible renewed influx, a natural disaster affecting
a camp, an epidemic, an attack on a camp, violence in a camp, sudden spontaneous
repatriation, or a security threat to staff or premises. In these situations the
realities of the ongoing operation are well known, but contingency plans must be
made for future developments for which one needs to be
prepared.
Planning as a Process
10. Planning is an ongoing activity; the planner needs to
constantly assess the situation and adjust objectives and courses of action to
take account of developments.
11. A static contingency plan is soon out of date and breeds a
false sense of security. By reviewing and updating planning measures regularly,
the preparedness measures in place can be kept appropriate and adequate.
12. One of the most important contributions of the contingency
plan to emergency response often comes from the process itself: identifying
working partners, their capabilities and resources, developing a working
relationship with them and coming to a common understanding of the issues,
priorities and responsibilities.
The capacity of the actors to respond in an emergency will be
enhanced by their previous involvement in the contingency planning process.
13. Both contingency planning and operations planning set
strategic and sectoral objectives and develop an action plan to achieve these
objectives. The major difference between the two is that contingency planning
involves making assumptions and developing the scenarios upon which planning is
based, while in operations planning, the starting point is known, and the
planning will build on needs and resources assessments.
Figure 1 - Differences between Contingency Planning and
Emergency Operations Planning
Aspect
Contingency plan
Operations Plan
Relation to emergency event
Before
During
Scope of plan
Global or scenario based
Both strategic and specific
Partners involved
All likely partners
Operational and implementing partners only
Focus
Developing agreed scenarios
Effective and rapid response
Relationships
Developing
Utilizing
Planning Style
Consultative
Directive and consultative
Allocation
Roles
Responsibilities
Time frame
Floating, uncertain
Fixed, immediate
Meetings
14. Many pitfalls in contingency planning can be avoided by
planning collectively, marshalling the widest range of local skills, and
complementing these by external inputs.
Contingency planning is best achieved through a cooperative
and coordinated effort wherein all concerned work together with shared
objectives over a period of time.
A single meeting that produces a plan is usually insufficient
and the product often inadequate. The contingency planning process therefore
revolves around regular meetings and follow up.
15. The participants in the contingency planning process should
include those who might be involved in the emergency response, including the
government, agencies, representatives of donor governments and local
organizations and expertise. Contingency planning meetings are sometimes called
"roundtable" meetings to stress the importance of participation by all involved.
The views of one agency may differ from others, but this will often be to the
advantage of the planning process since it provides a useful forum for all
assumptions to be questioned and refined. The end product is thus more
realistic. While UNHCR may facilitate the roundtable, the role and importance of
each participant must be respected.
16. A contingency planning meeting should produce a draft
contingency plan containing the following:
i. Scenario identification;
ii. Strategic objectives;
iii. Sector objectives and activities.
Subsequent meetings should review early warning indicators,
report on actions taken since the previous meeting, and update the existing
plan.
17. Inputs into these meetings include specialist expertise and
advice, results from field visits, and statements of agency policy. Outputs
include the contingency plan, draft budgets and standby arrangements such as
stockpiles.
Contingency Planning Tasks
Scenario Identification
18. Based on early warning indicators and their own experience,
the participants in the planning process should develop likely scenarios. This
activity is the most intuitive, yet one of the most important, since it lays the
basis for all further planning. In establishing scenarios assumptions must be
made. While these will be based on best available knowledge, nothing can remove
the element of unpredictability.
19. The scenario is a kind of benchmark: if the influx is
smaller than envisaged, the safety margin will be welcome, if it is larger, the
importance of taking urgent corrective action is highlighted.
20. For scenario development:
i. Consider all possibilities (be
imaginative);
ii. Settle for a limited number of options only (1
or 2 options are the norm); otherwise the planning process will be too
complicated;
iii. Use the concept of either worst case scenario
or most likely scenario.
Policy and Strategic Objectives
21. Planners need to have some vision of the direction of the
overall operation. To the extent possible this should be a shared vision. It is
not unusual for the various partners to hold different policy approaches to a
particular problem. If these cannot be reconciled, at least the differences
should be known and understood by all parties. However, an effort should be made
to agree on some overall principles, through establishing overall objectives for
the emergency response. All activities undertaken in the plan will need to be
consistent with these overall objectives.
Sector Objectives and Activities
22. This is the most detailed part of the planning process. For
each sector planners should agree, in as much detail as time will permit, on:
i. Sector objectives, including
standards;
ii. The main tasks;
iii. Who is responsible for implementing which
task;
iv. Time frame for
implementation.
Characteristics of a Good Plan
23. A good plan (whether operations or contingency) should be
comprehensive yet not too detailed; it should find the right balance between
covering all the important issues yet not flooding the plan with detail.
24. It should be well structured, easy to read and, importantly,
easy to update. Much of the plan will be action oriented, so it should have a
layout that clearly shows what needs to be done, by whom and by when.
25. It should be a living document and be constantly updated,
amended and improved. It is not a document which is comprehensively revised on a
schedule, but is one that is constantly in a state of change.
A short document with a clear structure will facilitate
updating.
26. A contingency plan should also achieve a balance between
flexibility (so it can apply to a variety of scenarios) and specificity (for key
practical inputs - e.g. well positioned stockpiles). The plan must not be too
directive, and yet must provide adequate guidance. It should not be expected to
act as a blueprint.
27. See Annex 1 for the structure of a typical contingency
plan.
Key References
Contingency Planning - A Practical Guide for Field Staff,
UNHCR, Geneva,
1996.
Annexes
Annex 1 - A Model Structure for a Contingency Plan
The following is a proposed structure for a Contingency Plan. It
is based on a refugee influx. Adaptation will be required for different
scenarios.
Chapter 1: General Situation and Scenarios
i. ii. iii. iv. v. vi. vii. viii.
Background and country information Entry points Total
planning figure Arrival rate Reception and anticipated in-country
movement Settlement arrangements Expected refugee demographic
profile Emergency response trigger
Chapter 2: Policies and Overall Operation Objectives
i. ii.
Overall policy (strategic) objectives of the
programme Comments on policy stance of various partners
Chapter 3: Objectives and Activities by Sector
i. ii. iii. iv. v. vi. vii. viii. ix. x. xi. xii. xiii. xiv.
Management and overall coordination; allocation of
responsibilities Protection, reception, registration, security Community
services Logistics and transport Infrastructure and site
planning Shelter Domestic needs and household
support Water Environmental sanitation Health and
nutrition Food Education Economic activities Support to the
operation, administration, communications, staff support and safety
Each section should include a consideration of sector objectives
and outputs, needs, resources, activities, and financial requirements, existing
and proposed preparedness measures, implementation responsibilities and timing.
Chapter 4: Procedures for feedback, updating and future
action
Describe how the Plan will be updated and revised, who will be
responsible for ensuring this, and how the information will be disseminated.
Possible Annexes
i. ii. iii. iv. v. vi. vii.
Maps Registration forms List of organizations or
individuals participating in the planning process Agency Profiles (details of
staff, resources, future intentions) Gap identification charts (see chapter
6 on operations planning) Commodity specifications Draft budgets.
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
5. Initial Assessment, Immediate Response
(introduction...)
Introduction
Organizing the Assessment
Immediate Response
Protection and Material Assistance
Key References
Annexes
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
5. Initial Assessment, Immediate Response
Figure
Introduction
1. Emergency assistance must be based on a sound, though rapid,
assessment of the refugees' most immediate problems and needs and the resources
available to meet those needs.
2. The objective of the initial problem analysis and needs
assessment is to provide UNHCR with a clear and concise picture of the emergency
situation, in both quantitative and qualitative terms. It should provide enough
information to predict the evolution of the emergency, at least in the short
term. It is the basis for decisions which affect the future of the operation.
3.
More detailed assessments will follow as the emergency
develops and needs evolve: assessment never stops.
The initial and subsequent assessments are intricately linked
with, and will form the basis for, operations planning. The initial assessment
will also build on the contingency planning process.
4. The initial assessment should:
Answer the questions "what is
the main problem?" and "is there an emergency or not?";
Provide sufficient
information to decide whether UNHCR should be involved in the emergency response
and what the scope of that involvement should be;
Be an inter-agency
initiative, but with one body providing the overall coordination. The team
should include staff from UNHCR, the government and other potential partners
(for example other UN agencies, NGOs). Ideally the inter-agency body used for
contingency planning should provide the basis for the group carrying out a
simple problem and needs assessment. Often the people carrying out the initial
assessment will simultaneously be providing the initial response. Whenever
possible, the assessment team should include those who will implement the
emergency operation in the field;
Be carried out
quickly;
Provide a full picture of the
scope of the emergency, rather than focus on a limited area or sector (it is
better to get the whole picture half right);
Describe the people affected
by the emergency (a simple demographic profile);
Identify the coping ability
of the refugees themselves;
Identify locally available
resources;
Identify what are the most
immediate priorities;
Use agreed and appropriate
standards against which needs can be measured;
Involve the refugees, women
and men, from the outset. Get to know them and understand their concerns. They
are a key source of information;
Record the sources of
information collected;
Cross-check information, not
relying on only one tool (e.g. aerial surveys cross-checked by on the ground
observations and interviews);
Involve appropriate technical
input;
Use samples and surveys
rather than collect too much detailed information which is difficult to
analyze;
Produce recommendations for
immediate action indicating the resources needed to implement them;
Be able to trigger an
immediate and effective response;
Have the results shared
promptly and widely.
5. The assessment should, as a minimum, answer the questions in
the checklist in Annex 1. This includes essential minimum information required
for planning an emergency operation.
6. The initial assessment should focus on the priority life
threatening problems which are usually in the sectors of protection, water,
food, sanitation, shelter and health. The assessment should measure the actual
condition of the refugees against what is needed for their survival and
immediate well-being (expressed as "standards"). The resources at their disposal
should also be assessed.
The setting of standards appropriate for the situation is an
important prerequisite for needs assessment.
7. Standards provide a benchmark against which the condition of
the refugees can be measured (see Appendix 2 for some of the minimum survival
standards). The standards established for emergency assistance must be
consistent with the aim of ensuring the survival and basic well-being of the
refugees, be fairly applied for all refugees and be respected by all involved.
8. The document Initial Assessment in Emergency Situations: a
Practical Guide for Field Staff (see references) includes more detailed
checklists for assessments, and contains practical information on principles,
planning, techniques, methods, and forms. See also chapter 6 on operations
planning for an example of a Gap Identification Chart, a useful tool for
comparing needs and
resources.
Organizing the Assessment
9. The initial assessment must be carried out on the spot as
soon as it is clear that a refugee emergency may exist. The assessment must
involve the government and other key actors.
10. Immediate access to the area where the refugees are located
is, of course, a prerequisite. Getting the assessment underway as soon as
possible requires quick, practical steps: establish a presence at or near the
refugee site for first hand information, interview refugees, use other available
sources of information, mobilize local expertise and resources.
11. While an organized approach is necessary, time must not be
lost simply because the desired expertise is not immediately available. Where
UNHCR is already present, initial action must not be delayed pending the arrival
of staff with more expertise.
A quick response to obviously urgent needs must never be
delayed because a comprehensive assessment has not yet been completed.
12. Planning the assessment involves setting the objectives,
establishing the terms of reference and selecting team members. The assessment
plan should indicate which information should be collected and the report should
make clear if it was not possible to collect that information.
13. If UNHCR is not already present in the country, the
assessment mission will normally be organized by Headquarters.
14. Any problem and needs assessment should start with a review
of the existing background information (mission reports, media articles,
situation reports, local maps). Ideally, a contingency plan would have been
prepared and kept updated and would provide input for the assessment and the
immediate response. UNHCR Headquarters can provide maps and geographical
information from a computerized database. The maps and information can be
tailored to the specific requirements of the assessment. The assessment should
also include interviews with the refugees and others involved.
15. Tools commonly used in assessments are:
i. Questionnaires;
ii. Checklists;
iii. Visual Inspection.
16. A combination of tools is normally used in order to
cross-check the conclusions. Questionnaires and checklists (see Annex 1 for a
basic checklist) are particularly useful because they standardize the approach
and force the assessors to plan ahead and decide which information needs to be
collected. Visual inspections provide general information and can put into
context data from more systematic
assessments.
Immediate Response
17. Gathering information about problems, needs and resources on
the one hand, and the establishment of standards on the other, will allow the
immediate unmet needs to be determined.
The most urgent actions must be taken with whatever local
material and organizational resources are available, even if the information at
hand is incomplete.
18. In order to ensure urgent survival needs are met, the most
important initial actions are likely to be: i. Ensuring the capacity to act; ii.
Protection; iii. Organizational considerations.
Ensure the Capacity to Art
19. The first priority is to provide the organizational capacity
required to meet the needs of the emergency.
Enough UNHCR and implementing partner staff of the right
calibre and experience must be deployed.
It may be necessary to invoke emergency procedures for the
allocation of funds, implementing arrangements, food supply, local purchase, and
recruitment of personnel. See Appendix 1 for details of how to access UNHCR
emergency response resources. With the government, the resources of other UN
organizations, particularly UNICEF and WFP, and of the NGO sector must be
mobilized within the framework of a plan for immediate action.
Protection
20.
Unless the refugees' right to asylum is assured there can be
no assistance programme.
Action must be taken to this end, and to ensure their security
and fundamental human rights. The importance of a UNHCR presence where the
refugees are located has been stressed. Specific measures may be needed, for
example to meet the special protection problems and needs of groups at risk
(unaccompanied children, single young girls, minorities, etc.), and to protect
the refugees against arbitrary actions of outsiders and against groups within
their own number who may pose a threat to their safety.
Organizational Considerations
21. UNHCR must establish a presence where the refugees are, with
assured communications with the main office and with Headquarters. The
organization of the necessary logistical capacity to deliver the assistance will
be of critical importance.
22. The priority, once problems and needs have been assessed,
will be to provide vital assistance wherever the refugees are located. There
will also, however, be key organizational or planning decisions to take, some of
which may determine the future shape of the whole operation. These often include
the points summarized below; decisions on them should be seen as a part of the
immediate response.
If such decisions go by default or are wrong they will be
very difficult to correct later.
Protection and Material Assistance
The Location of the Refugees
23. This will have a major influence on protection and all
sectors of assistance. If the refugees have spontaneously settled in a scattered
manner, they should not be brought together unless there are compelling reasons
for breaking their present settlement pattern. If they are already in sites
which are judged to be unsatisfactory, move them. The difficulty in moving
refugees from an unsuitable site increases markedly with time. Even if those
already there cannot be moved, divert new arrivals elsewhere (see chapter 12 on
site planning).
Control at the Sites
24. Determine the optimum population in advance and plan for new
sites accordingly. Keep careful control of actual occupation of the site as
refugees arrive, so that sections prepared in advance are filled in an orderly
manner.
Numbers and Registration
25. An accurate estimate of numbers is a prerequisite for
effective protection and assistance. Efficient delivery of help to all in need
will require at least family registration which should be organized as soon as
possible. Nevertheless the initial provision of assistance may have to be based
on a population estimation rather than full registration (see chapters 11 and 13
on registration and commodity distribution).
Urgent Survival Needs
26. Meet the most urgent survival needs: food, water, emergency
shelter, health care and sanitation, ensuring fair distribution:
i. Involve the refugees and promote their
self-reliance from the start. If this is not done the effectiveness of the
emergency assistance will be severely reduced, and an early opportunity to help
the refugees to start to recover from the psychological effects of their ordeal
may be missed;
ii. Food. Ensure that at least the minimum
need for energy is met; a full ration can follow. Set up special feeding
programmes if there are clear indications of malnutrition. Establish storage
facilities;
iii. Water. Protect existing water sources
from pollution and establish maximum storage capacity with the simplest
available means. Transport water to the site if the need cannot otherwise be
met;
iv. Emergency shelter. Meet the need for
roofing and other materials from local sources if possible. Request outside
supplies (e.g. plastic sheeting) if necessary;
v. Health care. Provide the necessary
organizational assistance, health personnel and basic drugs and equipment in
close consultation with the national health authorities. Although the immediate
need and demand may be for curative care, do not neglect preventive and
particularly environmental health measures;
vi. Sanitation. Isolate human excreta from
sources of water and accommodation.
27. Take steps to meet the social needs and reunite families if
necessary. Surveys may be necessary to identify those in need, who often do not
come forward. Tracing may be required. If groups of refugees have been
separeted, they should be reunited. Special measures to ensure the care of any
unaccompanied children will be a priority.
28. Once these and other priority measures are underway, begin
the wider planning
process.
Key References
Initial Assessment in Emergency Situations - a Practical
Guide for Field Staff, UNHCR, Geneva,
1998.
Annexes
Annex 1 - Checklist for Initial Assessment
This checklist is based on a refugee influx, it should be
modified in the light of the actual nature of the emergency.
Who are the refugees, their numbers, and pattern of
arrival
Approximately how many
refugees are there?
Where have the refugees come
from? Why?
What is the rate of arrival?
Is it likely to increase or decrease? a What is the total number likely to
arrive?
What is the location of the
arrival points and of the sites where people are settling (latitude and
longitude)?
Are the refugees arriving as
individuals or in groups? Are these family groups, clans, tribal, ethnic or
village groups?
Are families, village groups
and communities intact?
How are the refugees
organized? Are there group or community leaders?
How are the refugees
travelling - on foot, in vehicles?
What is the gender ratio of
the population?
What is the age profile of
the population? Can a breakdown in age be given - under five's, age 5 to 17
years, 18 years and over?
How many unaccompanied minors
are there? What is their condition?
What was the social and
economic situation of the refugees prior to their flight? What are their skills
and languages? What is their ethnic and cultural background?
Are there individuals or
groups with special social problems? Are there particular groups made more
vulnerable by the situation? (e.g. the disabled, separated minors or elderly
people in need of support)
What are the basic diet,
shelter, and sanitation practices of the refugees?
What is the security
situation within the population - is there a need for separation between
different groups, are there armed groups within the population?
What is the formal legal
status of the refugees?
Characteristics of the location
What are the physical
characteristics of the area where the refugees are located?
What is the soil, topography
and drainage?
Is there enough space for
those there and those likely to arrive?
Is there all season
accessibility?
Can the refugees access
relief assistance from where they are located?
What is the vegetation
cover?
Will the refugees need to use
wood for fuel and shelter?
Approximately how many people
already live in the local area?
Who owns (or has usage rights
on) the land?
Is there grazing land and are
there potential areas for cultivation?
What is the actual or likely
impact on the local population and what is their attitude and that of the local
authorities towards the refugees?
Are there security
problems?
What environmental factors
must be taken into account (e.g. fragility of the local environment and extent
to which local community relies on it; how rapidly might it be degraded by the
refugees, proximity to protected areas)?
What is the condition of the
local population? If assistance is provided to the refugees, should the local
population also be assisted?
Health status and basic problems
Are there significant numbers
of sick or injured persons, is there excess mortality?
Are there signs of
malnutrition?
Do the refugees have access
to sufficient quantities of safe water?
Do the refugees have food
stocks, for how long will they last?
Do the refugees have adequate
shelter?
Are adequate sanitary
facilities available?
Do the refugees have basic
domestic items?
Is there sufficient fuel for
cooking and heating?
Resources, spontaneous arrangements and assistance being
delivered
What type and quantity of
possessions have the refugees brought with them?
What arrangements have the
refugees already made to meet their most immediate needs?
What assistance is already
being provided by the local population, the government, UN organizations and
other organizations, is the assistance adequate, sustainable?
Is the present assistance
likely to increase, continue, decrease?
What is the government's
policy on assistance to the refugees?
Are there any major
constraints likely to affect an assistance operation?
Has contingency planning for
this type of emergency been undertaken?
What coordination
arrangements are required?
Means to Deliver Protection and Assistance
Can effective implementing
arrangements be made quickly and locally, if not, what are the
alternatives?
Is there already an
identified refugee leadership with whom it will be possible to coordinate the
delivery of protection and assistance?
What are the logistical needs
and how can they be met?
Where will the necessary
supplies come from?
How will they reach the
refugees?
What storage is needed, where
and how?
Are there essential items
which can only be obtained outside the region and whose early supply will be of
critical importance (e.g. food, trucks?)
What are the needs for UNHCR
and implementing partner staff and staff
support?
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
6. Operations Planning
(introduction...)
Introduction
Operations Planning Tasks
Allocation of Responsibilities
Annexes
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
6. Operations Planning
Figure
Introduction
1. An emergency response requires good planning. An important
aspect of planning, particularly in an emergency situation, is the development
of an operations plan. The "Operations Plan" is a vital management tool which
should be based on a problems, needs and resources assessment. The plan should
determine programme priorities, set objectives, and specify actions that need to
be taken by the actors responsible for the various sectors of an operation.
Specific tasks in an emergency and the parties responsible for the
implementation of these tasks need to be clearly identified and a plan
formulated in as clear and concrete a way as possible.
At the start of an emergency there is a tendency to postpone
planning, both because information is not available and because there are
obvious urgent needs which can be met piecemeal, without a plan. This tendency
should be resisted.
2. The more critical the situation, the more important it is for
the operations manager to find the time to take stock, determine priorities and
develop a plan for what needs to be done, when, by whom and how.
3. Ideally, the operations plan should make use of the
contingency planning process, partners identified, and resources prepared, as
well as the plan itself. As the same principles of planning apply, the structure
of the operations plan can be based on the contingency plan (also attached here
as Annex 1). There are a range of additional considerations beyond what is
included in the Contingency planning format, many of which will be addressed
over time. However, the main differences between contingency planning and
operations planning and the characteristics of a good plan are discussed in
chapter 4 on contingency planning. The tasks and approach will be different
primarily because of assessments - in operations planning, the starting point is
known and assessments of the situation replace the contingency planning
scenarios and many of the assumptions.
4. The views of the refugees should be taken into account in
drawing up the operations plan. They are the single most important resource in
meeting their own needs, and will have definite ideas on how this may best be
done. The plan must strengthen the refugees' own resources and self-reliance and
avoid creating dependency. The plan should also reflect the aim of a durable
solution.
5. The operations plan must be comprehensive, identifying all
problems, needs and resources whether these are met through UNHCR or by other
organizations and sources of funds. Drawing up the operations plan should be a
team effort. Clear direction must, however, come from the government and/or
UNHCR.
The most effective operations plans are those developed by or
with the people who will implement them.
6. Although the plan should be comprehensive, this should be
balanced by the need to produce the plan quickly, so that in rapidly evolving
emergencies the plan will not become outdated before it is finished. In
addition, lengthy plans can be difficult to update. Characteristics of a good
plan are discussed in paragraphs 23 to 25 of chapter 4 on contingency planning.
7.
It should be stressed that, as with contingency planning,
operations planning is a process.
A plan, as a document, is not an end in itself but simply a
record of the process. It should be kept updated in light of the evolving
situation: implementation of the plan should be monitored and corrective action
taken, and the plan should then be adjusted and revised. The operations plan
must be made available to all who need it.
8. This chapter focuses on operations plans developed with
partners. However, planning within the office should not be neglected -simple
plans of action at each administrative or office level within UNHCR should also
be drawn up, from site to Headquarters, tying in with the overall operations
plan and involving the same principles: clarifying objectives, allocating
responsibilities, defining activities to achieve objectives, and defining
coordination mechanisms such as staff meetings (discussed in chapter 20 on
administration and
staffing).
Operations Planning Tasks
9. Operations planning involves the tasks set out below:
i. Review existing plans and information in the contingency
plan;
ii. Assess problems, needs and resources: identify critical
unmet needs.
The problems, needs and resources assessments determine what
must be done, and where the priorities are. Assessment of problems, needs and
resources is part of planning: plans must be updated to take account of new
assessments and progress in implementation. Identify critical unmet needs using
the results of the assessments and comparing these with established standards -
the determination of the standards to which assistance should be delivered is of
fundamental importance. The resources which are available and those which are
required must also be identified. Resources includes human resources and
personnel, local and international implementing and operational partner
organizations, and material resources.
At the early stages of a major emergency, it is unlikely that
resources will be sufficient to meet all needs, thus prioritization will be an
important part of operations planning.
iii. Set overall goals
The overall operation and strategic goals must be clarified. All
other objectives and activities should be consistent with these overall
objectives. In formulating objectives, the single most important question to ask
is, "What is the intended result?" Objectives should be specific, measurable,
achievable and realistic, and the time frame within which they should be reached
should be specified.
iv. Clarify planning assumptions
It will also be necessary to clarify the main constraints,
planning assumptions and principles behind the emergency operation. These should
be set out explicitly, including an explanation of the role, responsibilities
and policies of the government, UNHCR, other UN organizations and operational
partners. In addition, standard or established procedures, such as monitoring
and coordination mechanisms, MOUs etc. should also be set out. Similarly,
standards in various sectors and any specific guidelines necessary should be
specified (where the plan includes objectives, outputs and activities on a
sector by sector basis). Although these issues should have been in the
contingency plan, they will need to be revisited in the light of the problem and
needs assessments, and restated as necessary to new partners, so everyone is
working with the same assumptions and to the same standards.
v. Determine the courses of action to reach overall
objectives (implementing arrangements).
Consider various options to reach objectives, their advantages
and disadvantages; which are flexible, which are the most efficient and
effective? Choosing an option for implementing arrangements which retains
flexibility is important in a rapidly changing situation. Chapter 8 on
implementing arrangements discusses this in more detail.
vi. Determine objectives and courses of action to reach
objectives at sector level.
Decide on the objectives, activities and outputs for each
sector. As with contingency planning, this is the most detailed part of the
plan. The organization with operational responsibility for a particular sector
or site should draw up the plan of action for that sector or site.
vii. Allocate responsibilities
Responsibilities (both within UNHCR and between different actors
in the operation), need to be clearly stated.
viii. Determine coordination mechanisms
Coordination mechanisms should be established between the
different actors in the operation. Coordination at different geographical levels
(e.g. at the site and in the capital or regional city) needs also to be assured.
In a large operation, it may be necessary to have separate coordination
mechanisms for sectors.
ix. Determine monitoring mechanisms
From the start, the management of a refugee emergency must
include continuous monitoring (by measuring the indicators of performance),
reporting and evaluation in order to ensure that the objectives remain
appropriate as circumstances change, and the activities to fulfill the
objectives are being carried out effectively.
x. Record and disseminate the plan, monitor progress, take
corrective action, and adjust and revise the plan.
Effective Planning Guidelines for UNHCR Teams (updated in
January 1999) provide more details on managing the planning process at all
levels of an operation in the most effective and efficient way possible. The
assumption underlying this emphasis on the planning process is that better
planning processes lead to better quality results delivered on time in a cost
effective manner.
Figure 1 - an example of a Gap Identification Chart
Site1
Site2
Site3
Overall site management
Agency M
Agency M
Agency R
Protection
UNHCR
UNHCR
UNHCR
Food distribution
Agency B
Agency K
Shelter
Agency B
Agency Y
Water
Agency W
Agency W
Hearth
Agency H
Agency H
Etc.
Allocation of Responsibilities
Gap Identification Chart
10. A gap identification chart is a simple but very important
and useful tool to allocate responsibilities effectively and identify the
critical unmet needs of the refugees site by site and sector by sector. It
illustrates who is responsible for what in an operation (by site and sector) and
points out gaps where a sector or site needs attention. An example is shown
below - the blanks indicate "gaps" i.e. sites or sectors for which nobody has
responsibility. These would need to be given priority attention. Annex 2 shows a
blank chart Figure 1 shows an example that has been filled in.
Roles and Tasks
11. The roles and tasks of all involved must be clearly stated.
Delay in defining responsibility usually leads to each party defining goals
independently and setting their own limits of responsibility. This in turn can
lead quickly to confusion, gaps and duplication. Responsibilities should be
defined for each administrative level, and for both organizations and
individuals. How responsibilities are allocated to individuals is discussed in
chapter 20 on administration and staffing.
12. Responsibilities are allocated to different organizations in
a refugee emergency primarily through organizations' mandates, international
instruments and pre-existing MOUs between organizations.
13. The responsibilities and roles are defined in more detail in
response to the specific needs of the refugee situation and capacities of the
different parties on the ground. These are set out in implementing agreements
with implementing partners, MOUs and exchange of letters with other UN agencies,
and agreements with the government. If formal agreements have not yet been drawn
up and the basis of cooperation remains a Letter of Intent, the definition of
responsibilities contained in the operations plan is more essential than ever
(see Annex 1 of the chapter 8 implementing arrangements for a format of a Letter
of Intent).
14. The responsibilities of organizations delivering assistance
but which are not implementing partners of UNHCR must also be defined. This may
create problems, particularly where individual NGOs wish to have responsibility
for a specific sector. Final authority rests with the government, and the
Representative or the operations manager should consult closely with the
authorities. To the extent possible, however, any conflict of interest should be
resolved within the framework of a coordinating
mechanism.
Annexes
Annex 1 - A Model Structure for an Operations Plan
Based on the problem, needs and resources assessments
The following is a proposed structure for an operations plan. It
is based on a refugee influx. Adaptation will naturally be required for
different situations.
Chapter 1: General Situation
i.
Background and country information;
ii.
Entry points;
iii.
Agreed planning figures;
iv.
Arrival rate;
v.
Reception and in-country movement;
vi.
Settlement arrangements;
vii.
Demographic profile of the refugees;
Chapter 2: Policies and Overall Operation Objectives
i.
Overall policy (strategic) objectives of the programme;
ii.
Comments on policy stance of various partners;
Chapter 3: Objectives and Activities by Sector
i.
Management and overall coordination; allocation of
responsibilities;
ii.
Protection, reception, registration, security;
iii.
Food;
iv.
Logistics and transport;
v.
Infrastructure and site planning;
vi.
Shelter;
vii.
Domestic needs and household support;
viii.
Water;
ix.
Environmental sanitation;
x.
Health and nutrition;
xi.
Community services;
xii.
Education;
xiii.
Economic activities;
xiv.
Support to the operation, administration, communications, staff
support and safety;
Each section should include overall sector objectives, and site
by site objectives and outputs, problems, needs, resources, financial
requirements, activities, implementation responsibilities and timing.
Chapter 4: Procedures for updating the operations plan
Describe how the Plan will be updated, who will be responsible
for ensuring this and how the information will be disseminated.
Possible Annexes
i.
Maps
ii.
Registration forms
iii.
List of organizations or individuals participating in the
operation
iv.
Agency Profiles (details of staff and resources involved in the
operation)
v.
Gap identification charts
vi.
Commodity specifications
vii.
Budgets
Annex 2 - Gap Identification Chart (blank)
Site 1
Site 2
Site 3
Overall site management
Protection
Registration
Shelter
Water
Health
Nutrition
Sanitation
Distribution
Other
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
7. Coordination and Site Level Organization
(introduction...)
Coordination
Organization at the Site Level
Key References
Annexes
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
7. Coordination and Site Level Organization
Figure
Coordination
Introduction
1. Coordination can be defined as the harmonious and effective
working together of people and organizations towards a common goal.
2. Good coordination should result in:
i. Maximum impact for a given level of
resources;
ii. Elimination of gaps and overlaps in
services;
iii. Appropriate division of
responsibilities;
iv. Uniform treatment and standards of protection
and services for all the beneficiaries.
3. For effective coordination appropriate approaches and
structures will need to be put in place at the various levels. Coordination
requires good management and clearly defined objectives, responsibilities and
authority.
Coordination is not free: it has costs in terms of time and
other resources needed to make it work.
Coordination of the UN Response to Refugee Emergencies
4. Within the UN system the responsibility for refugees lies
with UNHCR. Therefore, when there is a refugee emergency, UNHCR is the UN
organization responsible for coordinating the response of the UN system to the
emergency.
Mechanisms for Coordination in Refugee Emergencies
5. Effective coordination is the result of sound management.
Coordination mechanisms set up without the establishment of clear objectives and
assignment of responsibility and authority will be ineffective. Coordination
must be based on good information exchange, particularly with the site level,
otherwise it may even be counterproductive.
6. Mechanisms for coordination include:
i. International and Regional instruments and
agreements which define responsibilities and roles at the global (and sometimes
regional or country) level;
ii. Memoranda of Understanding and exchange of
letters with other agencies, and agreements with implementing partners and host
governments, defining responsibilities and roles at the situational level;
iii. A coordinating body;
iv. Sectoral committees as necessary;
v. Regular meetings;
vi. Reporting and information sharing;
vii. Joint services and facilities, for example,
vehicle repair services, communications, and a joint staff security
group;
viii. Codes of conduct for organizations working in
humanitarian emergencies.
7. In refugee emergencies UNHCR should take the lead to ensure
effective coordination if this is not already ensured, including establishing
the coordinating body.
8.
Whatever the implementing arrangements, a single coordinating
body should be established for the operation - for example, a task force,
commission, or operations centre.
The coordinating body will provide a framework within which the
implementation of the programme can be coordinated and management decisions
taken. The coordinating body should have clearly defined and well promulgated
responsibility and authority.
9. The elements of a coordinating body, including membership and
functions are described in Annex 1. Tips for running meetings, including
coordinating meetings are given in Annex 2.
10. Where a coordinating structure does not already exist, UNHCR
should, in cooperation with the government, take the lead in setting up the
coordinating body and mechanism. This is a crucial component of UNHCR's
leadership role. The coordinating body may be set up and chaired by the
government with strong support from UNHCR, or be co-chaired by the government
and UNHCR, or be chaired by UNHCR alone.
11. The membership of the coordinating body should include
government ministries and departments, as well as other UN agencies, NGOs and
other concerned organizations. It is important to coordinate the activity of all
NGOs - whether they have entered into an implementing agreement with UNHCR or
not. In a large scale emergency with a number of actors, the coordinating body
could become unwieldy. However, it should still be possible to ensure some
degree of representation or participation on the coordinating body by all actors
either directly, or on sectoral committees, or through close working partners
who are represented on the coordinating body.
12. The coordinating body should hold regular, formal meetings
during which overall progress is reviewed and plans adjusted. These meetings
should be complemented by informal contacts with members of the coordinating
body.
13. When required, the coordinating body should create sectoral
committees, for example for health and nutrition. Such committees will be
responsible for coordinating implementation in that sector and reporting back to
the coordinating body. They could also play an important part in the development
of specific standards for the delivery of assistance. When the operation is
sufficiently large, a sectoral committee could be coordinated by a UNHCR sector
coordinator.
14. A coordinating body can also be of considerable value when
new agencies arrive, both in integrating their assistance in the overall
programme and with practical administrative arrangements and briefing.
15. Coordination must be based on good information exchange,
particularly with the site level. The framework for the organization and
coordinating mechanisms at the site level is likely to broadly reflect that
established centrally. To get information passed vertically between central
level and site level can be as hard as getting information passed between
organizations. Each organization should be responsible for ensuring that there
is good communication between its staff at site level and centrally, and that
important information is then passed on to the coordination body.
Coordination of the UN Response to Complex Emergencies
16. A complex emergency can be defined as:
a humanitarian crisis in a country, region or
society where there is a total or considerable breakdown of authority resulting
from internal or external conflict, and which requires an international response
that goes beyond the mandate or capacity of any single agency and/or the ongoing
UN country programme.
17. Likely characteristics of complex emergencies include:
i. A large number of civilian victims, populations
who are besieged or displaced, human suffering on a major scale;
ii. Substantial international assistance is needed
and the response goes beyond the mandate or capacity of any one
agency;
iii. Delivery of humanitarian assistance is impeded
or prevented by parties to the conflict;
iv. High security risks for relief workers providing
humanitarian assistance;
v. Relief workers targeted by parties to the
conflict.
18. The Office for the Coordination of Humanitarian Affairs
(OCHA), is the UN body charged with strengthening the coordination of
humanitarian assistance of the UN to complex emergencies. OCHA has three main
functions in this field: coordination of humanitarian response, policy
development and advocacy on humanitarian issues.
19. OCHA discharges its coordination function primarily
throughout the Inter-Agency Standing Committee (IASC) which is chaired by the
Emergency Relief Coordinator (ERC), with the participation of humanitarian
partners1. The IASC ensures interagency decision-making in response
to complex emergencies, including needs assessments, consolidated appeals, field
coordination arrangements and the development of humanitarian policies.
20. Where there is a complex emergency an individual or agency
is appointed to be responsible for the coordination of the UN system response at
field level - this individual or agency is designated the "Humanitarian
Coordinator".
21. The decision on who to appoint as Humanitarian Coordinator
is made by the Inter-Agency Standing Committee (IASC).
22. The agency appointed as Humanitarian Coordinator will depend
on the nature of the emergency, and comparative existing agency capacity in the
region.
23. There are four possible options which are normally used for
the coordination of UN assistance in a complex emergency. These are:
i. Resident Coordinator
The Resident Coordinator is the leader of the United
Nations country team and is normally the head of UNDP in a particular country.
In a complex emergency, the Resident Coordinator may also be designated as the
Humanitarian Coordinator.
ii. Lead Agency
One of the UN agencies may be selected to coordinate
and this is often the agency which provides the majority of the
assistance;
iii. Humanitarian Coordinator
If the emergency is of considerable size a
Humanitarian Coordinator may be appointed distinct from the office of the
Resident Coordinator and lead agency. The Humanitarian Coordinator normally
phases out once the emergency reaches recovery phase and any residual tasks are
returned to the Resident Coordinator;
iv. Regional Humanitarian
Coordinator
If the emergency affects more than one country a
Humanitarian Coordinator having regional responsibilities may be
appointed.
1The full members of the IASC are
OCHA (convenor), FAO, IOM, UNDP, UNHCR, WFP, UNICEF, WHO, and there are a number
of standing invitees, including the Red Cross movement and NGOs. i.
Resident Coordinator
Role of UNHCR and Other UN Agencies in a Complex
Emergency
24. In complex emergencies involving refugees, UNHCR will be
responsible for protection and assistance activities on behalf of the refugees.
UNHCR may also be appointed lead agency, and therefore be responsible for the
coordination of the UN response.
25. Whether or not UNHCR is lead agency, the UNHCR
Representative remains directly responsible to the High Commissioner on all
issues related to the UNHCR country programme as well as policy matters and
issues related to UNHCR's mandate.
The protection of refugees must remain the sole prerogative
of the High Commissioner.
Organization at the Site Level
Introduction
26. The framework for the organization and coordinating
mechanisms at the site level are likely to reflect broadly those established
centrally. However, there is one fundamental difference between the site and
central levels: at the site level the refugees themselves should play a major
role.
The organization of the refugee community must support and
enhance their own abilities to provide for themselves.
27. A clear understanding of the aims and objectives of the
emergency operation and proper coordination are even more important at the site
level than centrally, for it is here that failures and misunderstandings will
directly affect the refugees.
Of particular importance will be the adoption of common
standards when a number of organizations are providing similar assistance.
Regular meetings of those concerned are essential. There should
be an overall coordinating mechanism chaired by the government authority, UNHCR
Field Officer, and/or an operational partner, and this mechanism may be
complemented by sectoral committees.
28. Certain activities are interdependent or have a common
component and will need particularly close coordination at site level. For
example, environmental sanitation measures must be closely coordinated with
health services, and the home visiting component of health care with feeding
programmes and community services.
29. A rapid changeover of outside personnel can create major
problems for site level coordination, though some specialists may obviously be
required for short periods. The importance of continuity is proportional to the
closeness of contact with the refugees. Operational partners at the site should
have a standard orientation and briefing procedure to ensure continuity of
action and policy despite changes in personnel.
Community Organization
30. The importance of preserving and promoting a sense of
community is stressed in chapters 10 and 12 on community services and site
planning. The approach to thinking about and understanding site and community
organization should be from the smallest unit - the family - upwards, rather
than imposed from the largest unit downwards, which would be unlikely to reflect
natural or existing community structures and concerns.
31. The basic planning unit for site organization and management
is likely therefore to be the family, subject to traditional social patterns,
and distinctive features of the population (e.g. numbers of separated minors,
adolescent and women headed households). Larger units for organizational and
representational purposes will again follow the community structure. For
example, the next level up is likely to be community units of about 80 to 100
people, grouped according to living arrangements, followed by groups of
communities of about 1,000 people. Different settlement services are
decentralized to these different levels - e.g. water and latrines at household
level, and education and health facilities at community and larger levels. The
physical layout of the site will have a major influence on social organization.
Generally, the smaller the Settlement the better - the
overriding aim should be to avoid high density, large camps.
Community Involvement
32. The refugees must be involved in planning measures to meet
their needs and in implementing those measures. The way the community is
organized can help ensure that the refugees' specific skills are made use of and
that the personnel for services at the site will come from the refugees.
33. There are three levels to the involvement of refugees. The
first is in the overall planning and organization, for example the determination
of what is the best and culturally most appropriate solution to a problem, given
the constraints of the situation. This level requires that the refugees have a
social organization within their community that is properly representative. As
the previous social structures may have been severely disrupted, this may take
time to redevelop but will be important to the success of the emergency
operation and for the future of the refugees. Meanwhile, urgent action to meet
evident needs must of course be taken.
34. The second level of involvement is in the practical use of
the refugees' skills and resources wherever possible for the implementation of
the operation. The refugees themselves should run their own community to the
extent possible. Where suitably qualified or experienced refugees exist, such
as nurses, teachers and traditional health workers, they must obviously be
used. Where they do not, outside assistance should ensure that refugees are
trained to take over from those who are temporarily filling the gap. Other
services include feeding programmes, sanitation, (maintenance and cleaning of
latrines, drainage, garbage disposal, vector control, etc.) construction
(shelters and communal buildings) education, tracing and general administration.
Note that women and adolescents often have the necessary skills but lack the
confidence or language skills to come forward - an outreach programme to
identify them might be necessary.
35. At the same time, other traditional skills - for example in
construction or well-digging -should be harnessed. While specific measures to
develop self-reliance will vary with each situation, their aim should always be
to avoid or reduce the refugees' dependence on outside assistance. The more
successful measures are generally those based on methods and practices familiar
to the refugees.
36. The third level is the education of the community on life in
their new situation, which may be markedly different from their previous
experience. Public health education in such matters as the importance of hygiene
in crowded conditions, mother and child care and the use of unfamiliar latrines
is an example. As another example, if unfamiliar foods or preparation methods
have to be used, immediate practical instruction is essential. Education and
guidance of this sort are best given by the refugees themselves (including women
and youth), with outside assistance.
Refugee Representation
37. Refugee settlements are not, typically, simple replicas of
former community life, and large numbers of refugees may be living temporarily
outside their traditional community leadership structures. However, in nearly
every emergency, some refugee leaders, spokespersons, or respected elders will
be present. It will be necessary to define with the community the method of
choosing leaders to ensure fair representation and proper participation in both
the planning and implementation of the emergency programme. The more the
settlement differs from former community life, the more important this action is
likely to be to the success of the programme.
However, be aware that some new power structures might
emerge, for example through force, and may exercise de facto control over the
population, but may not be representative.
38. The system of refugee representation should:
i. Be truly representative of the different
interests and sectors of the community, and of both men and women;
ii. Include various levels of representatives and
leaders to ensure adequate representation and access for individual
refugees;
iii. Avoid unconscious bias, for example on the
basis of language. Bear in mind that there is no reason why a refugee should be
representative of the community simply because he or she has a common language
with those providing outside assistance;
iv. Be based on traditional leadership systems as
much as possible but provided these allow proper representation (for example, if
the traditional leadership system excludes women, there should nevertheless be
women representatives);
v. Be consistent with the physical divisions in the
layout of the
site.
Key References
A Framework for People-Oriented Planning in Refugee
Situations taking account of Women, Men and Children, UNHCR, Geneva, 1992.
Partnership: A Programme Management Handbook for UNHCR's
Partners, UNHCR, Geneva 1996.
UNHCR Handbook; People-Oriented Planning at Work: Using POP
to Improve UNHCR Programming, UNHCR, Geneva,
1994.
Annexes
Annex 1 - Elements of a Coordinating Body
Each of the factors listed below would need to be evaluated
against the particular context and policy of the host government. At the
beginning of the operation UNHCR should secure a suitable meeting room for
coordination meetings.
Membership
The nature of the coordinating body and its usefulness will be
determined partly by its membership.
1. Criteria for participation:
i. Provision of direct services;
ii. Regular attendance at coordination
meetings;
iii. Compliance with service guidelines and
standards;
iv. Regular financial contributions to coordination
mechanism.
2. Other organizations may wish to attend coordination meetings
without full participation in the coordination mechanism:
i. Organizations which may choose not to fully
participate, e.g. ICRC;
ii. Funding organizations and donor
representatives;
iii. Public interest groups;
iv. Military forces.
Functions of the coordination body
1. Meetings.
These may be needed at the central and the site level, and
include:
i. Overall coordination meetings, which may be
needed daily at the start of an emergency;
ii. Sectoral committee meetings (e.g. health,
registration, water);
iii. Conferences.
2. Identification of needed services and soliciting voluntary
agencies to assume responsibilities for the provision of these services.
3. Allocation of donated commodities and financial
contributions.
4. Guidelines and standards for the provision of services.
5. Orientation of newly arrived agencies.
6. Orientation of incoming staff.
7. Research and documentation.
8. Support for settlement coordination committees.
9. Coordination with agencies outside the country.
10. Information sharing.
11. Fund raising.
Annex 2 - Tips on running a meeting
1. Set clear objectives for the meeting
· Why is the meeting
needed and what is the expected outcome? (Communication? Problem-solving?
Planning? Decision-making?)
· Who should attend
the meeting?
· Should the meeting
be formal or informal?
2. Prepare an agenda
· Make a written
agenda with clear objectives and approximate timing for each item;
· Ensure that the
agenda states why the meeting is needed;
· Make sure the
agenda is realistic (not too many items) and sequence the items
appropriately;
· Put the difficult,
important issues near the beginning (perhaps dealing first with something quick
and simple);
· Plan breaks if the
meeting is more than 1 hour in length;
· Avoid mixing
information sharing and decision-making in the same meeting - hold separate
meetings for these functions.
3. Documentation
· Circulate a
detailed agenda, list of participants and any background documentation (such as
minutes of previous meetings) in advance (but not too far ahead) of the meeting,
2 to 3 days before is best;
· Indicate the time,
place and duration of the meeting;
· Prepare
audio-visual materials in advance.
4. Seating arrangements
· Choose a circular
or rectangular table;
· Avoid a long,
narrow table if possible as this makes communication more
difficult;
· In an informal
setting, a semicircle of chairs facing a flip chart is the best;
· Everyone should be
able to see each other;
· Participants
should not be too crowded or too far apart.
5. During the meeting
· Start on
time;
· Have the
participants introduce themselves if they do not know each other;
· Clarify the
objective(s) of the meeting and review the agenda and time limits;
· Outline how the
meeting will be conducted (methodology);
· Identify the
rapporteur or secretary for the meeting;
· Ask the
participants if they agree to the agenda and be flexible on minor changes if
there is consensus;
· If applicable,
review action items of previous meeting(s);
· Make sure you have
everyone's attention before opening the meeting.
During the meeting the chairman or facilitator should
· Avoid getting
personally involved in the discussions;
· Keep an overall
view of the objective(s);
· Do not lose the
thread of the argument;
· Stick to the
agenda (but be flexible within agenda items);
· Ask for
information and opinions;
· Summarize and
reformulate key points (have the rapporteur or secretary use the flip chart to
record the points as they occur);
· Clarify and
elaborate where needed;
· Concentrate on key
issues and stop digressions;
· Test for
consensus;
· Ensure everyone
gets a chance to speak;
· Assign
responsibilities and deadlines for agreed tasks (action, responsibility, and
date by agenda item);
· Set date, time and
place for next meeting;
· Close the meeting
on time, on a decided and positive note.
7. After The Meeting
· Keep a record of
the meeting. It should include the following basic items:
i. A list of the participants noting
those who were invited but did not attend ("apologies"
list);
ii. The conclusions, decisions,
recommendations and the follow up action required, by agenda item, with the name
of the person responsible for action and time frame;
iii. The time, date and place of the
next meeting.
Note: working in small groups
Dividing the participants into small groups can be useful in
large meetings (more than 12 participants), when discussions are lengthy.
Depending on the subject, it can allow in-depth discussion on specific questions
and possibly help to solve
problems.
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
8. Implementing Arrangements
(introduction...)
Introduction
Implementing Arrangements
Implementing Procedures
Monitoring, Reporting and Evaluation
Special Considerations
Key References
Annexes
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
8. Implementing Arrangements
Figure
Introduction
1. Appropriate arrangements to implement an emergency operation
will be fundamental to its success. UNHCR has a unique statutory responsibility
for the provision of international protection. However, there is no such unique
statutory responsibility for the provision and distribution of material
assistance to refugees, which might be carried out by other organizations -
governmental, UN agencies, NGOs, as well as directly by UNHCR. There are a
number of factors which will influence the implementing arrangements for
assistance operations. This chapter outlines implementing arrangements and
procedures in emergencies including monitoring, reporting and evaluation. UNHCR
guidelines for standard procedures must be referred to for more
detail.
Implementing Arrangements
2. Depending on the scale and needs of the emergency, a number
of different implementing arrangements may be needed in the various sectors. One
organization might have operational responsibility for health care, and another
for logistics. Even within a sector, operational responsibility may have to be
split up. Different operational partners might have responsibility for health
care in different refugee sites or communities. In UNHCR terminology, an
operating partner is an organization or agency that works in partnership with
UNHCR to protect and assist refugees, and an implementing partner is an
operational partner that signs an implementing agreement with UNHCR.
3.
Whenever possible UNHCR seeks to implement assistance
indirectly through an implementing partner rather than directly.
The origin of this policy is found in the Statute of UNHCR.
Article 1 requires the High Commissioner to seek "permanent solutions for the
problem of refugees by assisting Governments and, subject to the approval of the
Governments concerned, private organizations...". In accordance with Article 10,
the High Commissioner "shall administer any funds, public or private, which
he/she receives for assistance to refugees, and shall distribute them among the
private and, as appropriate, public agencies which he/she deems best qualified
to administer such assistance".
Degree of Operational Responsibility of UNHCR
4. Although UNHCR normally seeks to implement indirectly through
an implementing partner, there are circumstances in which it may be necessary
and/or clearly in the interests of refugees for UNHCR to assume greater
operational responsibility. UNHCR's degree of direct operational responsibility
will vary for each emergency situation, and also with time as the operation
evolves.
5. Factors influencing the degree of operational responsibility
undertaken by UNHCR, other organizations and the government include the
following:
i. The government's capacity to manage the refugee
emergency, because of the scale, nature, location of the emergency, and ability
of existing government structures to respond;
ii. The existence and capacity of other
organizations in the country, and in the sectors where assistance is most
needed;
iii. The stage of the emergency. At the start of an
emergency, the government itself frequently has full operational responsibility.
For example, a new influx is often first assisted by the local district and
provincial authorities. On the other hand, in other circumstances, it is often
at the start of an emergency where UNHCR has the greatest operational
responsibility because there may be no suitable operational partner immediately
available within the country.
6. Where UNHCR does assume a high degree of operational
responsibility, swift action is needed to ensure that the necessary personnel
and expertise are available, by obtaining the rapid deployment of sufficient
UNHCR staff (see chapter 20 on administration and emergency staffing). At the
same time, steps should be taken to identify and mobilize other organizations to
assume responsibilities in the various sectors as soon as possible.
The Operational Role of the Government
7. Whatever the implementing arrangements, overall
responsibility remains with the host government, assisted by UNHCR. The
government's concurrence must, in accordance with Article 1 of the Statute, be
sought on the proposed implementing arrangements.
8. The government may not have the capacity to be the primary
operational organization, but may play a major role in the implementation of
various activities of UNHCR and donors. In this case, it is preferable to ensure
that the policy arm of the government (e.g. the Ministry of the Interior) is
separate from the "operational" entities, since, as recipients of UNHCR funds,
the relationship with the latter is substantially different.
It is preferable that the implementation of programmes be
carried out by existing line ministries - e.g. the Ministry of Health for hearth
programmes. As a rule, new government departments should not be specifically
created to respond to the refugee emergency.
Every effort should be made to resist the creation of such
specialized departments.
The Operational Role of UN Agencies
9. UNHCR always retains responsibility for the protection needs
of refugees, but the refugees' material needs are likely to fall within sectors
for which other organizations in the UN system have special competence through
their mandate, experience and capacity, e.g. WFP and UNICEF. The roles and
responsibilities of UN agencies are defined through their mandates and MOUs, and
situation-specific responsibilities are set out in exchanges of letters and
agreements - this should avoid duplication, minimize gaps, and clarify roles on
the basis of recognition of comparative advantages.
Non-Governmental Organizations
10. Where the government is not the implementing partner in a
particular sector, there may be advantages to selecting a national organization
or an NGO with the required capacity as a partner. National or
locally-based organizations may already be delivering emergency assistance,
would already have staff on the ground, and would already be familiar with the
country.
11. Many international NGOs have great experience of refugee
emergencies and some can deploy teams and resources at short notice, both for
specific sectors and for general management. In addition to their own staff,
they will also know of a wide circle of individuals with the appropriate skills
and experience. International NGOs already working in the country may be
strengthened by their headquarters. For instance, under the overall
responsibility of the national Red Cross or Red
Crescent Society, the IFRCRCS may be able to help strengthen
quickly the capacity of the national society to implement the emergency
operation.
12. Criteria for the selection of implementing partners may be
found in Chapter 4 of the UNHCR
Manual.
Implementing Procedures
Implementing procedures are subject to change. The forms,
terms, documentation, procedures and references (e.g. chapter 4 of the UNHCR
Manual) referred to in this section from paragraphs 13 to 31 may change from
time to time. However, the basic principles should remain the same.
13. Authority to implement the activities envisaged in the
operations plan must be given formally through implementing instruments. These
define the conditions which govern project implementation and authorize the
obligation and expenditure of funds.
14. Authority to implement is firstly delegated internally
within UNHCR. This is usually given through a Letter of Instruction (LOI) which
authorizes the UNHCR Representative to implement projects directly or to enter
into implementing agreements with implementing partners. Based on the internal
delegation of authority, implementing agreements can be signed with UNHCR's
implementing partners.
Any party disbursing UNHCR funds must have a formal signed
agreement with UNHCR.
The Emergency Letter of Instruction (ELOI)
15. An Emergency Letter of Instruction (ELOI) is simpler in form
and procedure than a "normal" LOI and is used to delegate implementing authority
rapidly to the field. It is usually sent via e-mail, fax or telex. The ELOI
gives the Representative in a country where an emergency is rapidly evolving the
immediate authority to incur expenditures, and to enter into agreements for
project implementation with implementing partners. It is not intended to cover
the entire emergency operation, but to permit a rapid response to immediate
needs, pending the formulation of an assistance project based on a detailed
needs and resources assessment. Thus, in order to ensure continued assistance
once these funds are exhausted or the ELOI project is terminated the manager of
the operation should, as soon as possible, send Headquarters a detailed project
proposal for the issuance of an LOI, in accordance with the procedures set out
in Chapter 4 of the UNHCR Manual.
16. The minimum information which the Field Office must send to
Headquarters in order that an ELOI be prepared is a budget proposal in US
dollars at sector level. No project description or workplan is required.
17. Headquarters can then issue an ELOI with the following basic
information:
i. Total requirements;
ii. Initial obligation level;
iii. Purpose of the expenditure (at sector
level);
iv. Any time limit applicable to the
expenditure;
v. Project symbol;
vi. Summary budget at sector level.
18. Actual expenditure under an ELOI must be recorded at a more
detailed level (sector activity or, preferably, sub-item). It must be charged to
the appropriate project under which implementation is taking place. A voucher
must be completed to record every disbursement made, showing the name of the
payee, the amount, the project symbol, the purpose and date of disbursement. The
voucher should be signed by the payee or supported by receipted bills and sent
to Headquarters with the monthly accounts.
19. In certain circumstances, the ELOI may not be necessary, as
it will be possible to reallocate funds under an existing LOI.
Implementing Agreements
20. Implementation of all or part of a project may be
sub-contracted to one or more implementing partners. A party disbursing UNHCR
funds must have a formal signed agreement with UNHCR. The agreement must be
based on the internal delegation of authority, and must comply with the terms of
the authority (LOI, ELOI, etc.) and the Financial Rules. The standard clauses
which must figure in any implementing agreement are described in Chapter 4 of
the UNHCR Manual.
21. If the government or an international organization advances
relief supplies from their own resources, UNHCR may agree in writing to
reimburse them in cash or kind, provided the maximum US dollar commitment is
specified and does not exceed unobligated funds available under the ELOI or
other existing authority. Any such commitments should immediately be reported to
Headquarters.
22. An agreement with the government covering the provision of
assistance is quite separate from the administrative agreement that governs the
status of the High Commissioner's representation in the country. Where this
administrative agreement (often referred to as the "UNHCR Cooperation
Agreement") needs to be concluded, special instructions will be given by
Headquarters. See also annexes to the Checklist for the Emergency
Administrator for examples of such agreements.
Letter of Intent
23. If the implementing partner must start providing assistance
before there is time to conclude an agreement, a signed "Mutual Letter of Intent
to Conclude an Agreement" can authorize the obligation of funds. This is a
temporary arrangement until there has been time to develop the detail of the
agreement. The letter must include certain basic clauses. Annex 1 contains a
sample format for such a letter and the basic clauses.
Agreements
24. The form of the agreement will depend on the circumstances
and on the identity of the implementing partner. The agreements exist in two
different formats. Bipartite agreements are for projects implemented by a
governmental or a non-governmental organization. Tripartite agreements are for
projects implemented by an non-governmental organization and where the host
government is a third signatory to the agreement. The individual signing on
behalf of UNHCR should be the addressee of the ELOI or LOI. The agreement sets
out the responsibilities of each party, for example the government's
contributions to the programme (land, services etc.) and its undertakings on
facilitating the import and transport of relief supplies (traffic and landing
rights, tax and customs exemptions, etc.).
Administrative Expenditure by Implementing Partners
25. UNHCR looks to implementing partners to contribute their own
resources to the refugee programme, and to develop the capacity to meet their
own support costs, in particular their headquarters support costs. UNHCR
recognizes, however, that certain types of support costs could be a legitimate
charge on UNHCR voluntary funds. Support costs (as opposed to operational costs)
are defined in Chapter 4 of the UNHCR Manual, as are the guidelines applicable
to the coverage of such costs.
Direct UNHCR Expenditure
26. In many cases, there may be a need for direct UNHCR project
expenditure in addition to programme delivery, and administrative support. This
might include international procurement by UNHCR, clearing, storage and internal
transport expenses for contributions in-kind, and initial direct operational
expenditure by UNHCR Field Officers at the refugee site.
Procurement
27. The Representative may enter into a contract (or series of
related contracts1 for the procurement of goods and services up to a
certain limit (US$100,000 in 1998), without special Headquarters approval, but
subject always to the appropriate authority (e.g. the ELOI) and procedures.
28. Where the Representative needs to enter into a contract (or
series of related contracts) in excess of this amount, approval must be obtained
either from Headquarters, or from the Local Committee on Contracts. A Local
Committee on Contracts can be established when circumstances demand, for example
at the beginning of an emergency where required goods and services are available
locally. It can only be established with the approval of Headquarters (according
to the procedures in Annex 2).
29. In all cases, the Representative must ensure that there is
always due assessment of the available alternatives, including competitive
bidding, before procuring any goods or services.
30. Procurement procedures are described in Chapter 4 of the
UNHCR Manual, and set out in Annex 2. See also chapter 18 on supplies and
transport.
Contributions In Kind
31. Contributions in kind may be made towards needs foreseen
under the emergency programme. Whether these are made bilaterally or through
UNHCR, their value (generally assessed on the same basis as foreseen in the
budget costing) will normally be credited against the appropriate budget item,
and the cash requirements through UNHCR for that item reduced accordingly. This
mechanism may need to be carefully explained to the government and implementing
partners. For all contributions in kind made through UNHCR, a separate project
or an "in kind LOI" will be established by Headquarters for the value of the
contribution. The addressee of the relevant LOI is required to provide reports
from the field to Headquarters on the arrival and distribution of the
contribution. Paragraph 53 of chapter 9 on external relations discusses
contributions in kind received by the Field.
1Related purchases are contracts
entered into with one supplier within the previous 90 days which amount to
$100,000 or more, not including contracts that have been approved by the
Committee on
Contracts.
Monitoring, Reporting and Evaluation
32. Control of UNHCR funds by the UNHCR field office and
operational partners, and monitoring and evaluation, should be in accordance
with established UNHCR procedures and the relevant clauses of the ELOI or LOI.
Proper project control, including the close monitoring of obligation and
expenditure levels, is particularly important in an emergency because of the
risk of over-expenditure and the need to reallocate under-used resources without
delay.
33. Careful and close monitoring of the activities and outputs
is essential. Whatever the implementing arrangements, a UNHCR presence at, or at
least frequent visits by the same person to, the site of the refugees will be
required.
34. Monitoring is the ongoing review of an operation or project
during its implementation to ensure that inputs, activities, and outputs are
proceeding according to plans (including budget and work schedules). Monitoring
tracks progress towards objectives, and that progress should be analyzed and
evaluated by management, who can make improvements and take corrective measures
to better achieve those objectives. Monitoring can be summed up in the question:
"Are we doing the thing right?".
35. Projects should also be evaluated to analyze the goals of
the project themselves: their relevance and achievability - this can be summed
up in the question "Are we doing and have we done the right thing?".
Sufficient information must be available to decision-makers
so that the operation can be adjusted to meet changing needs or to correct
shortcomings.
36. Monitoring and evaluation should not be considered as time
consuming detractions from protecting and assisting refugees, but as important
tools in an emergency to ensure that activities being carried out retain their
relevance in rapidly changing situations, and continue to address the most
urgent problems. The circumstances of refugee women and children should be
specially monitored; their circumstances could and should be used as benchmarks
for monitoring the effectiveness of the overall operation.
37. Reports should be in standard formats or cover standard
issues, in order to ensure important information is covered but avoiding
unnecessary detail. Always bear in mind the purpose of the report, and who will
be reading it, keeping it concise and to the point. Energy should not be wasted
on exchanging information that is not acted upon - a report that is not read and
acted upon is a waste of paper and time.
38. See Annex 3 for a suggested format for a standard emergency
situation report.
Situation reports should be sent as a matter of routine.
Specific reports will be required for various sectors like
protection, health and community services.
39. Regular reports should be made by the implementing partner
to UNHCR at field level. The reporting obligations of implementing partners must
be set out in the implementing agreements. The Field must also send regular
reports to Headquarters - implementing partners' reports that are forwarded to
Headquarters must always be accompanied by an analysis and comments from the
Representative.
Special Considerations
40. In a refugee emergency, staff may be faced with a number of
questions on which the following guidance may be helpful.
Payment for the Purchase or Rent of Land Occupied by
Refugees.
41. As a matter of policy, UNHCR does not buy or rent land,
which the government of the country of asylum is expected to provide.
Headquarter's approval is required for exceptions to this
policy. Construction on the land may however be financed by UNHCR.
Payment to Refugees
42. The issue of paying refugees in cash or kind for certain
assistance activities (e.g. some community services, establishing basic
infrastructure and shelters) will inevitably arise. How this issue is resolved
can have a crucial effect on a settlement's character.
Payment can destroy the sense of responsibility refugees feel
for their welfare.
However, the absence of payment may mean that tasks essential to
the settlement's well-being are either not done or have to be done by paid
outside labour.
43. In the first days of a settlement's existence payment to
refugees would not normally be appropriate. In this start-up phase refugees
should assume their responsibility towards themselves and their fellows to
participate in the establishment of their settlement. Even payment-in-kind is
probably inappropriate at this stage. In addition to the unfortunate impression
of creating a right to payment, it may also involve commitments which cannot
continue to be met, or have to be met at the expense of the entire settlement's
general ration. Problems with the supply system are almost inevitable at the
beginning of a settlement's life and no group should in such circumstances get
extra commodities to the direct detriment of others.
44. In the longer-term, certain types of community work
frequently start to emerge as areas where standards will drop if some form of
payment is not given. This is often the case with key public health services
whose importance is not always correctly understood by the refugees. Before
starting any payment scheme, calculate its full potential cost and ensure that
the required extra funds or food are available. The continuing financial
implications for a large refugee population may be considerable.
It should be borne in mind that, after payment is introduced
for One type of job or for one group of workers, others will see this as a
precedent.
It will be necessary to have some very clear but restrictive
criteria for paid community work, The wage system introduced should not inhibit
progress towards a self-reliant settlement. Those agencies responsible for
different sectoral services should meet the wage costs of refugees working in
that sector.
45. As the refugees are already supported, remuneration levels
should be well below national rates. It is important that this remuneration be
fairly applied to all refugees doing broadly the same work. A major cause of
discord at many refugee sites has been the payment by different organizations of
markedly different rates to refugees for the same work.
A standard scale is essential.
Whether or not there are differentials recognizing different
levels of skill will be a matter to decide in consultation with the refugees.
Provision of Services to the Local Population.
46. The local population should not see the refugees as a
burden, because of their effect on existing local services and environment, nor
should the refugees be a cause of resentment, because of benefits which may seem
to accrue only to them. So activities to benefit the refugees such as
maintaining or improving the local infrastructure (roads, hospitals and schools)
or to look after the local environment, could help avoid or diminish resentment
on the part of the local population.
47. Bilateral aid programmes and other organizations, both
within and outside the UN system, should be encouraged to help affected
nationals. Assistance available to refugees should take account of the
conditions of nationals in the area and a flexible approach should be adopted -
the principle is that provision of services to refugees should not be higher
than that available to the local population.
Corruption
48. UNHCR should ensure that all concerned with the provision of
assistance know clearly what UNHCR policy is regarding corruption. UNHCR is
obliged by donors and by its mandate to ensure that all funds distributed by it
are properly used for the benefit of refugees and all transactions must be in
accordance with the Financial Rules. UNHCR should clearly specify which
practices are acceptable and proper and which are not. It should also be clear
that breaches of the policy will not be tolerated, and this message will be
reinforced if rigorous monitoring and control are apparent to all parties.
Political and Religious Activity
49. Everyone has a right to political and religious expression:
however, refugees are also obliged to conform to the laws and regulations of the
host country as well as to the measures taken for the maintenance of public
order. UNHCR itself is obliged to be non-political2. Responsibility
for security and public order at the refugee site always rests with the
government. To help maintain order, site planning should take into account any
need there may be to physically separate any previously hostile groups among the
refugees.
50. Other organizations active in the delivery of assistance may
have a religious aspect in their normal work. Some are traditional partners of
UNHCR, and the separation of religious and other activities is long established
and well understood, but for others it may be useful to recall the basic
principles. Religious activities by those outside the refugee community, where
permitted by the authorities, must be clearly dissociated from the delivery of
assistance and services to refugees.
No proselytizing should take place in association with the
provision of services such as education, health and community services.
2Para. 2 of the Statute of the United
Nations High Commissioner for Refugees states: "the work of the High
Commissioner shall be of an entirely non-political character: it shall be
humanitarian and
social..."
Key References
Partnership: A Programme Management Handbook for UNHCR's
Partners, UNHCR, Geneva, 1996.
Supplies and Food Aid Field Handbook, UNHCR, Geneva,
1989.
Annex 1 - Sample Letter of Mutual Intent to Conclude an
Agreement
NATIONS UNIES - HAUT COMMISSARIAT POUR LES REFUGIES
UNITED NATIONS - HIGH COMMISSIONER FOR REFUGEES
Date
Notre/Our code:
Dear
I should like to refer to our exchanges [add details as
appropriate] concerning the implementation by [nameof
implementing partner] on behalf of the United Nations High Commissioner for
Refugees (UNHCR) of a programme of emergency assistance to [origin and number of
beneficiaries].
It is my understanding that it is our mutual intention to
conclude and sign as soon as possible an agreement covering our cooperation in
the above mentioned programme. This agreement will incorporate, inter alia, the
attached clauses and will require [name of implementing partner] to
report in financial and narrative form on the use of all contributions received
from the High Commissioner. The conclusion of an agreement embodying these
requirements is mandatory under the Financial Rules of UNHCR whenever funds are
made available by UNHCR.
I should be grateful if you would confirm in writing below that
this understanding is correct, and your agreement that the use of the sum of
[amount in local currency or in US dollars], that the High Commissioner
intends to make available to [name of implementing partner] on receipt of
this confirmation, will be considered as subject to the terms of the Agreement,
once concluded and signed.
[signature and title of addressee of ELOI]
I confirm that the understanding set out above is that of [name
of implementing partner], which agrees that the use of the sum of
[amount in local currency or in US dollars] will be considered as subject
to the terms of the Agreement, once concluded and signed.
[signature and title of addressee of letter above, and
date]
MANDATORY CLAUSES
Clauses governing Rate of Exchange (1.08 or 2.03),
Maintenance of Financial and Project Records (3.08), Inspection and Audit (3.11
and 3.12), Audit Certificate (3.13) and Non-Liability of the High Commissioner
(4.05 and 4.06) are STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS and cannot be excluded (paragraph
numbers given are those from UNHCR Manual, Chapter 4, Appendix 8). These clauses
are set out below:
Rate of Exchange
1.08 (if the government is a signatory to the Agreement): grant
the most favourable official rate of exchange for all conversions into local
currency of funds provided by the High Commissioner for the implementation of
the project governed by the UNHCR Agreement;
2.03 (if an NGO is the implementing partner): apply the most
favourable official rate of exchange for all transactions relating to the
implementation of the project governed by the UNHCR Agreement;
Maintenance of Financial and Project Records
3.08 maintain separate project records and accounts containing
current information and documentation which, inter alia, shall comprise:
a) copies of the UNHCR Agreement(s) and all revisions thereto;
b) payment vouchers, clearly showing the (Sub-) Project symbol,
the name of the payee, the amount, the purpose and date of disbursement,
evidencing all payments made and with all pertinent supporting documentation
attached;
c) vouchers evidencing the receipt of all remittances, cash or
any other form of credit to the project account;
d) periodic analyses of actual expenditure against the project's
budget;
e) records of all financial commitments entered into during the
project;
f) reports by auditors on the accounts and activities of the
project;
Inspection and Audit
3.11 facilitate inspection and audit of the project governed by
the UNHCR Agreement by the United Nations Internal Audit Service or any other
person duly authorized by the High Commissioner on behalf of the United Nations.
Should they at any time wish to do so, the United Nations Board of Auditors may
also carry out an audit of the project. Audits of the project will include,
inter alia, the examination of the project accounting records in order to
determine that the charging of administrative and operational support costs to
the project complies with those specified in the annexes to the UNHCR Agreement.
For auditing purposes, project accounting records shall be retained for the six
years following the project's termination;
3.12 facilitate visits by the High Commissioner or of any other
person duly authorized by him/her to the project site(s) to evaluate the
progress and achievements of the project during its period of implementation or
thereafter;
Audit Certificate for Governmental Implementing Partners
3.13 submit to the High Commissioner, within three months of the
final date for liquidation of commitments, an audit certificate issued by the
appropriate government audit authority, together with such comments as the
auditor may deem appropriate in respect of project operations generally and, in
particular, the financial situation as reported by the Government;
Audit Certificate for International NGO Implementing
Partners
3.14 submit to the High Commissioner, within six months of the
end of the Agency's fiscal year, a copy of its consolidated audited financial
statements, wherein UNHCR funding is clearly identified, issued by an
independent audit authority and as presented to and endorsed by the Agency's
governing body. The audit report and opinion should include such comments as the
auditor may deem appropriate in respect of UNHCR funded project operations
generally and, in particular, the opinion should clearly indicate that UNHCR
funds were duly included in the audit;
Audit Certificate for National NGO Implementing Partners
3.15 for all UNHCR Agreements for a value of US$100,000 and
above, submit to the High Commissioner, within six months of the final date for
liquidation of commitments, an audit certificate issued by an independent audit
authority. The audit report and opinion should include such comments as the
auditor may deem appropriate in respect of project operations generally and, in
particular, the financial situation as reported by the Agency to UNHCR in its
final Sub-Project Monitoring Report. For all UNHCR Agreements for a value of
less than US$ 100,000, UNHCR reserves the right to request an audit in
accordance with Clause 3.11 above.;
Non-liability
4.05 not be liable to indemnify any third party in respect of
any claim, debt, damage or demand arising out of the implementation of the
project governed by the UNHCR Agreement and which may be made against the other
parties to the Agreement;
4.06 not accept liability for compensation for the death,
disability or the effects of other hazards which may be suffered by employees of
the other parties to the UNHCR Agreement as a result of their employment on work
which is the subject matter of the Agreement.
Annex 2 - Procurement by a UNHCR Field Office
1. Introduction
1.1. The procedures applicable to the procurement of goods
and/or services by UNHCR Headquarters or UNHCR offices in the field (other than
contractual arrangements for the employment of staff) vary according to the US
dollar value (at the prevailing United Nations rate of exchange) of the goods or
services, and are described below.
1.2 For all purchases of substantial quantities of relief or
other supplies by UNHCR offices in the field. Representatives should nominate a
purchasing/logistics focal point with a clear line of responsibility. Local
purchases will be initiated by, or at least cleared with, the
purchasing/logistics focal point. In all circumstances, including the evaluation
of contracts for the supply of goods and services or consultancies, the
procedures described below will apply. The term "Purchase Order" is to be read
as also applying to other forms of authorization used in relation to contracts
for services or corporate or institutional consultancies.
1.3 In all cases of procurement of goods and/or services, the
procedures and controls applied should be in accordance with Appendix 8 of
Chapter 4 of the UNHCR Manual and must provide an open, competitive, qualitative
and accountable process to obtain such goods or services which meet project
requirements at the lowest available cost. It is the responsibility of the
addressee of the Letter of Instruction to ensure that the relevant procedures
are adhered to.
1.4 All contracts entered into for the procurement of goods
and/or services should ensure exemption from, or reimbursement of, all customs
duties, levies and direct taxes on services and goods, supplies or any other
articles imported or domestically purchased.
1.5 It is the responsibility of the Representative to ensure
that each UNHCR office in the field maintains a register of all commercial
contracts entered into and that a sequential number is assigned to every such
contract.
1.7 For a value of less than US$ 2,500
A Purchase Order may be issued without recourse to formal
tender, provided that funds are available under the Letter of Instruction and
that at least three informal offers or prices have been considered and the best
offer has been selected.
1.8 For a value of over US$ 2,500 and up to US$ 5,000
A Purchase Order may be issued provided that funds are available
under the Letter of Instruction and that at least three informal quotations have
been compared and the best offer has been selected. A written record of the
quotations and the reasons for the selection must be kept.
1.9 For a value of over US$ 5,000 and up to US$ 50,000
A Purchase Order may be issued provided that funds are available
under the Letter of Instruction and that selection has been made on the basis of
at least three competitive offers obtained in response to a formal Quotation
Request sent to selected suppliers inviting them to submit sealed quotations
within a specified time frame. Chart 3.F and Annex VIII of the Supplies and Food
Aid Field Handbook provide guidelines and an example of a Quotation Request. The
Quotation Request must stipulate that all offers must be received at the UNHCR
office in signed and sealed envelopes and marked with the Quotation Request
number. All quotations received must remain sealed and must be kept under lock
and key until the expiration of the bid deadline. All bids must be opened before
a witness by the Administrative Officer or the Officer in charge of
administration in the office, and must be initialled by both the person opening
the bids and the witness. The witness shall be selected by the Representative
and drawn from the professional or national officer categories. All formal
quotations will be compared on a Tabulation of Bids form as per Annex IX of the
Supplies and Food Aid Field Handbook. The recommended supplier and the reasons
for selecting that supplier will be stated thereon.
1.10 For a value of over US$ 50,000 and up to US$ 100,000
Representatives will establish a Purchasing Committee to
consider bids and to make the appropriate recommendations. The approval of
Headquarters is not required. Rules and procedures concerning Purchasing
Committees and their composition are set out below. In a country with more than
one Field/Sub Office, the Representative may wish to establish Purchasing
Committees at different duty stations. Depending on local costs and current
exchange rates, Representatives may also lower the financial limit of
procurement to be considered by the Purchasing Committee. The Committee will
consider quotations subject to the same conditions as set out in paragraph 1.9
above. If appropriate, the Representative and/or the Committee may wish to
request specialist advice from the Programme and Technical Support Section or
the Supply and Transport Section at Headquarters.
For a value of US$ 100,000 or more:
1.11 A submission must be made to the Committee on Contracts at
Headquarters except in cases where Headquarters has authorized the establishment
of a Local Committee on Contracts as described in 3 below. For submissions to
the Headquarters Committee on Contracts, a minimum of four formal quotations
must be requested and considered by the Purchasing Committee which will make a
proposal as to the most suitable supplier to the Committee on Contracts through
the relevant Desk at Headquarters. In cases where Headquarters has authorized
the establishment of a Local Committee on Contracts, the latter may evaluate and
decide on all bids without recourse to the Purchasing Committee. Nevertheless,
in all cases, the relevant specialists in the Programme and Technical Support
Section and the Supply and Transport Section must be consulted before or during
the tendering and evaluation stages so as to ensure compliance with technical
requirements and that prices are compatible with international market rates for
the goods or services under consideration. Submissions to the Committee on
Contracts should include information as shown in Chart 3.G of the Supplies and
Food Aid Field Handbook. After approval by the Committee on Contracts (or a
Local Committee on Contracts), a Purchase Order may be issued.
2. Purchasing Committee
2.1 Procurement of goods or services by a UNHCR office in the
field for a value of over US$ 50,000 and up to US$ 100,000 must be approved by a
Purchasing Committee. This Committee will also prepare proposals to the
Headquarters Committee on Contracts for procurement for a value of over US$
100,000 in cases where Headquarters has not authorized the establishment of a
Local Committee on Contracts. The Purchasing Committee will be established and
chaired by the Representative and will consolidate the requirements, oversee the
tendering process, select suitable local suppliers and record its
recommendations in writing.
2.2 The Committee will be composed of Members and alternate
members designated by the Representative and drawn from the professional or
national officer categories. Staff members responsible for procurement should be
excluded from membership. In cases where several implementing partners require
similar supplies the Representative may consider including in the Purchasing
Committee staff from implementing agencies. A quorum will consist of three
Members.
2.3 The staff member in charge of procurement should present a
written proposal to the Purchasing Committee which will include information on
the goods or services to be procured as per Chart 3.G of the Supplies and Food
Aid Field Handbook. The minutes of the meeting will be taken and issued (at
least in draft) within two working days after the meeting. Alternatively,
particularly in an emergency, Members of the Committee may approve purchase by
signature of the proposal with appropriate comments. In general, the Committee
should adopt procedures similar to those of the UNHCR Committee on Contracts as
set out in Annex 8.5 of Chapter 4 of the UNHCR Manual, except for the provisions
concerning emergency procedures.
3. Local Committee on Contracts
3.1 In a UNHCR office in the field, the Representative may
request Headquarters to approve the establishment of a Local Committee on
Contracts, particularly in the early stages of an emergency operation and when
required goods or services are known to be available locally or regionally. The
authority to establish a Local Committee on Contracts must be obtained from
Headquarters, which will normally stipulate the purpose, the geographic, time
and financial limits, the necessity to apply the relevant rules and procedures
and, if applicable, the necessity to consult the Supply and Transport Section or
the Programme and Technical Support Section on the prices and sources of supply
of commodities and/or services available in the region. The Committee will be
chaired by the Representative or by a formally designated alternate, and will be
composed of at least three professional staff members. If there is no quorum,
the matter will be referred to the Committee on Contracts at Headquarters. The
Local Committee on Contracts will consider quotations subject to the same
conditions as set out in paragraph 1.9 above.
3.2 All requests for the establishment (or the extension of the
period of validity) of a Local Committee on Contracts should be sent via the
Desk to the Chairman of the Committee on Contracts who will check the criteria
and the justifications provided, and, if appropriate, request the Secretary of
the Committee on Contracts to prepare an authorizing communication. The
authorizing communication should be cleared by the relevant Regional Bureau and
the Chief of the Supply and Transport Section, and be authorized by the Chairman
of the Committee on Contracts. Requests for the establishment of a Local
Committee on Contracts must include a full justification as well as information
on the requested time and financial limits, and must also confirm that the goods
or services being sought are available locally or regionally and that the
requisite minimum number of professional staff would be available to act as
Members of the Local Committee on Contracts. Requests must include the names of
three members and three alternate members.
3.3 The Representative shall appoint a secretary to the Local
Committee on Contracts to receive submissions to the Committee, to schedule
meetings and secure the relevant documentation, to conduct required
correspondence, to maintain the Committee's files and to prepare and distribute
minutes of the Committee's proceedings.
3.4 Copies of the minutes and proceedings of each meeting of the
Local Committee on Contracts, together with a Tabulation of Bids form and copies
of the contracts entered into or purchase orders placed (and any amendments to
these) must be forwarded to the Secretary of the Committee on Contracts at
Headquarters who will present these to the Chairman and Members of the Committee
on Contracts for their comments. The minutes must contain a summary of the
discussion, the reasons for decisions taken, details regarding the contractor or
supplier selected and the potential costs involved.
Annex 3 - Example of a Standard Emergency Situation Report
(SITREP)
1. In emergencies, it is essential that regular situation
reports reach the outside world (other UN agencies, implementing partners). The
frequency of such reports will be determined by the characteristics of the
situation; more frequent reports will be necessary in the initial stage of an
emergency. Situation reports should give an overall view of the situation with
sufficient factual content and explanation of changes since the last report to
answer rather than raise substantive questions. By indicating progress achieved,
problems encountered and steps being taken or planned to overcome these
problems, the reports should give a cumulative picture of how the needs of the
refugees are being met. It should report on actions including actual and planned
activities; however, it should not dwell on intentions.
The SITREP should:
Be short;
Focus on priority
areas;
Give quantitative data in a
standard format (e.g. give the death rate as deaths/10,000/day NOT the number of
people who have died);
Highlight trends (e.g.
increasing/decreasing water supply, increase/decrease in arrival
rate);
Clearly say who is expected
to take any actions which are specified.
2. A suggested format is given below. Information contained in
the SITREP should be analyzed and consolidated before being passed on to the
next management level. The practice of simply copying "raw" and un-analyzed
information from one level to another should be avoided. If the same format is
used by all levels from site to central office to Headquarters, it will make it
easier to consolidate reports from various areas. Major headings should as a
rule be the same in each report, indicating "no change" if appropriate. The
report can either be structured by sector of assistance with sites covered under
each sector, or alternatively, by site, with sectors of assistance covered under
each site heading. In either case, the information under each sector of
assistance and for each location should cover as applicable:
i. Current situation;
ii. Particular problem areas, remedial action
planned with time frame;
iii. Any variation from overall implementing
arrangements;
iv. Any action required from the addressee of the
SITREP.
3. The reports should be sequentially numbered, copied to other
UNHCR offices as appropriate (including the UNHCR liaison office in New York).
The report may be used as the basis for wider situation reports issued from
Headquarters.
SITREP(number)
COUNTRY
COVERING PERIOD (date) TO (date)
Drafted, cleared, authorized by () on (date).
A. GENERAL SITUATION
B. MAJOR DEVELOPMENTS
Summary of general assessment of situation,
assessment of refugee location, and field deployment of UNHCR staff. Summary of
major trends including protection.
C. REFUGEE STATISTICS AND REGISTRATION
By location in country of origin or by distinct
groups if not self-evident. Explanation of changes since last report. Indication
of sources, e.g. government, UNHCR, etc. Any additional information (as
relevant) on gender breakdown, vulnerable cases, variances between UNHCR and
official figures, group or individual determination, etc. A format for reporting
on population in emergency situation reports is given in Annex 1 of chapter 11
on population estimation and registration.
D. PROTECTION AND DURABLE SOLUTIONS Summary of any
developments.
E. OPERATIONS
E.1. Coordination
Government departments, UN system, NGOs - both at
central and field levels.
E.2. Overall Implementing Arrangements
Role of authorities. Operational role of UNHCR. Role
of UNHCR's government counterparts, other UN agencies, international
organizations and NGO partners. Other sources of significant
assistance.
E.3. Assistance
Summary of main developments since the last report,
broken down by sector and/or site, as applicable. Additional information
provided could include major problems encountered in programme delivery and
modifications required to implementing arrangements.
F. EXTERNAL RELATIONS
Significant events in relations with donor
government representatives, with diplomatic missions in general and with the
media.
G. ADMINISTRATION AND STAFFING
Establishment of UNHCR presence, office premises,
vehicles and equipment, staffing arrangements, local recruitment,
etc.
Annex 4 - Format for Reporting on Population in Emergency
Situation Reports
Period: From _______________ to_________________
Type/ status of population
Current location
Origin/ from
Pop. at start of period
New arrivals
Decreases
Pop. at end of period
Vol. return
Resettle- ment
Other
Total
% of total 0-4 years*
%of total who are female*
*Estimate
Main source of information is Government;
UNHCR; NGO
Main basis of the information is
Registration;
Estimate
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
9. External Relations
(introduction...)
Relations with Government and Diplomatic Corps
Relations with the Media
Funding and Donor Relations
Formal Written Communications
Annexes
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
9. External Relations
Figure
Relations with Government and Diplomatic Corps
1. All matters of protocol relating to establishing a new UNHCR
presence in an emergency are likely to be handled by the Foreign Ministry in the
same way as for other United Nations organizations. However, substantive matters
concerning refugees may be handled by another authority, for example the
President or Prime Minister's office or the Ministry of Interior. Guidance on
the form of written communications with the government is given below.
2. It is important that the diplomatic corps accredited to the
country is kept informed of UNHCR's activities from the start of an emergency.
An informed and concerned diplomatic corps will be helpful in gaining support
for the emergency operation both from the host country institutions and from
donor governments for funding.
Briefing Meetings
3. Briefing meetings should start in the early days of an
emergency and continue on a regular basis. There may already be a contact group
of the ambassadors most interested in refugee matters who could be briefed in
the early days of an emergency. Where there is no such group, or to make the
arrangements for meetings more formal, it may be appropriate to invite the
ambassadors of member states of the Executive Committee of the High
Commissioner's Programme (EXCOM) to the briefings (for a list of EXCOM members,
see Annex 1).
The aim is to keep Executive Committee : and other
immediately concerned Governments well informed while not devoting scarce time
to a major protocol exercise.
4. A number of people may be helpful in giving advice on the
organization and participants of the meetings, including: the ambassador from
the country of the current Executive Committee Chairman may be helpful in
advising on the organization of briefings, or the Dean of the Diplomatic Corps,
or the ambassador of the country currently holding the presidency of the
European Union (as a major donor group), or the Organization of African Unity or
other regional groups.
5. A representative of the government would normally be present
at these briefings. United Nations organizations and NGOs directly involved in
the emergency operation should also be invited to attend.
6. Unless chaired by the representative of the Government, the
meeting should normally be chaired by UNHCR. Other agencies should be encouraged
to give account of their activities. Initially these meetings may need to be
held fortnightly or even weekly, but once a month is a reasonable interval once
the situation starts to come under control.
7. It may be useful to prepare for briefing meetings by prior
discussions with other participating agencies to ensure that there is agreement
on the issues and on information such as population figures.
8. If a question cannot be answered immediately, arrangements to
follow up on an individual basis with the questioner should be made.
9. These briefing meetings will be important for fund-raising
purposes. Representatives of donor governments will form part of the diplomatic
corps and will therefore be involved in the meetings. Additional smaller
briefing meetings may be appropriate, to deal with particular concerns of a
donor, or to respond to a donor mission, or in respect of major protection
issues which might require smaller, more discreet, briefings.
10. A useful complementary measure, which might eventually
substitute for the diplomatic and other briefings, is a weekly or monthly
written report prepared by UNHCR. The standard internal emergency situation
report, or sitrep, could be used as the basis for this report (the format for
this is suggested in Annex 3 of chapter 8 on implementing arrangements). If the
sitrep is to be used in this way the parts which must not be made public should
be clearly marked. Other United Nations bodies directly involved should
contribute an account of their work. Such situation reports should be given wide
distribution in the operations area and to focal points at Headquarters.
11. Implementation of these briefing arrangements will require
valuable time and effort. Clearly the priority is to deliver the emergency
assistance needed by refugees. However, if those interested do not have a
regular source of information on the progress of the operation, UNHCR staff may
end up spending even more time on individual
briefings.
Relations with the Media
Introduction
12. The media has traditionally been an ally of UNHCR and other
humanitarian agencies working in difficult conditions. The media, especially
locally based correspondents, can also be a useful source of information. There
may be considerable media interest in an emergency and perceptions of how the
international community in general, and UNHCR in particular, is responding will
be set in the early days. This has important implications for support for UNHCR.
It takes time to correct an unfavourable first impression, and media interest
may have shifted elsewhere before this happens.
The best way to have positive media coverage and support is
to run the most effective emergency operation possible in the circumstances.
Expertise in relations with the media can never substitute for good
performance.
13. Television, radio and newspapers operate on tight deadlines
and need factual stories on the emergency, with some background information.
Magazines and some radio and television programs cover stories in depth and have
more time available for research and subsequent re-checking. Television news
channels (such as CNN, BBC World and Sky News), and wire services (for example
AFP, AP, Reuters), produce bulletin-type news stories, have very short
deadlines, and are likely to be the major source for world-wide coverage of the
emergency.
14. Given the logistical difficulties of some emergencies,
journalists are likely to approach humanitarian agencies with requests for help
in moving around. Whenever possible, and taking into account the operational
priorities and the sensitivity of some situations, journalists, both national
and international, should be assisted in getting to the story.
General Guidelines for Relations with the Media
15. The first decision to make concerns who should handle
relations with the media. The media prefer information directly from those
responsible, which can be very time-consuming. It is therefore recommended that
a Public Information Officer be a member of the UNHCR field team from the start.
16. The Public Information Officer must have full and immediate
access to information concerning developments in the operation and UNHCR
policies and reactions. He/she needs to be updated by the most senior UNHCR
Officer in the operation as often as necessary, at least once per day in a major
emergency. The Public Information Officer should then be responsible for all
aspects of relations with the media. Where there is no UNHCR Public Information
Officer, good contacts with the press officers of other organizations will be
helpful for general advice, and for organizing joint news conferences.
17. In emergencies the media will probably go to the location of
the refugees, often unannounced, and expect a briefing from UNHCR field officers
on the spot. The briefing given should be limited to facts and practical
intentions. See below for tips for interviews.
18. When intense press interest in a particular event can be
predicted, there is much to be said for preparing a short and simple statement,
distributing it to the enquirers, and avoiding further comment. Close internal
coordination with field staff is essential, particularly if the interest relates
to an event occurring in a location where UNHCR has field staff. Sending the
statement to Headquarters is essential as questions are likely to be raised in
Geneva.
19. Newspaper editors will generally print a factual correction,
and will often give space in opinion or correspondence columns for UNHCR to
comment on errors of interpretation of UNHCR's role and policy. It is more
difficult to correct a factual error made on television or radio. However, when
trying to made corrections, these should be corrections of fact not
interpretation.
UNHCR should be careful to avoid public polemical debate.
Locally-based Media
20. The national media will be very important in determining
local attitudes to the refugees, and may also give an early indication of
sensitive issues and even government policy. The government may be as concerned
by national coverage as by foreign coverage. Local foreign-language newspapers
may be less important, except indirectly as a result of their effect on the
diplomatic community or foreign press corps.
21. Field offices should monitor the local media, including the
radio and television, which may play a much greater role in influencing public
opinion than newspapers. Good relations should be developed with local
correspondents covering the emergency. However, exercise considerable discretion
until there is practical experience of the outcome of interviews. Language
barriers are often a source of misunderstanding, particularly on the telephone
and a locally recruited Public Information Assistant can be very helpful in this
regard.
22. It will probably be useful to make early contact with the
news editors of the main national (and any local foreign language) radio, and
television stations and newspapers to explain UNHCR's role. Stress that every
priority is being given to the needs of the emergency and give a contact
reference, should further information be required.
Information Sharing with the Government
23. The government may be sensitive to coverage of the refugees,
and early contact should be established with the official press office or
information service. General statements or press releases should be shared with
the government information services and the department handling refugees and
UNHCR. Statements relating to joint government-UNHCR actions may have to be
cleared with the government first.
Field/Headquarters Information Sharing
24. A regular and swift exchange of information is essential.
Many questions on the operation will be asked directly in Geneva and New York.
There is a UN press briefing in Geneva every Tuesday and Friday morning, where
UNHCR participates, and a weekday press briefing at noon in New York by the
spokesperson of the Secretary-General. In addition, UNHCR calls special news
conferences whenever necessary.
25. The Public Information Section at Headquarters must have
access to up-to-date information. The Field should therefore:
Keep media interest in mind
when reporting to Headquarters (for example in sit reps);
Provide information (in
sitreps or separately) on matters likely to be of specific press
interest;
Send reviews of local media
coverage to Headquarters.
26. In addition, if the Field has given an interview with a
major foreign newspaper or network, or if a foreign correspondent has been
aggressive or appeared unsatisfied with answers, the Public Information Section
at Headquarters should be forewarned.
27. Similarly, the Field must be kept regularly informed by the
Public Information Section at Headquarters of international media coverage.
Important international media reports (including those based on briefings given
in the field) may not be available in the field.
Press who contact Headquarters before going to the field
should be clearly briefed that only limited attention and logistical support can
be devoted to them by the field offices during the emergency phase.
Tips for Interviews
28. Reporters generally respect the ground rules for an
interview, provided these are clearly established in advance. The interviewer
and interviewee should agree on type of attribution and how the interviewee will
be quoted: for example: by name, "a UNHCR spokesman", "UN sources",
"humanitarian worker", "sources in the international community", etc. An
interview may need to mix full attribution for the facts, and no attribution for
information on political considerations and constraints. Alternatively an
interview can be fully attributed and may often be tape recorded. An interview
can also be for background information, and in this case what is said by the
interviewee is not attributed directly.
29. Radio and television interviews can provide good coverage
for UNHCR's aims. They are, by definition, for full attribution. If this is not
advisable because of particular sensitivities, avoid such interviews. Bear in
mind that interviews on radio and television can be edited.
30. In all interviews and comments to the media, when in doubt
err on the side of discretion. Considerable experience and self-discipline is
needed to limit remarks to what was previously planned. Having agreed to give an
interview or answer questions, showing hostility or irritation will nearly
always be counter-productive, no matter how unreasonable or loaded the questions
are.
31. UNHCR's work is difficult and mistakes will inevitably be
made, but do not try to hide problems and difficulties.
Though it is important to be discreet, honesty and clarity
are the best policy.
Most journalists understand these problems and respect efforts
in what they know are very difficult conditions. In fact, it is almost always
best to talk about problems before the media find out about them on their own -
and they usually do. Finally, if mistakes are made, admit them and try to learn
from them.
32. When a complete answer to a question is given and a silence
ensues, leave it silent. There is no law stating that one has to say more than
one wants or intends to say. It is better to pause to construct a response than
to ramble. Do not suggest follow-up questions, unless it is in order to
disseminate important information.
33. Do not ask for a story to be killed or suppressed. Attempts
at censorship will backfire and are likely to generate two immediate
consequences; stepped up investigation of the matter to be suppressed; and an
unfavourable story on the attempts to suppress it.
34. When in a press conference and especially with the
electronic media, state the most important point at the beginning. In subsequent
answers and statements, refer again to the most important point. When dealing
with radio and television, keep answers short; television and radio put severe
restrictions on how much information can be used and long drawn-out explanations
and answers tend not to be used and the main point not covered.
35. Give direct answers to direct questions. If the facts are
not known, say so, and offer to get back to the reporter with the information.
36. Sensitive political or policy questions should be referred
to the main UNHCR field office. Responses to general questions about the
situation should be made with UNHCR's mandate and goals in mind.
37. Take the initiative/control. Avoid answering speculative
"what if" questions.
Be prepared to take the lead and direct the interview into
positive areas of information about the operation.
38. Key things to remember for all interviews are:
BE YOURSELF. While
journalists are always on the lookout for a good story, they are not out to make
your life miserable. So relax and be friendly. Look at the interviewer. Avoid
nervous gestures and mannerisms. Keep your answers short and
simple;
BE POSITIVE. Do not criticize
colleagues or other UN organizations and NGOs. We are all in the same
boat;
BE CONVERSATIONAL. When you
talk to journalists, keep it simple and clear. Do not use the type of language
found in many UNHCR internal documents. In everyday conversation, ordinary
people don't use terms like "modalities", "durable solutions," "inter alia"
"specific international protection mandate," "NGO," and "implementing partner."
Use examples that will make the information comprehensible to your
audience;
BE CONCISE. A 10-minute
interview may end up being seconds on the air, or three lines in the newspaper.
It is essential to crystallize your thoughts in a few quotable
sentences;
BE IDENTIFIABLE WITH UNHCR.
If you are being interviewed for television, or if a photograph will accompany
the report, try to get a UNHCR logo in the background -possibly a flag or on a
vehicle, wear a UNHCR T-shirt or cap.
Guidelines For Appearance On Television
39. Key things to remember for television interviews are:
DO's
Do make and maintain eye
contact with the questioner, not the camera. Do not let your eyes
wander;
DO wear suitable
subdued-coloured clothes. Normal working clothes for field conditions are fine -
ties and suits are not appropriate;
DO check your appearance
before going in front of the camera, hair, buttons, zips?
DO make short statements,
each holding up on its own;
DO remember to make your most
important points as early as possible;
DO, before you begin, discuss
with the interviewer what line the discussion will take;
DO remember that the
interviewer and audience know less about your subject than you do;
DO remember that any
programme is likely to be edited before use.
DONT's
DON'T smoke;
DON'T wear sunglasses or
jewellery;
DON'T forget that the
smallest mannerisms show up more obviously on television;
DON'T fidget or fiddle with
pens, pencils, lighters, etc.;
DON'T say "I think" too
often, it sounds as though you are uncertain of your subject. Talk about "we" or
"UNHCR" instead.
Visibility of the Operation
40. In addition to working with the media to ensure coverage of
UNHCR operations, emergency managers must pay attention to the visibility of the
operation.
41. Proper identification of staff, vehicles, buildings and
relief materials contributes to improved dialogue with beneficiaries, local
authorities and partners.
In conflict zones, visible markings can be an important
security measure for staff and property.
42. Staff should be visible and identifiable as UNHCR personnel.
Visibility items for staff, vehicles and buildings are available from
Headquarters (see Catalogue of Emergency Response Resources, Appendix 1). A
visible UNHCR will help to show the beneficiaries and the outside world that
UNHCR is present, active and delivering services to the
refugees.
Funding and Donor Relations
Emergency Fund
43. The availability of funds is a prerequisite for any UNHCR
emergency action. The initial funding in an emergency for project and operations
delivery and administrative support expenditure is likely to be allocated from
UNHCR's Emergency Fund. Under the terms of UNHCR's Financial Rules, the
Emergency Fund is established to provide "financial assistance to refugees and
displaced persons in emergency situations for which there is no provision in the
programmes approved by the Executive Committee", and to meet additional
administrative expenditures resulting from those emergencies. The High
Commissioner may allocate from the Emergency Fund up to US$25 million annually,
provided that the amount made available for any one single emergency does not
exceed US$8 million in any one year and that the Fund shall be maintained at not
less than US$8 million. Further details are provided in Chapter 4 of the UNHCR
Manual and in Appendix 1, Catalogue of Emergency Response Resources.
Central Emergency Revolving Fund
44. The Central Emergency Revolving Fund of the UN Office for
the Coordination of Humanitarian Affairs was established to provide funds within
the UN system to respond rapidly to emergencies. The fund has a target level of
US$50 million and is financed from voluntary contributions. It is used for cash
advances to UN operational organizations and entities. In principle these
advances are to be reimbursed as a first charge against income subsequently
received, usually as a result of consolidated appeals. Further details are
provided in the Catalogue of Emergency Response Resources (Appendix 1).
Using Existing Funds
45. If an emergency develops in an existing operation, immediate
funds may be available from those already foreseen for that operation or, if
appropriate, from the Programme Reserve. Depending on the scale of further
needs, and also on the time of year when the emergency occurs, further funding
could either be proposed to the Executive Committee as a new current year
project or as a new project for the coming year, or could be the subject of a
special appeal.
Communicating Needs to Donors
46. Operational needs, progress and constraints must be clearly
communicated to donors. A donor relations strategy should be established in the
first days of an emergency and maintained for its duration.
47. Donor relations should be maintained through:
i. Briefing meetings and regular contact at field
level between UNHCR staff and donor representatives. Regular briefing meetings
(see paragraphs 3 to 11 above) with donors should aim to keep them up to date on
actions being taken, protection issues, and any constraints;
ii. Regular contact and follow-up at Headquarters
level;
iii. Involving donor representatives in missions to
see refugee sites and other points at which assistance is
delivered;
iv. Indirect communication of operational needs
through UNHCR visibility in the media.
48. It is important to highlight UNHCR's protection and
coordinating role when communicating with donors. Coordination must be a reality
on the ground with UNHCR taking, and being seen to take, an appropriate
leadership role.
49.
Only request funding for operations and budgets which have
been formally approved.
There are no exceptions to this. This is necessary to ensure
funding is targeted where it is most needed, to provide consistency in
operational priorities and objectives, and in communicating these priorities to
donors. Several sections in UNHCR brief donors and it is important for
credibility that the briefings be similar. In case of doubts regarding what
should be presented to donors for funding, contact the Donor Relations and
Resource Mobilization Service at Headquarters for advice.
50. Steer donors towards funding those activities or areas of
the operation that are most in need of funding. When appropriate, promote
regional funding. Do not forget that the emergency may have a regional
dimension. Include this and other elements of the UNHCR operation in the
briefing and be prepared to discuss funding for all aspects of the operation
with donors.
51. Contributions tightly earmarked to one aspect of the
operation impede flexibility. Sometimes substantial contributions are strictly
earmarked and there is little scope for amending budgets once they are approved.
Donors should be encouraged to make unearmarked contributions
whenever possible.
However, if donors do want to earmark a contribution to a
specific part of the operation, advise them to check with the Donor Relations
and Resource Mobilization Service at Headquarters to ensure that this portion of
the operation has not been funded already, or offered for funding, to another
donor.
52. Particularly in emergencies, donors may offer to supply
commodities or services rather than make a cash contribution. To a large extent
it will be up the Field to decide on the suitability of such contributions. The
offer should be immediately reported to the Donor Relations and Resource
Mobilization Service at Headquarters, and the donor requested to follow up with
Headquarters. In kind contributions need to be coordinated by Headquarters to
avoid duplication of similar contributions by different donors, and to avoid
confusion over the amount of cash versus total contribution1.
Preparation of an Emergency Appeal
53. The primary document for communicating with donors is the
emergency appeal. It is the appeal which needs to be brought to the donors'
attention at briefings, and it is the activities in the appeal against which
progress should be reported.
54. The emergency appeal is developed by both the Field and
Headquarters.
Information contained in the appeal about operational needs
to be generated at the point of delivery - i.e. the field - so appeals written
primarily in the field are the most effective in raising funds.
Headquarters is responsible for issuing the appeal: it should
have all the information necessary from the Field as soon as possible to enable
it to approve budgets and to issue the appeal at the earliest opportunity.
55. The government should be consulted in the development of the
appeal. The appeal should also take into account the results of the initial
assessment, and the budget should cover all foreseen expenditures.
56. If the situation changes dramatically during the emergency,
and the current appeal becomes inappropriate, then the Field should review
operational objectives and agree the new direction with Headquarters before the
revised operation is presented to donors.
57. The appeal and the way the operation is funded can be a
potential source of confusion when the government is UNHCR's operational
partner. The total target can be misunderstood as being entirely intended for
expenditure in the country, whereas the budget will, of course, cover all
UNHCR's direct expenditure, such as for any international procurement and field
and Headquarters operational delivery and administrative support, including
protection. Clarity on this point from the start, for example in any local press
release or comment, can avoid embarrassment later.
1Further information on contributions
in kind can be found in Procedures for Handling Contributions In Kind,
IOM/65/96 - FOM/74/96, UNHCR, November 1996. Budgetary procedures for dealing
with contributions in kind are discussed in chapter 8 on implementing
arrangements.
Communication Between the Field and Headquarters
58. Headquarters and the Field need to work together closely on
funding and donor relations issues. The focal point for this at Headquarters is
the Donor Relations and Resource Mobilization Service. The Private Sector Fund
Raising Unit at Headquarters may also issue appeals to the general public or
aimed at individual or corporate donors. 59. Donor Relations and Resource
Mobilization Service at Headquarters should:
Advise how to deal with a
particular donor;
Provide latest information on
funding for the operation;
Follow up with donor capitals
on potential contributions discussed in the field;
Produce and distribute
appeals (with the active participation of the Field);
Prepare specific submissions
to donor funding agencies (with the active participation of the
Field);
Submit detailed reports to
the donors.
60. The Field should:
Produce the basic operation
information and information for the appeals;
Inform Headquarters when a
donor has indicated an interest in contributing funds, whether to the appeal, to
a particular operation, to earmarked activities, or as a contributions in kind,
and should also ask the donor to follow up through the normal channels at
Headquarters;
Provide information to the
donors about the current situation and UNHCR's plans. When deciding on a
contribution, donors need relevant information. Some information will be in the
emergency appeal and given at briefings, but some donors require more detailed
information. Timely and detailed responses will ensure the most rapid
funding;
Provide reports and
information to Headquarters to assist it in submitting reports to donors. To
ensure continuity of funding it is essential that the required information be
provided from the Field without delay.
Reporting to Donors and Special Requirements
61. A variety of reports are required by donors in order to
account for their contributions and to release additional funds. Bear in mind
that donor reporting cycles do not necessarily correspond to UNHCR's reporting
and operation cycles.
62. Some major donors to UNHCR's emergency operation require
particularly detailed reporting at both financial and narrative level in a
unique format with strict deadlines. These special reports are prepared by the
Donor Relations and Resource Mobilization Service at Headquarters on the basis
of information from the Field. Some donors also monitor implementation directly
through their local representatives.
63. A number of donors attach great importance to the visibility
of their financial support, through the marking of assistance material and other
means.
Formal Written Communications
64. When establishing a new UNHCR presence in a country, there
is likely to be a need for a number of formal written communications to
government or local authorities. The purpose of this section is to give brief
guidance on the preparation of formal letters and "notes verbales" (formal notes
written in the third person - see sample in Annex 2).
65. Formal letters are used for communications to ministers,
ambassadors and senior officials (for example, the Director-General of a
government department) on important matters.
66. Note the following points for written correspondence with
ambassadors, ministers and other dignitaries:
i. The proper opening salutation is: "Sir" or
"Madam", with "His/Her Excellency" used, if appropriate, only in the address.
However, it may be local practice to begin and end with "Your Excellency". When
in doubt check with UNDP or use "Sir". His/Her Excellency precedes all other
titles and ranks (e.g. Her Excellency Dr. X Y; His Excellency General A B,
Minister of the Interior);
ii. The expression "I have the honour ..." is
usually used only in the opening sentence;
iii. "You" can normally be used in the text.
However, in a long text it may be courteous from time to time to interject the
more formal address (e.g. "I should be grateful if you, Sir, [or Your
Excellency] would confirm that this is also the understanding of your
Government");
iv. Formal letters end with "Accept, Sir/Madam/Your
Excellency, the assurances of my highest consideration".
67. A note verbale is a formal note written in the third person.
Notes verbales may be addressed to a Minister for Foreign Affairs or a Ministry
of Foreign Affairs, an ambassador or an embassy. Notes verbales are always used
in replying to an incoming note verbale. It is written from person to person
(e.g. Representative to Minister) or office to office (e.g. Branch Office to
Ministry). The following points should be noted:
i. Typical uses of notes verbales include the
exchange of information between UNHCR and governments, embassies or permanent
missions. The note verbale is not normally used to communicate with other United
Nations agencies and is never used to address NGOs or the public. The note
begins either, "The Special Envoy/Representative of the United Nations High
Commissioner for Refugees in (country) presents his/her compliments to ... and
has the honour to ..." or "the Branch Office of the United Nations High
Commissioner for Refugees in (country) presents its compliments to ... and has
the honour to ...";
ii. Titles must be given in full, at least in the
opening and closing paragraphs. Be sure to use the full correct designation of
the country (Kingdom of ..., Republic of ..., Democratic Republic of...,
etc.)2;
iii. The complimentary closing of a note verbale is
always the same: "The (Representative/Special Envoy) of the United Nations High
Commissioner for Refugees in (country) avails him/herself of this opportunity to
express (renew) to ... the assurances of his/her highest consideration", or, as
appropriate, "The Branch Office ..." etc.;
iv. The note should bear no signature. The Office
stamp should be placed over the typewritten date and the officer responsible for
its dispatch should sign his/her initials within the stamp. The Representative
or Special Envoy and an alternate may be required to register their initials or
even signatures with the protocol department of the foreign
ministry;
v. The place and date should appear on the bottom
right-hand side of the last page. The address does not appear on a note
verbale;
vi. The text of the note verbale should be single
spaced with double spacing between paragraphs.
68. Both formal letters and notes verbales may bear file
references, as brief as possible, on the top left of the first page.
69. Notes verbales are always answered by notes verbales, and
formal letters by formal letters. Apart from the restrictions on the use of
notes verbales given above, there are no completely clear-cut rules about which
to employ when UNHCR is initiating the communication. In general terms, the note
verbale conveys brief information and is the normal form for routine exchanges
with the protocol department, for example, when seeking customs clearance for
relief supplies or advising of the arrival of international staff. References to
important meetings with senior officials and major issues, particularly those
already discussed, are better treated in a formal letter. A formal letter may
also reach the action officer more quickly than a note.
70. If it is necessary to set out UNHCR's position on a specific
subject (policy, action taken, intentions, etc.), this may be done in the form
of an aide-m�moire written in the third person. An aide-m�moire has no addressee
and is simply headed Aide-M�moire, with the title below. A similar purpose is
served by a "Note by the Office of the United Nations High Commissioner for
Refugees", a minor difference being that this description goes below the title.
An aide-m�moire would normally be used to convey information to a government
ministry or department, an embassy or the diplomatic corps. For a less formal or
wider distribution, the "Note by ..." form may be appropriate.
71. All four types of communication should be presented on UNHCR
letterhead stationery.
2The following document is a useful
guide: Terminology, Country Names, United Nations Bulletin No. 347
(STICSI SER.F/347/Rev.
1).
Annexes
Annex 1
MEMBER STATES OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE OF THE
HIGH COMMISSIONER'S PROGRAMME As of November 1998
Algeria
Madagascar
Argentina
Morocco
Australia
Namibia
Austria
Netherlands
Bangladesh
Nicaragua
Belgium
Nigeria
Brazil
Norway
Canada
Pakistan
China
Philippines
Colombia
Poland
Democratic Republic
Russian Federation
of the Congo
Somalia
Denmark
South Africa
Ethiopia Finland
Spain Sudan
France
Sweden
Germany
Switzerland
Greece
Thailand
Holy See
Tunisia
Hungary
Turkey
India
Uganda
Iran (Islamic Republic of)
United Kingdom
Ireland
United Republic
Israel
of Tanzania
Italy
United States of America
Japan
Venezuela
Lebanon
Yugoslavia
Lesotho
Annex 2 - Example of a Note Verbale
NATIONS UNIES - HAUT COMMISSARIAT POUR LES REFUGIES
UNITED NATIONS - HIGH COMMISSIONER FOR REFUGEES
Note Verbale
The United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees (UNHCR) Branch
Office for [Ruritania] presents its compliments to the Ministry of
Foreign Affairs of ___________________ and has the honour to request
authorization to import [twoToyota land-cruisers]. It requests
furthermore that the usual advice be sent to the appropriate authorities for
exemption of payment of import duty, excise duty, registration and licensing
fees for [these vehicles]. Details of (the vehicles) are as follows:
1. Bill of lading number:
TAN-P-C 16-11/25-03
2. Engine numbers of vehicles:
B-L-C 741-1334
B-L-C 24-04-01
The Office of the United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees
avails itself of this opportunity to renew to the Ministry of Foreign Affairs
[of Ruritania] the assurances of its highest consideration.
(stamp)
[nameof place of UNHCR office in Ruritania],
[date]
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
10. Community Services and Education
(introduction...)
Overview
Introduction
Organizing Community Services
Human Resources
Family Tracing and Reunification
Groups at Risk and Vulnerable Groups
Education
Key References
Annexes
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
10. Community Services and Education
Figure
Overview
Situation
The trauma of becoming a refugee can be very great. Normal
structures which have regulated community well-being and also cared for groups
at risk such as older persons, women, children and the disabled, have broken
down and need rebuilding. Social and psychological problems are created or
exacerbated and appropriate measures for resolving these problems are essential.
Objectives
To provide for the welfare of the whole refugee group and to
ensure that the most vulnerable refugees have equal access to basic goods and
services.
To assist the re-establishment and development of refugee
community structures which can be used in the management of the assistance
programme and which can also minimize longer-term problems of dependency.
To ensure that the assistance provided is appropriate for the
refugees.
Principles of Response
· Refugee community
participation (including both men and women) should be promoted in all sectors,
by building on the community's own resources as much as possible and encouraging
individual, family and group self-reliance;
· Special services
for the vulnerable should, as far as possible, be provided by the refugee
community itself;
· Services should be
decentralised but within a structured plan, and must reach those in
need;
· Community services
should be developed in co-ordination with and in support of the priority life
support sectors and should be an essential component of the overall assistance
operation.
Action
· Assess community
problems, needs and resources. Help refugees to identify and establish the
services which will meet their needs in all sectors;
· Ensure prompt
identification of and support to the most vulnerable;
· Develop
appropriate community management structures including mechanisms to ensure
participation of women in decision-making and ensure that all groups within the
population are appropriately represented. Identify community workers who can
help the vulnerable, spread relevant information and support other
sectors;
· Take immediate
action to prevent family break-up and reunite families as soon as
possible.
· Identify and
provide care for all isolated vulnerable individuals, especially unaccompanied
minors. Spontaneous groupings, if already bonded, should be kept
together;
· Establish
communication links with the refugees to ensure good two-way communication
between the refugees and those assisting them;
· Build the capacity
of the community by identifying training needs and by helping to organize
practical and hands-on training in community
work.
Introduction
1. The shock of having to leave home and the circumstances of
life as a refugee, particularly in the early stages of an emergency, create
major emotional and social problems and exacerbate existing problems in the
community. The trauma of flight and its aftermath may leave the refugees
confused, frightened, lonely and insecure, facing an unknown future in a
strange, sometimes hostile, environment. Separation from or loss of other family
members as well as lack of community support are common in refugee emergencies,
and causes emotional stress and problems for individuals and their community.
2. The most important action that can be taken to help reduce
the shock and stress for the community is to provide security, stability and
protection. In part this can be done materially, and in part by ensuring
protection and involving the refuges from the start in the organization of all
aspects of their new lives, and in particular the search for durable solutions.
Community services are a vital bridge between the refugee and the goods and
services of the new settlement. Without help in adjusting to this new
environment, the sense of loss and isolation can deepen even in circumstances of
relative material well-being.
3. It is important to involve the refugees in the provision of
assistance and allow the community to share the responsibility of caring for
itself and its vulnerable members. This minimizes dependency and encourages
self-reliance.
The approach used during the emergency period will determine
the whole pattern of behavioural response of refugees towards external
assistance.
4. In every emergency, there will be refugee groups at risk with
psychological or social problems that require particular attention. The most
vulnerable are those with no family support who are dependent on external
assistance for their daily survival. This dependence may be because of their
age; their physical condition; their psychological condition; or socio-economic
problems. The social disruption of emergencies causes these problems to be both
aggravated and overlooked - but in stable non-emergency situations, the
community itself meets many of the needs of groups at risk. Thus services to
meet these needs are best given in a community-based
programme.
Organizing Community Services
· Plan and implement
the community services programme with the refugees;
· Use a phased
approach to implement a community services programme;
· Assess the needs
by screening the whole community; the most vulnerable rarely come forward
themselves;
· Co-ordinate
closely with other sectors.
Introduction
5. The main objectives of community services should be to
identify and assist those persons whose basic needs are not being adequately met
and to ensure the general welfare of all refugees. A community services
programme should mobilize appropriate community resources, with outside help as
necessary, to screen the refugee population for those facing urgent problems and
see these immediate needs are met. Community services can then proceed to
strengthen self-reliance and develop community activities.
6. A three-phased approach has been developed to implement the
community services programme:
Phase 1
assessment, action plan, guidelines;
Phase 2
foundation of community services programme;
Phase 3
building up community service:
To measure performance in each of these phases (which are not
mutually exclusive), a community service checklist can be used (see Annex 1).
7. Experience suggests that even in an emergency many needs can
best be met by resources that exist within the community. Every community has
its own beliefs, social values, customs, traditions and preferences for how
problems should be resolved.
A community services programme should seek to enhance and
improve existing and positive coping mechanisms.
Community problems are best solved using an integrated,
inter-disciplinary approach, working with other sectors. Community services
staff should therefore work as part of the UNHCR team, contributing to
assessment, planning, programming and monitoring activities of other sectors.
8. Community services programmes generally require a
decentralised structure, allowing refugee community workers to work with the
same refugees, getting to know and be known by them. An active community
services team is likely to be a major referral unit, helping to direct refugees
to available resources and identifying areas of need where other services
(health, nutrition, etc.) may be targeted.
Assessment and Action Plan
9. A careful initial assessment will determine the most pressing
social problems, and the plan of action. This assessment should cover the whole
community, with particular attention to identifying refugees with special needs
who may not come forward themselves. The assessment and resulting plan should
take into account demographic and cultural information regarding the refugee
population, as well as the policies and resources in the country of asylum.
Another priority in drawing up the community services programme is to identify
gaps in the general assistance programme.
10. The outcome of the assessment will determine the community
services action plan, including priorities of actions to be taken, the role of
the various partners, and the need for special programmes, such as family
reunification or assistance to victims of violence (see key references for
guidelines on these topics).
11. Before establishing the community services team (see the
section on Human Resources below), it will be necessary to identify appropriate
local, national and international partners, including NGOs, governments, local
and refugee community leaders. Involving local communities and government will
help raise refugees' sensitivity to the needs and culture of the local
population, and will also facilitate local acceptance of refugees, thus
preventing tension.
Foundation of Community Services Programme
12. It is important to identify and promote refugee
self-management groups either within mainstream structures or if more culturally
appropriate, in separate groups. These should include women and youth. Community
support for the vulnerable must be encouraged. Refugee volunteers can help
identify vulnerable refugees and ensure their access to general services.
13. To ensure that all refugees, especially the most vulnerable,
have access to services:
i. Direct all refugees to appropriate health or
nutrition services;
ii. Organize immediate tracing of lost children and
registration of these and other vulnerable individuals and provide assistance to
all those alone and unable to care for themselves;
iii. Address the problems of survivors of abuse or
violence.
14. In order to minimize long term dependency, and ensure the
services are appropriate for the whole refugee group, community services will
promote refugee participation in all sectors, and build the refugee community's
problem solving capacity. Community services should also raise awareness and
mobilize refugees on sanitation and environment issues and respect for local
community resources.
Building up Community Services
15. Once the community services programme has been established,
community services are built up by: building the capacity of implementing
partners; co-ordinating community outreach and community training activities;
establishing information networks; running a training programme for community
workers; setting up education programmes and running the tracing and special
programmes. General community activities, for example, cultural events and
recreation, will be important for the creation of a greater sense of normality
and security, and the reduction of stress, as well as fostering the refugees'
sense of
community.
Human Resources
· The refugees
themselves should play the central role;
· Continuity of
personnel is very important;
· Professional
impartial conduct and confidentiality must be maintained;
· Teamwork with
other sectors is essential.
Introduction
16. Refugees trained as community workers should be the backbone
of the community services programme. Outsiders will be severely limited by
language barriers and lack of familiarity with social values and customs.
Refugee community workers will be responsible for assisting groups and
individuals through outreach work, and referring individuals to appropriate
services where necessary. In some cultures, traditional healers are especially
skilled at resolving psychological problems.
17. Training refugee community workers is a priority. Training
should draw on refugees' own knowledge of their community, and make use of
outside expertise (from within the host country if possible). Training should
cover social work and community development, with inputs from other disciplines
such as public health, nutrition, sanitation, protection, water, shelter.
18. Refugee community workers should be drawn from the various
groups within the refugees, and a particular effort may be needed to ensure that
a sufficient number are women. There should be a proper balance between workers
from different social and ethnic groups.
19. The number of such workers required will depend greatly on
the community's own response mechanisms, and the geographical distance between
site locations, population size and complexities of the situation. However, one
worker per 1,000 refugees is usually appropriate. In addition, there should be
community workers in the health centres, as there is a tendency for people with
special needs to be directed to these even when the problem may not be medical.
20. Staff from outside the refugee community will be required to
co-ordinate community services, manage training programmes and deal with
problems beyond the resources of the refugees. This outside assistance is likely
to involve both international and national personnel. The role of international
personnel may be limited principally to overall co-ordination, guidance,
support, training and liaison with the authorities and other organizations
concerned.
Familiarity with social values and customs is essential.
21. National personnel will play an important role because of
their cultural knowledge and understanding of the refugees. Additional
specialist staff may be needed to focus on specific issues. A memorandum of
understanding exists between UNHCR and Radda Barnen (Sweden) under which
specialized community services staff can be quickly de ployed to emergencies
(see Appendix 1, Catalogue of Emergency Response Resources, for details).
Continuity of personnel is necessary for effective community
services because of the fundamental part played in these services by human
contact and trust.
22. Interpreters are a vital link of communication between UNHCR
and the refugee community as they bridge the gap created by cultural, national,
linguistic and racial differences. Interpreters are usually selected from the
refugee or local community and should include an adequate proportion of women.
Refugee interpreters have the benefit of knowing and being committed to helping
their community; however they are likely to be placed in a difficult position as
intermediary between refugees and UNHCR and expected to be answerable to both.
Therefore, if possible, refugee interpreters should not be used in sensitive
situations such as status determination interviews.
Working as a Team
23. Community services should support, and have strong links
with, other sectors. For example:
Protection: Community services and protection have
complementary roles in dealing with refugee problems on a day-to-day basis and
working with refugee groups at risk. There will be areas of overlapping concern,
for example, in training, promotional and advocacy activities at the community
level; programmes for unaccompanied minors such as tracing, family reunification
and foster care; and in developing preventive mechanisms and community-based
solutions to deal with harassment of minority groups and sexual violence;
Health services: Many problems have both a medical and
social component. Refugees might not make use of health services because they
are too weak or infirm, too traumatized or just unfamiliar with the health
service. Women may be particularly constrained if there are insufficient female
health staff. On the other hand, problems of all kinds may be referred to health
centres - so community outreach workers should be located in the health centre.
Community networks can be used to promote basic health messages in cleanliness,
sanitation, breast feeding etc.;
Site planning and construction: Community services can
assist in the identification of social and cultural determinants of shelter
planning, promote the involvement of all the community, including women, help
establish refugee committees to oversee construction, and ensure that the
community will take responsibility for providing shelter for its more vulnerable
members in locations where they can be protected and assisted;
Environment: Community services should convey
environmental messages such as the need to preserve trees and vegetation during
emergencies (see chapter 12 on site planning). Community services should also
promote simple, but crucial, energy saving techniques such as covering pots with
lids during cooking, drying, chopping and splitting firewood before burning, and
soaking beans and grains to reduce cooking time. Community services staff should
work closely with environment specialists in areas such as forestry and domestic
energy, to ensure these activities take into account the concerns and priorities
of the local and refugee community. Without community participation,
environmental programmes might not achieve their objectives;
Logistics: Community services should also work with
logistics officers to ensure that vulnerable groups and groups at risk have
equitable access to all
commodities.
Family Tracing and Reunification
· Tracing and
reunion of separated family members must be organized as quickly as
possible;
· Refugees must be
able to send and receive mail.
24. Procedures for the reunion of refugee family members
separated during flight or within the country of asylum should be agreed with
the authorities and implemented as soon as practicable. Tracing programmes
should be set up and co-ordinated in the country of asylum, country of origin
and regionally. At camp or local level, simple and effective tracing mechanisms
include posting lists of names with photographs on the community notice boards
in different locations, using the radio, or even making announcements by
megaphone. The tracing arrangements must be widely promulgated; a central
contact point in each site is likely to be needed. Tracing is a delicate task,
and has to be organized by people who have the necessary experience and skills.
A suitably experienced agency may be needed to implement these activities.
Tracing requires the involvement of the refugees themselves, who will play a key
role. The local population and authorities can also play an important role.
Confidentiality of information and protection of individuals is also essential.
25. Consider the causes of separation when establishing tracing
systems. Separation may have been caused by large scale population movements but
may also have been due to other factors such as children opting to leave their
families, or placement of persons outside their family for survival purposes.
Outsiders, often relief workers, may have removed a child from an apparently
dangerous situation, without informing the family and without proper
documentation.
26. The following actions should be taken:
Organize tracing and reunion
of separated family members as quickly as possible, giving first priority to
unaccompanied minors and other extremely vulnerable individuals;
Combine a variety of systems:
on the spot tracing, use of community mechanisms and formalized tracing at a
regional level;
Coordinate activities with
agencies having expertise, e.g. the ICRC. Note that ICRC procedures, using the
national Red Cross or Red Crescent societies, can be lengthy but may be the most
appropriate for difficult cases;
Ensure regional
standardization of registration systems;
Set-up a communication
network in the community including a mailing system. A properly organized
exchange of news (Red Cross messages) may considerably diminish the workload of
a tracing service and accelerate the reunion of family members. Refugees have
the right to send and receive
mail.
Groups at Risk and Vulnerable Groups
· Develop and
strengthen community-based support for vulnerable groups wherever
possible;
· Ensure that
children are cared for in ways that meet both their physical and emotional
needs; individual care of unaccompanied children is all-important;
· Ensure that all
groups among the refugees can participate in decision making affecting their
well-being.
Introduction
27. In dealing with vulnerable groups, community based support
is preferred, and only as a last resort should small, special facilities be
established. These should be short-term to shelter vulnerable individuals while
identifying community support mechanisms.
28. Experience shows that in refugee emergencies certain groups
are likely to be more at risk than others. Standard criteria for vulnerability,
and for eligibility for the provision of special assistance should be developed
in conjunction with refugees. Some groups may be excluded from decisions
directly affecting their wellbeing, and the particular needs of these groups may
be unintentionally ignored or excluded in programme development. This exclusion
may result in making the group vulnerable. This is often the case with minority
groups. Women, who often make up the majority of the population, can be excluded
in much the same manner.
29. In emergencies vulnerable refugees may need special
transport where the refugee has physical problems which would prevent long
distance movement. This would include older persons, the disabled, women in late
pregnancy, severely malnourished or those in severe psychological distress. If
special transport is needed, the refugee should be accompanied by a responsible
attendant (usually a relative) and a clear reunion point identified to prevent
further vulnerability through separation.
30. When individual casework is necessary, up-to-date records
and confidential individual dossiers should be kept, and a simple periodic
reporting system instituted, focusing on the needs identified and services
provided rather than giving just statistical data. It is important that case
records are transferred with refugees when they are moved. A coordinated
response avoids unnecessary repetition of basic interviewing which is not only a
waste of time but can also be psychologically damaging.
Children (including Adolescents)
31. For the purposes of this Handbook, "children" should be
understood to mean "persons below the age of 18 years" (as defined in the
Convention on the Rights of the Child, 1989), and therefore includes young
children and adolescents.
32. Children make up a large proportion of most refugee
populations. Early interventions during emergencies will help to normalize and
stabilize their situation. Specialized agency expertise may be needed for parts
of a child-focused programme.
33. Birth registration may be a prerequisite for obtaining
nationality, enrolling in school and may be a vital tool for tracing. It can
also be important in preventing military recruitment and other forms of
exploitation. Ensure that the births of all refugee children are registered.
Ideally births should be registered through the same procedure applicable to
nationals. Where this is not possible the authorities should be encouraged to
establish a separate birth registration system for refugee births. If this is
not possible either, organize a temporary attestation system to ensure, at a
minimum, that the date, place of birth and the names and nationalities of both
parents are recorded. The UNHCR Field Office or the Red Cross/Red Crescent
could, for example, issue such an attestation.
34. Different age groups will have different problems, young
children have very different needs from teenagers.
35. UNHCR has an MOU with UNICEF which outlines their respective
responsibilities for children and unaccompanied minors- UNICEF takes the lead in
countries of origin and UNHCR in countries of asylum (see MOU attached as
Appendix two).
36. Take the following action:
Identify and develop
community-based mechanisms to monitor refugee childrens' assistance and
protection needs;
Identify whether the child
population as a whole might have any specific characteristics or needs as a
consequence of the trauma of their flight and life before finding asylum: in
particular, where children have been victims of and/or participants in armed
conflict, or might have particular psychological, physical or social problems as
a consequence;
Identify what current risks
there may be to the child population: for example a risk of on-going military
recruitment, or of sexual exploitation or abuse;
Promote the social role of
adolescents in the community and their responsibility towards others in need,
for example they can serve as community workers. Adolescents will need support,
especially if they have assumed adult roles as heads-of-households. They will
also need access to and education about reproductive health services, and
vocational training;
Coordinate with the health
and nutrition sectors in organizing education campaigns and outreach activities
in community health, nutrition and sanitation, such as promoting breast feeding,
immunization and feeding programmes;
Organize play groups,
recreation activities and emergency education for pre-schoolers and for school
age children including girls and vulnerable children;
Identify resources within and
outside the community which could be used to address the needs of children and
young people (and their families). These community resources should encourage
self-reliance, and work towards preventing domestic violence, sexual abuse, drug
and alcohol abuse and involvement in military activities;
Integrate the needs of
children in all programming activities.
Unaccompanied Minors
37. UNHCR defines an unaccompanied minor as one who is below 18
years of age who has been separated from both parents and for whose care no
person can be found who by law or custom has primary responsibility. Note that
other organizations may have other definitions of unaccompanied minors. In
addition, note that unaccompanied minors are sometimes also called separated
minors.
38. Labelling children as orphans tends to encourage adoptions,
(and in some cases, there may be enormous external pressure for orphanages
and/or third country adoption) rather than focusing on family tracing, foster
placements and increasing community support.
The description "unaccompanied minors", or "separated
minors", should always be used in place of "orphans".
39. Although the government of the country of asylum should take
legal responsibility for these minors, with UNHCR offering advice and
assistance, in practice if government resources are thinly stretched, UNHCR may
take a more pro-active role.
Prevention of Separation
40. Family unity must be preserved as much as possible - take no
action that may prevent family reunion. The failure to protect family unity not
only results in avoidable physical and emotional suffering, but subsequent
efforts to reunite families are costly and difficult, and delays in family
reunification will impede durable solutions. Although children are often
separated from their families while their families are in flight, steps can be
taken to minimize further separations, and to maximize the chances of timely and
successful reunion.
Steps to prevent separation include supporting households at
risk, and ensuring care provided to unaccompanied minors does not become an
incentive for parents to abandon their children to institutionalized care.
41. There is sometimes pressure to rescue minors from dangerous
situations but some child-only evacuations have caused years of separation and
in some cases the breaks have been permanent. The physical dangers may be over
estimated, while the children's psychological need to be with their parents may
be under appreciated.
There should be no evacuations separating children from their
parents or others recognized as primary caretakers (custody) unless essential to
protect life.
42. If an evacuation is essential, the following safeguards
should be observed. Minors should be accompanied by an adult relative, and if
this is not possible, by a qualified care-giver known to the children, such as
their teachers. The minors' identities must be fully documented before
departure. Whenever possible, documentation should travel with the minors, and
caregivers should be waiting at the destination. The evacuation must be
coordinated with the designated lead agency. If the minors are moved across an
international border, written agreements with the government should be secured
in advance in order to ensure family visits and reunions are possible.
43. Continuity of existing care arrangements will help avoid
further disruption and may facilitate reunion. Siblings should be kept together,
as should unrelated children who have been living together and give each other
emotional support.
Assessment, Identification, Registration and
Tracing
44. Make a rapid assessment of the situation of unaccompanied
minors among the refugee population. The first source of information for
identifying unaccompanied minors will be the refugees themselves and the
community leaders. A general registration or census of refugees may provide a
suitable occasion for initial identification without raising expectations before
seeking more detailed information.
45. A general registration or census will also identify those
children not alone, but not with their immediate family, and who thus require
tracing. Give priority to identifying children under five years, girls who may
be subject to sexual abuse and boys who may be recruited into military service.
46. Once identified, unaccompanied minors should be individually
registered as soon as possible (see Annex 2, unaccompanied minor registration
form).
Registration should not raise expectations for special status
and advantage.
The Emergency Kit for Unaccompanied Children provides guidance
and tools for identification, registration, and tracing. This can be ordered
from Headquarters and contains a priority actions handbook, emergency
registration books, cameras, equipment and basic supplies.
47. Ensure that children are issued with separate registration
documents and ration cards and that these documents (including a recent
photograph), always travel with the child. These measures will avoid confusion
if a fostering arrangement breaks down.
48. Unaccompanied minors should be individually assessed and
medically screened. A sympathetic and imaginative approach to interviewing
children is very important and best conducted by carefully trained refugees, if
possible by someone the child already knows and trusts. If an interview has to
take place through an interpreter, the interpreter must be well briefed, with
his or her role limited to direct translation, and must not be allowed to break
personal contact between interviewer and child. Children may react very
differently, depending, for example, on the degree of their trauma, fear and
shyness. The presence of the child's friend(s) at the interview can not only
reassure the child but may also yield important information. Any accompanying
adults or persons who brought the child forward should also be interviewed.
49. As soon as unaccompanied minors are identified, start to
trace their parents or families. Family tracing is not considered exhausted
before a two year investigation has been completed. All claims for reunification
must be verified, as mistakes and false claims sometimes occur.
Careand Protection of Unaccompanied Minors
50. Children separated from their immediate next-of-kin during a
refugee emergency are often cared for by the refugee community, frequently
within an extended family.
It is only where children cannot be cared for by the
community that special measures will be required for their care.
Whenever possible, children should be placed with families, as
institutional placements cannot provide adequately for children's developmental
needs and social and cultural integration into society. Ideally, they should be
cared for by relatives or others from the same ethnic or cultural groups.
51. One of the most important principles in the care of any
child is that relationships must be stable, because of the importance of the
emotional bond developed with the care-giver. An unaccompanied minor must be
placed in a family where bonding can continue until the parent(s) or recognized
first caretaker(s) are found. The child will then need time to reestablish a
bond with his or her parent(s) or original caretaker(s). A period of overlap
with the two families may therefore be necessary, in order to permit the
re-establishment of the relationship with the parents while avoiding an abrupt
severance of the ties with the foster family. Where years have elapsed, the
child's interests may be better served by remaining with the foster family.
UNHCR's usual practice is to allow unaccompanied minors over 15 to take
decisions concerning durable solutions for themselves.
52. Criteria for foster family care should be worked out
together with the community. Foster care arrangements should be formalized as
quickly as possible by signed contracts or agreements, with an understanding
that children should be returned to their immediate family if located.
Particularly needy host families may be provided with an incentive to support
the child on a case by case basis, but not as a systematic measure for all
foster families. Food rations and other normal assistance should of course,
continue to be provided for the child through the foster family. However, the
child should continue to have registration and ration documents separate from
those of the foster family. Foster care arrangements should be monitored closely
through outreach activities in the community. Careful account should be taken of
cultural attitudes towards fostering. For instance, in some situations, a family
may find it hard to conceive of taking in a child except as a servant.
53. Where child care centres are necessary, they should be
small, decentralized within the community, and integrated into community
activities.
Remember that when the facilities and services provided for
unaccompanied children are significantly better than those otherwise available,
parents may actually place children in special care.
54. The advantage of small residential centres is that if
reunification with the parents is expected to take place quickly, such centres
provide an efficient way of caring for the children while at the same time not
losing sight of them during the upheaval and confusion at the start of an
emergency.
Unaccompanied minors should be integrated into the life,
activities and services available to other children. Avoid either marginalizing
them or paying them special attention.
55. Ensure continuity and stability in care (foster families and
other) by employing refugee and national community services staff who are less
likely to move on than international staff.
56. Provide supervision, support and training to child care
workers, including child interviewing techniques, child development, community
mobilization and child trauma. Train refugees and aid workers to identify and
register unaccompanied minors from the outset of an emergency.
Women
57. While it is not correct to see women as a vulnerable group,
women do have specific needs which, if not met, can put them at risk, such as
vulnerability to exploitation and sexual abuse, sexual discrimination and
restricted access to basic services. In addition, many decisions in camp
management which affect women are made without them being consulted. Not
including refugee women in decision making about camp management may put them at
risk and add to their workload. In addition, the effectiveness of the assistance
programme may be reduced because the problems and needs of all the beneficiaries
have not been properly identified.
58. However, when seeking women's participation in
decision-making, it is also wise to remember that measures which challenge the
status quo may be threatening to traditional leaders. Special efforts may be
needed to overcome resistance to change.
Culture and tradition cannot be used as reasons to exclude
refugee women from participation in decision-making.
To Ensure Women's Participation:
Include refugee women in
leadership functions and give them responsible roles in the community including
participation in decision-making bodies;
Ensure that women have equal
access to services and facilities, particularly health and reproductive health
care services, and inform persons concerned about these resources;
Encourage activities such as
adult literacy classes which will help empower women and bring them together for
mutual support;
Provide community support to
women by organizing recreational and educational activities for
children;
Develop preventive protection
mechanisms with the community to ensure protection of women against all forms of
abuse;
Work with the elders and
other influential groups to gain their support for the participation of women in
camp management.
Single Parent Households
59. In refugee emergencies, the majority of single parent
households are female-headed. However, community services must be sensitive to
the needs of both male and female single parents. Men may have to be supported
in the functions of rearing children and organizing household responsibilities.
Women who have to manage the family needs on their own are at risk as they are
vulnerable to exploitation and harassment, especially if they are young. They
may be exposed to pressures attached to provision of food and material
resources. Women must therefore be included in food management and other
committees. Some women may have to resort to prostitution in order to provide
for their families, particularly if they do not have any skills to earn a
livelihood.
Survivors of Violence
60. Men, women and children can be victims of violence in
conflict situations (including torture, rape or solitary confinement) and suffer
consequent trauma. Rape is a crime of violence, and is sometimes used as a
systematic method of intimidation. Survivors of rape can be any age from the
very young to the very old and belong to any social group. It should be
remembered that survivors of sexual violence including rape can be men as well
as women. It is important to recognize that the consequences of sexual violence
on children and adolescents will differ from that on adults.
61. Where there is a high risk of violence, steps can be taken
to reduce exposure and vulnerability. Crimes of sexual violence may be more
likely to occur where women and/or children are exposed and vulnerable, such as
when they collect firewood or water from distant points. The level of risk of
violence including sexual violence from within or outside the community, should
be reflected in taking increased precautions in camp security, and in creating
mechanisms to allow people to travel outside the camp in safety e.g. fuel-wood
gathering in groups.
Take the Following Action
Establish services for
survivors of violence which are integrated into other community and health care
services;
Ensure confidentiality is
maintained;
Organize counselling support
services using trusted, supportive refugee staff, including female
staff;
Organize support groups with
people who are trusted;
Provide a safe place for
survivors to stay, with friends if possible;
Ensure appropriate legal and
medical services are established and accessible, including access to female
staff;
Mobilize community support by
discussing the general problem with them to ensure more compassionate treatment.
Religious heads and community leaders in particular can influence attitudes to
survivors of violence;
Ensure that site layout,
fencing and lighting promote physical safety. Good site planning, including
location of services, will help create conditions where violence will be less
likely (see chapter 12 on site planning).
Sensitize the community to
the problem and the seriousness of domestic violence. An emergency situation
often triggers an increase in levels of domestic violence, particularly in the
early stages. However, in the later stages of an emergency incidents of domestic
violence may remain high and on occasion escalate, if the situation generates
high levels of stress.
62. Urgent medical treatment must be provided to any person who
has been raped to help deal with the physical trauma. A protocol for management
of such persons, based on host country laws, should be adopted.
63. Post trauma reactions to sexual violence include feelings of
shame and guilt, anger, humiliation, nightmares, withdrawal, depression and
suicidal tendencies. Family, friends and community support groups must be
alerted to these possible reactions so that they can understand and assist the
survivors of violence.
64. Social attitudes to rape are usually very judgmental. A
woman who becomes pregnant by rape may need help in being accepted by her family
and the community or in placing a child for adoption. In some cases a man or a
woman who has been raped may have to leave their present location in order to
lead a normal life. This is especially the case of a woman with a child, who may
then be left without family support. Additionally, she may feel hostile towards
the child, a common post trauma reaction.
65. Any documentation of a case should be undertaken with the
utmost confidentiality. It is the survivors choice whether or not to take legal
action; there may be very strong considerations not to do so. If legal action is
taken, the survivor will need support and protection in every step of what is a
painful process, and should be made aware of exactly what degree of protection
and care will be available.
66. Community services, protection and health staff must work
together for survivors of rape and sexual violence. Protection staff can provide
information on legal action and monitor the legal process if charges are
pressed. Health personnel should make necessary treatment facilities and
documentation available. Community services should work directly with the
survivor concerned, and with the family of the survivor, as well as establish
support groups and more generally sensitize refugees to the problems of rape. A
refugee team, which could complement the UNHCR community services team, may be
established to provide outreach to women reluctant to come forward.
Disabled and Handicapped
67. Disabled and handicapped persons might have problems in
accessing goods and services available to refugees and steps must be taken to
ensure this access, including that of disabled children to whatever schooling is
available. In some refugee situations, but more often in returnee situations,
additional dangers of land-mines mean that an information campaign must be
started immediately to prevent further disability. Initial care for the disabled
should be through families and the community, nevertheless, rehabilitation
services (e.g. wheelchairs, crutches) should also be introduced as soon as
possible. Community based rehabilitation to care for disabled people is an
approach that should be promoted from the outset of an emergency.
Older Persons
68. The presence of older people in the community can strengthen
the bonds and the sense of belonging. However, physical deterioration may limit
their mobility and hence their access to basic services. Those most at risk are
living alone or caring for young children.
Older persons can constitute a significant proportion of the
refugee population though they are often overlooked.
69. Consideration should be given to include older persons in
the supplementary feeding programmes. Even if older people can obtain food
rations, limited mobility may preclude collection of water or fuel essential for
food preparation.
70. For the more frail elderly, family and community care should
be encouraged. Refugee community workers should identify neighbours, relatives
or others who can help these people with food, water or fuel collection.
71. It should be kept in mind that after any repatriation, the
elderly may make up a high proportion of refugees remaining behind in the
country of asylum. Hence local government structures and local NGO capacity
should be strengthened to care for them.
Isolated Social Groups
72. Every society has its social, religious, political or ethnic
groups whose access to services is restricted even under normal conditions. They
become particularly vulnerable during emergencies as assistance is likely to be
channelled through the leaders of the majority groups. Immediate assessment
should be made of any of these groups to determine if they can be integrated
into the refugee community, or whether special provision must be made.
In the early stages of an emergency, cultural and traditional
customs that may be harmful to particular groups of refugees such as genital
mutilation, early marriages and other abusive practices should be addressed and
appropriate action
taken.
Education
· Education
programmes can help address not only the psychological and social needs of the
children, but also the well being of the whole community, by helping to organize
the population and by providing structure for the children and their
families;
· Education
programmes can provide important support to lifesaving activities;
· Every child has
the right to education. Even in an emergency, start providing appropriate
education as soon as possible;
· The priority is to
make primary schooling available to all. Special efforts will probably be
necessary to ensure the proper participation of girls in the
programme;
· Refugee schools
should be organized and run by the refugees themselves, to the extent possible,
with proper outside support.
Introduction
73. Establishing an education system is important for the
well-being of the whole refugee community, as well as for the social and
psychological well-being of children and young people. Setting up basic schools
will give a structure and sense of normality to a dislocated and traumatized
community. Refugees are dislocated not only from their homes and families but
also from their community - the old community is disrupted while new community
structures are only gradually evolving. Schools can be the initial community
focal points, and a sense of well-being may be created if the new community is
partly structured around institutions which are as familiar as schools, rather
than around, for example, distribution points, registration and health centres
which may be more representative of the problems of their current situation.
74. In addition, schools can be initiated and managed by the
community itself much more easily than other refugee institutions, again
enhancing self-esteem and self-reliance. Refugee teachers and parents often
establish informal schools even in an emergency - as soon as basic needs in food
water and health are met, because they recognize the importance of a school
system for the reasons set out above.
Informal schools started by the refugees themselves should be
supported, and can be used as a basis to begin the programme.
75. In addition to community building, other important functions
of the education system in an emergency are:
i. To disseminate survival and life skills messages.
Simple messages can be spread through the school system, on issues such as
health, sanitation, nutrition, and looking after the local resources (fuelwood
for cooking) so they do not become too rapidly depleted;
ii. To provide parents with extra time to work on
family survival needs;
iii. To serve as an important protection tool in
certain circumstances, e.g. through providing an alternative to military
recruitment;
iv. To provide continuity of education which can
help reintegration in the country of origin.
Every child has the right to education, as set out in the
Convention on the Rights of the Child.
76. Detailed information on planning education programmes and on
standards for refugee schools is set out in the latest edition of NHCR's
Education Guidelines. These guidelines are essential reading for those
establishing an education programme.
Setting up an Education Programme
77. Basic education must be provided and, although priorities in
the emergency phase may mean that the full implementation of an education
programme is difficult, a start must be made. An education programme should only
be delayed if the emergency is clearly going to be short-lived.
The emergency education programme should provide free access
to organized activities and basic education for all refugee children and young
people.
78. Identify teachers from the refugee population who can
organize recreational and educational activities, and identify agencies to
support the development of basic education programmes.
Simple Activities
79. In the beginning, the aim is to establish a simple programme
of structured recreational and simple educational activities for children and
young people. This is possible even with limited educational supplies - simply
gathering the children together for a set period each day and keeping them
occupied is a valuable first step. Identify teachers from the refugee population
who are willing to do this. The activities should support the lifesaving
measures underway in other sectors by including simple messages on health,
sanitation etc. appropriate for the children's level, and by providing parents
with extra time to work on family survival needs. Recreational and activity
materials of the type listed in Annex 3 could be used to support such a
programme.
80. The initial activities should then be developed into a
primary school system, based on the curriculum of the country of origin. The
timing of the transition from the simple activities to the more formal primary
education will depend on the evolution of the emergency. Where the school system
in the country of asylum is similar to that of the country or area of origin and
refugee numbers are limited, resources may be provided to local schools to
enable them to accommodate refugee students, provided this is cost-effective.
Basic Education
81. A single, unified primary school system should be developed
as soon as possible. Educational materials of the type described in Annex 4 can
be used to establish a basic education programme. The materials on this list
would meet the initial needs of 1,000 refugees, and include sufficient writing
materials for two classrooms of students in the earliest stages of primary
school plus one classroom for students who have completed 2 or 3 years or more
of primary schooling. If each classroom is used initially for separate morning
and afternoon shifts, then a total of 240 students can be catered for. Typically
there would be two or more writing materials kits (of the type specified in
Annex 4) per school, according to the number of classrooms on each site.
The curriculum should initially be based on that of the
country or area of origin, to facilitate reintegration upon repatriation.
82. Where possible, contact should be made with the Education
Ministry of the country of origin, initially to obtain school textbooks and
teachers' guides and later regarding certification of education and training
received by refugees and teachers. In order to open schools as early as
possible, temporary shelters may be erected using plastic sheeting. The
community should be mobilized to help build and maintain school buildings. Other
items required for simple classroom structures, latrines etc. should be
constructed, using local materials where possible.
Smaller, decentralized schools are generally preferable to
large schools. Primary schools should be established within walking distance for
young children.
83. Recreational and sports programmes for children and
adolescents should be included as part of the education programme, and necessary
space should be allocated at the time of site planning. The likelihood that
additional classrooms may be needed at a later stage should likewise be borne in
mind at the time of site selection and demarcation.
It is probable that young refugees will have had their formal
education disrupted. There Should therefore be no limitation of entry to
schooling according to the age of the children or adolescents.
84. Initial budgets should provide for the printing or
photocopying of classroom materials for pupils and teachers, based on core
elements of the country of origin curriculum as well as for the initial purchase
of school and recreational supplies. Budgetary provision may also be necessary
for the translation and reproduction of materials supporting health,
environment, peace education and other messages.
Action
Identify humanitarian
agencies to be responsible for educational assistance in each location and to
establish and train community education committees and parent/ teacher
groups;
Identify school sites, and
erect temporary shelter, ensure construction of latrines;
Provide writing and
recreational materials to support community initiatives (see Annexes 3 and
4);
Convene a refugee education
committee. Include refugees, local education authorities, relevant UN agencies,
implementing partners and refugee educators, at appropriate (district and/or
national) levels;
Consult UNHCR Headquarters
and the local UNICEF office regarding availability of educational materials and
school-books;
Arrange the timing of
educational and recreational activities around other household and family
activities to get maximum participation and cooperation of
refugees;
Establish schooling in all
refugee locations with refugee education advisers and teachers. Make plans for
moving to a normal system of education as soon as possible;
Aim at a realistic level of
service which can be sustained over the longer term;
Organize in-service training
of teachers. Training should cover: school organization; basic teaching methods;
review of basic subject matter; and dissemination of messages regarding health,
sanitation, environmental conservation and peace;
Monitor participation of
girls in educational programmes and promote girls' enrollment and attendance in
school. Identify what are the root causes of non-attendance by girls. Promote
recruitment and training of female teachers (at least 50 per cent);
Reintegrate out-of-school
children and youth in school or non-formal education. Causes of school drop-outs
and non-participation in community activities should be monitored.
85. An education specialist may be needed to advise on programme
development. Liaise with UNHCR Headquarters, regarding materials and expertise
available internally and through standby arrangements (see Catalogue of
Emergency Response Resources, Appendix 1).
86. The provision of education may give the refugees a privilege
not enjoyed by the local population of some locations. If the government is in
agreement and there is a common language of instruction, it is usually
appropriate to open the schools to the local population. Some assistance may be
provided to national schools located very near to refugee
schools.
Environmental Guidelines, UNHCR set of environmental
guidelines for different sectors (May 1998 revision): Domestic Energy Needs in
Refugee Situations; Livestock in Refugee Situations; Forestry in Refugee
Situations. UNHCR, Geneva, 1996.
Evacuation of Children from Conflict Areas, UNHCR,
UNICEF, Geneva 1992.
Guidelines for Educational Assistance to Refugees, UNHCR,
Geneva, 1995.
Guidelines on the Protection of Refugee Women, UNHCR,
Geneva, 1991.
Memorandum of Understanding between UNHCR and UNICEF,
1995.
Refugee Children: Guidelines on Protection and Care,
UNHCR, Geneva, 1994.
Refugee Emergencies: A Community-Based Approach; UNHCR,
Geneva,1996 (revision).
Sexual Violence Against Refugees: Guidelines on Prevention
and Response, UNHCR, Geneva, 1995.
Working with Unaccompanied Minors: A Community-Based
Approach; UNHCR Geneva 1996.
Urban refugees, A Community-Based Approach. UNHCR,
Geneva, 1996.
Figure
Annexes
Annex 1 - Community Services Checklist
The following chart covers the three phases of community
services in an emergency. In each phase activities are identified and
quantitative and qualitative indicators listed which can be used to
assess the effectiveness of the community services programme.
CS = Community services
CSO = Community Services Officer
PHASE 1. ASSESSMENT, ACTION PLAN, GUIDELINES
Major Activities
Community Service Checklist
1.1. Assists with overall programme management
Are CS resources available through LOI?
Does the CSO participate in the UNHCR management team
and support other sectors - water, sanitation, shelter, health, food and
nutrition, programme, protection and environment?
1.2. Helps meet basic refugee survival needs
Have CS considerations been included in
the needs and resource assessment? Have refugee
leaders been identified and involved in assessment?
Do vulnerable groups have access to initial assistance? Have relevant local government and other local resources
(NGOs, host families) been identified? Have CS
standards and guidelines been set? Is there an action
plan based on the above?
PHASE 2. FOUNDATION OF COMMUNITY SERVICES PROGRAMME
Major Activities
Community Service Checklist
2.1. Facilitates refugee participation and self-management
Have refugee committees and information
networks been established with women's participation as well as men and are
vulnerable groups represented? Is community awareness
building and information dissemination undertaken? Is
there a CS coordination mechanism with refugees, implementing partners and
government?
PHASE 3. BUILDING UP COMMUNITY SERVICES
Major Activities
Community Service Checklist
3.1. Assistance to groups at risk, promoting their
self-sufficiency
Unaccompanied minors Are they
protected from exploitation by provision of information centres etc.? Are reception points established for reunifying parents and
children? How many UAMs are identified? a Is the
community mobilized to provide foster care? Is
information disseminated on the reunification programme? Traumatized
children and adults Do children attend clinics,
child care services, schools or organized play? Is
there a system of identification and referral of acute cases to local facilities
and are volunteers identified? Are there special
programmes established and are children participating in these therapeutic
activities? Single parent households Are
neighbours or volunteers mobilized for support? Have
interest groups formed? Survivors of violence Are means of safety and security identified and implemented?
Are activities established to provide a supportive
environment and re-establish normal life? Disabled Are preventative measures established? Are children immunized? Have health
education messages been identified and disseminated? Are
the disabled referred for identification and treatment? · Are their families supported? Are the disabled receiving education? Unaccompanied
older persons Do they receive assistance in daily
survival? Are they involved in community activities?
Has a skills inventory of elderly been
established? Ethnic minorities and mixed couples Is their safety and security ensured through site planning?
Have community activities been developed to foster
peace and reconciliation? Adolescents Are
they involved in community activities? Single Females Are they protected? Have neighbours
and volunteers been identified to offer support? Have
community activities been organized? Have females
been accomodated in a physically secure place in the refugee
community? Other specific groups Is there a
system of emergency support for urban refugees, co-ordinated with programme and
protection?
3.2 Establishment and maintenance of reproductive health
services
Has consultation been held with refugees
groups? Have needs and priorities been identified
within categories -safe motherhood, family planning, HIV/AIDS, STDs, sexual and
gender based violence, special needs of adolescents?
Have clinics and services been established? Have
refugee health workers been mobilized and trained?
Are women attending the services?
3.3. Promotion of refugee self-reliance and durable solutions
Self-help activities Have
projects been established for community development? Training Are refugee training programmes developed, have refugees been
trained? Has capacity building (on-the-job or
orientation training) been organized for government, NGO, CS workers?
Education Are schools established
(especially primary) and students enrolled? Is non-formal
education established? Is the education of girls
taken into consideration? Capacity building of refugee infra-structure
Are structures established (including community
centres, clinics, housing)? Have some programmes been
handed over to refugee groups? Are women included as
part of the refugee leadership structure?
Annex 2
Sample Unaccompanied Minor Registration Form
Child's Name
PLACE PHOTOGRAPH
Sex
Age
Registration No.
HERE
ICRC Number
1. Write names of brothers & sisters who are with the
child. 2. Find out the name and location of persons who found or brought
child to current location, interview that person and record that
information. 3. Interview any other adults & children who may have
information on child's family and record that information. 4. Write down any
visit the child receives: date, name and address of visitor and relationship to
the child. 5. Record child's movements: date and places: e.g. hospital,
nutrition centre, etc. and final move for family reunion or other reasons.
REGISTRATION FORM
Child
Father
Mother
Date
Reg. No.
Last and First Name
Age
Sex
Last and First Name
Last and first Name
Note: Find out immediately who found the child and name, address
of that person.
Are there other persons who know how to find child's family?
Continue to talk to the child to obtain and write down more information about
locating family.
Last Address of Child & Family
Present Caretaker or Organization Complete Name and
Address
With Siblings Yes/no
If Child leaves, note reasons: Family Reunion, moved to
another place, where, reasons? - Died, etc.
Annex 3 - List of materials for Recreational and Other
Activities
(Resource box for children and young people)
Quantities indicated below are required for 1,000 total refugee
population. For the younger children:
Qty
Item
2
footballs
2
medium-sized inflatable balls
8
skipping-ropes, long
40
skipping-ropes, short
80
slates (A4)
80
slate pencils
80
slate cleaning cloths
For young people
2
volleyballs
2
volleyball nets
2
footballs
100
exercise books (100 pages, lined)
100
pens, ball-point
For storage of the above materials
1
lockable metal or plastic container
1
padlock
For use by the team leading the activities
2
double sided chalkboards
2
registration books
2
notebooks A4 (250 pages, lined)
4
tambourines
4
large handbells
8
whistles
2
air pumps
2
puncture repair kits
6
boxes of white chalk (144 sticks)
2
soft tape-measures
2
lockable sports bags
2
small padlocks
Note
The materials on this list is sufficient for a refugee
population of 1,000 people. (Thus, a refugee population of 50,000 persons would
require 50 times the quantities indicated on the lists).
Supplementary items based on local needs and culture should be
added (such as items needed for local games). If these items are not available
locally the UNHCR Supplies and Transport Section in Geneva should be asked to
assist with their purchase. Specific items normally used by the refugee children
should be added.
Annex 4 - Writing Materials List
Quantities indicated below are required for 1,000 total refugee
population.
For the younger children:
Qty
Item
160
slates
160
slate pencils
160
slate cleaning cloths
160
pencils
160
exercise books (100 pages)
For older children
240
exercise books (100 pages, lined)
240
exercise books (100 pages, squares)
240
ball point pens
For storage of the above materials
3
lockable metal or plastic containers
3
padlocks
For use by the teachers
3
double sided chalkboards
6
boxes of white chalk (144 sticks)
1
chalkboard ruler
1
chalkboard compass
1
chalkboard set square
18
ball point pens, (6 blue, 6 red and 6 black)
3
large pencil sharpeners
3
register books
3
rulers, 30 cm
3
chalkboard dusters
9
erasers
3
boxes of HBO pencils (12)
3
poster sets (alphabet, numbers in the language and script of the
refugees)
3
duffle bags to carry teacher items
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
11. Population Estimation and Registration
(introduction...)
Overview
Introduction
Population Estimates
Registration
Key References
Annexes
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
11. Population Estimation and Registration
Figure
Overview
Situation
Refugee emergencies are characterized by a mobile population,
often with rapidly fluctuating numbers. It is often difficult to collect exact
information on the total number and composition of the population.
Objectives
To find out the total number of the population of concern, and
the breakdown of the population by age and sex, and by groups of special
significance. The exact identity of those special groups will depend on the
particular circumstances of the emergency.
Principles of Response
· Knowing who the
refugees are and their number is essential for an efficient and cost effective
operation;
· Formal mass
registration should normally be the aim. Where this is not immediately possible,
this can be reached in stages, starting with the first stage of population
estimation;
· The final goal is
a full registration of the refugee population;
· Information
collected will be important for voluntary repatriation and re-integration into
country of origin;
· Involvement and
understanding by the refugees themselves is essential to the success of
registration.
Action
· Use population
estimation techniques as a first step;
· Plan towards a
full registration, keeping the population informed;
· Identify resources
needed for full registration;
· Review the need
for full registration and implement each phase towards full registration as soon
as each is
feasible.
Introduction
· Knowing how many
refugees there are and who they are is fundamental for planning and managing an
efficient operation. There are several ways of determining numbers with
sufficient accuracy;
· Although an
accurate enumeration is essential, a formal mass registration should not
necessarily be an automatic response at the start of an emergency;
· Successful
registration needs good planning, careful implementation and consistent
monitoring.
1. To plan and manage an efficient operation, one of the first
things to know is how many refugees there are and who they are. An accurate
enumeration is therefore an essential component of any assessment.
2. Chapter II, 8(f) of the UNHCR Statute states that the High
Commissioner shall provide for the protection of refugees by "obtaining from
Governments information concerning the number and condition of refugees in their
territories". It must be made clear to the authorities that an assistance
operation cannot be carried out without this information.
3.
Although an accurate enumeration is essential, a formal mass
registration should not necessarily be an automatic response at the start of an
emergency.
There are a number of methods for accurate population estimation
(including age/sex breakdown) which do not require formal registration. In some
circumstances these simpler methods may be preferable as an initial response.
4. The main advantage of registration is that it provides a
unique opportunity to acquire basic information for subsequent programming. It
also helps avoid disputes about refugee numbers. Registration will also be an
essential component of any individual or family tracing programme and may be an
important factor in protecting refugees.
5. The most practical time to register refugees is when they
arrive at a reception/ transit centre or site for settlement. Registration is
often carried out in conjunction with health screening. Transferring refugees to
a new site also provides a good opportunity for mass registration.
6. A discrepancy may arise with time, between official figures
and the best estimates of those working closest to the refugees. Unless this
discrepancy is swiftly resolved major problems will follow. Small discrepancies
are likely, given the difficulties in enumeration and registration. Large ones
can be avoided by timely action to verify numbers through the various methods
set out in this chapter.
7. For detailed information on registration and population
estimation techniques, refer to Registration - A Practical Guide for Field
Staff.
Population Estimates
· For most methods
of population estimation, it is important to understand the community structure
of the beneficiary population;
· Estimates should
be updated regularly.
Introduction
8. The following methods can be used to estimate the population:
i. Counting;
ii. Administrative records;
iii. Lists compiled by refugee leaders;
iv. Extrapolation and Global Positioning System
(GPS);
v. Aerial photography.
9. Understanding the community structure of the beneficiary
population is important for most methods of population estimation - for example,
living arrangements and the average number in a family group.
10. Annex 1 provides a format for reporting population estimates
as part of an overall situation report. Estimates should be updated regularly.
Counting
11. If there are easily identified entry or transit points
during a refugee influx (e.g. bridges or transportation sites), then a daily
count of the number of people passing through these points can give a reasonable
estimate of the refugee population. Sufficient staff should be immediately
positioned at bridges and other critical points to provide 24 hour coverage.
These staff members should be provided with counters to aid counting, and with
simple recording and reporting forms.
Administrative Records
12. Local authorities at the refugee site may collect population
data on the refugees. If possible, national census and other population data
should be obtained from the country of origin as a means of cross-checking the
host area data.
Lists Compiled by Refugee Leaders
13. Lists of names can be compiled by refugee leaders and
verified through a process agreed with the refugee community.
To ensure the system is as accurate and fair as possible, it
is particularly important to understand the community structure.
The normal community structure and hierarchy in a society are
often disrupted during exodus and different people often take on the role of
leadership in the country of asylum. It is essential to understand the role,
motives and effectiveness of the new leadership. Community services and field
staff can help in this. Records compiled by refugee leaders may even eliminate
the need for registration, provided they are checked and verified at random and
updated regularly.
14. The lists can also be useful in identifying vulnerable
refugees who need special assistance. Community services staff should visit
vulnerable individuals and families to help confirm the accuracy of lists
provided by the leaders.
Shelter Count and Extrapolation
15. Population estimates can also be obtained by calculating the
total area of the camp, then counting shelters in a fraction of the camp, from
which the population of the whole camp can be extrapolated.
16. The total surface area of the camp can be determined in a
number of ways. It can be determined by measuring the average length and average
width of the camp by pacing, or by using a wheel meter or measurement tape (if
the camp is small), or by driving (if the camp is large), using the trip meter
to estimate distance.
17. If there is a map of the camp, the surface area of the camp
can be estimated by overlaying scaled gridlines on the map, and adding up the
number of the squares falling within the camp's boundaries.
18. Finally the surface area can be calculated using GPS. GPS is
a system which includes a hand-held device (about the size of a large
calculator, costing about US $200 in 1999) which displays on a small screen the
latitude and longitude of its current position. The device uses satellites to
establish its position. It does not work under heavy forest cover or in deep
narrow valleys because it needs an unobstructed sightline to several satellites.
19. The GPS Is used to find the geographical coordinates of the
camp perimeter. The more irregular the camp shape, the more perimeter points
will be needed. Once the camp perimeter is established, the surface area of the
camp can be calculated in the following ways:
i. Communicate the perimeter coordinates to
Headquarters Mapping Unit where these can be used to calculate the area and the
result will be communicated back. Alternatively, perimeter coordinates can be
marked on paper which has scaled gridlines, using the X-axis to represent
longitude and the Y-axis to represent latitude. A line is drawn joining these
points. Counting the scaled squares inside the perimeter will give the total
camp area. The distance represented by one degree of longitude varies, getting
smaller moving towards the North and South poles and larger towards the equator.
In order to use this method, the distance which one degree represents at the
exact location of the camp must be found out. This could be scaled off a map of
the area, if it has sufficiently large scale;
ii. Computer software (called Geographical
Information Systems or GIS) can automatically map and calculate camp area based
on the perimeter points established by GPS. Technical assistance for setting up
this software can be obtained from Headquarters.
20. Once the surface area has been established, select a minimum
of three sample areas within the camp, each representing about one thirtieth of
the total camp area.
For example, if the total surface area of the camp
is 600,000 sq. meters, then each sample area should be 20,000 sq. meters. Any
variation of length or width which yields 20,000 sq. meters could be used for
the sample sections. The normal GPS is not sufficiently accurate for use in
measuring the size of the sample area and conventional means of measuring should
be used instead.
21. Count the number of family shelters in each of the three
sample sections. Obtain a figure for the average number of shelters per section
(i.e. - in 20,000 sq. meters). Then multiply by 30 to extrapolate this over the
entire camp.
For example, if 3 sample sections have 120, 134, and
150 shelters respectively, then the average number of shelters in a sample
section will be (120 + 134 + 145) / 3 = 133. Thus the total number of shelters
in the 600,000 sq. meters camp will be 133 × 30 = 3,990
shelters.
22. Determine average family size per shelter to estimate the
total population. For example, if the average family size per shelter is 5, then
the total population is 5 × 3,990 = 19,950.
Aerial Photography
23. Aerial photographs (or sometimes videos) of a camp can be
used to count the number of family shelters. This can be accomplished to a
limited extent by taking a picture from a nearby hill, tower or tall building.
In addition to professional aerial photography, "amateur" photographs taken, for
example, from a UNHCR plane can be used for estimation. Flying over the site may
require the permission of the authorities.
24. Aerial photographs must be accompanied by a ground survey to
establish the average family size per shelter and the percentage of empty
shelters.
25. The number of shelters appearing on the photograph (or
mosaic of photographs) multiplied by the average family size per shelter will
give an estimate of the overall population.
26. It is important to define an appropriate scale for the
photography. This will depend, in part, on the size of the camps. High altitude
flights produce fewer photographs to handle and interpret, but it will be more
difficult to distinguish the shelters.
27. The results of aerial surveys can be integrated within the
GIS from which maps can then be
produced.
Registration
· Registration
provides the more detailed information needed for the efficient management of an
assistance operation;
· Registration is
carried out over several phases.
Introduction
28. Protection and assistance can be provided more efficiently
if it is based on the demographic information which can be obtained through
registration. Registration may be required at different phases of an operation,
for example: when there is a new refugee influx; when there is a voluntary
repatriation operation (see chapter 19 on voluntary repatriation); at any time
during an assistance programme to update information on the population, or to
collect information on special groups e.g. unaccompanied minors (see the annex
to chapter 10 on community services). The information below relates mainly to
registration at the time of an influx or for updating.
29. In order to cope with large numbers it is preferable to
separate the components of a registration exercise into six distinct phases,
according to the immediate needs of the population and the time and staff
available to carry out the task. Each phase should be viewed as an entity in its
own right, but each leading to the next phase when circumstances permit.
30. The six phases of registration are:
i. Estimating the population;
ii. Planning the registration and informing the
refugees;
iii. Fixing the population;
iv. Collecting information and issuing registration
cards;
v. Computerization;
vi. Verification and updating.
31. The 'ideal' in registration is to work as closely as
possible with the refugee population and its leadership, promoting community
responsibility and participation in all stages of the process. Whilst this may
not always be possible initially, it should be a major objective for both
registration and camp management.
32. Formal registration requires considerable time and personnel
resources and needs the active involvement of key partners to supply the
necessary personnel. Key partners include government, other UN agencies, NGOs
and the authorities responsible for security. Registration should only be
carried out when:
i. The safety of the staff and of the refugees can
be assured;
ii. The refugees accept the process;
iii. The key partners can supply personnel to help
carry out the registration;
iv. There are sufficient quantities of registration
materials and other equipment, including logistical support and
communications.
Standard UNHCR Registration Materials
33. Standard materials for registration are stockpiled at
Headquarters, and are sufficient to register 300,000 refugees. The materials
include, for example, standard cards and forms, wristbands, fixing tokens, etc.
These materials are included as part of a refugee registration package - see
Appendix 2, Catalogue of Emergency Response Resources which has further details
of these resources and how to obtain them.
Registration Phases
Phase 1: Estimating the population
34. This is the initial step to determine if there is a need for
a full registration and/or to establish the planning figures for the
registration exercise. It also provides working figures for the population for
operational planning prior to the availability of more detailed population
information.
Phase 2:Planning the registration and
informing refugees
35. Designate a focal point to take responsibility for planning
and executing the registration. A pilot registration in another camp can help
identify potential difficulties. Planning should be a joint exercise with the
concerned partners, including refugees. Staff training may be required at this
stage. Ensure that the necessary staffing, equipment, supplies, security,
telecommunications, vehicles and logistical support will be available on the
date of the exercise. Decide on the level of information to be collected on a
control sheet or registration form, and computerization.
36. At the same time as planning, there should be an intensive
information campaign aimed at the refugee population at large (not just the
leaders) informing the refugees of the procedures and benefits of registration.
Phase 3: Fixing the population
37. Give each individual in the target population a fixing token
(see Annex 2) or wristband.
This defines and temporarily freezes the size of the group on
whom more detailed information will be collected later. Without the fixing
phase, registration will become a revolving door, open to escalating distortion
and abuse. It must be done rapidly (preferably within a few hours, maximum one
day) to avoid multiple and/or bogus registration. While the population may be
given only short notice of when this will take place, it is necessary to ensure
that they understand what is happening.
Phase 4: Collecting information and issuing
registration cards
a) Collecting limited information on control sheets and
issuing temporary registration cards
38. This phase (including issuing temporary registration cards)
should be carried out before the next food distribution because the fixing token
or wristband is not linked to verifiable information about persons in need, and
cannot be used reliably for food and relief distribution.
39. Usually there will be no time to collect detailed
information immediately, yet assistance should be distributed urgently and basic
demographic data is needed. The first step therefore is to exchange the fixing
token or wristband for a temporary registration card (also used as ration card -
see Annex 2) to all heads of family, and collect limited information on control
sheets (see Annex 3). In most instances this information will be limited to the
name of the head of family, the size and age/sex breakdown of the family and the
number of the temporary registration card, with an indication of any immediately
visible vulnerable family members (see Annexes 4 and 5).
b) Completing registration forms and distributing of
registration cards
40. The second step is to record detailed information about the
families on Registration Forms (see Annex 4) and to issue long-term registration
cards (also used as ration cards, the standard UNHCR card lasts about one year
or 24 to 36 distributions). Where this is done immediately after the fixing
phase (without the intervening step of temporary registration cards) there will
be time constraints. Where it is done after the issue of temporary cards it can
be spread over a longer period of time, with a cut off date for the validity of
the temporary cards.
It is the Registration Form that constitutes the core
document of a UNHCR registration and which will provide the basis for all future
reference, analysis, verification and updating of the registration.
41. This phase provides a verifiable linkage between the
identity of persons of concern and the very simple forms of documentation needed
for processing large numbers of people for assistance distribution. The two-step
process of information collecting is used because the second step can take
considerable time, and registration information is needed in the interim for
commodity distribution. It is particularly important in this phase to have
personnel who speak the language and to ensure there Is a common code for
transliteration between alphabets, particularly for names.
Phase 5:Computerization
42. Computerization can either start after registration cards
have been distributed or at the same time if there are sufficient resources.
Computerization is normally carried out using the "Field Based Registration
System" (FBARS). Standard codes are used in UNHCR Registration Forms to
facilitate the collection and input of data, particularly data on groups at risk
(see Annex 5).
43. Data can be entered on-site by trained data-entry clerks or
by out-sourcing to an off-site specialized data entry company. The data should
be computerized as soon as possible and not more than a few months after being
collected on the registration forms, otherwise it will be outdated and unusable.
44. FBARS can handle two types of registration, either by family
unit (control sheet) or by individual (standard registration form). It also has
a convoy management module which can be used during organized mass movement. It
can be used by both UNHCR Offices and by Governments and implementing partners.
45. FBARS has easy-to-use search and report facilities and can
produce information for planning, monitoring and reporting, for example:
i. Data on the numbers and rate of
arrival;
ii. Data on refugee groups including on vulnerable
groups;
iii. Data consolidated both regionally and
globally;
iv. Food distribution lists;
v. Passenger manifests.
46. FBARS is available with the UNHCR registration materials
(see above). The software and documentation are currently available in English,
French and Russian. Information and support for the use of FBARS is available
from the Information and Computing Services Section at Headquarters.
Phase 6: Verification and information
updating
47. Registration information will need to be updated as the
population changes with births, deaths and population movements. There should be
a system to do this from the start. The registered numbers should be
cross-checked with other information, for example, births and deaths can be
monitored through the health services, and population movement monitored through
any of the methods for population estimation described above.
48. Registration documents can acquire monetary value,
especially if they are used to access assistance. There should be a system to
check these documents, for example random verification at food distribution
points to ensure the refugees are not using other people's documents or forged
documents.
49. Verification is a continuous process, therefore routine
verification, including house to house visits, at food distribution centres,
etc., should become a standard, regular and frequent part of monitoring.
Shelters should be given an address (section/block/individual shelter number)
which will be linked to the individual family registration
information.
Key References
Registration - A Practical Guide For Field Staff, UNHCR,
Geneva,
1994.
Annexes
Annex 1 - Format for reporting on population in emergency
situation reports.
Period: From ___________ to___________
Decreases
Pop. at end of period
Type/ status of popuation
Current location
Origin/ from
Pop. at start of period
New arrivals
Vol. return
Resettlement
Other
Total
% of total 0-4 years*
%of total who are female*
*Estimate
Main source of information is Government;
UNHCR; NGO Main basis of the
information is Registration;
Estimate
Annex 2
Figure
Annex 3 - Control Sheet
Feuille de contr�le
Figure
Annex 4 - Registration Form
Formulaire d'engregistrement
Figure
Annex 5 - Codes for UNHCR Registration Forms
Codes pour les formulaires HCR d'enregistrement
Sex Sexe
Relation to HOH Lien de Parent� avec CDF
Education Formation
Vulnerability Vuln�rabilit�
F
Female F�minin
SPO
Spouse (husband/wife)
Conjoint (mari/femme)
P
SP
Single Parent Parent seul(e)
M
Male Masculin
cm
Child (son/daughter)
Enfant (fils/fille)
S
Secondary Secondaire
SF
Single Female Femme seule
PAR
Parent (mother/father)
Parent (m�re/p�re)
T
Technical/ Vocational
Technique/ Professionnelle
UE
Unaccompanied Elder
Personne �g�e non accompagn�e
SBR
Sister/Brother
Sur/Fr�re
U
University
Universitaire
UM
Unaccompanied Minor
Mineur non accompagn�
GPR
Grandparent (grandmother/ grandfather)
Grand-parent (grand-m�re, grand-p�re)
G
Graduate
Dipl�me universitaire
PD
Physically Disabled
Handicap�(e) physique
GCH
Grandchild (grandson/ granddaughter)
Petit-enfant (petit-fils/ petit-fille)
Informal Education
Education non Institutionnalis�e
Ml
Mentally III
Malade mental(e)
INL
In-laws
Beaux-Parents
N
No Formal Education
Aucune Education Institutionnalis�e
Cl
Chronically III
Malade chronique
OFM
Other family member
Autre
X
Unknown
Inconnu
MC
Missing Child
Enfant disparu
UNR
Unrelated person belonging to the household
personne �trang�re vivant avec la
famille
0
Others
Autres
A/U
Aunt/Uncle
Tante/Oncle
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
12. Site Selection, Planning and Shelter
(introduction...)
Overview
Introduction
Organization of Response
Criteria for Site Selection
Site Planning: General Considerations
Site Planning: Specific Infrastructure
Shelter
Reception and Transit Camps
Public Buildings and Communal Facilities
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
12. Site Selection, Planning and Shelter
Figure
Overview
Situation
Suitable and well-selected sites, soundly planned refugee
settlements with adequate shelter and integrated, appropriate infrastructure are
essential in the early stages of a refugee emergency as they are lifesaving and
reduce suffering. Refugee settlement in emergencies may take the form of
dispersed settlements, mass accommodation in existing shelters or organized
camps. Initial decisions on location and layout have repercussions throughout
the existence of a refugee settlement with long-term effects on protection and
the delivery of humanitarian assistance.
Objectives
To provide suitable sites and shelter to accommodate refugees in
emergencies.
Principles of Response
· Use longer term
planning principles, even when the refugee situation is expected to be only
temporary;
· Decisions on site
selection and camp planning are very difficult to reverse, therefore when in
doubt seek technical support;
· Avoid high
population density in settlements and in shelters;
· Avoid very large
emergency settlements; refugee camps should normally be considered as a last
resort;
· Involve refugees
in all phases of settlement and shelter planning and construction;
· Use a bottom-up
planning approach, beginning with the smallest social units, preserving
traditional social arrangements and structures as far as possible;
· Develop a
comprehensive master plan, with the settlement layout developed around
sanitation and other services, providing room for expansion.
Action
· Assess the
suitability of the refugee site and ensure that it meets the basic
criteria;
· Simultaneously
assess the most immediate needs for emergency shelter and provide the necessary
materials that cannot be met from locally available resources;
· Identify the most
urgently required measures to improve site planning and layout, and implement
these as soon as
possible.
Introduction
1. Providing a place to live is a natural consequence of
granting asylum. As the layout, infrastructure and shelter of an emergency camp
will have a major influence on the safety and well-being of refugees, these
factors must be coordinated with the other vital sectors involved in the
humanitarian response: community services, water, environmental sanitation,
health, education, food distribution, logistics, forestry, and the environment.
2. Most refugee operations last much longer than initially
anticipated, therefore cost-effective and sustainable infrastructure and shelter
should be planned from the start. The expected life-span of a camp will
influence site selection, camp planning and the implementation of a refugee
operation.
3. The role and responsibility of the national authorities in
site selection is obvious and of fundamental importance. Equally, the refugees
themselves must be involved as early as possible; ideally, the needs of the
refugees should determine the location, size and layout of the site. In practice
a compromise has to be reached between the needs of refugees and external
factors, both practical and political.
4. Good site selection, planning and shelter will:
i. Save lives and reduce cost;
ii. Minimize the need for difficult, corrective
measures later;
iii. Make the provision of utilities, services and
infrastructure easier and more cost-effective;
iv. Ensure most efficient use of land, resources and
time.
5. Emergency refugee settlements generally fall into one of
three categories:
i. Dispersed settlement;
ii. Mass shelter;
iii. Camps.
Dispersed Settlement
6. This type of arrangement is where the refugees find
accommodation within the households of families who already live in the area of
refuge. The refugees either share existing accommodation or set up temporary
accommodation nearby and share water, sanitation, cooking and other services of
the preexisting households.
7. Accommodation is often found with extended family members or
with people of the same ethnic background. This type of arrangement may occur in
both rural or urban settings. The advantages of this type of settlement are:
i. Quick to implement;
ii. Limited administrative support is needed;
iii. Low cost;
iv. Fosters self help and independence;
v. It has less impact on the local environment than
camps.
8. The disadvantages of this type of settlement are:
i. The host families and communities can become
overburdened and impoverished;
ii. It can be difficult to distinguish the host
population from the refugees. This may pose problems where population estimation
and registration are required;
iii. Protection problems may not be as easy to
detect as when the population is more concentrated;
iv. Shelter and other forms of assistance are likely
to be needed by the host population as well as the refugees.
Mass Shelter:
Public Buildings and Community Facilities
9. This type of settlement is where refugees find accommodation
in pre-existing facilities, for example, in schools, barracks, hotels,
gymnasiums. These are normally in urban areas and are often intended as
temporary or transit accommodation. The advantages of this type of settlement
are:
i. They are not continuously inhabited during normal
use and refugees can be accommodated immediately without disrupting
accommodation in the hosting area;
ii. Services such as water and sanitation are
immediately available, though these may be inadequate if the numbers are
large;
iii. The need to construct additional structures
specifically for the refugees is avoided.
10. The disadvantages of this type of settlement are:
i. They can quickly become overcrowded;
ii. Sanitation and other services can become
overburdened;
iii. Equipment and structure can be
damaged;
iv. Buildings are no longer available for their
original purpose, thus disrupting public services to the hosting
population;
v. Lack of privacy.
Camps
11. This type of settlement is where refugees find accommodation
in purpose built sites where a full range of services, for example water,
sanitation, are provided, usually exclusively for the population of the site.
12. High density camps with very large populations are the worst
possible option for refugee accommodation. However, this may be the only option
because of decisions by the host country or simply because of a lack of
alternatives. They are common in areas with little or no pre-existing
infrastructure or where the size of the refugee population is such that it would
put an intolerable strain on the local resources if the two other types of
settlement mentioned above were used.
13. The advantages of this type of settlement are:
i. Services can be provided to a large population in
a centralized and efficient way;
ii. There may be economies of scale in the provision
of some services compared with more dispersed settlements;
iii. The refugee population can be easy to identify
and communicate with;
iv. Voluntary repatriation can be easier to
organize.
14. The disadvantages of this type of settlement are:
i. High population density seriously increases
health risks to the population;
ii. High risk of environmental damage in the immediate vicinity
of the camp;
iii. High population concentrations, particularly close to
international borders, may make the population vulnerable to protection
problems;
iv. Large camps may provide a hiding place and support base for
armed groups who should be excluded from refugee status. It may be difficult to
distinguish these groups from the normal refugee population and thus they may
continue to benefit from
assistance.
Organization of Response
· Site selection,
planning and shelter have a major bearing on the provision of other
assistance.
· This subject must
therefore be considered as essential to a problem and needs assessment and
response.
· Expertize is
necessary, as is swift coordinated planning of a new site or the improvement of
existing conditions.
Introduction
15. Site selection, planning and provision of shelter have a
direct bearing on the provision of other assistance and will be important
considerations in the overall assessment of problems and needs and planning of
response. Decisions must be taken as part of an integrated approach and in light
of the advice of specialists and views of the refugees.
Contingency Planning
16. Ideally sites should be selected, planned and developed
prior to the arrival of the refugees. However, frequently the scale, nature,
timing or direction of movement of the refugee flow will mean that some or all
aspects of a contingency plan may need to be modified in the face of changing or
unforeseen events. The information previously gathered in the contingency
planning process, however, will usually be useful.
17. Because of the nature of emergencies, and because practical
and political considerations are often the primary determinant of the location
of a site, the immediate priority will often be to improve sites where refugees
have spontaneously settled.
Information for Site Selection and Planning
18. The information previously gathered from the contingency
planning process, and information already available (maps and data) should be
reviewed to assist in determining the range of options for sites. Information
that is essential for planning will often be in the form of maps, reports
surveys and other data and should typically cover such areas as topography, land
use, climate, soils, geology, hydrology, vegetation, infrastructure and key
natural and cultural resources. Sources of information may include government
offices, educational institutions and UN agencies. UNHCR Headquarters, through
the focal point on Geographical Information Systems (GIS) can also support
operations with maps, aerial photographs, satellite images and a special
geographic database.
Expertize and Personnel
19. Expertize may be required in the fields of hydrology,
surveying, physical planning, engineering (e.g. water supply, environmental
sanitation, road and bridge construction, building materials, etc.), public
health, the environment and perhaps social anthropology. Familiarity with
conditions in both the country of origin and asylum is very important. Prior
emergency experience and a flexible approach are particularly valuable.
20. Expertize and advice should be sought through UNHCR's
Engineering and Environmental Services Section, who will advise on the fielding
of a specialist to coordinate activities in this sector. Potential sources of
the necessary expertize are government line ministries, national and
international NGOs, architecture and engineering faculties, local industry and
professional organizations, as well as other UN organizations.
21. Site selection and settlement planning require broad
consultations with all concerned in the planning, development and use of the
site. When appropriate, multi-sector planning teams, work-groups or task-forces
might be formed to better structure consultations and better solicit inputs.
Consensus should be sought, though it is rare that the needs of all the parties
will be fully
satisfied.
Criteria for Site Selection
· Land may be scarce
in the country of asylum and no site may be available that meets all of the
desired criteria. If, however, the site is clearly unsuitable, every effort must
be made to move the refugees to a better site as quickly as possible. Both the
problems which result from a bad site, and the difficulties inherent in a move,
increase with time.
Introduction
22. The social and cultural background of the refugees must be a
primary consideration and will be an important determinant of the most
appropriate type of site and shelter. In many circumstances, however, choice
will be limited and land that meets even minimum standards may be scarce. For
uninhabited sites or areas where refugee settlement is proposed, it is wise to
establish why the site was not already in use, and examine whether the reason -
for example, no water or because it floods in the monsoon - does not also
exclude use by the refugees.
Water Supply
23. A specialist assessment of water availability should be a
prerequisite in selecting a site.
The availability of an adequate amount of water on a
year-round basis has proved in practice to be the single most important
criterion, and commonly the most problematic
A site should not be selected on the assumption that water can
be found merely by drilling, digging, or hauling. Drilling may not be feasible
or may not provide water in adequate quantity and quality. No site should be
selected where the hauling of water will be required over a long period.
Size of Camp Sites
24. While there are recommended minimum area requirements for
refugee sites, these should be applied cautiously and with flexibility. They are
a rule of thumb for an initial calculation rather than precise standards.
Ideally, the recommended minimum surface area is 45
m2 per person when planning a refugee camp (including garden space).
However, the actual surface area per person (excluding garden space) should not
be less than 30 m2 per person.
The figure of 30 m2 surface area per person includes
the area necessary for roads, foot paths, educational facilities, sanitation,
security, firebreaks, administration, water storage, distribution, markets,
relief item storage and distribution and, of course, plots for shelter. The
figure of 30 m2 does not include, however, any land for significant
agricultural activities or livestock. Although agricultural activities are not
usually a priority during emergencies, small vegetable gardens attached to the
family plot should be included in the site plan from the outset. This requires a
minimum increase of 15 m2 per person, hence, a minimum of 45
m2 overall land allocation per person would be needed.
25. Large camps of over 20,000 people should generally be
avoided.
The size of a site for 20,000 people should be calculated as
follows assuming space for vegetable gardens is included:
20,000 people × 45 m2= 900,000
m2 = 90 ha (for example a site measuring 948 m × 948
m).
26. If possible, there should be a substantial distance between
each camp. The distance depends on a number of factors: access, proximity of the
local population, water supplies, environmental considerations and land use.
27. Refugee settlements should have potential for expansion to
accommodate increase in the population due to natural increases or new arrivals.
The excess of births over deaths means that the population could grow as fast as
3 to 4% per year.
Land Use and Land Rights
28. In most countries land for the establishment of refugee
sites is scarce. Often, sites are provided on public land by the government. Any
use of private land must be based on formal legal arrangements in accordance
with the laws of the country.
Note that UNHCR neither purchases nor rents land for refugee
settlements.
Headquarters should be consulted at once if this is a problem.
29. Once a possible site has been identified, the process of
site assessment should always include clarification of land-ownership and land
rights. Almost invariably, land rights or ownership are known, even though these
may not be well documented in public record, or may not be obvious. Nomadic use
of range-land, for instance, requires huge areas and may not look used.
30. The refugees should have the exclusive use of the site,
through agreement with national and local (including traditional) authorities.
Traditional or customary land use rights are very sensitive issues, and even if
there may be an agreement with the national government to use a site, local
groups may disagree with the site being used even temporarily. Clarification of
access rights and land use restrictions is also necessary to define the rights
of the refugees to:
i. Collect fuel-wood, and timber for shelter
construction as well as fodder for animals;
ii. Graze their animals;
iii. Engage in agriculture or other subsistence
activities.
Security and Protection
31. In principle, the granting of asylum is not an unfriendly
act by the host country towards the country of origin. However, to ensure the
security and protection of the refugees, it is recommended that they be settled
at a reasonable distance from international borders as well as other potentially
sensitive areas such as military installations.
The OAU Convention states: "for reasons of security,
countries of asylum shall, as far as possible, settle refugees at a reasonable
distance from the frontier of their country of origin"1.
1Article II, paragraph 6 OAU
Convention.
Exceptions should only be made to this rule where the interests
of the refugees would be better served, for example if there are good prospects
for early voluntary repatriation, and security and protection considerations
allow.
Topography, Drainage and Soil Conditions
32. Where water is readily available, drainage often becomes a
key criterion. The whole site should be located above flood prone areas,
preferably on gentle (2 to 4%) slopes. Sites on slopes steeper than 10% gradient
are difficult to use and usually require complex and costly site preparations.
Flat sites present serious problems for the drainage of waste and storm water.
Avoid areas likely to become marshy or waterlogged during the rainy season.
33. Soils that allow swift surface water absorption are
important for the construction and effectiveness of pit latrines. The subsoil
should permit good infiltration (i.e. allowing water absorption by the soil, and
the retention of solid waste in the latrine). It should be noted that very sandy
soils which are good for infiltration are sometimes poor for the stability of
the pit. Where drinking water supplies are drawn from ground water sources,
special attention must be given to preventing contamination by pit latrines. The
pit latrines must not reach into the ground water. The groundwater table should
be a minimum of 3 m below the surface of the site.
34. Avoid excessively rocky or impermeable sites as they hamper
both shelter and latrine construction. If possible, select a site where the land
is suitable at least for vegetable gardens and small-scale agriculture.
Accessibility
35. The site must be accessible and close to sources of
necessary supplies such as food, cooking fuel and shelter material. Proximity to
national services is desirable, particularly health care services. Roads must be
"all-weather" providing year-round access. Short access roads to connect the
main road with the site can be constructed as part of the camp development.
There may be advantages in choosing a site near a town, subject to consideration
of possible friction between local inhabitants and refugees.
Climatic Conditions, Local Health and Other Risks
36. Settlement areas should be free of major environmental
health hazards such as malaria, onchocerciasis (river blindness),
schistosomiasis (bilharzia) or tsetse fly. A site may have unseen and/or
irregular (but often locally known) risks such as flash flooding, or serious
industrial pollution. For sites in dust prone areas, regular dust clouds can
foster respiratory diseases. Emergency and temporary shelter need protection
from high winds, however, a daily breeze is an advantage. Climatic conditions
should be suitable year-round and careful account should be taken of seasonal
variations: a suitable site in the dry season may be untenable in the rains.
Likewise, mountainous areas may be suitable in summer, while in winter the
temperatures may fall way below freezing. Seasonal variation can have a
considerable impact on the type and cost of shelter, infrastructure, heating
fuel and even diet. As far as possible, refugees should not be settled in an
area where the climate differs greatly from that to which they are accustomed.
For example, settling refugees from malaria-free high ground in a marshy area
where the disease is endemic can be disastrous.
Vegetation
37. The site should have a good ground cover (grass, bushes,
trees). Vegetation cover provides shade, and reduces erosion and dust. During
site preparation, care should be taken to do as little damage as possible to
this vegetation and topsoil. If heavy equipment is used, indiscriminate
bulldozing or removal of top-soil has to be avoided at all costs. If wood must
be used as domestic cooking fuel or for the construction of shelter, the
refugees should be encouraged not to cover their needs at the site or in the
immediate vicinity. Rather, a more dispersed pattern of wood collection should
be encouraged, in coordination with local forestry authorities (see section on
site planning and management of natural resources below). A quick survey of
vegetation and biomass availability for these purposes should be undertaken. The
site should not be located near areas which are ecologically or environmentally
protected or fragile.
Site Selection Methodology
Obtain agreement among the planning team on site selection
criteria;
i. Prioritize the criteria list;
ii. Obtain suitable maps and other information
showing topography, road networks, land use and water sources;
iii. Determine site characteristics through site
visits, identifying any potential flaws that would exclude use of the site (e.g.
no water, flood-prone);
iv. Make simple estimates of the surface area of
each of the potential sites, e.g. use vehicle trip-meter to estimate distances,
or, if feasible, use other methods such as Global Positioning System (see
chapter 11 on population estimation and registration);
v. Assess the implications of different layouts on
the potential sites and rank the sites on the basis of the criteria
list.
Site Planning: General Considerations
· The overall
physical layout of a site should reflect a decentralized community-based
approach focusing on family, village or other social groups.
· Site planning
should use the "bottom up" approach starting from the characteristics and needs
of the individual family, and reflect the wishes of the community as much as
possible.
Introduction
38. The physical organization of the settlement will markedly
affect the health and well-being of a community. Good site planning will also
facilitate an equitable and efficient delivery of goods and services.
Whatever the circumstances, the overriding aim must be to
avoid high density refugee camps.
Master Plan
39. A "master plan" or overall site plan should show the overall
configuration of the site, its surroundings and characteristics, and its
location vis-a-vis natural and existing features including settlements. The plan
should take into account the social organization of the refugees and principles
of module planning, and should cover the following physical features.
40. Natural and existing features:
i. Contours (lines joining points of identical
elevation are called contour lines);
ii. Rivers, forests, hills, flood plains,
swamps;
iii. Rocky patches, sandy soils;
iv. Existing buildings, roads, bridges;
v. Farm land, electrical power grid, water
pipelines.
41. Planned features:
i. Shelter areas, potential expansion
areas;
ii. Roads and footpaths;
iii. Drainage system and terracing;
iv. Environmental sanitation plan;
v. Water distribution plan;
vi. Utilities, camp lighting, etc.;
vii. Administration areas;
viii. Educational and health
facilities;
ix. Distribution points;
x. Feeding centres;
xi. Markets and recreation areas;
xii. Fire prevention breaks;
xiii. Agricultural plots.
42. A topographical and planimetric survey is crucial as the
basis for site planning. The plan or map should have a metric scale between
1:1,000 and 1:5,000, and in case of large camps a scale of 1:10,000 or above. A
topographical survey describes the physical features of a landscape (rivers,
valleys, mountains). A planimetric survey describes locations within an area
(e.g. the camp site).
Services and Infrastructure
43. The following are standards for services and infrastructure
and should be referred to when preparing the master plan:
1 water tap
per
1 community (80-100 persons)
1 latrine
per
1 family (6-10 persons)
1 health centre
per
1 site (20,000 persons)
1 referral hospital
per
10 sites (200,000 persons)
1 school block
per
1 sector (5,000 persons)
4 distribution points
per
1 site (20,000 persons)
1 market
per
1 site (20,000 persons)
1 feeding centre
per
1 site (20.000 persons)
2 refuse drums
per
1 community (80- 100 persons)
44. There are two situations for which planning is required:
i. Reorganizing existing spontaneously developed
sites;
ii. New sites.
The design standards to be applied should be the same in each
case, although methods, approach and timing, may differ substantially.
45. Where refugees have spontaneously settled they may be
understandably reluctant to relocate. In such cases involvement of
representatives of the refugees in planning will usually facilitate a better
understanding and acceptance by the refugees of priority changes. An early and
clear demarcation of plots, including areas reserved for services, is advisable.
Comprehensive but swift planning is essential for a new
site.
Modular Planning
46. Planning should start from the perspective of the individual
refugee family. Begin by considering the needs of the individual household, such
as distance to water and latrines; the relationship to other members of the
community (other relatives, clan, or ethnic groups); and traditional housing and
living arrangements. Developing the community layout in this way, and then
considering the larger issues of overall site layout, is likely to yield much
better results than beginning with a preconception of the complete site layout
and breaking it down into smaller entities.
47. Thus planning and physical organization of the site should
start from the smallest module, the family, and then building up larger units as
follows:
Module
Consisting of
Aprox. No. Of persons
Family
1 family
4-6 persons
1 community
16 families
80 persons
1 block
16 communities
1,250 persons
1 sector
4 blocks
5.000 persons
1 camp module
4 sectors
20.000 persons
These figures are indicative and should be adjusted according to
actual conditions.
48. Modular planning does not necessarily mean using a grid
layout for the site. The linear or grid layout, with square or rectangular areas
separated by parallel streets, has often been used for its simplicity of design
and speed of implementation. However, every effort should be made to avoid a
rigid grid design which promotes high density settlements since environmental
health problems and disease are directly proportional to population density.
Whatever design is used should take account of the natural features of the site
and of the identity of the refugee community.
49. The social organization, background and family structure,
are all factors that will influence the physical layout of a site. Initially,
this information, which is part of the basic problem and needs assessment should
be gathered through discussions with the refugees and others knowledgeable about
their society. A full socio-economic survey of the refugee population should be
conducted once resources allow, and will be important in subsequent planning,
particularly for self-reliance and durable solutions.
Environmental Considerations
50. Environmental considerations have to be integrated into
physical planning and shelter from the very start of an emergency. Location and
layout of refugee camps, provisions made for emergency shelter, and the use of
local resources for construction and fuel, can have a major negative
environmental impact. It is in the earlier stages of an emergency where the
greatest environmental damage can occur:
This environmental damage has health, social and economic
consequences for the refugees and local population, and can have political
repercussions.
51.
Rehabilitation effectively starts in the emergency phase, and
the costs of environmental damage can be substantially reduced by early
environmental action in an emergency.
52. In order to safeguard the welfare of refugees and local
population by protecting their environment, the following steps can be taken:
i. Site selection: avoid environmentally protected
areas. Where possible, a site should be located a day's walk from protected
areas or reserves;
ii. Site preparation: preserve existing vegetation
and top-soil;
iii. Camp density and size: generally, the
smaller the settlements the better;
iv. Camp layout: the layout (particularly roads)
should follow the contour lines. This will reduce erosion and preserve topsoil,
and avoid the creation of dangerous gullies. A site layout that encourages
clustered living arrangements (which can also promote security) promotes sharing
of resources including cooking which reduces fuel consumption;
v. Shelter design (energy saving through
insulation): In cold climates, with extended winter seasons where continuous
heating is needed, passive energy saving measures, e.g. sufficient insulation of
roof, walls, floors can be extremely fuel saving and cost-effective over
time;
vi. Shelter and fuel: The materials for these often
come from the immediate surroundings of the camp. It is crucial to initiate at
the outset a system managing and controlling the use of local natural resources
including wood for construction and fuel. Meeting the initial need for shelter
materials from the local resources can be particularly destructive - so
collection of such materials should be carefully managed, and/or materials
should be provided from an alternative source.
53. A simple natural resources management plan should be drawn
up as soon as possible. A key feature of a basic plan will be controlled
harvesting and collection of fuel-wood and timber. This should be discussed with
government bodies, such as forestry departments. Controlled fuel-wood and timber
harvesting in the vicinity of the camp can include: defining certain areas and
trees (by marking) which should not be harvested, allowing only dead wood to be
collected; establishing an environmental awareness programme to define clear
rules from the outset regarding harvesting fuel-wood and to encourage respect
for the local resources; assigning responsibility for managing and harvesting
certain areas to certain groups.
54. The decision on supplying fuel-wood from outside the
vicinity of the camp (e.g. trucking in wood), how to supply it and the quantity
which is necessary, must be taken according to the specifics of the situation.
The organized supply of fuel-wood or other fuel such as kerosene can have
complex repercussions and should be instituted with care. Organized supply of
free fuel on a regular basis is only appropriate in certain circumstances:
for example, where there are severe restrictions on fuel from other sources.
Where fuel-wood is also readily available locally, its distribution free of
charge from outside the vicinity may actually lead to increased consumption. In
addition, refugees rely on local natural resources for income, therefore if free
fuel-wood is provided for cooking purposes, collection of wood will continue for
income generating purposes (e.g. the sale of fuel-wood or timber, charcoal
making, etc.). To retain its value therefore, fuel-wood should generally be
supplied in return for work.
55. The source and impact of wood supplied to the refugees needs
also to be considered:
i. Is it being harvested sustainably?
ii. Are the environmental problems merely being
moved elsewhere?
Care should be taken to prevent emergence of local monopolistic
suppliers. Finally, it should be remembered that, if it is necessary to
introduce free fuel supply in the initial stages of an emergency, it will be
difficult to later modify such arrangements.
56. A more comprehensive natural resource management plan for
the site and its immediate surroundings should be drawn up as soon as possible
(with specialist advice if necessary).
Such a plan should be based on a baseline environmental
survey.
The comprehensive natural resource management plan would cover,
in addition to controlled harvesting of timber for fuel mentioned earlier:
promotion of fuel saving stoves and fuel efficient cooking techniques, supply of
key energy saving devices (e.g. lids with cooking pots, provision of mills or
milled grain), awareness raising programmes, identifying the scope for better
use of existing natural resources (e.g. using waste water, common areas, and
areas around shelters), for kitchen gardens and tree planting, and reforestation
where necessary.
Gender Considerations
57. In emergencies there may be a loss of normal community
participation and the changes in demographic proportions may have altered values
and principles. This may mean disruption of traditional mechanisms for the
protection and assistance of women. This change of social patterns in refugee
communities may also result in:
i. Increased numbers of female headed
households;
ii. Large numbers of unaccompanied
children;
iii. Shortage of men;
iv. Disruption of the extended family, with its role
as social caretaker.
58. It is important that the needs of women are taken into
account in site planning. It may be difficult to reach women if they do not
traditionally form part of the leadership structure of the community. In such
cases the community extension workers should be able to assist in obtaining
views on the protection and security of women.
59. Among the refugees may be those who are unable to build
their own shelters because of vulnerabilities. Specific actions should be taken
to ensure that the refugee community themselves are organized to assist the more
vulnerable refugees with their shelter
construction.
Site Planning: Specific Infrastructure
· Under-estimation
of surface area required for social infrastructure and communal services is a
common problem.
60. At the start of an emergency it may be difficult to foresee
all the administrative and communal services that are likely to be required.
Where adequate space is available, free areas should be allocated for future
expansion of these services. Under-estimation of the space required for future
communal needs is a common problem in sites of limited area.
Sanitation
61. While water requirements often determine site selection,
sanitation requirements often dictate site layout. High population density
together with poor sanitation is a severe threat to health and safety of the
refugees. This is often the case when sites have developed in an unplanned way.
Minimal organization of basic sanitation should be introduced before
reorganizing the site or transferring the refugees to a new site. This should
include prohibiting uncontrolled defecation and the establishment of public
latrines. Sufficient space must be left for replacement latrines. If communal
latrines are unavoidable, there should be a plan for their maintenance and they
should be accessible by road to facilitate this.
62. For all sites, new or reorganized, the goal should be one
latrine per family. Only if the latrine remains under the control and
maintenance of a family group is safety and hygiene assured in the long run. The
ideal location of the family latrine is on the family plot, as far as possible
from the shelter.
Water Supply
63. Where possible, the maximum distance between any shelter and
a water distribution point should be not more than 100 m, no more than a few
minutes walk. The layout of the site should contain the water distribution grid
as an integral part of the service plan and the pipes should be underground.
Water pipes should be kept at a depth that traffic or other surface activities
do not cause damage (40 to 60 cm). In countries with very low temperatures, the
pipes must be positioned at frost free depth (60 to 90 cm). Experience shows
that water distribution to small, socially cohesive groups of 80 to 100 persons
reduces water wastage considerably and reduces destruction of taps, standposts
and concrete aprons. The water distribution point is more likely to be kept well
drained and hygienic and the waste water used to irrigate communal or individual
vegetable gardens.
64. Effluent and used water from water supply points should be
well drained and eventually absorbed in soakage pits or gardens.
Roads
65. A site should have access and internal roads and pathways
connecting the various areas and facilities. Accessroads should be all-weather
roads above flood levels and have adequate drainage. If there has to be a
significant amount of vehicle traffic on the site, it should be separated from
pedestrian traffic. All structures, including fences, should be set back some 5
to 7 m from roads to provide adequate visibility for pedestrians and vehicles.
Fire Prevention
66. As a rule of thumb a firebreak (area with no buildings) 30 m
wide is recommended for approximately every 300 m of built-up area. In modular
camps firebreaks should be situated between blocks. This area will be an ideal
for growing vegetables or recreation. If space allows, the distance between
individual buildings should be great enough to prevent collapsing, burning
buildings from touching adjacent buildings. The distance between structures
should therefore be a minimum of twice the overall height of any structure, if
building materials are highly inflammable (straw, thatch, etc.) the distance
should be increased to 3 to 4 times the overall height. The direction of any
prevailing wind will also be an important consideration.
Administrative and Communal Services
67. Buildings for administrative and communal services should be
traditional structures, if possible of a multipurpose design to facilitate
alternative uses. For example, buildings for initial emergency services could
later be used as schools or other community facilities. The following list
includes administrative and communal services most often needed, the division is
indicative only - the importance of maximum decentralization has already been
stressed. Whether centralized or decentralized, administrative and other
facilities should be located and designed so as they are accessible to women as
well as men.
68. Services and facilities likely to be centralized are:
i. Site administrative office;
ii. Services coordination offices for health care,
feeding programmes, water supply, education, etc.;
iii. Warehousing and storage;
iv. Initial registration/health screening
area;
v. Tracing service;
vi. Therapeutic feeding centre (if
required).
69. Services and facilities likely to be decentralized:
i. Bathing and washing areas;
ii. Supplementary feeding centres (if
required);
iii. Education facilities;
iv. Institutional centres (e.g. for the disabled and
unaccompanied children, if required);
v. Recreation areas;
vi. Commodity distribution centres.
70. The location of the centralized services will depend on the
specific situation and in particular on the space available. Where sufficient
space is available, there may be clear advantages in having the centralized
services in the centre of the camp. Where space is scarce, it may be better to
have the centralized services located near the entrance to the camp. In
particular, this will avoid the trucks delivering supplies having to drive
through a densely populated site, with the attendant problems of dust, noise and
danger to pedestrians. If some form of closed camp is unavoidable, at least the
centralized administrative services will probably have to be located near the
entrance. The warehouses should always be near the administrative office for
reasons of
security.
Shelter
· Refugee shelter
must provide protection from the elements, space to live and store belongings,
privacy and emotional security;
· Blankets and
clothing must be provided if necessary;
· Refugee housing
should be culturally and socially appropriate and familiar. Suitable local
materials are best, if available;
· Shelter must be
suitable for the different seasons;
· Except for tents
in certain circumstances, prefabricated or special emergency shelter has not
proved to be a practical option on either cost or cultural grounds;
· Wherever possible,
refugees should build their own housing, with the necessary organizational and
material support.
Introduction
71. Shelter must, at a minimum, provide protection from the
elements, space to live and store belongings, privacy and emotional security.
Shelter is likely to be one of the most important determinants of general living
conditions and is often one of the largest items of non-recurring expenditure.
While the basic need for shelter is similar in most emergencies, such
considerations as the kind of housing needed, what materials and design are
used, who constructs the housing and how long it must last will differ
significantly in each situation.
72. Particularly in cold climates or where there are daily
extremes of temperature, lack of adequate shelter and clothing can have a major
adverse effect on health and nutritional status.
Thus, in addition to shelter, provision of sufficient
blankets, appropriate clothing and heaters will be a high priority.
73. The first steps are to assess the adequacy of any emergency
shelter arrangements refugees have already made themselves, and to meet
immediate needs through provision of simple local materials.
The key to providing an adequate shelter is provision of a
roof.
If materials for a complete shelter cannot be provided,
provision of adequate roof materials will be the priority, as walls can usually
be made of earth or other materials found on site or locally available.
74. Wherever possible, refugees should build or assist in
building their own housing, with the necessary organizational and material
support. This will help to ensure that the housing will meet their particular
needs, will reduce their sense of dependence, and can cut costs considerably.
Type of Shelter
75. Individual family shelter should be always preferred to
communal accommodation as it provides the necessary privacy, psychological
comfort, emotional safety and a territorial claim for future security. It
provides safety and security for people and possessions and helps to preserve or
rebuild family unity.
76. Emergency shelter needs are best met by using the same
materials or shelter as would be normally used by the refugees or the local
population. Only if adequate quantities cannot be quickly obtained locally
should emergency shelter material be brought into the country. The simplest
structures, and labour-intensive building methods, are to be preferred.
Materials should be environmentally benign or gathered in a sustainable manner.
Standards
77. At the beginning of an emergency, the aim should be to
provide sufficient materials to the refugees to allow them to construct shelter
meeting at least the minimum standards for floor space, which in emergencies
are:
i. minimum of 3.5 m2 per person in
tropical, warm climates, excluding cooking facilities or kitchen (it is assumed
that cooking will take place outside);
ii. 4.5 m2 to 5.5 m2 per
person in cold climates or urban situations including the kitchen and bathing
facilities.
78. The design of shelter should if possible provide for
modification by the occupants to suit their individual needs. In cold climates,
for example, it is very likely that people, in particular children and old
people, remain inside the shelter throughout the day, hence more space is
required.
Plastic Sheeting
79. Plastic sheeting has become the most important shelter
component in many relief operations. In urban areas roofs can be repaired with
specialized UV-resistant heavy duty plastic sheeting. Windows can be repaired
with translucent reinforced panels. Tents and emergency shelters can be covered
with highly reflective UV-resistant woven plastic tarpaulins.
80. Wooden support-frames and stick skeletons for these
shelters, if collected from surrounding forests, can harm the environment
considerably. It is therefore important to always supply frame material (which
is sufficient to support plastic). The frame material should come from
sustained, renewable supply sources. Bamboo is ideal, if available. Standard
specifications for plastic sheeting can be found in Annex 1 to chapter 18 on
supplies and transport.
Tents
81. Tents may be useful and appropriate for example when local
materials are either not available at all or are only seasonally available or
for refugees of nomadic background. The life-span of an erected tent depends on
the climate and the care given by its occupants; it may be as long as 2 to 3
years. Where tents are used, repair materials should be provided to the
occupants. A group of tents may also serve as transit accommodation while more
appropriate shelter is constructed. Standard specifications for tents can be
found in Annex 1 to chapter 18 on supplies and transport.
82. Tents should be covered with an outer fly to shade and
protect the tent below. The tent should provide free standing height all over
the floor area. Tents are difficult to heat as canvas walls and roof cannot
provide insulation against heat loss. However, it is possible to some extent to
heat a good, well sealed tent, if enough heat is produced in a tent stove. This
stove needs fuel (usually wood or kerosene) around the clock to maintain a
comfortable temperature. The fuel cost will be high. Therefore tents are not
suitable as cold climate shelters, but if there is no choice, they can save
lives and bridge the time until more suitable shelters are established.
Prefabricated Shelters
83. Neither pre-fabricated building systems nor specially
developed emergency shelter units, even winterized shelter units, have proved
effective in large scale refugee emergencies. Reasons include:
i. High unit cost;
ii. Long shipping time;
iii. Long production time;
iv. Transport problems including cost of
transport;
v. Inflexibility.
Usually emergency shelter arrangements will have been made
before these systems can arrive.
Shelter for Cold Conditions
84. Climates where cold weather with rain and snow prevails over
extended periods (3 to 5 months), demand that people live primarily inside a
house. In particular, the more vulnerable persons such as the elderly, small
children, the sick and the handicapped need heated, enclosed spaces.
85. Shelters which are sufficient to withstand cold conditions
have to be of a high standard and are complex and expensive to build. The
following should be considered:
i. Wind protection of walls, roofs, doors and
windows;
ii. Insulated enclosed space, with simple dividers;
iii. Heating stoves;
iv. Structural stability (to withstand snow- and
wind-loads);
v. Protected and heated kitchens and sanitary
facilities.
86. To help people survive the impact of cold weather in an
emergency, a strategy should focus on the following:
i. Individual survival.
It is extremely important to protect the human body
from loss of heat. Particularly during sleep, it is important to be able to keep
warm, by being able to generate and retain body heat with blankets, sleeping
bags, clothing and shoes, and food with high calorific value;
ii. The living space.
It is very important to concentrate on a limited
living space and to ensure that cold air can be kept out of this space. This can
be done by sealing the room with plastic sheeting and sealing tapes. Windows and
doors should be covered with translucent plastic sheeting, stapled on window and
door frames. Large rooms should be subdivided, with the help of plastic sheets
or blankets. New structures should be constructed with a sealed space to keep
the cold air out. Walls, ceilings and floors of the living space should be
designed to insulate from cold air and to retain warm air as efficiently as
possible;
iii. Heating.
Keeping the inside of a shelter at a, comfortable
temperature (15 to 19° C) depends to a large extent on the outside
temperature, the type of construction, the quality of insulation, the
orientation of the building, and on the type and capacity of the stove.
Depending on these conditions, a stove with 5 to 7 kW performance should have
the capacity to heat a space of 40 to 70 m2 in most cold areas.
Usually the stove for heating is used for cooking and baking as
well.
87. For reasons of safety, convection stoves are recommended
over radiation stoves. Fuel efficiency is very important as fuel may not be
readily available, and its supply can pose major logistical problems.
Overlooking regular fuel supply in the beginning can have very negative
environmental
consequences.
Reception and Transit Camps
88. Reception and transit camps are used where it is necessary
to provide temporary accommodation for refugees. These camps might be necessary
at the beginning of a refugee emergency as a temporary accommodation pending
transfer to a suitable, safe, longer term holding camp, or at the end of an
operation, prior to repatriation, as a staging point for return. Reception and
transit camps are therefore usually either intermediate or short term
installations.
89. Whether the transit camp is used in an emergency or as part
of a repatriation operation, the camp should be designed for short stays of 2 to
5 days and a high turnover rate.
90. The required capacity of a transit camp will depend
primarily on how many people will be channelled through the camp and in what
time. This will depend on the absorption or reintegration capacity at the
receiving end as well as the total time foreseen to carry through the operation.
91. The primary criteria for site selection for a transit camp
are:
i. Good access (road, port, airport);
ii. The availibility of water;
iii. Good drainage (minimum 2% slope);
iv. Adequate conditions for sanitation.
92. The transit camp must be strictly functional and equipped
with considerably higher construction standards than regular refugee camps.
Operational maintenance must be fully supplied through the camp management. In
particular, cleaning and disinfection of accommodation and sanitation areas need
to be carried out on a regular and ongoing basis. Prepared food should be
provided and individual food preparation should be prohibited. The transit camp
will therefore need kitchen facilities, wet food distribution and a hall for
food consumption. In view of the expected short-term stay, a minimum of 3
m2 per person is needed.
93. Standards for the construction of transit facilities are:
Accommodation: in barracks, long houses (open plan or
subdivision for groups/families of 5 persons) heated in cold climates. For
example, a tent of 85 m2 can accommodate approximately 14 to 25
persons;
i. Sanitation: 20 persons per latrine, 50 persons
per shower. Regular and intensive maintenance is required;
ii. Water supply: absolute minimum provision of 7
litres/person/day plus water required for kitchens, cleaning and
sanitation;
iii. Food preparation: approximately 100 m2
per 500 persons;
iv. Storage: 150 to 200 m3 per 1,000
persons;
v. A public address system;
vi. Lighting;
vii. Arrival zones and departure zones which are
separated from accommodation zones;
viii. Administrative offices and staff
accommodation;
ix. One health post;
x. Security fencing (depending on
circumstances).
Public Buildings and Communal Facilities
· Public buildings
should be used only as short term accommodation to gain time to provide more
suitable shelter;
· Right from the
beginning, intensive maintenance of infrastructure and utilities should be
provided;
· The UNHCR shelter
standards should be applied.
94. Public buildings such as schools are sometimes used
initially as shelter. This is particularly the case in cold conditions which
demand very rapid shelter response.
95. Where possible such accommodation in public buildings should
be a temporary solution. The supporting infrastructure of the building (water,
electricity, sanitation) will deteriorate very quickly with concentrated use, to
the extent that living conditions can become dangerously unhealthy. The
buildings decay rapidly primarily because they are unsuited to such large
numbers and lack the necessary infrastructure and utilities. In addition the
very low sense of responsibility by its inhabitants contributes to the
deterioration.
96. The normal use of the building has to be suspended with
various social and economic consequences (the buildings might otherwise be used
for example as schools, sanatoria, workers' or students' dormitories, sports
halls and hotels). Both local and national governments are therefore reluctant
to transform public buildings into humanitarian shelter.
97. In order to ensure a healthy environment, it is particularly
important to ensure regular operational and preventive maintenance in public
buildings. Neglecting to maintain a building from the outset can have serious
health consequences for the refugees, and economic consequences for the host
government.
98. The UNHCR minimum shelter standard of some 3.5 to 5.5
m2 per person should be applied, as well as the standard for public
sanitation (maximum 20 persons per toilet/latrine). Public buildings, such as
schools, are not equipped to serve the sanitation needs of large populations
including basic toilet use, as well as personal hygiene such as laundry and
cleaning
dishes.
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
13. Commodity Distribution
(introduction...)
Overview
When to start distribution
Choosing a Commodity Distribution System
Components of Distribution Systems
The Role of Refugee Women
Monitoring
Key References
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
13. Commodity Distribution
Figure
Overview
Situation
Emergency situations are characterized by an urgent need to
distribute life sustaining commodities such as food, shelter materials, cooking
implements and fuel. The fair distribution of commodities is often problematic
and groups and individuals from among the refugees can use the confusion of the
emergency to obtain unfair control over the resources which are distributed.
Objectives
To provide life-sustaining commodities to the refugee families,
fairly, according to specified rations, selection criteria and priorities.
Principles of response
· The design of the
distribution system should be based on a thorough understanding of the social
structure of the refugees;
· The refugees
should be kept continuously informed on the design of the distribution system,
on the timing of distributions and on the quantity of commodities to be
distributed;
· All groups among
the refugees should be appropriately involved in the design and operation of the
distribution system. Particular care must be taken to involve
women;
· The family as the
basic social unit plays the key role in meeting basic needs of individuals,
therefore, the family unit should be the target of commodity
distribution;
· The commodity
distribution cycle should be regular and predictable. Irregularities in the
distribution cycle increases the tendency of the refugees to circumvent the
system.
Action
· Use community
services structures (or set up new structures if necessary) to consult the
refugees on the design and operation of the commodity distribution
system;
· Select and
implement a commodity distribution system;
· Set up a system by
which information on the operation of the commodity distribution system can be
regularly conveyed to the mass of the refugees;
· Allow the refugees
themselves to monitor the fairness of the distribution system.
Introduction
· Distribution
passes control over a commodity to the intended beneficiaries. Distribution must
be fair, and commodities must be distributed according to specified rations,
selection criteria and priorities;
· Distribution must
be monitored to ensure that it is fair and reaches vulnerable
groups;
· However ingenious
the distribution system devised, it is unlikely to work fairly without the
support of the refugees themselves;
· UNHCR's
distribution systems should provide material assistance to and through
families.
1. The principles in the chapter apply to the distribution of
both food and non-food items, although food often forms the bulk of the
commodities distributed. This chapter provides brief guidance on the subject.
The handbook "Commodity Distribution: A Practical Guide For Field Staff" is
essential reading for those who plan to set up and run a commodity distribution
system (see Key References at the end of the
chapter).
When to start distribution
2. There is usually a degree of uncertainty when planning
distributions. Ideally, distribution of commodities should start only after a
full needs assessment has taken place and when the size of the beneficiary
population is accurately known. However, the reality of almost all emergency
programmes is that distributions must start prior to these ideal conditions
being reached. Try not to start distribution until there is at least a minimum
framework in place to build upon, and a plan as to how subsequent distributions
will be
improved.
Choosing a Commodity Distribution System
3. Two basic issues are:
i. How much responsibility should be given to the
refugees themselves; and,
ii. What resources are available to set up and run
the system (including time, space, experienced staff as well as financial
resources (see Table 1).
4. There are three broad categories of distribution system (see
Table 1). Note that the head of family can either be a woman or a man.
Distribution systems can be classified according to who
receives the commodities.
5. There will probably be a period in the early stages of an
emergency when it will not be possible to register or issue ration cards.
However, effective distribution of commodities is possible without ration cards.
Table 1 - Commodity Distribution Systems
Through Group Leadership
Through Groups of Heads of Family
Through Individual Heads of Family
System Description
Commodities are given in bulk to a representative of a large
group of beneficiaries who further divides it among the group.
All of the commodities for the group of families are
handed over to a representative of the group. The group usually
con- sists of about 20 heads of family. The commodities are then
im- mediately redistributed to the individual family heads by
the representatives.
Commodities are handed over directly to each family head.
Types of situation in which these systems have been
used
· Early days of an
emergency. · Mass influx of
refugees. · No formal registration. · Large populations.
· When the population
is comparatively stable, and/or have ration cards. · Where the beneficiaries are living in
camps. · Where the population
is comparatively homogeneous.
· When the population
is comparatively stable, and/or have ration cards. · Where the beneficiaries are living in camps,
settlements or integrated within the local population.
Amount of resources needed increases
Degree of self regulation by refugees increases
Components of Distribution Systems
General Considerations
6. The ideal distribution system should be safe and easily
accessible to the intended beneficiaries.
Safe: Distribution should be
organized in such a way that the system is safe for all who use it. Particular
attention should be given to women and the vulnerable;
Accessible: Distribution
points should be close to where people live and located so that the access of
particular groups is not restricted. The timing of distributions should suit the
beneficiaries.
7. The refugees themselves can provide the most effective
monitoring and control of the distribution system. In order to do this they must
be informed as to the type and quantity of commodities to be distributed and
method and timing to be used.
A system needs to be put in place whereby the refugees can be
continuously informed of changes in the quantity, type or method Of
distributions.
8. In the early stages of a new operation, particularly in large
emergencies, effective control over distribution may not be possible. However,
from the start, each action taken should contribute to a process whereby control
by UNHCR is progressively established. For example the provision of plastic
sheeting, tents and other shelter material is very important because it reduces
the mobility of the population. Once it is issued, the population can settle and
commodity distribution and other services will be easier to organize.
Refugee Involvement
9. Ensure the refugees are well informed (both women and men).
They must know what they should receive, how much, when and how. This
information should come to them directly rather than through their leadership.
The refugees should be able to see the distribution process
for themselves as they are the best monitors and controllers of the process.
Ensure that the refugees participate at all levels of the
distribution process. However, be aware of the dangers of non-representational
leadership (see chapter 7 on coordination and site level organisation).
10. Irregularities in the distribution cycle undermine the
confidence of the beneficiaries and increase their need to circumvent the
system.
Logistical Considerations
11. In camps, the distribution system should allow beneficiaries
to collect rations close to where they live (not more than 5 km away) and at
regular monthly intervals. For dispersed populations refugees should not have to
travel more than 5 to 10 km to distribution sites.
12. In the case of food distribution, it is usually preferable
to distribute dry uncooked rations in bulk. Avoid mass cooked food distribution
for the general ration (see chapter 15 on food and nutrition).
Managerial Considerations
13. Distributing relief commodities involves several
organizations and many individuals, for example, the government, WFP and NGOs.
Co-ordination structures must be put in place, including regular meetings of all
interested parties. The frequency of these meetings will depend on the
situation. At the start of an emergency daily meetings will probably be needed.
As the situation normalizes the frequency of meetings can be reduced to one per
month.
14. It is important to understand the roles and responsibilities
of the main actors involved at various stages of commodity distribution. In the
case of food distribution the modalities of distribution as well as the
reporting requirements are set out in a tripartite agreement between UNHCR, WFP
and the implementing partner. The respective roles of UNHCR and WFP in relation
to food aid are set out in their Memorandum of Understanding (Appendix 3). See
Chapter 15 on food and nutrition for more information on food distribution and
on of the role of WFP.
15. The family, as a basic social unit, is the target of
distribution. This applies to food and non-food items. Providing assistance to
and through families is effective as the basis for the distribution system and
also supports the family unit. However this does not mean that the ration has to
be handed to each family directly. In some situations distribution can be more
effective through groups of families or other community structures.
16. Avoid payment in kind to distribution workers. It makes
monitoring difficult and, in times of shortages, vulnerable people may be
deprived of commodities in order to pay staff.
17. In camps, aim to have at least 1 distribution site per
20,000 refugees.
18. Plan to have a minimum of 2 distribution staff per 1,000
beneficiaries.
The Role of Refugee Women
UNHCR Policy
19. UNHCR's policy is to ensure the maximum possible appropriate
involvement of refugee women in all aspects of distribution. Determining the
nature of this involvement requires consultation with refugee women and men and
a careful evaluation of the totality of the needs and responsibilities of
refugee women and their families. Failure to take these considerations into
proper account can have negative implications that go well beyond the
distribution system itself.
20. In the great majority of refugee communities, the objective
of fair distribution will be best served by having an appropriate balance of men
and women. However, it is normally women, and in particular single female heads
of household, who are either under-represented or excluded.
Areas of Women's Involvement
21. There are three areas where refugee women can be involved:
In the decision-making
processes and monitoring;
In the distribution itself
(women supervise and/or hand out the commodities); and,
In collecting the commodities
(where they are distributed to women not men).
22. Women must be directly involved in decision-making and
monitoring, including being involved in planning the system and determining
their own participation in its implementation. Women should be members of the
commodity distribution or food committees.
23. Women should choose representatives who will be involved in
the distribution itself. The extent and nature of this participation will depend
on factors specific to that situation.
24. If women themselves feel that the most effective way to
ensure that they receive their fair share and to retain control of its use
thereafter, is by actually collecting, or at least being present at the
distribution of food and non-food items for their household (whether or not they
are its head), this should be
ensured.
Monitoring
25. Monitoring the distribution system is an important
management responsibility of UNHCR. General principles of monitoring are
described in chapter 8 on implementing arrangements. Monitoring distribution
includes monitoring the actual distribution of the commodity and spot checks in
the camps on distribution days. See chapter 15 on food and nutrition, and
"Commodity Distribution: A Practical Guide For Field Staff", for more details
about monitoring distribution
systems.
Key References
Commodity Distribution: A Practical Guide For Field
Staff, UNHCR, Geneva, 1997.
Memorandum of Understanding on the Joint Working Arrangements
for Refugee, Returnee and Displaced Persons Feeding Operations, UNHCR,
Geneva, 1997.
Model Tripartite Agreement: UNHCR, WFP and the Implementing
Partner, WFP/UNHCR, March 1998.
UNHCR Training Videos: Under Watchful Eyes, UNHCR, 1995 -
Sorting it Out, UNHCR,
1993.
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
14. Health
(introduction...)
Overview
Introduction
Health Assessment, Planning, Monitoring and Surveillance
Main Health Programmes
Organization of Refugee Health Care
Human Resources and Coordination
Key References
Annexes
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
14. Health
Figure
Overview
Situation
It is well known from experience that emergencies result in
excess loss of life (high mortality) and increased incidence of diseases (high
morbidity). The diseases mainly responsible for high mortality and morbidity are
measles, diarrhoeal diseases (including cholera), acute respiratory infections
(pneumonia), malnutrition and malaria. The factors which increase the risk of
disease and which should be addressed in any emergency response include an
unfamiliar environment, poverty, insecurity, overcrowding, inadequate quantities
and quality of water, poor environmental sanitation, inadequate shelter and
inadequate food supply.
Objectives
· To promote the
enjoyment of the highest attainable standards of physical and mental
health1, and to prevent excess mortality and morbidity.
Principles of Response
· Priority should be
given to a Primary Health Care (PHC) strategy focusing on the vital sectors of
water, food, sanitation, shelter and physical planning. In addition, preventive
and basic curative health services should be provided. The health of the
majority of the refugees is more likely to be affected by these measures than by
individual care;
· Refugee
participation in the development and provision of health services is
essential;
· Services provided
for refugees should be at a level equivalent to that appropriate to host country
nationals - i.e. there must be parity;
· The health
programme should also be sustainable. It is sometimes better not to start
activities which cannot be maintained, than to cease supporting activities which
both implementing partners and beneficiaries have come to take for
granted;
· The health
services must be of a quality that ensures that programmes, providers and
institutions respect patients' rights and comply with nationally and
internationally accepted health standards and principles of medical
ethics;
· Many countries
will not have sufficient human and material resources to respond adequately to
the extraordinary needs generated by an emergency. Experienced national and
international NGOs should be mobilized to initiate urgent life saving measures.
Rapid integration with the Ministry of Health (MOH) is essential;
· Health services
should take into account the particular vulnerability of children under five
years during emergencies. Priority should be given to immunizations, feeding
programmes, oral rehydration therapy, Vitamin A prophylaxis, basic curative care
and family health;
· Health services
should also take into account the special needs of women who play a central role
as primary health care providers and at the same time bear a disproportionate
share of suffering and hardship;
· A UNHCR Health
Coordinator should be appointed with responsibility for the health programme and
for ensuring that nationally and internationally accepted standards and best
practice are adhered to, in close coordination with the national health
authorities and other organizations.
Action
· Assess the health
and nutritional status of the population and identify the critical health risk
factors in the environmental conditions;
· Establish priority
needs, define the required activities to meet those needs and determine the
required human, material and financial resources to perform these
activities;
· In accordance with
these activities, set up community-based health services and devise the
appropriate organizational and coordination mechanisms both with the health
partners and the other relevant sectors of assistance;
· Promote basic
health education for the refugees and train refugee health workers;
· Monitor and
evaluate the effectiveness of the services and adjust as necessary;
· Ensure that
decisions about the health services are based on proper assessment and
surveillance;
· Communicate
information about the emergency situation and the health services for advocacy
purposes.
1International Covenant on Economic,
Social and Cultural rights", 1996, Article
12.
Introduction
1. Good health, depending as it does on so many non-medical
factors, is too big a subject to be left only to medical workers. This chapter
is directed at non-specialist staff in the field. It does not pretend to give
"medical answers" to health problems. It does however seek to show that proper
assessment of problems, needs and resources, appropriate organization and
coordination of public health and medical services based on a Primary Health
Care (PHC) strategy are more important to the overall health status of refugees
than curative medicine alone, see figure 1. These crucial organizational factors
are often the responsibility of non-medical UNHCR staff.
2. In an emergency, many refugees will be exposed to insecurity,
poor shelter, overcrowding, lack of sufficient safe water, inadequate
sanitation, inadequate or inappropriate food supplies and a possible lack of
immunity to the diseases of the new environment. Furthermore, on arrival,
refugees may already be in a debilitated state from disease, malnutrition,
hunger, fatigue, harassment, physical violence and grief. Poverty, powerlessness
and social instability, conditions that often prevail for refugees, can also
contribute to increased sexual violence and spread of sexually transmitted
diseases including the Human Immuno-deficiency Virus (HIV).
3. The World Health Organization (WHO) has summarized the
concept of Primary Health Care as follows: "PHC is essential health care made
accessible to everyone in the country; it is given in a way acceptable to
individuals, families, and the community, since it requires their full
participation; health care provided at a cost the community and the country can
afford. Though no single model is applicable everywhere, Primary Health Care
should include the following: promotion of proper nutrition, an adequate supply
of safe water, basic sanitation, reproductive and child care, including family
planning, appropriate treatment for common diseases and injuries, immunization
against major infectious diseases, prevention and control of locally endemic
diseases, education about common health problems and what can be done to prevent
and control them".
At the heart of such a strategy there is an emphasis on
preventive, as against curative care alone.
Figure
Health Assessment, Planning, Monitoring and Surveillance
· An assessment of
the health and nutritional status is an essential start to the provision of
health services;
· This must be done
by experts with experience of emergencies and, if possible, local
knowledge;
· The factors
affecting the health of the refugees must be identified and a surveillance and
reporting system established.
Initial Assessment
4. First, information should be obtained on the number of
refugees2 segregated by age (percentage of children under five years
of age) and sex (male/female ratio). See chapter 11 on registration for more
information on estimating the total number of refugees.
Age/sex breakdown can be estimated from:
i. Information collected during
surveys;
ii. Information collected during mass immunization
campaigns;
iii. Mass health screening on arrival;
iv. Information collected by community health
workers.
5. The aim of the initial health assessment is to identify basic
problems and needs and to establish priorities. It should be carried out by
people with appropriate qualifications and relevant experience. There are
obvious advantages in using national or locally-based personnel, but appropriate
outside expertise can be made available quickly and should be requested through
the Health and Community Development Section at Headquarters if necessary.
6. The priority should be to evaluate the incidence of the major
causes of excess mortality and morbidity - measles, diarrhoeas, pneumonia,
malaria and malnutrition.
7. Relevant information can be obtained from:
i. Direct observation;
ii. Reviewing baseline information regarding the
country/areas of origin and asylum;
iii. Analyzing records at health facilities and
interviewing health workers;
iv. Undertaking sample surveys (nutrition and
mortality). These must be done by experts;
v. Population estimation and registration (see
chapter 11 on population estimation and registration);
vi. Mass health and nutrition screening on arrival.
This should focus on: (i) nutrition screening through visual inspection and
measurement of the Mid Upper Arm Circumference ("MUAC"), (see chapter 15 on food
and nutrition), (ii) checking for communicable diseases and vaccination
coverage, and (iii) identifying patients in need of urgent referral. It is
usually impractical to try to provide treatment in the screening line
itself.
8. Figure 2 illustrates key management considerations for action
in light of the initial assessment.
2Health experts sometimes call this
number "the denominator".
Figure 2 - Assessment and
Response
Monitoring and Surveillance: The Health Information
System
9. From the earliest stages of an emergency, a health
information system should be put in place under the responsibility of the UNHCR
Health Coordinator. The health information system should be simple, reliable,
and action oriented, and its use will be essential to:
i. Quantify the health and nutritional status of the
refugee population;
ii. Follow trends in health status and monitor the
impact and outcomes of the relief programme;
iii. Detect epidemics;
iv. Evaluate programme effectiveness and service
coverage;
v. Ensure that resources are targeted to the areas
of greatest needs;
vi. Re-orient the programme as
necessary.
10. Annex 1 sets out the tables and forms for collecting
health-related information. However, to have a more comprehensive idea of the
situation, information regarding water, food, sanitation, shelter and
availability of soap should also be collected and analyzed (see the relevant
chapters on water, nutrition, sanitation, and physical planning).
11. The health information system should be kept simple. The
information to be collected should be adapted to suit the collectors'
qualifications. Overly detailed or complex reporting requirements will result in
non-compliance. In addition, only data that can and will be acted on should be
collected. Communication and exchange of views among all the actors in the
health information system are essential to secure the functioning of the system.
Only simple arrangements are effective in emergencies.
12. Health information in the initial stages of an emergency
should concentrate on:
i. Demography (see chapter 11 on registration, also
paragraph 4 above, and table 1 of Annex 1);
ii. Mortality and its causes (see tables 2.1 and 2.2
of Annex 1 and paragraph 14 below);
iii. Nutritional status (see Annexes 4 and 5 of
chapter 15 on food and nutrition);
iv. Morbidity (see below, and table 3.1 of Annex
1).
13. Only when the situation stabilizes can the system be made
more comprehensive. Information on mortality and morbidity should be collected
as follows:
Mortality
14. Each health facility should keep a log of all patient deaths
with cause of death and relevant demographic information. This information
should be summarized in tables 2.1 and 2.2 of Annex 1, reported centrally and
consolidated with other data. Because many deaths occur outside the health-care
system, a community-based mortality surveillance system should also be
established. Such a system requires identifying sites which people are using as
cemeteries, employing grave watchers on a 24 hours basis, routinely issuing
burial shrouds, and using community informants. Deaths that occur outside
hospitals with unknown causes should be validated through verbal autopsy by
health workers specifically trained for this task.
Morbidity
15. Each health facility providing out-patient services
(including clinics for under five's and selective feeding programmes) should
keep daily records. These records should be in the form of a log book or tally
sheets at least, and should at least record the patient's name, age, sex,
clinical and laboratory diagnosis and treatment. This information should be
summarized in the forms set out as tables 3.1. in Annex 1 and reported
centrally.
16. Diseases recorded in the health information system must have
a case definition (i.e. a standard description) which will guide health workers
in their diagnosis and ensure the consistency and validity of data. Where
possible, case definitions that rely on clinical signs and symptoms (e.g.
malaria) should be checked against a laboratory standard test (e.g. blood test
for malaria).
17. In addition, the patient should be issued a health record
card (or "Road to Health" card) on which the date, diagnosis, and treatment are
recorded. Every contact a patient has with the health-care system, whether for
curative or preventive services, should be noted on the health record card
retained by the patient.
18. The health information system should be periodically
assessed to determine its accuracy, completeness, simplicity, flexibility, and
timeliness. The way programme planners and key decision-makers use the
information should also be assessed. The system should evolve as the need for
information changes.
19. Camp and centrally controlled monitoring of health and
nutritional status is essential if problems are to be identified in time to
allow preventive and/or corrective actions to be taken and to adjust resource
allocation. The refugees' health status should improve as public health services
start to function adequately and the refugees adjust to their new environment.
20. However, a vigilant surveillance system must be maintained.
Seasonal changes will affect health (for example temperature changes, and
especially the rainy season) so seasonal variations in the incidence of disease
will remain. The UNHCR Health Coordinator and her/his counterparts in the
government and other partners will be responsible for the quality of this
surveillance, the data required, who will interpret it and how to ensure action
on the results and feed-back to all actors.
Mortality
21. The most important and specific indicators of the overall
status of the refugee population are the Crude Mortality Rate (CMR), for the
whole population and Under-5 Mortality Rate (U-5MR) for children under five
years of age. These indicators are of crucial importance to managers of the
operation and are also of great interest to the media, donors and relief
agencies. A priority for the health surveillance system is to produce reliable
information on death rates.
22. During the emergency phase, mortality rates should be
expressed as deaths/10,000 persons/day so that sudden changes can be detected.
Crude Mortality Rate is
deaths/10,000/day.
This is calculated as follows:
23. The objective of the overall assistance programme in the
emergency phase should be to achieve CMR of <1/10,000/day and U-5MR of
<2/10,000/day as soon as possible. These rates still represent approximately
twice the "normal" CMR and U-5MR for non-displaced populations in most
developing nations and should not signal a relaxation of efforts.
24. Age and sex-specific mortality rates have to be collected
systematically and may indicate the need for targeted interventions. Table 1
below shows some benchmarks against which the daily Crude Mortality Rate (CMR)
can be compared. Under-5 Mortality Rate benchmarks are usually twice the CMR.
Table 1 - Crude Mortality Rate Benchmarks
Average rate in most
developing countries
0.5 deaths/10,000/day
Relief programme: under control
<1.0 deaths/10,000/day
Relief programme: very
serious situation
>1.0 deaths/10,000/day
Emergency: out of control
>2.0 deaths/10,000/day
Major catastrophe
>5.0 deaths/10,000/day
Morbidity (incidence and types of disease)
25. Knowing the major causes of illness and the groups at
greatest risk helps efficient planning of intervention strategies and the most
effective use of resources. Morbidity incidence is the number of new cases of a
given disease among the population over a certain period of time, usually
expressed per 1,000. It is more useful to follow this than to keep a simple
tally of cases, as trends can be followed over time, or compared with other
situations. Morbidity incidence should be recorded as set out in Tables 3.1 and
3.2 in Annex
1.
Main Health Programmes
· The main causes of
death and diseases in emergency situations are measles, diarrhoeas (including
cholera), acute respiratory infections, malnutrition and malaria (where
prevalent). Priority should be placed on programmes to reduce the negative
impact of these diseases;
· Other causes of
morbidity include tuberculosis, meningitis, vector-borne diseases, sexually
transmitted diseases including HIV/AIDS, pregnancy and obstetric3
complications, and childhood vaccine-preventable diseases;
· The emotional
stress of displacement, often compounded by harassment, violence and grief
suffered by the refugees will combine to deplete their physical and emotional
reserves and reduce their natural resistance to diseases;
· Experience
underlines the importance of meeting the reproductive health needs of refugees,
and most particularly of women and adolescents;
· Early emphasis
should be placed on correcting environmental factors which adversely affect
health.
3Obstetrics: the branch of medicine
concerned with childbirth and the treatment of women before and after
childbirth.
Curative care
26. The peak of curative medical care is at the early stage,
when refugees are most vulnerable to their new environment with the health
hazards it poses and before it has been possible to achieve any major public
health improvements. Even though curative care alone will not meet the objective
of reducing excess loss of lives, it will create confidence among the refugees
towards the health services.
27. Appropriate diagnosis and treatment protocols of major
diseases must be defined in accordance with national protocols, if they are
suitable to the refugee context. There may be some exceptions to this rule, but
implementation of refugee specific protocols should always be previously agreed
upon with national authorities.
28. Remember to take into account deaths occurring outside the
health care system. A commonly documented error, committed by even excellent
clinicians who have become absorbed in a health facility, is to fail to notice
that cemeteries are being filled by refugees dying in their shelters, without
having been identified or referred to receive appropriate curative services.
Immunization
29. Measles has been documented as being responsible for excess
loss of lives, particularly but not exclusively among children under five years
of age.
Immunization against measles for young children is the only
essential immunization in the early stages of an emergency.
UNHCR advocates the immunization of children from 6 months up to
12 or even 15 years (rather than the more usual 5 years) because of the
increased risks from the living conditions in refugee emergencies.
30. The decision as to whether or not to undertake a measles
vaccination campaign at the onset of an emergency should be the responsibility
of an expert. The campaign should ideally be associated with, but not delayed
by, distribution of Vitamin A. The decision will be based on the vaccination
coverage reported in the country and area of origin and its reliability, and
whether there has been a recent epidemic or vaccination campaign. If there is a
need for a measles vaccination campaign, it should not be delayed until other
vaccines are available, and it should have appropriate mechanisms to ensure new
arrivals are vaccinated. The provision of vaccines should be discussed with
UNICEF (see the MOU between UNICEF and UNHCR, Appendix 3).
31. There are strong reasons, both medical and organizational,
not to have a mass immunization programme with all vaccines. The most common
causes of disease and death in the emergency phase cannot be cured or prevented
by immunizations (except measles). Mass immunization programmes require a large
number of workers, and vaccines need careful handling and controlled,
refrigerated conditions. Therefore undertaking such a campaign may represent a
misuse of time and resources in an emergency.
32. As soon as the emergency has stabilized there should be a
complete Expanded Programme of Immunization (EPI), which should form an integral
part of the ongoing long-term health programme. A standard EPI includes
diphtheria, pertusis and tetanus toxoid (DPT), oral polio (OPV), and BCG
(Bacille Calmette-Guerin) vaccines as well as measles. However, there should not
be a vaccination campaign against any of these (apart from measles), nor should
there be a complete EPI, unless the following criteria are met: the population
is expected to remain stable for at least 3 months; the operational capacity to
administer vaccine is adequate, and the programme can be integrated into the
national immunization programme within a reasonable length of time (see the MOU
between UNICEF and UNHCR, Appendix 3).
33. It is essential that adequate immunization records be kept.
At the very minimum, personal immunization (or "Road to Health") cards should be
issued. In addition, an independent central register of all immunizations is
desirable, to enable analysis of vaccination coverage.
Communicable Disease Control
· Emergency
conditions, particularly overcrowding, poor sanitation etc. will facilitate the
spread of communicable diseases;
· The aim is to
prevent, detect, control and treat diseases;
· Refugees are at
greatest risk if they are exposed to a disease against which they have not
acquired immunity (e.g. measles, malaria etc.);
· Communicable
disease outbreaks require an immediate on-the-spot expert investigation and
close coordination of the response with the national authorities, WHO and
partners as appropriate.
34. The main causes of death and morbidity among refugees in
emergencies are:
i. Measles,
ii. Diarrhoeal diseases,
iii. Acute respiratory infections,
iv. Malaria (where prevalent).
Moreover, the interaction between malnutrition and infection,
particularly among young children, contributes to increased rates of mortality.
Other communicable diseases - meningococcal
meningitis4, tuberculosis, sexually transmitted diseases (STDs),
hepatitis, typhoid fever, typhus and relapsing fever - have also been observed
among refugee populations. However, the contribution of these illnesses to the
overall burden of disease among refugees has been relatively small.
4 See World Health
Organization. Control of Epidemic Meningococcal Disease: WHO Practical
Guidelines, 1995.
Diarrhoeal Diseases
35. Diarrhoeal diseases represent a major public health problem
and acute epidemics of shigellosis (causing bloody diarrhoea dysentery) and
cholera, have become common in refugee emergencies and have resulted in excess
loss of lives. In risk areas, it is essential to set up appropriate preventive
measures as soon as possible. These measures include:
i. Adequate supply of potable water and an
appropriate sanitation system;
ii. Provision of soap and education on personal
hygiene and water management;
iii. Promotion of food safety and
breast-feeding;
iv. Reinforced home visiting and early case
detection;
v. Identification of an area ("cholera management
unit") to manage patients with cholera in case an epidemic occurs.
36. It is not possible to predict how a cholera outbreak will
develop. If proper preventive measures are taken less than 1% of the population
should be affected. Usually however, 1 to 3% are affected but in extreme cases
it can be more-even as much as 10%.
37. To be prepared to respond quickly to an outbreak, the above
preventive measures should be accompanied by the establishment of appropriate
protocols on case management. These protocols should be based on National or WHO
protocols and should be founded on rehydration therapy, continued feeding and
appropriate antibiotics (especially for shigellosis5). In addition,
there should be a reliable surveillance system for early detection of cholera
cases, to follow trends and determine the effectiveness of specific
interventions.
38. A significant amount of material, financial and experienced
human resources are likely to be needed to respond to a cholera outbreak and
reduce the case fatality rate.
39. To facilitate an immediate response, cholera kits can be
obtained from the Supply and Transport Section at Headquarters at short notice.
Each kit can cover the overall management of some 500 cases. No efficient
vaccine to prevent cholera outbreaks is as yet available.
5 See World Health
Organization. Guidelines for the control of Epidemics due to Shigella
Dysenteriae Type 1, 1995.
Measles
40. WHO has classified refugees and displaced populations,
especially in camps, as groups at highest risk for measles outbreaks. Indeed,
this disease has been devastating in many refugee situations. Measles
vaccination coverage should be as close as possible to 100%, if not, measures
should be taken immediately to control the situation (see the MOU between UNICEF
and UNHCR, Appendix 3, and paragraphs on immunization above).
Malaria
41. Malaria can also pose major problems. Its appropriate
management and control is also a matter for experts and is based on the
following:
i. Early case detection and appropriate treatment.
It may be necessary to study drug resistance;
ii. Preventative treatment (chemoprophylaxis)
particularly for pregnant women;
iii. Elimination of vector breeding
sites;
iv. Vector control, including the distribution of
insecticide-impregnated mosquito nets and periodic spraying, as
indicated.
42. Chemical control measures such as spraying, or impregnated
mosquito nets, may seem quite attractive but should only be taken upon expert
advice as several factors must be considered such as: the habits of the
refugees, seasonal variations, mosquito biting habits, transmission levels,
national protocols about chemicals and registered lists of chemicals, and cost.
Please see chapter 17 on environmental sanitation for guidance on vector
control.
Acute Respiratory Infections
43. Pneumonia is the acute respiratory infection that has been
documented as a cause for excess mortality, most particularly in the under five
population. It is therefore essential to make sure that refugees are provided
with adequate shelter and blankets as soon as possible. Health staff must be
appropriately trained to diagnose and treat respiratory infections.
44. The more common diseases are outlined in table 2 below which
illustrates the environmental impact on disease and indicates those improvements
in living conditions which will bear directly on the health of the refugees.
Table 2 - Common diseases
Disease
Major contributing factors
Preventive measures
Diarrhoeal diseases
Overcrowding, contamination of water and food Lack of
hygiene
· adequate living
space · public health education · distribution of soap · good personal and food hygiene · safe water supply and sanitation
Measles
Overcrowding Low vaccination coverage
· minimum living space standards
as defined in chapter 12 on site planning · immunization of children with distribution of vitamin
A. Immunization from 6 months up to 12-15 years (rather than the more
usual 5 years) is recommended because of the increased risks from living
conditions
Acute respiratory infections
Poor housing Lack of blankets and clothing Smoke in living
area
· minimum living space standards
and · proper shelter, adequate clothing,
sufficient blankets
Malaria
New environment with a strain to which the refugees are not
immune Stagnant water which becomes a breeding area for mosquitoes
· destroying mosquito breeding
places, larvae and adult mosquitoes by spraying. However the success of
vector control is dependent on particular mosquito habits and local experts
must be consulted · provision of mosquito
nets · drug prophylaxis (e.g. pregnant women
according to national protocols)
Meningococcal meningitis
Overcrowding in areas where disease is endemic (often has
local seasonal pattern)
· minimum living space
standards · immunization only after expert
advice when surveys suggest necessity
Tuberculosis
Overcrowding Malnutrition High HIV prevalence
· minimum living space standards
(but where it is en- demic it will remain a problem) · immunization
Typhoid
Overcrowding Poor personal hygiene Contaminated water
supply Inadequate sanitation
· minimum living space
standards · safe water, proper
sanitation · good personal, food and public
hygiene and public health education WHO does not recommend vaccination as
it offers only low, short-term individual protection and little or no
pro- tection against the spread of the disease
Worms especially hookworms
Overcrowding Poor sanitation
· minimum living space
standards · proper sanitation, good personal
hygiene · wearing shoes
Scabies6
Overcrowding Poor personal hygiene
· minimum living space
standards · enough water and soap for washing
Xerophthalmia Vitamin A deficiency
Inadequate diet Following acute prolonged infections,
measles and diarrhoea
· adequate dietary intake of
vitamin A. If not available, provide vitamin A fortified food. If this is not
possible, vitamin A supplements ·
immunization against measles. Systematic prophylaxis for children, every 4-6
months
Anaemia
Malaria, hookworm, poor absorption or insufficient intake
of iron and folate
· prevention/treatment of
contributory disease · correction of diet
including food fortification
Tetanus
Injuries to unimmunized population Poor obstetrical
practice causes neo-natal tetanus
· good first aid · immunization of pregnant women and
subsequent general immunization within EPI · training of midwives and clean ligatures,
scissors, razors, etc.
Loss of social organization Poor transfusion
practices Lack of information
· test syphilis during
pregnancy · test all blood before
transfusion · ensure adherence to universal
precautions · health · availability of condoms · treat partners
6Scabies: skin disease caused by
burrowing mites
Reproductive Health7
7 See: United Nations High
Commissioner for Refugees. An Inter-agency Field Manual on Reproductive Health
in Refugee Situations, 1995. UNFPA have developed a set of
reproductive health kits which can be used as part of a programme to deal with
reproductive health problems and the Health and Nutrition Unit or the Supplies
and Transport Section at Headquarters should be contacted for
details.
45. Reproductive health care in refugee situations should be
provided by adequately trained and supervised staff and should be guided by the
following principle:
Reproductive health care should be available in all
Situations and be based on refugee, particularly women's, needs and expressed
demands. The various religious, ethical values and cultural backgrounds of the
refugees should be respected, in conformity with universally recognized
international human rights.
46. The provision of quality reproductive health services
requires a collaborative effort by a number of sectors (health, community
services, protection, education) and organizations, which should provide
reproductive health services based on their mandates.
47. While resources should not be diverted from addressing the
problems of the major killers (measles, diarrhoeal diseases, acute respiratory
infections and malaria), there are some aspects of reproductive health which
must also be dealt with in the initial phase of an emergency. The major
objectives of reproductive health care in an emergency are to:
i. Prevent and manage the consequences of sexual
violence;
ii. Decrease HIV transmission by respecting
universal precautions8 and guaranteeing the availability of free
condoms;
iii. Prevent excess neonatal and maternal morbidity
and mortality by providing clean home delivery kits, ensuring clean and safe
deliveries at health facilities and managing emergency obstetric complications
by establishing a referral system;
iv. Plan for provision of comprehensive reproductive
health services, integrated into Primary Health Care, as soon as
possible;
v. Identify a person responsible to coordinate
reproductive health activities under the responsibility of the overall health
coordinator.
48. As soon as feasible, when the situation has stabilized,
comprehensive reproductive health services based on the needs of refugees should
be put in place. These services should be integrated within the primary health
care system and should address the following aspects:
8 "Universal precautions" means
procedures and practices by health workers to limit transmission of
disease.
Safe Motherhood
49. This should cover antenatal care, delivery care and
postnatal care. All pregnant women should receive antenatal care services during
pregnancy. All deliveries should be accompanied by a trained health care
provider. A referral system to manage obstetric emergencies should be put in
place. Within the first 4-6 weeks, mothers and their new babies should visit the
health services and receive nutritional supplements, counselling on child
spacing, and education about breast-feeding and infant care.
Prevention and Response to Sexual Violence
Please refer to chapter 10 on community services.
Sexually Transmitted Diseases including
HIV/AIDS9
50. Experience shows that HIV spreads fastest in
conditions of poverty and social instability - conditions which typify refugee
emergencies. The priority should be on preventing HIV transmission: ensure there
is respect for universal precautions and work closely with the community to
promote HIV prevention strategies including condom education and distribution.
Where blood transfusions are provided, ensure they are safe. Treatment of
sexually transmitted diseases should be a routine part of the health services
and should include appropriate follow up of partners.
Mandatory HIV testing in refugee circumstances, with the
single exception of testing blood for transfusion, is not justified, and WHO has
determined that, as a matter of policy, such testing should not be pursued.
9United Nations High Commissioner for
Refugees, UNAIDS and WHO. Guidelines for HIV Interventions in Emergency
Settings, 1996.
Family Planning
51. Family planning services should be initiated as soon as
feasible. Ensure that the refugees are informed and understand their free choice
in the matter.
Other Reproductive Health Concerns
52. Women who have complications such as spontaneous or unsafe
abortion should be cared for by the referral system.
53. Programmes to eradicate harmful traditional practices
including female genital mutilation should be implemented once the situation has
stabilized. It is crucial to work closely with the refugee community in tackling
this issue10. Culturally appropriate sanitary supplies should be
distributed to women as soon as possible. Inadequate sanitary protection may
prevent women from collecting material assistance.
10 See IOM/FOM (83/97: 90/97),
Policies on Harmful Traditional Practices, UNHCR, 1997.
Reproductive Health and Young People
54. Health workers should pay particular attention to meeting
the reproductive health needs of young people as they may be at greater risk and
have more limited access to appropriate services.
55. It is important to ensure that sufficient female health
workers are trained in reproductive health in order to provide culturally
appropriate health services including education in the community and at the
health facilities. At least some of these health workers should be recruited
from among the refugee community.
Tuberculosis control11
56. The prevalence of Tuberculosis (TB) has significantly
increased in recent years worldwide, but a TB control programme is not a
priority in the early stages of an emergency when mortality and malnutrition
rates are very high.
57. Expert advice and involvement of the National TB control
programme (often supported by WHO) are needed before starting a TB programme.
Bad planning and poor implementation could result in more harm than good.
58. To increase the chances of success, TB programmes should
only be started in stable situations, when Directly Observed Therapy12
can be implemented, when funds, drugs, reliable laboratory services and
trained staff are available.
11 World Health Organization and
United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees. Guidelines for Tuberculosis
Control in Refugees and Displaced Populations, 1996.
12 Directly Observed Therapy is where
the health worker is able to observe the treatment including that the medication
is taken correctly.
Mental Health13
59. The psychosocial needs of refugees have often been neglected
or even forgotten. However, health services should aim to promote the highest
standard of both physical and mental health. It is easy to recognize that there
is a heavy burden placed upon refugees from, for example, physical violence,
grief and bereavement, fear and stress, an uncertain future and a sense of
powerlessness.
60. Experience in identifying and dealing with the psychosocial
problems of refugees (including Post Traumatic Stress Disorders) is limited,
even so the following general guidance can be given. Any programme dealing with
mental health must be community-based with the refugees themselves playing a
major role. The programme must be based on a solid knowledge and understanding
of the refugees' cultural background and integrated with the other services
provided to refugees, and, from the outset, its long term sustainability must be
ensured.
13 World Health Organization and
United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees. Manual of Mental Health of
Refugees, 1996.
Capacity building
Health Education
61. The importance of health education is widely recognized.
However, there are significant difficulties in persuading those most at risk to
change long-established habits.
In the emergency phase, the priority topics should be those
directly related to the immediate public health problems.
62. Health education should therefore focus on the disposal of
human excreta and refuse, water management and personal hygiene. Many
governments and organizations produce simple health education materials that may
be useful. Trained refugee teachers and respected elders are likely to be more
effective than outsiders in communicating the basic principles and practices of
health to their own people. At a later stage, information, education and
communication should also be a major tool for the prevention and reduction of
sexually transmitted diseases including HIV.
Training
63. As suggested by the definition of "emergency", extraordinary
mobilization of resources, including human, will be needed to cope with the
situation. Annex 2 sets out a suggested structure of the health service and
numbers and qualifications of staff needed. Full staff support including
community health workers, and health workers, doctors and nurses at health
centres, health posts and clinics, with the necessary qualifications and
experience, will not be instantly available.
Training will therefore be a cornerstone of an effective
health and relief programme.
64. Training activities must be well targeted to meet the
objective of the programme, and this is dependent on definition of roles and
responsibilities among various levels of health care and identifying the
necessary qualifications. Training must be part of the main health programme.
Medical supplies
65. There must be a policy on essential drugs. The aim of the
policy will be to ensure a supply of safe, effective and affordable drugs to
meet priority needs of the refugees. The Health and Community Development
Section and the Supply and Transport Section at Headquarters issued an essential
drugs list which is used to order drugs for UNHCR operations.
66. In order to foster the appropriate use of drugs, standard
treatment protocols should be established. This will help rationalize
prescription habits among the various partners and organize training activities.
Protocols are usually based on national standards.
67. In the early stage of an emergency, it is often useful to
resort to pre-packaged emergency health kits. The best known is the New
Emergency Health Kit which has been developed through collaboration among many
agencies (WHO, UNICEF, MSF, ICRC, UNHCR and others). The contents of the kit are
intended to cover the needs of 10,000 people for 3 months during an emergency.
The kit can be obtained at short notice through the Supply and Transport Section
at Headquarters and can be used at the community level of health care and at
health centres. The emergency health kit should only be used in the early stage
of an emergency and not relied on for longer term needs.
68. As soon as possible, arrangements should be made for a
regular supply of appropriate quantities of essential drugs from the UNHCR
essential drugs list. The requests should be based on epidemiological
surveillance and disease patterns. The Supply and Transport Section can also
provide support for the purchase of drugs and their transport to the field.
69. It is of utmost importance to establish a system to monitor
drug consumption. In major operations, a full time pharmacist may be needed to
work with UNHCR. Over-prescription of medicines by health workers following
pressure by refugees is not uncommon in refugee emergencies.
70. Donations of unsolicited drugs are often a problem during
emergencies. A number of agencies (UNDP, UNHCR UNICEF, WHO, MSF and others) have
jointly developed guidelines on drug donations14 that provide donors
and users with a list of drugs and supplies which can be sent to emergency
situations. This is to help ensure that personnel in the field do not waste time
sorting out "useless" donations (small quantities of mixed drugs, free samples,
expired medicines, inappropriate vaccines, and drugs identified only by brand
names or in an unfamiliar language). UNHCR's policy is that overseas medical
supplies should be sent only in response to a specific request or after expert
clearance. The WHO Representative, local diplomatic missions and all others
concerned should be briefed accordingly.
14 WHO, Guidelines for Drug
Donations, May 1996.
Laboratory Services
71. Refugees are often remote from laboratory facilities.
However, very simple laboratory services at the site level are usually adequate.
72. Reference laboratory services are required for epidemic
management and control, (e.g., meningitis, shigellosis, cholera, hemoragic and
relapsing fevers, high malarial endemicity, hepatitis etc.) to confirm/clarify
diagnosis and perform antibiotic sensitivity. This should be discussed with the
national authorities and WHO. Where blood transfusions are provided, laboratory
services will be absolutely essential to test all blood for HIV before
transfusion.
Organization of Refugee Health Care
· There is no single
model for organizing health services in refugee situations, but it is usually
structured on three levels: community health posts and clinics, health centres,
and referral hospitals;
· It is of the
utmost importance to ensure good communication and feed-back between the various
levels of health care;
· Priority should be
given to using host country health facilities as referral centres and support
should be agreed upon and provided to the facilities (see MOU between WHO and
UNHCR, Appendix 3).
Introduction
73. The three levels of health care are summarized in Annex 2.
The first level is at the community level with health posts, clinics and
outreach services. At the second level is a health centre with basic facilities
for out and in-patients departments, dressing and injections, a pharmacy, and a
basic laboratory. At the third level is a referral hospital for emergency
obstetric care and surgery, management of very complicated cases, performance of
laboratory tests etc. Referral hospitals are usually national facilities at the
district, regional or national level.
74. The refugees must have easy access to appropriate treatment.
If the local national health facilities cannot be strengthened to meet the
needs, alternative arrangements will be required. Unless treatment is provided
at the right level, the hospitals or health centres will be swamped by refugees
demanding treatment for simple conditions. Thus, a community-based health
service is required that both identifies those in need of health care and
ensures that this is provided at the appropriate level. Close coordination with
community services is essential.
Community Level Health Care
75. Whether refugees are in camps or spontaneously settled among
local villages, community level services are essential.
Community-level health care must be the mainstay of health
services from the very beginning of the emergency.
76. This means basic health care is to be delivered at the
community level in a decentralized manner with two components: (i) a peripheral
clinic/health post and (ii) outreach services delivered by Community Health
Workers (CHWs) and Traditional Birth Attendants (TBAs). TBAs might be recruited
among traditional midwives in the community. In order to be effective, CHWs and
TBAs must be trained, supported and closely supervised. The role of CHWs and
TBAs includes:
i. home visiting, identification and referral of
sick people and malnourished children;
ii. identification of pregnant women and referral
for antenatal, delivery and post natal care;
iii. basic health education;
iv. data-gathering for the health information system
(deaths and their causes and the incidence of major communicable
diseases);
v. responding to the needs of refugees who have been
sexually assaulted.
As a guide, 1 CHW per 1,000 population and 1 TBA per 3,000
population should be the goal. Ideally, 50% of those trained should be women as
same sex care is often preferred.
77. The clinic or health post will cater for the needs of
approximately 5,000 refugees in crowded conditions but otherwise in reasonably
good health. This should be a simple building with facilities for consultation,
basic curative care (drugs from the New Emergency Health Kit), oral rehydration
therapy, clinical procedures such as dressings (but not injections because of
the risks of HIV transmission), a small lock-up pharmacy, simple equipment and
sterilization facilities (electricity may not be available), data collection
(log books to record patients and activities). Water and sanitation are
essential in all health facilities.
The Health Centre
78. In support of the clinics/health posts, there should be a
health centre for each refugee settlement (approximately 10,000 to 20,000
people). Very large settlements may require more than one. The health centre
should be able to handle all but the most complicated medical, obstetric and
surgical cases. More facilities should be available than at the clinics,
including basic laboratory services, a central pharmacy and some beds for
in-patients, in the range of one per 2,000 to 5,000 refugees. The health centre
should collect and consolidate health information from the various clinics and
health posts. The health centre should also organize the main health programmes
(EPI, reproductive health, tuberculosis) and the supervision and training of
staff (at both first and second level).
79. An indication of the number and qualifications of health
staff required is given in Annex 2.
Referral Services
80. The health centre must be able to refer patients to
hospitals for treatment. Referral hospitals should provide emergency obstetric
and surgical care, treatment for severe diseases, laboratory and x-ray services
as well as supply and support for nationally controlled programmes (TB, leprosy,
HIV/AIDS).
81. Only a small proportion of patients will require referral
services. These services will usually be organized in national health facilities
at the district, regional or national level, and ideally, referral should be
made to the nearest national hospital. This has obvious advantages, not least
the fact that the infrastructure already exists.
The programme should compensate the national referral
structures for services provided to refugees.
82. The hospital(s) should be expanded or supported as
necessary, for example with tents and additional health personnel as well as
some financial and/or material support (drugs, supplies, food). Care must be
taken not to swamp the local hospital. Close and direct coordination with the
district or regional medical officer is essential.
83. An agreement should be signed between the parties, under the
aegis of the Ministry of Health, which clarifies the conditions of assistance
including cost per patient per treatment and in kind support (food and drugs). A
written agreement is essential to avoid controversies.
84. It is only in certain circumstances that special refugee
hospitals will need to be established, but generally this should be avoided.
They should only be established when the needs cannot be met by existing or
strengthened national hospitals, for example when refugee numbers are very large
(much larger than the local population), when the nearest national hospitals are
too far away, or for security reasons. The Supply and Transport Section and the
Health and Community Development Section should be consulted prior to
establishing or acquiring refugee specific field hospitals.
85. Whatever arrangements are made for hospital treatment and
referral, there must be suitable transport to and from the referral hospitals.
Facilities at the hospital must also provide for the needs of relatives and
allow parents to be with young children.
86. Arrangements for referral must be such that only those
patients specifically referred from the health centres are attended, with no
refugees presenting themselves directly to the hospital.
87. Refugee emergencies are not usually characterized by large
numbers of injured persons. However, when this is the case, there may be an
initial requirement for the rapid deployment of a surgical unit which is
normally quickly available. Pre-packaged (expensive) surgical kits can be
obtained through Supply and Transport Section at short notice.
88. The UNHCR Health Coordinator should ensure that there is a
system to record referrals and subsequent treatment and follow-up of the
patients.
Human Resources and Coordination
· The health
services must be developed with and not just for the refugees and
in accordance with their needs and demands;
· The early
appointment of a suitably experienced health coordinator to UNHCR's staff has
proved essential. A reproductive health focal point should also be identified as
early as possible;
· While the use and
development of local expertise is preferable, it is often necessary to mobilize
outside assistance in an emergency;
· The issue of staff
salary and incentives should be discussed and solved from the
outset;
· The Ministry of
Health at all levels must be as closely involved as possible.
The Refugees
89. The refugees must be given responsibility for their own
health. Outside health workers must understand the refugees' own concepts of
health and disease. From the beginning, health services should be developed and
operated with, rather than for, the refugees. If not, the services will be less
effective, may be distrusted and poorly used, and are unlikely to be
sustainable.
90. Preventive services should always be free. In most
situations, other health services are also offered free of charge. While this
may well be justified, it should not be considered as a policy as it is often
based on paternalistic attitudes. The issue of cost-recovery or payment for
services should be regularly analyzed and most particularly when refugees are
integrated within the local population (which may have to pay for services) or
when refugees are benefiting from local integration and sources of income.
Staffing Needs
91. As a general principle, the order of preference for
selecting health personnel, in cooperation with the national authorities, is:
i. Refugees;
ii. Experienced nationals or residents;
iii. Outsiders.
Most emergencies will require some combination of these sources.
92. Strong emphasis should be placed on the training,
supervision and upgrading of medical skills of selected refugees, particularly
in their former roles within the community. When selecting refugees, care must
be taken to include women who may not come forward as readily as men. Full
account should be taken of the experience of the traditional healers and
midwives. Refugees may seek traditional treatments and experience has
demonstrated the advantages of encouraging traditional methods of health care
which complement other organized health services.
93. An important consideration may be the government's attitude
to foreign medical personnel, including, for example, recognized qualifications
and permission to practice medicine.
94. The issue of staff salary and incentives should be addressed
at the onset. All agencies and organizations involved in the refugee programme
should adhere to the same standards. The determination of salaries and
incentives should be based on the national (or country of origin) standards and
due account should be taken of assistance (free food, water, shelter etc.)
received by refugees. In principle, all staff performing work on a daily basis,
with clearly identified responsibilities and strict working hours, should
receive a salary or an incentive.
95. Special attention should be given to the recruitment of
local staff. The salary or incentive offered to them should be in line with
national standards. Very frequently, refugee emergencies attract national
personnel (commonly referred to as "brain drain") at the expense of national
services which can create serious tension.
The National Health Authorities
96. Early involvement of the host government's central,
provincial, and district health services is essential. To the extent possible,
services provided to refugees should be integrated with national services. It
will be particularly important to ensure integration and compatibility with
certain treatment protocols, immunization programmes, communicable disease
control and surveillance practices. Promoting good health for the refugees is
clearly in the interest of the local population. In addition, supporting
existing structures will help ensure that health services for refugees are
sustainable and are at a standard equivalent to that of the host country
nationals.
UNHCR Health Coordinator
97. In major emergencies, (e.g. when there is a prevalence of
epidemics, many partners, large numbers involved) UNHCR must ensure that a
Refugee Health Coordinator is appointed. The Health Coordinator should be a key
member of the UNHCR programme staff. The person should take the lead role in
this sector, or play a key supporting role to the national institution which
takes the lead role.
98. The Health Coordinator's primary responsibility will be to
ensure that the level and quality of services provided adhere to nationally and
internationally accepted standards and medical ethics.
Other main tasks and duties include:
i. Participating and facilitating the consultation
process among all concerned parties in order to carry out an appropriate
problem, needs and resources assessment;
ii. Participating in, and facilitating the creation
of, health and nutrition committees with the Ministry of Health, other UN
agencies and non-governmental organizations (NGOs) where coordination will take
place to jointly identify priority activities, and to plan for their
implementation by defining needed human, material and financial
resources;
iii. Facilitating cooperation among all partners to
ensure an appropriate implementation and monitoring of the programme as agreed
upon at the coordination committee meetings;
iv. Setting up and participating in the
implementation of an effective Health Information System;
v. Ensuring that joint protocols for medical
treatment, staffing and training are established and that implementing partners
adhere to them;
vi. Ensuring the identification of a qualified and
experienced person to coordinate reproductive health activities at the start of
the relief programme;
vii. Facilitating inter-sectoral
coordination;
viii. Consolidate the reporting about the refugees'
health and nutritional status;
ix. Assisting in setting up a medical evacuation
plan for UNHCR staff.
99. Experience shows that it is in the first days and weeks of
an emergency that excess mortality is recorded.
It is therefore vital that a UNHCR Health Coordinator is
fielded immediately, at the very start of the emergency.
100. The quickest and most practical way to deploy a Health
Coordinator is usually to send UNHCR staff or consultants. Headquarters should
be consulted immediately on this. At a later stage, posts can be created or
staff seconded from other UN agencies (UNICEF or WHO), or from the Ministry of
Health.
Other Specialized Staff
101. The need for specialized staff should be carefully assessed
by the UNHCR Health Coordinator or by the Health and Community Development
Section at Headquarters. Such specialists include epidemiologists, specialists
in public, reproductive and mental health, nutrition, tropical medicine,
paediatrics, midwifery, pharmacy etc.
Experienced personnel with the right personality are more
important than highly trained Specialists, whose skills are often
inappropriate.
102. Familiarity with the local culture, patterns of disease and
the public health services and previous experience in emergencies are as
important as an advanced knowledge of medicine and medical techniques.
Role of the UN and Specialized Agencies
103. WHO. The World Health Organization works directly
with the Ministry of Health in almost every country in the world. The response
to the health needs of the refugees and surrounding local populations should be
closely coordinated with WHO. Details of this collaboration are described in the
WHO and UNHCR Memorandum of Understanding, Appendix 3.
104. UNICEF. Collaboration with UNICEF in emergencies
will focus on supply of measles vaccines and delivery/midwifery kits, as well as
on health education (see Memorandum of Understanding between UNICEF and UNHCR
for more details, Appendix 3)
105. UNFPA. Collaboration with UNFPA focuses on
reproductive health matters and demography and there is a Memorandum of
Understanding between UNFPA and UNHCR which details this collaboration, Appendix
3.
106. UNAIDS. UNAIDS is an inter-agency mechanism created
in 1995 to support national HIV/AIDS programmes. Refugee health services must be
integrated in these national programmes.
107. Through a standby arrangement with UNHCR, the Centre for
Disease Control and Prevention (CDC Atlanta, USA) can supply, at short notice,
experts for rapid health and nutritional assessment, improvement of epidemic
preparedness and response in emergencies and set up Health Information Systems.
Deployments are usually limited from four to eight weeks and can be arranged
upon request through the Health and Community Development Section at
Headquarters.
Role of NGOs
108. Operational and implementing partners are essential
collaborators for UNHCR. All collaborators in the emergency health programme
must be brought together to form health sub-committees at the central and field
level as appropriate. Initially, these committees may have to meet daily or at
least weekly, usually under the chairpersonship of a representative of the
Ministry of Health, supported by the UNHCR Health Coordinator. Ideally, members
of the committee should have been identified at the contingency planning stage.
109. Activities of the health sub-committee include: allocation
of tasks, exchange and pooling of information on health activities and with
other sectors (e.g. food, water, sanitation etc.), setting up jointly agreed
protocols for medical procedures, staffing levels and training, and
problem-solving in general.
110. In emergencies, urgent outside assistance in the health
sector is almost invariably necessary. This is because the immediate and
specialized attention needed represents a burden that existing local structures
are not designed to bear. District health services will almost never have the
needed reserve capacity in terms of staff at all levels, infrastructure, medical
supplies and technical expertise. This capacity can be developed over time, with
the support from the central government and other UN agencies.
111. NGOs (international, regional or national) must be chosen
with care and this is usually done by the government of the country of asylum.
However, it is also the responsibility of UNHCR to advise the government on
which organizations have proven competence in emergencies. Some agencies have
experience in long-term situations but less in emergencies; others may be too
narrow in focus, preferring to do purely curative work to the exclusion of
public health, prevention, sanitation etc.
112. Small NGOs, especially those created in response to a
specific situation, should first demonstrate appropriate competence before being
engaged in the emergency phase.
The number of agencies involved should be kept to a
minimum.
113. During the early stages of an emergency it is essential
that the numbers of NGOs involved should be kept to the minimum necessary, and
that those chosen should be professional, capable of deploying experienced
personnel and with proven past experience in collaborating with both governments
and UNHCR in the effective management of an emergency.
Organization of Response
114. A possible hierarchy of health services is outlined in
Annex 2. It is based on a large-scale emergency involving a great number of
health staff, both national and international. A smaller emergency will require
fewer levels of organization. Note that the numbers and qualification of staff
suggested is no more than an indication. Actual needs will depend on the health
problems, the degree of isolation of the area and so on.
115. Once the pattern of disease and overall needs have been
determined, situation-specific guidelines on standard procedures for health
workers should be prepared, based on national or internationally recognized
standards. These should cover all aspects of the services, including such
subjects as basic principles, how the services are to be organized, including
any selective feeding programmes, standardized treatment protocols, drug lists
and supply, vaccination and reporting. The guidelines should be prepared by the
UNHCR Health Coordinator in consultation with all concerned, issued under the
aegis of the Ministry of Health if possible, and reviewed periodically, for
example by a health coordination sub-committee. At least part of the guidelines
should be translated into the language of the community health workers.
All organizations providing health care to the refugees
should be involved in the preparation and required to observe standard
guidelines.
Key References
An Inter-agency Field Manual on Reproductive Health in
Refugee Situations, 1995. United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees,
Geneva. To be updated in 1999.
Essential Drugs Manual: Guidelines for the Use of Drugs in
Refugee Settings and UNHCR List of Essential Drugs, Geneva, 1989.
Famine-affected, Refugee, and Displaced Populations:
Recommendations for Public Health Issues, July 24, 1992/Vol.41/No. RR-13.
The Centers for Disease Control, (CDC).
Guidelines for Tuberculosis Control in Refugees and Displaced
Populations, 1996 World Health Organization and United Nations High
Commissioner for Refugees.
Guidelines for HIV Interventions in Emergency Settings,
1996 United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees, UNAIDS and WHO, Geneva.
Manual of Mental Health of Refugees, 1996 World Health
Organization and United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees.
Sexual Violence against Refugees, Guidelines on Prevention
and Response, 1995 United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees, Geneva.
UNHCR, IOMIFOM (83/97; 90/97), Policies on Harmful
Traditional Practices, 1997 United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees,
Geneva.
Vector and Pest Control in Refugee Situations, April,
1997 United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees,
Geneva.
Annexes
Annex 1 - Health Information System
In the early stages of an emergency it is essential to
collect information on a weekly or monthly basis for the following tables:
Table Number
Table Description
1
Demographic information
2.1 A and B, 2.2
Crude Mortality Rate and Under five years old Mortality
Rate Cause-specific-mortality
3.1
Morbidity Incidence
and 4.2 (set out in Annexes 4
and 5 of
chapter 15 on nutrition)
Nutrition, Supplementary and Therapeutic Feeding Programmes
5.2
Main causes of discharge/deaths
in In-Patients Departments
7.1
Deliveries: Birth (Total births and birth rate
only)
Collection of the information required for the other tables
should be progressively introduced as the situation stabilizes.
In order to detect problems and to monitor the impact of any
health programme, it is necessary to collect information over time so as to
follow trends. The tables below are designed to allow tabulation of information
on a weekly or monthly basis. Graphical presentation of the same information
will make it easier to detect trends. The tables may need to be adjusted to
reflect the needs of actual situations.
1. Demographic Information
Table 1 - Population
Camp/area Names
Male under 5 years
Female under 5 years
Male over 5 years
Female over 5 years
Total Population
Total
Sources of demographic information: registration Estimate Government Other
% of total population which is under 5 =
% of total population which is female =
Note: demographic information does not necessarily have to be
reported in a table format. The denominator used for calculation of rates could
differ from the official working figure and this should be clarified.
2. Mortality
2.1 Mortality rates
Mortality rates (segregated by age and sex) should be given
per 10,000 per day
A. Crude Mortality Rate: CMR
Table 2.1 A
Camp/area Names
Male
Female
Total
Number of deaths
Death Rate
Number of deaths
Death Rate
Number of deaths
Death Rate
Total
B. Under five years old mortality rates (U-5 MR)
Table 2.1 B
Camp/area Names
Male
Female
Total
Number of deaths
Death Rate
Number of deaths
Death Rate
Number of deaths
Death Rate
Total
Female / Male ratio:
A graph line (to show trends) for CMR and U-5 MR could be
attached.
2.2 Cause-specific mortality
Tables 2.2 (2.2 A for total population and 2.2 B for
under-five population).
Male
Female
Total
Number of deaths
% of the total number of deaths
Number of deaths
% of the total number of deaths
Number of deaths
% of the total number of deaths
Malaria
Pneumonia
Watery diarrhoea
Bloody diarrhoea
Measles
Meningitis
Cholera
Maternal death (2.2 A only)
Peri/neo natal
Malnutrition
Total
100%
100%
100%
From table 2.2 A and 2.2 B, pie charts could be attached to the
report.
The list of diseases is provided as an indication.
Comments on mortality:
3. Morbidity
3.1 Incidence (Number of new cases per 1,000 of the
population for the period)
Tables 3.1 (3.1A for total population and 3.1B for
under-five population).
Male
Female
Total
Malaria
Pneumonia
Watery diarrhoea
Bloody diarrhoea
Measles
Meningitis
STDs
The list of diseases is provided as an indication.
3.2 Out-Patient Department (OPD) consultations
Table 3.2 Number of consultations per refugee per year.*
Camp Names
Male
Female
Total
Average
* from the total number of OPD consultations per
camp, extrapolate to define the number of consultations per refugee per year. As
an example: 10,000 consultations in one month in a camp of 30,000. 10,000 ×
12 = 120,000 / 30,000 = 4 consultations/refugee/year.
This table is contained in Annex 4 of chapter 15 on nutrition.
4.2 Therapeutic Feeding Programme Monthly Report
This table is contained in Annex 5 of the chapter 15 on
nutrition.
4.3 Food basket monitoring
See chapter 15 on food and nutrition. If undertaken, please
specify by whom and the results.
Comments on nutrition:
5. In-Patients Department (IPD) Activities
5.1 Activities
Table 5.1 (per week or month)
Hospital Name
Hospital Name
Hospital Name
A. No. of patients end last week/month
B. No of patients admitted
C. No. of patients end week/month (A+B-D)
D. No. Discharged of which:
D.1 authorized
%
D.2 unauthorized
%
D.3 deaths
%
D.4 transferred
%
No. of beds
Average length of stay (No. Of days)
Occupancy rate
%
5.2 Main Causes of discharge/deaths in IPDs
Table 5.2 (per week or month).
Hospital Name:
Hospital Name:
Hospital Name:
Number of cases
Number of deaths
Number of cases
Number of deaths
Number of cases
Number of deaths
Malaria
Pneumonia
Watery diarrhoea
Bloody diarrhoea
Meningitis
Measles
Comments on IPDs:
6. Referral System
6.1 Total number of patients transferred for admission and
where:
6.2 Causes of transfer
Table 6.2
Camp Name:
Camp Name:
Camp Name:
Number of cases
% of the total
Number of cases
% of the total
Number of cases
% of the total
Obstetrics
Surgery
Paediatrics
Internal medicine
Blood transfusion
Total
Comments:
7. Main Health Programmes 7.1
Reproductive Health 7.1.1 Safe motherhood
a. Deliveries: Birth
Table 7.1.1
Camp names
Number
Crude Birth Rate*
Total A: a1 + a2 + a3
· a1: total # and %
of birth in health centre or hospital:
· a2: total # and %
of birth assisted by aTrained Birth Attendant (but outside health
centre or hospital):
· a3: total # and %
of other births (i.e. A - (a1 + a2):
· total number and %
of complicated deliveries:
· total # of cases
of neonatal tetanus:
· total # and % of
deliveries with adequate Tetanus Toxoid (TT) coverage:
b. Ante-natal care (ANC)
· total # of
expected pregnancies per year:
· total # of new ANC
consultations (last 3 months) and % compared to expected:
· % of women with
three ANC visits at delivery:
· are supplements
given to pregnant women? specify criteria and supplements provided:
· RPR test (syphilis
test): % of positive tests:
c. Other information
· maternal
mortality: # and incidence per 100,000 live birth per year:
· Peri/neonatal
mortality: # and incidence per 1,000 live birth per year:
· # of abortions and
% per number of pregnancies:
· low birth weight
(below 2.5 kg): provide # and percentage per total number of
births:
· # and percentage
of total number of births having a post-natal consultation:
7.1.2 Sexual and gender based violence
· # of cases of
sexual and gender based violence per month (incidence per 10,000):
· is there any
special programme for Female Genital Mutilation (where prevalent)? if yes, give
brief description:
7.1.3 STDs including HIV / AIDS
· enforcement
of universal precautions:
· % of blood tested
for HIV before transfusion:
· % of HIV positive
among blood tested:
· distribution of
condoms, # and percentage of acceptance:
7.1.4 Family Planning (every three months)
· number of new
acceptors in last three months, per method:
· total # and % of
acceptors per method:
7.1.5 Adolescents
Is there any special programme for adolescents? if yes, give a
brief description:
Comments on reproductive health:
7.2 Extended Programme of Immunizations (EPI)
· measles
vaccination coverage:
· other antigens
coverage:
· are there any
vaccine preventable diseases prevalent in the camps?:
·
comments:
7.3 Tuberculosis (every three months and not usually
during the emergency phase)
· expected number of
new cases per year (i.e. prevalence in country of origin):
· treatment
protocols:
Table 7.3
January-March
April-June
July-September
October-Dec.
A. No. under treatment at beginning
B. No. of new cases
C. No. of discharged of which:
C.1 cured
%
C.2 defaulters
%
C.3 deaths
%
C.4 transferred
%
Total at end of period: A+B-C
7.4 Cholera/Meningitis/Hepatitis/Micronutrients
deficiencies etc.
On daily, weekly and/or monthly basis: number of cases, number
of deaths and attack rate (cumulative) and Case Fatality Rate (cumulative).
Graphic representation could be attached to the report.
7.5 Mental health
Provide a description of the mental health programme.
7.6 Training activities
Provide a description of training activities which have taken
place during the reporting period: type of training, by whom, to whom, etc.
7.7 Laboratory activities
8. Information on other vital sectors
· availability of
potable water: # litres per person per day
· availability of
functioning latrines per # of persons
· % of population
with adequate shelter
· quantity of soap
available per person per month
· specify vector
control activities
Annex 2 - Possible organisation of health services in a major
emergency Number of births in a year
Unit/Location
Level
Health staff
Outline of major responsibilities
· Health Coordinating
Committee with all partners, this may be decentralised as
appropriate · Refugee Health Unit
(with Ministry of Health if possible or as part of UNHCR
programme team)
Capital/national level
· UNHCR Health Coordinator
or Health professionals, Nutritionist, Pharmacist, Health Administrator
· Planning and monitoring
pro- grammes · Preparation and
dissemination of guidelines on standard procedures · Overall coordination and supervision · Procurement and supply of drugs and equipment
3rd level
Regional/district Hospital
Regional or district level
· If necessary: say, 1
doctor, 2 nurses to help existing staff (plus material support
if required, especially food and drugs) · Cost per patient or per treat- ment could also be
negotiated with the hospital
· Complicated obstetric cases
and surgical emergencies on referral from settlement · Reference laboratory
2nd level
Health Centre (with limited beds for overnight stay, as
guidance: 1 bed per 2,000 to 5,000 refugees)
Each refugee settlement of about 30,000
· As guidance: 2 doctors,
6-8 nurses, 1 midwife · About 10 health
workers (1 health worker per 50 - 70 consultations per day)
· Supervision of settlement
health services including training health workers and any selective
feeding programmes · Treatment of patients
not handled at 1st level ·
Security, distribution and use of drugs ·
Basic laboratory · Referral to third level
1st level
1 Health Post or clinic
Section level approximately 5,000 refugees
· As guidance, 1 nurse
(from above) and 2-3 refugee or national health workers per section
· Section level services, both
preventative and basic curative care ·
Supervision of outreach services
The community
Outreach services (organized by section of, say 1
Community Health Worker per 1,000 and 1 traditional birth attendant
per 3,000 refugees)
· Refugee Community
Health Workers
· Identification of public
and individual health and nutritional problems · Referring sick patients to health post · Home visiting ·
Basic surveillance of mortality and birth
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
15. Food and Nutrition
(introduction...)
Overview
Introduction
Organization of Food Support
Nutritional Assessments
General Feeding Programme
Selective Feeding Programmes
Infant Feeding and use of Milk Products
Key References
Annexes
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
15. Food and Nutrition
Figure
Overview
Situation
In emergencies, food and nutritional security is often severely
threatened. This causes increased risk of malnutrition, disease and death.
Therefore, refugees will need partial or full food support. Some may also need
nutritional rehabilitation.
Objective
To provide the refugees with sufficient quantities of
appropriate food to maintain their health and nutritional status and, where
necessary, to improve the condition of those who are already malnourished.
Principles of Response
· Measures to meet
food needs should be appropriate and standardized, with responsibilities clearly
defined, and the overall co-ordination ensured by a single
organization;
· Whenever possible
use familiar foods that meet nutritional requirements and maintain sound
traditional food habits;
· The food
distribution system should allow families to prepare their own
meals;
· Pay particular
attention to infant feeding and the needs of children, women and others prone to
malnutrition;
· Maintain close
co-ordination with the other vital sectors (health, water, environmental
sanitation, etc.) and aim for maximum integration in existing
services;
· Ensure the active
involvement of a nutritionist.
Action
· Assess health and
nutritional status and food needs as soon as possible;
· Ensure the
availability of appropriate food and the necessary transport, storage, cooking
fuel and utensils;
· Organize a general
feeding programme for all refugees and, if necessary, selective feeding
programmes to meet the additional needs of children, women and
others;
· Monitor
effectiveness of feeding programmes and make necessary
changes.
Introduction
1. In an emergency, refugees may be completely dependent on
external food sources. An initial assessment of their health and nutritional
condition and their numbers must be made as soon as possible. The types of
programmes needed will be determined by this initial assessment. Continuous
monitoring of nutritional status will ensure that the emphasis on different
programmes can be adjusted in order to reflect changing conditions.
2. The causes of malnutrition are often complex and
multi-sectoral (see Fig 1). Therefore coordinating the food and nutrition
programmes with health and other vital sectors is essential.
3. Assistance must be appropriate to the nutritional needs of
the refugees and be culturally acceptable. Foods prepared locally with local
ingredients are preferable to imported foods. Infant feeding policies require
particular attention.
4. Certain groups are more at risk of malnutrition than others.
These include infants, children, pregnant women and nursing mothers, the sick
and the elderly. Special action is required to identify the malnourished and
vulnerable and to meet their additional needs. Where the refugees have already
suffered a prolonged food shortage, many will be malnourished by the time of the
first assessment.
5. If the refugees are already suffering the effects of severe
food shortage, immediate action must be taken to provide food available locally
which is acceptable to the refugees.
6. If insufficient acceptable food is available locally, it must
be brought in from outside, initially by air if necessary. Flexibility and
improvisation will be required, and time may be needed to develop the full
response set out in this chapter.
7. This chapter should be read in conjunction with "Nutrition
Guidelines" M�decins Sans Fronti�res (MSF), 1995, and UNHCR/WFP Guidelines for
Estimating Food and Nutritional Needs, 1997 and Selective Feeding Programmes,
1999.
Organization of Food Support
· The World Food
Programme (WFP), the food aid arm of the United Nations system, shares with
UNHCR responsibility for meeting the food and nutritional needs of
refugees;
· The Memorandum of
Understanding (MOU) signed between WFP and UNHCR establishes the division of
responsibilities and coordination mechanisms for refugee, returnee and
internally displaced persons feeding operations;
· The aim of the
food programme is to ensure the restoration and maintenance of sound nutritional
status through a food ration that meets the assessed requirements, is
nutritionally balanced, palatable and culturally acceptable;
· In most refugee
emergencies a UNHCR food and nutrition co-ordinator should be appointed, who
will have overall responsibility for co-ordination of all aspects of the food
and nutrition programme;
· The refugees, and
in particular refugee women, must be involved in the organization of these
programmes;
· Simple nutrition
education is an integral part of effective food support.
Figure 1 - The Complex causes of
malnutrition
Adapted form: UNICEF Conceptual Framework of Malnutrition, 1997.
WFP/UNHCR Co-operation
The objective of WFP/UNHCR co-operation is the timely
provision of the right amount of food, to ensure the restoration and maintenance
of sound nutritional status.
8. The means to achieve this is through a food ration that meets
the assessed requirements, is nutritionally balanced, palatable, culturally
acceptable, and promotes gradual self-reliance of the beneficiaries. Essential
to this objective is joint UNHCR/WFP planning, from the start of the emergency.
9. A Memorandum of Understanding (MOU) (see Appendix 3) exists
between UNHCR and WFP covering cooperation in the provision of food aid. Under
the terms of the MOU, WFP meets the emergency food needs of refugees, returnees,
and, in specific situations, internally displaced persons, and provides
associated logistic support. The terms of the MOU only apply when the
beneficiaries in the country of asylum number more than 5,000, irrespective of
their country of origin or their location within the country of asylum. UNHCR
will meet the food needs of persons of its concern who are outside the scope of
the MOU.
10. Within the scope of the MOU, WFP has the lead responsibility
for mobilizing the following food commodities (whether for general or selective
feeding programmes) and the resources to deliver them.
WFP resourced commodities include:
i. Cereals;
ii. Edible oils and fats;
iii. Pulses and other sources of protein;
iv. Blended food;
v. Iodized salt;
vi. Sugar;
vii. High energy biscuits.
11. WFP is also responsible for arrangements for milling cereals
and transporting WFP commodities to agreed extended delivery points (EDPs), and
for the operation and management of the EDPs. UNHCR is responsible for the
transportation of all commodities from the EDP to the final destination and for
final distribution.
12. Under the MOU, UNHCR is responsible for mobilizing and
transporting complementary food commodities and for the provision of the
necessary micronutrients (vitamins and minerals) when they cannot be met through
the ration.
UNHCR resourced commodities include:
i. Local fresh foods;
ii. Spices and Other condiments;
iii. Tea;
iv. Dried milk;
v. Therapeutic milk.
13. UNHCR and WFP have developed a common set of guidelines for
estimating food and nutritional needs in emergencies and in selective feeding
programmes2. These guidelines should be used to assess the food needs
for both the general and selective feeding programmes.
Extended delivery Points (EDP)
An EDP is the location at which WFP hands over a consignment of
food to UNHCR or its implementing partner. WFP is responsible for the
consignment and all costs incurred in moving and storing it, until UNHCR or its
representative collects it from the EDP. In all cases the location of EDPs must
be agreed jointly by UNHCR and WFP.
EDPs should be positioned to give cost effective and
logistically practical delivery, while avoiding the imposition of undue
hardships on the beneficiaries because of travel distance and/or difficult
access. Whenever possible the EDP should be at the same place as the final
distribution point, or, if not, then as near as possible to it. An EDP should be
established for approximately every 10,000 beneficiaries.
1WFP/UNHCR Guidelines for Estimating
Food and Nutritional Needs in Emergencies, UNHCR/WFP, 1997.
2 UNHCR/WFP Guidelines for
Selective feeding Programmes in Emergencies, WFP, UNHCR, Geneva,
1999.
Joint Assessment and Planning
14. UNHCR and WFP should carry out a joint assessment of the
overall food, nutrition and related requirements in consultation with government
authorities, operational partners and experts.
The first requirement is a knowledge of the numbers,
nutritional status and food habits of the refugees.
Assessing nutritional status is discussed in detail below. The
joint UNHCR/WFP assessment for the food assistance programme should cover the
following:
Basic Information
i. Numbers and demography (see chapter 11 on
registration);
ii. Current nutritional status;
iii. Milling possibilities;
iv. Food commodity preferences of the
beneficiaries;
v. Capacity of the family to prepare, store, and
process the food;
vi. Access to cooking fuel, utensils and
distribution containers;
vii. Food availability now and over
time;
viii. Availability of local food for
purchase;
ix. Ease of access to food supplies;
x. Groups at risk - identify who and how
many;
xi. Degree of and prospects for
self-reliance;
xii. Coping strategies.
Other Important Information
i. Health status and health services;
ii. Environmental health risks;
iii. Community structure;
iv. Food distribution systems;
v. Socio-economic status;
vi. Availability of human resources;
vii. Logistics constraints;
viii. Storage capacity and quality;
ix. Delivery schedule of food and non-food
commodities;
x. Other agencies' activities and assistance
currently provided: quantity, items and frequency, and selective feeding
programmes.
15. WFP and UNHCR should draw up plans covering: the number of
beneficiaries, the composition of the food basket, ration size, duration of
assistance, and directly related non-food inputs which may have an impact on the
nutritional status of the beneficiaries (for example, cooking utensils, cooking
fuel and milling equipment).
16. The main considerations to take into account when responding
to food and nutritional needs of refugees are set out in figure 1.
17. Special consideration should be given to the needs of women,
children and groups-at-risk. The views of the beneficiaries, especially those of
women, should be sought. The proposed food assistance programme should also take
into account the need to minimize the environmental impact of cooking the food
provided.
Coordination
18. A UNHCR coordinator should be appointed as focal point for
food and nutritional issues. In smaller operations, either the programme officer
or the logistics officer could be appointed as food coordinator. If technical
expertize is not available initially within UNHCR then assistance should be
sought from government nutritionists, UN agencies or NGOs.
19. The food and nutrition coordinator's responsibilities are to
establish standard procedures, including procedures for general food
distribution, coordinate feeding programmes, monitor and evaluate the feeding
programmes, and ensure close coordination and integration with community
services, health and other sectors. The coordinator should art as the focal
point within UNHCR for coordination with WFP and NGO's. Where the food
coordinator is not her/himself a nutrition specialist, an experienced
nutritionist will also be needed to provide the food coordinator with the
necessary technical advice.
Role of Refugees and Nutrition Education
20. The refugees must be involved from the start in the
organization and management of the feeding programmes. Special training will be
necessary for refugees.
21. The provision of simple nutrition education for the refugees
is always necessary when unfamiliar foods or new methods of cooking cannot be
avoided. This should be organized in conjunction with nutrition education
activities and provide guidance on: proper infant feeding, feeding sick
children, treating diarrhoea, basic food hygiene and preparing available foods
for maximum nutritional benefit.
Cooking Fuel
22. Particular attention must be paid to the provision of
cooking fuel and the control and management of the natural resources in the
vicinity of the camp. Failure to deal with this can quickly lead to destruction
of the vegetation in and around the site causing lasting damage to the
environment, with direct effects on the health and well-being of refugees and
local people and friction with the local population. Fuel needs and consumption
vary considerably3-factors affecting the use of fuel include:
i. food preparation, cooking techniques, fuel
type and preparation. Soaking beans prior to cooking, ensuring lids are used
on pots, ensuring wood is dry and chopped, and that fires are put out after
cooking - all these make considerable fuel savings and can be incorporated into
environmental awareness raising and training programmes. Other steps to
facilitate efficient fuel use are to ensure that the pots supplied have
lids.
ii. type of stove. It may be possible to use
local technology to modify existing types of wood or charcoal burning stoves in
order to make them more fuel efficient. Simple improvements and local
technologies are best. Note that the social and economic implications of a new
technology are usually more important in determining whether it will be adopted
than the effectiveness of the technology itself. The promotion and use of
improved stoves must closely involve the refugees.
iii. type of food. Freshly harvested foods
take less cooking time, also using milled rather than whole grain and using
pre-cooked food make considerable fuel savings. The environmental implications
of the food basket need to be taken into account with WFP.
iv. availability (or "price") of fuel itself.
This is often the most significant factor affecting per capita fuel consumption.
The provision of fuel wood and managing and controlling the use of natural
resources around a refugee camp is discussed further in chapter 12 on site
planning.
3 Average fuel-wood consumption
per person per day in different refugee camps has varied from 0.9 kg to
4kg.
Nutritional Assessments
· The nutrition
assessment should be carried out as soon as possible by an experienced
nutritionist;
· Nutritional
assessment should include anthropometric surveys as well as food security
information;
· Regular assessment
is necessary both to monitor the nutritional status of the community as a whole
and identify individuals and groups who need special care and food
assistance;
· Information must
be gathered on mortality and morbidity in addition to malnutrition rates, in
order to understand the underlying causes of malnutrition and to identify people
who are most affected.
Introduction
23. An initial assessment of the nutritional status of the
refugees should be made as soon as possible and should be carried out by an
experienced nutritionist. The extent of malnutrition has important implications
for what form the emergency response will take, and will enable early decisions
to be taken on the components of the rations and on the requirement for any
additional selective feeding programmes.
24. The nutritional assessment should be followed by regular
nutrition surveys under specialist supervision to monitor the condition of the
population as a whole.
25. Where conditions and/or results of the initial assessment or
later surveys indicate a need for selective feeding programmes, individuals will
need to be identified and registered for these programmes. Their individual
progress should then be monitored through periodic measurements at the feeding
centres.
26. The initial nutrition assessment and the periodic nutrition
surveys of the population as a whole should be done by measuring the weight and
height of a random sample of the child population (as explained below).
Initially such surveys should be carried out every two to three months. When
conditions have stabilized, once every six to twelve months is sufficient. Any
change or trend in nutritional status can thus be detected and appropriate
adjustments made in the assistance programmes.
There is a serious nutritional emergency where the
malnutrition rate is either over 15%, or over 10% with aggravating factors (e.g.
an epidemic). Such a situation requires I urgent action.
Recognizing and Measuring Malnutrition
27. Malnutrition can be recognized by clinical signs (such as
oedema and micronutrient deficiencies) and by anthropometry (body measurements).
Measurements such as weight-for-height are used as an objective assessment of
nutritional status, which quantifies the nutritional situation at one point in
time, and allows comparisons over time.
28. Mortality and morbidity information will assist in
understanding the underlying causes of malnutrition and identify people who are
most affected. Child mortality rates are particularly important.
In an emergency a high child mortality rate is very often
associated with high levels of malnutrition.
Death rates among children who are severely malnourished can be
about six to ten times greater than those who are healthy and well nourished in
the same population.
29.Weight-for-height in children, is the best
indicator to assess and monitor nutritional status of populations. The actual
weight of a child is calculated as a percentage of the standard weight for a
normal child of that height, or as a Z score. It is the most sensitive indicator
of acute malnutrition and is preferred for nutrition surveys and for measuring
individual progress in feeding programmes. It is usually young children aged
between 6 and 59 months who are measured in nutrition surveys, because young
children are the first to show signs of malnutrition in times of food shortage
and are the most severely affected. When the ages of children are not known, 65
cm and 110 cm height are used as the cut off points instead of 6 and 59 months.
30.Body mass index (BMI) (Weight in kg)/ (Height
in m)2, is used for assessing the nutritional status of adults by
assessing the degree of thinness (see table 1).
31.Oedema is an essential nutrition indicator and
indicates kwashiorkor (see Annex 3). Oedema is characterized by swelling in both
feet due to an abnormal accumulation of fluid in intercellular spaces of the
body.
32.Mid-upper-arm-circumference
The mid upper arm circumference (MUAC) is measured on the left
arm, at the mid-point between elbow and shoulder. MUAC should only be used as
part of a two-step screening exercise. In the first step the MUAC of children is
measured. Those falling below a certain cut-off circumference are then
channelled to weight-for-height measurement to determine their nutritional
status and whether they should be included in selective feeding programmes.
33.Weight-for-age andheight-for-age are not such useful assessment indicators in
emergencies as age is often difficult to determine. This can be used for growth
monitoring of individual children, and in assessing long-term (chronic)
malnutrition.
Moderate and Severe Malnutrition
34. The standard cut-off points to describe malnutrition, are
between 70% and 80% weight-for-height (or between -3 and -2 Z scores) for
moderately malnourished and less than 70% weight-for-height (or < -3 Z
scores) for severely malnourished.
Children with oedema are always classified as severely
malnourished.
Table 1 summarizes the key malnutrition indicators.
Table 1: Key Nutritional Indicators*
Malnutrition
Children under 5 years
Adults BMI
Weight-for- height (W/H)% of median
value4
Weight-for- height (W/H) in Z scores or
SDs5
MUAC
Moderate
70% to 79%
-3 to -2 Z
110mm to <125mm
16-17
Severe
less than 70%
less than -3 Z or oedema
< 110mm, oedema
less than 16
* Results expressed by different methods are not
directly comparable
4Percentage below the median
"reference" weight-for-height values.
5Standard deviations (SDs, or Z
score) below the median "reference" weight-for-height
values.
General Feeding Programme
· A mean figure of
2,100 kcal per person per day is used as the planning figure for calculating the
food energy requirements of refugees in emergencies in developing
countries6;
· Everyone in the
population, irrespective of age or sex, should receive exactly the same general
ration (i.e. same quantity and type of foods);
· The food basket
should be nutritionally balanced and suitable for children and other groups at
risk;
· Every effort
should be made to provide familiar foodstuffs and maintain traditional food
habits;
· The level of fat
intake should provide at least 17% of the dietary energy of the ration. Protein
intake should provide at least 10-12% of the total energy;
· The diet must meet
essential vitamin and mineral requirements;
· Particular
attention should be paid to locally prevalent nutrient
deficiencies.
6The Management of Nutritional
Emergencies in Large Populations, WHO, Geneva, 1978.
General Ration
35. Every effort should be made to provide familiar foodstuffs
and maintain sound traditional food habits. Expert advice on the ration size and
composition is essential and should take full account of local availability of
food commodities. Staple food should not be changed simply because unfamiliar
substitutes are readily available. Inappropriate foods often lead to waste and
lower the morale of the refugees.
36. The first concern is to ensure that energy and protein
requirements are met. The planning figure for the average minimum daily energy
requirement per person per day for a developing country population at the
beginning of an emergency is 2,100 kcal. See Annex 1 for examples of rations
which meet this requirement. This average requirement is calculated on an
average population containing men, women and children of different age groups.
However, a complete ration should be provided to each refugee without
distinction.
A minimum requirement of 2,100 kcal per person per day is
used as the planning figure for a developing country population at the beginning
of an emergency.
A population which contains mostly active adults may require
considerably higher average energy intakes. In addition, a higher ration is
vital for survival in a cold climate.
37. The daily energy requirement can be adjusted when the
situation has stabilized7 and detailed data is available. Factors to
be taken into consideration are:
i. Age and sex composition of the
population;
ii. Activity level;
iii. Climatic conditions;
iv. Health, nutritional and physiological
status;
v. People's access to other food sources e.g.
agriculture, trade, labour.
38. The food basket should comprise: a staple food source
(cereals), an energy source (fats and oils), a protein source (legumes, blended
foods, meat, fish), salt and possibly condiments (such as spices). Fresh foods
should be included in the food basket for essential micronutrients. The level of
fat intake should provide at least 17% of the dietary energy of the ration, and
protein intake should provide at least 10-12% of the total energy.
39. When certain food commodities are not available, they can be
replaced for a maximum of one month by other available food items in order to
maintain the adequate energy and protein level. Substitution in energy value,
should an item not be available, is:
Corn Soy Blend (CSB) for beans
1:1
Sugar for oil
2:1
Cereal for beans
2:1
Cereal for oil8
3:1
E.g. the energy from 20 g of sugar can substitute for that from
10 g of vegetable oil.
40. Cereal flour, rather than whole grain, should be provided,
especially at the beginning of an emergency. Considerable fuel savings are made
by using milled rather than whole grain. If whole grains are provided, local
milling should be made available and the cost compensated for.
41. Essential vitamin and mineral requirements must also be met.
The basic food commodities distributed through the general ration do not
normally cover the required amounts of vitamins and minerals. Therefore,
deficiencies often arise among populations entirely dependent on external food
aid and within a population among vulnerable groups like infants, pregnant women
and nursing mothers. Particular attention should also be paid to locally
prevalent nutrient deficiencies.
42. The risk of specific nutrient deficiencies can be estimated
from the composition of the general ration and access the population has to
other food sources in the area. Possible options for providing vitamins and
minerals are:
i. Provide fresh food products;
ii. Promote the production of vegetables and
fruits;
iii. Add to the ration a food rich in a particular
vitamin and micronutrient such as fortified cereals, blended foods, or
condiments;
iv. Provide supplements in tablet form, which is the
least preferred option.
43. Wherever possible the refugees should be encouraged to grow
vegetables themselves: the production of fresh food by refugees not only
improves and diversifies the diet but saves fuel and provides an opportunity to
generate some income. Larger plot sizes and the provision of appropriate seeds
would facilitate this, however, it can be difficult to encourage refugees to
produce fresh food because of their uncertainty as to the length of their stay
and problems of access to land.
7 Seefor further
information: WFP/UNHCR Guidelines for Estimating Food and Nutritional Needs in
Emergencies, 1997.
8 One way only, note that oil
cannot be used in place of cereal.
Food Distribution
44. The need for a fair, efficient and regular food distribution
cannot be over-emphasized. This is discussed in chapter 13 on commodity
distribution. There are two main types of distribution: dry ration and cooked
meals.
45. Dry food distribution (which is taken home) has major
advantages over cooked food distribution. It allows families to prepare their
food and to use their time as they wish, permits them to continue to eat
together as a unit and is more culturally and socially acceptable. It also
reduces the risk of the spread of infectious diseases.
46. Cooked meal distribution requires centralized kitchens with
adequate utensils, water and fuel (the requirement is less than the amount
required for family cooking), and trained personnel. The refugees usually sit
together in a feeding compound, although in some circumstances families can
carry the cooked meal to their accommodation. At least two meals must be served
each day.
Cooked meals are much more difficult to organize efficiently
than dry ration distribution, particularly for large numbers.
Cooked meal distribution to the whole population is therefore
only provided under exceptional circumstances when the refugees do not have
access to adequate water and/or cooking fuel and in insecure situations.
47. In addition to cooking pots, fuel and utensils, the refugees
must have containers and sacks to protect and store their food rations. Oil tins
and grain bags will be useful, and contracts with suppliers, at least for
initial deliveries, should not require their return.
Monitoring the General Feeding Programme
48. The general feeding programme can be monitored by:
Food basket monitoring:
Comparing the quantity and quality of food collected by the refugees at the
distribution site on distribution days compared with the planned ration, Also by
monitoring after the distribution at household level through house visits (on
distribution day);
Discussing the quality and
quantity of the rations regularly with the refugees;
Investigating
complaints.
For more information on how to monitor the general food
programme see UNHCR's Commodity Distribution: A Practical Guide For Field Staff,
and MSF's Nutrition
Guidelines.
Selective Feeding Programmes
· The objective of a
selective feeding programme is to reduce the prevalence of malnutrition and
mortality among the groups at risk;
· Selective feeding
programmes provide extra food for the malnourished and at-risk groups -
this food must be in addition to (not a substitute for) the general feeding
programme;
· The programme must
actively identify those who are eligible for the selective feeding programmes,
using criteria described in this chapter.
Figure 2 - Response to food and
nutritional needs
General Principles of Selective Feeding Programmes
49. Where malnutrition exists or the needs of the groups at risk
cannot be met through the general ration, special arrangements are required to
provide extra food. This is organized through different types of selective
feeding programmes which take into account the degree of malnutrition and
associated risks. In the emergency phase of an operation, selective feeding
programmes are part of an emergency measure to prevent excess mortality.
However, preventing excess mortality should be a combined strategy of selective
feeding, public health and emergency health care. Ref. Figure 2.
The organization of these programmes should be integrated
from the beginning with community and health services and especially with Mother
and Child Health Care programmes (MCH).
50. Malnutrition develops particularly among infants, children,
pregnant women, nursing mothers, the elderly and the sick. Their vulnerability
stems from the greater nutrient requirements associated with growth, the
production of breast milk, repair of tissues and production of antibodies.
Malnutrition results in lower resistance to infection, which in turn results in
further malnutrition. Small children are particularly susceptible to this cycle
of infection and malnutrition. Sick children must eat and drink even if they do
not have an appetite, are vomiting, or have diarrhoea. Because children are
unable to eat a large volume of food, it is necessary to prepare food in a
concentrated form (giving the required nutrients in less volume), and to provide
more frequent meals.
51. Certain other groups or individuals may be at risk of
malnutrition for social or economic reasons. These include unaccompanied
children, the disabled, single-parent families, and the elderly, particularly
those without family support. In some communities specific social or cultural
practices and taboos may put constraints on meeting the nutritional needs of
certain persons, for example pregnant women and nursing mothers or even sick
children.
52. Even if the overall quantity of food is sufficient there may
be other causes such as:
i. Inequities in the distribution system reducing
access to food for certain groups;
ii. Inaccuracies in registration or unfair
distribution of ration cards;
iii. Infections;
iv. Faulty feeding or food preparation
habits.
Selective feeding programmes are not a substitute for an
inadequate general ration.
53. The following types of selective feeding programmes are
contemplated:
i. Supplementary Feeding Programmes
(SFP)
a) Targeted
SFP
b) Blanket
SFP;
ii. Therapeutic Feeding Programmes.
To be effective, the extra ration provided must be additional
to, and not a substitute for, the general ration.
Supplementary Feeding Programmes (SFP)
54. Targeted and blanket supplementary feeding programmes
provide extra food to groups at risk, in addition to the general ration, as dry
take-home or wet on-the-spot feeding for a limited period of time.
55. A targeted SFP aims to rehabilitate those who are moderately
malnourished. These could be children adults or older persons and/or individuals
selected on medical or social grounds, e.g. pregnant and nursing women and the
sick. This is the most common type of supplementary feeding programme.
56. A blanket SFP provides a food (and/or micronutrient)
supplement to all members of a certain vulnerable group regardless of their
individual nutritional status in order to prevent a deterioration in the
nutritional status of those groups most at risk (usually children under five,
pregnant women and nursing mothers.
57. Supplementary feeding programmes can be implemented either
by giving wet or dry rations.
Therapeutic Feeding Programmes (TFP)
58. A TFP aims to reduce deaths among infants and young children
with severe protein-energy malnutrition (PEM). The forms of PEM are described in
Annex 3. Generally the target group is children under 5 years with severe
malnutrition. Therapeutic feeding can either be implemented in special feeding
centres or in a hospital or clinic. TFP involves intensive medical and
nutritional treatment. Therapeutic milk (TM) is used for treatment of severely
malnourished children. However if TM is not available, high protein milk can be
used (dried skimmed milk, oil and sugar) mixed with vitamin mineral supplements.
Starting a Selective Feeding Programme
59. The decision to start a selective feeding programme is based
on the prevalence of malnutrition and other aggravating factors. Aggravating
factors include high mortality (more than 1 person per 10,000 per day), measles
epidemic, high prevalence of infectious diarrhoea, general ration below minimum
requirements. The prevalence of malnutrition is assessed from the initial and
ongoing nutrition assessments and surveys.
In all situations, remember that it is more important to
address the root causes of malnutrition than to address symptoms through
selective feeding programmes.
60. The effectiveness of these programmes will be severely
compromised if an adequate general ration is not provided.
Figure 3 - Selective Feeding
Programmes
61. Figure 3 provides guidance on deciding when to initiate
selective feeding programmes. Clear criteria for the termination of these
programmes should be defined from the beginning.
Identifying Those Eligible
62. Selective feeding programmes must be based on the active
identification and follow up of those considered at risk. Beneficiaries can be
identified by:
House to house visits to
identify all members of a targeted group (e.g. children under five, elderly
people);
Mass screening of all
children to identify those moderately or severely malnourished;
Screening on arrival (for
example with the registration exercise);
Referrals by community
services and health services.
63. Table 2 below summarizes the main objectives, target groups
and criteria for selection of beneficiaries of selective feeding programmes.
Table 2 - Types of Selective Feeding Progammes
Programme
Objectives
Criteria for selection and target group
Targeted SFP
· Correct moderate
malnutrition · Prevent moderately
malnourished from becoming severely malnourished · Reduce mortality and morbidity risk in children
under 5 years · Provide nutritional support
to selected pregnant women and nursing mothers · Provide follow up service to those discharged from
therapeutic feeding programmes
· Children under 5 years
moderately malnourished: - between 70% and 80% of the
median weight-for-height or: - between -3 and -2 Z-scores
weight-for-height · Malnourished individuals
(based on weight-for-height, BMI, MUAC or clinical signs): - older
children (between 5 and 10 years) - adolescents - adults and elderly
persons - medical referrals · Selected
pregnant women (from date of confirmed pregnancy) and nursing mothers (until
6 months after delivery), for instance using MUAC <22 cm as a
cut-off indicator for pregnant women ·
Referrals from TFP
Blanket SFP
· Prevent deterioration
of nutritional situation · Reduce
prevalence of acute mal- nutrition in children under 5 years · Ensure safety net measures · Reduce mortality and morbidity risk
· Children under 3 or under 5
years · All pregnant women (from date of
confirmed pregnancy) and nursing mothers (until maximum 6 months after
delivery · Other at-risk groups
TFP
· Reduce excess mortality
and morbidity risk in children under 5 years · Provide medical/nutritional treatment for the
severely malnourished
· Children under 5 years
severely malnourished: - < 70% of the median weight-for-height
and/or oedema or: - < -3 Z-scores weight-for-height and/or
oedema · Severly malnourished children older
than 5 year adolescents and adults admitted based on available
weight-for-height standards or presence of oedema · Low Birth Weight babies · Orphans < 1 year (only when traditional
care practices are inadequate) · Mothers
of children younger than one year with breast feeding failure (only in
exceptional cases where relactation through counselling and traditional
alternative feeding have failed)
64. The links between different selective feeding programmes and
the criteria for entry and discharge from a programme are shown in figure 4
below.
Planning and Organizing a Selective Feeding Programme.
Organizing a Supplementary Feeding Programme
65. Supplementary feeding programmes can be implemented either
by providing wet rations or dry rations.
i. Wet rations are prepared in the kitchen of a
feeding centre and consumed on-site. The beneficiary, or child and caretaker,
have to come for all meals to the feeding centre every day;
ii. Dry rations are distributed to take home for
preparation and consumption. Rations are usually distributed once a
week.
66. In most situations dry take-home SFP programmes are
preferable. The advantages of dry instead of wet rations for SFP include:
Figure 4 - Admission and discharge
Criteria
i. Much easier to organize;
ii. Fewer staff are needed;
iii. Lower risk of transmission of communicable
diseases;
iv. Less time-consuming for the mother;
v. The mother's responsibility for feeding the child
is preserved.
The ration for dry feeding however has to be higher than for wet
feeding in order to compensate for sharing and substitution. Wet rations are
typically given in situations where insecurity prevents dry rations from being
taken home safely or where access to cooking facilities are limited. See Table 3
below for some of the main considerations when organizing a selective feeding
programme.
Organizing a Therapeutic Feeding Programme
67. Therapeutic feeding programmes are either implemented in
specially organized feeding centres or in hospitals or clinics. They involve
intensive medical and nutritional treatment as well as rehydration. The
programme should be easily accessible to the population, near to or integrated
into a health facility. The treatment should be carried out in phases (see Table
3), the length of which depend on the severity of malnutrition and/or medical
complications. At least during the first week of a TFP, care has to be provided
on a 24-hour basis.
Table 3
Organization of Selective Feeding Programmes
Supplementary Feeding Programme
Therapeutic Feeding Programme
Organization
· On site wet feeding · Same medical care
On site feeding would usually only be considered
for targeted SFP
· Take home dry feeding
This is the preferred option for both blanket and
targeted programmes
· On site wet
feeding + · Intensive medical
care + · Psychological stimulation
during rehabilitation phase
Size of extra ration
· 500-700kcal/ person/day,
and
· 15-25 g protein
·
1,000-1,200 kcal/person/day, and
· 35-45 g protein
· 150 kcal/kg
body-weight/day/ patient. And · 3-4 g
protein per kg body- weight/day/patient
Frequency of meals
Minimum 2 meals/day
Ration distributed once per week
Frequent meals. Phase 1:8-10 meals over a 24
hour period Rehabilitation phase: 4-6 meats
68. One of the main constraints to the implementation of a TFP
is the lack of experienced or insufficient staff to manage the programme. Proper
training of both medical and non-medical personnel is essential before starting
the programme. The refugees, particularly the mothers of patients, must be
involved in managing the TFP centres.
Planning the quantity of food needed for selective
feeding
69. The amount of food needed for the selective feeding
programme will depend on:
i. The type of selective programme;
ii. The type of commodities;
iii. The expected number of
beneficiaries.
70. This information should be based on precise demographic
information and on the prevalence of malnutrition taken from the results of the
nutritional survey. The nutritionist will advise on the appropriate commodities
and type of programme.
71. However, in some circumstances, estimates on the prevalence
of malnutrition and expected number of beneficiaries may need to be made for
planning purposes, when for example a registration and nutrition assessment have
not yet been carried out. See table 4 below for a projected demographic
breakdown for a typical population.
72. If it is apparent that there is, or is likely to be, a major
nutritional emergency, the following assumptions can be made for planning
purposes:
i. 15 to 20% may suffer from moderate
malnutrition;
ii. 2 to 3% may be severely
malnourished;
iii. The breakdown of a typical population, by age,
is as follows:
Table 4
Projected Breakdown by Age
age groups
% total population
0-4 or under 5
15-20%
Pregnant
1.5-3%
Lactating
3-5%
73. For example, to estimate the number of beneficiaries for a
targeted SFP and TFP, both for children under 5 years:
If the total population = 30,000
Estimated number under 5 yrs = 4,500
-6,000(15-20%)
Estimated prevalence of moderate malnutrition (15%)
gives 675-900 children
Estimated prevalence of severe malnutrition (2%)
gives 90-120 children
With these numbers the estimated food requirements can be
calculated by multiplying the estimated number of beneficiaries for each
programme by the ration scale appropriate for each beneficiary, as
follows:
Quantity of Commodity req. = Ration / person / day × no.
benef. × no. days
Monitoring Selective Feeding Programmes
74. The effectiveness of impact of the selective feeding
programme should be monitored at regular intervals.
75. Selective feeding programmes should be monitored and
evaluated to assess their performance in relation to the established
objectives9. Monitoring and evaluation will involve the regular
collection and analysis of:
Process indicators such as
attendance, coverage and recovery rates, to evaluate the success in
implementation and trends in the programme over time;
Impact indicators such as
malnutrition prevalence, mortality rate and numbers served, to evaluate the
effectiveness and efficacy of the programme.
76. The effectiveness of selective feeding programmes can be
measured through nutrition surveys and the regular collection of feeding centre
statistics. Specific forms for monthly reporting on supplementary and
therapeutic feeding programmes are attached as Annexes 4 and 5. A nutrition
survey results form (weight-for-height) is also attached (Annex 6).
77. Trends in health and nutrition indicators can be related to
many different factors. Actions in other sectors such as water, shelter, or
community services may help explain a positive outcome.
9For further reference, consult
Chapter 8: Evaluation of Feeding Programmes in the MSF Nutrition
Guidelines.
Criteria for Closing Programmes
78. Once the number of malnourished is significantly reduced, it
may be more efficient to manage the remaining severely malnourished individuals
through health facilities and through community based programmes. The specific
criteria for closing each selective feeding programme will depend on the degree
of success in reducing the main aggravating factors mentioned in Figure 3 and on
the degree of integration between these feeding programmes and mother and child
health (MCH) activities and other support services offered by the refugee
community.
79. After closing selective feeding programmes, any
deterioration of the situation should be detected by nutrition surveys
undertaken at regular intervals and review of morbidity and mortality data. This
is especially important if the overall situation remains
unstable.
Infant Feeding and use of Milk Products
· Breast-feeding is
best for babies and must be promoted and continued for as long as
possible;
· Ban baby bottles
completely;
· Weaning foods must
be appropriate; foreign baby foods and special foods often are not;
· Infant formulae
should be avoided and used only under strictly controlled conditions, with a cup
and spoon;
· Re-stimulate
lactation10 in cases where milk production has been affected by
stress and use wet nursing where appropriate;
· Milk products,
especially powdered milk, and infant formulae can cause health problems (as
described below) and they are often inappropriate.
80. Human milk is the best and safest for infants and children
under two years. Breast-feeding provides a secure and hygienic source of food,
often initially the only source of food, as well as antibodies giving protection
against some infectious diseases. Breast feeding must be encouraged for as long
as possible. Every effort must be made to promote or re-stimulate lactation even
among sick and malnourished mothers. Experience has shown that this can be done.
Mothers may need to receive extra food to encourage breast-feeding and provide
the additional calories and nutrients required. This should be done through the
feeding programmes.
81. The problems associated with infant formulae, milk products
and feeding bottles are exacerbated in a refugee emergency. Clean boiled water
is essential but rarely available, careful dilution of the feeds is of critical
importance but difficult to control, mothers are unlikely to be familiar with
the use of infant formulae, and the instructions are often in a foreign
language. Infant formulae, if unavoidable, should be distributed from health or
feeding centres under strictly controlled conditions and proper supervision.
Infant feeding bottles must never be distributed or used; they are almost
impossible to sterilize and keep sterile under emergency conditions and are
therefore dangerous. Babies should be fed by clean cup and spoon if necessary.
Appropriate weaning foods should be introduced while breast-feeding is
continuing. Weaning foods should be locally available foodstuffs and as far as
possible be prepared in the traditional manner. Overseas donations of tinned
baby foods are rarely appropriate.
10Re-stimulate lactation refers to
the re-establishment of an adequate volume of milk release. This is achieved by
increasing suckling and through social peer support.
Policy On Use of Milk Powder11
i. Never distribute milk powder, by itself, to take home. It
should be mixed with cereal flour, six parts cereal to one part milk powder;
ii. Never let liquid milk be carried home;
iii. Only use dried milk in supervised wet feeding programmes as
a high energy drink mixed with oil and sugar;
iv. Dried skimmed milk should always be fortified with Vitamin A
and have a Shelf-life Of more than six months.
11UNHCR IOM 88/89/FOM 76/89
Policy Directive for acceptance, distribution and use of milk products in
refugee feeding centres, UNHCR,
Geneva.
Key References
Calculation of Nutritional value of Food Commodities
(NUT-VAL), an EXCEL spreadsheet which can be used to calculate the nutritional
value of ration scales, UNHCR, Geneva, 1998.
Commodity Distribution: A Practical Guide For Field
Staff, UNHCR, June 1997.
IOM88/89 - FOM 76/89 Policy for acceptance,
distribution and use of milk products in refugee feeding programmes, UNHCR,
Geneva, 1989. Also available in French.Memorandum of Understanding (MOU) on
the Joint Working Arrangements for Refugee, Returnee and Internally Displaced
Persons Feeding Operations, Also available in French. WFP/ UNHCR, 1997.
Nutrition Guidelines, M�decins Sans Fronti�res (MSF),
1995. Essential Reading.
WFP/UNHCR Guidelines For Estimating Food and Nutritional
Needs, Also available in French. WFP/UNHCR, 1997.
WFP/UNHCR Guidelines For Selective Feeding Programmes in
Emergency Situations, WFP/ UNHCR, 1999.
Glossary
Anthropometric measurements
Assessment of body size and composition which reflects food
intake, physical activity and disease. Most common anthropometric indicators
include weight, height and arm circumference.
Baseline data
Data collected at the beginning of a programme that can be
compared with similar data collected later and so used to evaluate the impact of
interventions or to monitor trends.
Body Mass Index (BMI)
(weight in kg)/ (height in m)2 which is used for
assessing the nutritional status of adolescents and adults.
Fortified blended food
A flour composed of pre-cooked cereals and a protein source,
mostly legumes, fortified with vitamins and minerals, e.g. corn soya blend
(CSB), wheat soya blend (WSB) used for feeding programmes.
Fortification
Adding micronutrients to foods, e.g. iodized salt and fortified
blended food.
Kilocalorie
Unit of energy used in nutrition, 1 Kcal = 4.17 kilojoules.
Kwashiorkor
Severe form of malnutrition characterized by oedema (swelling)
particularly of the lower parts of the arms and legs.
Marasmus
Severe form of malnutrition in which the person becomes wasted.
Micronutrients
Minerals and vitamins.
Mid-upper arm circumference
(MUAC)
Circumference at the mid-point of the left upper arm, which is
an indicator of malnutrition and used as a tool for screening.
Nutrients
Those parts of food that are absorbed and/or used by the body
i.e. carbohydrate, protein, fat, alcohol, vitamins and minerals.
Oedema
An abnormal accumulation of fluid in intercellular spaces of the
body. In case of nutritional oedema this is oedema due to a deficiency in the
diet.
On-site feeding
Cooked meal eaten at the feeding centre.
Stunting
Low height for age. Comparing the height of a child of a certain
age with the height of reference (healthy) children of the same age indicates
the level of chronic malnutrition.
Take-home rations
Dry rations that are given to people to take and prepare at
home.
Therapeutic milk
Special milk used for rehabilitation of severely malnourished
persons.
Wasting
Abnormal loss of fat and/or muscle tissue which is indicated by
a low weight for height, a low body mass index or observation (thinness).
Xerophthalmia
Clinical signs in the eye caused by Vitamin A deficiency.
Weight-for-Height
The weight of a person at a certain height compared with the
reference weight for that height.
Annexes
Annex 1 - Basic Facts About Food and Nutrition
All foods are made up of five basic types of nutrient in
addition to variable amounts of water.
Carbohydrates, the main source of energy, provide 4 kcal/g. They
are mostly starches and sugars of vegetable origin, and are a major component of
cereals and tubers.
Fats and oils provide the most concentrated source of energy,
and have more than twice the energy content per weight of carbohydrates and
proteins (9/kcal/g).
Proteins are body-building substances required for growth and
tissue repair. Protein is found in foods of animal origin and in cereals and
legumes and provide 4 kcal/g.
Vitamins and minerals are needed in small quantities for the
adequate functioning of the body and protection against disease. Fresh
vegetables and fruits are a good source of vitamins. Water soluble vitamins are
fragile and cannot be stored (Vitamins Bs and C), whereas fat soluble vitamins
can be stored in the body (Vitamin A and D). Important minerals are iron,
sodium, iodine, zinc, magnesium, potassium, etc. Individual vitamins and
minerals or combinations are found in all foods in very variable amounts.
Energy and Protein Intakes
If the energy intake is inadequate, some protein will be burnt
to provide energy. That is, it will be used in the same ways as carbohydrate or
fat. More than 20% of the energy requirement should be supplied from fats and
oils which greatly enhance the palatability of the diet and increase energy
density (important for younger children). Energy requirements vary widely even
in normal individuals. They are also increased by physical activity. Much higher
energy and protein intakes are required for the treatment of malnutrition, when
the aim is rehabilitation rather than maintenance.
Food and Diets
Most diets in most countries contain adequate amounts of all the
nutrients required for good health if enough of the diet is taken to satisfy the
individual's energy requirements. Even a growing child, if healthy, requires no
more than 10% of total calories to be supplied from protein sources.
Figure
Annex 1 (cont.) - Nutritional Value Of Food Commodities
COMMODITY
Nutritional Value/100 g
Energy Kcal
Protein (g)
Fat (g)
Price per MT in US$
Cereals
Wheat
330
12.3
1.5
165
Rice
360
7.0
0.5
280
Sorghum/Millet
335
11.0
3.0
200
Maize
350
10.0
4.0
170
Processed Cereals
Maize meal
360
9.0
3.5
225
Wheat flour
350
11.5
1.5
240
Bulgur wheat
350
11.0
1.5
220
Blended Food
Corn Soya Blend
380
18.0
6.0
320
Wheat Soya Blend
370
20.0
6.0
390
Soya-fortified bulgur wheat
350
17.0
1.5
240
Soya-fortified maize meal
390
13.0
1.5
270
Soya-fortified wheat flour
360
16.0
1.3
240
Soya-fortified sorghum grits
360
16.0
1.0
190
Dairy Products
Dried Skim Milk (enriched)
360
36.0
1.0
1,900
Dried Skim Milk (plain)
360
36.0
1.0
1,800
Dried Whole Milk
500
25.0
27.0
2,200
Canned cheese
355
22.5
28.0
1,850
Therapeutic milk
540
14.7
31.5
2,200
Meat and Fish
Canned meat
220
21.0
15.0
1,950
Dried salted fish
270
47.0
7.5
1,500
Canned fish
305
22.0
24.0
2,000
Oils and Fats
Vegetable oil
885
-
100.0
750
Butter oil
860
-
98.0
2,300
Edible fat
900
-
100.0
950
Pulses
Beans
335
20.0
1.2
440
Peas
335
22.0
1.4
375
Lentils
340
20.0
0.6
500
Miscellaneous
Sugar
400
-
-
350
High Energy Biscuits
450
12.0
15.0
1,250
Tea (black)
-
-
1,235
Iodized salt
-
-
-
150
Dates
245
2.0
0.5
1,900
Dried fruit
270
4.0
0.5
1,200
Note: The prices quoted are free-on-board (FOB) and therefore
do not include transportation costs. The prices shown are as of 1998 and will
vary over time. This information is regularly updated and published by WFP and
is available from WFP HQ's or from their offices in the field.
Annex 1 (cont.) - Characteristics of Common Foods
Food type
Vitamins and minerals
Comments
1.
Cereal grains (rice, corn, sorghum, oats, etc.)
Contain vitamin B and iron. However these are reduced by
milling, i.e. the whiter the flour the greater the loss of vitamins.
The main source of both energy and protein in most diets.
Variable but generally low, except for potatoes which are
rich in vitamin C.
Bulk and low protein content makes them unsuitable
as staple foods in emergencies.
4.
Vegetables and fruits
Important source of vitamins and minerals. Variable
quantities of B and C vitamins. Dark green leaves or
yellow/red pigmentation usually indicates vitamin A compounds.
5.
Meat, milk and dairy products, eggs, etc.
Good sources of B vitamins. Whole milk and eggs also
good source of vitamin A. Milk and eggs provide significant amounts of
calcium.
Usually consumed in very small quantities in normal times.
They are more readily used by the body than proteins of vegetable
origin. Therefore small quantities useful to improve the quality and
palatability of diet.
6.
Fish, dried
Rich source of calcium and iron. Contains B Vitamins.
A concentrated source of protein for those who like
it. Therefore acceptability trials essential before use.
7.
Fats and oils
Fats derived from milk are sources of vitamin A and
D, while vegetable fats contain no vitamin A and D, except for red
palm-oil.
Useful way to increase energy intake without increasing
bulk of diet. Improves palatability and helps in food preparation.
Annex 2 - Examples of Food Rations
Examples of adequate full rations for the affected population
entirely reliant on food assistance12
Five types of rations are shown to illustrate differences due to
such factors as the food habits of the population and the acceptability and
availability of the commodities in the region.
Items
Rations (quantity in grams per person per
day)
Type 1*
Type2*
Type 3*
Type 4**
Type 5*
Cereal flour/rice/bulgur
400
420
350
420
450
Pulses
60
50
100
60
50
Oil (vit. A fortified)
25
25
25
30
25
Canned fish/meat
-
20
30
Fortified blended foods
50
40
50
-
-
Sugar
15
20
20
20
Iodized salt
5
5
5
5
5
Fresh veg./fruits
-
-
100
Spices
-
-
-
-
5
Energy: kilocalories
2113
2106
2087
2092
2116
Protein (in g and in % kcal)
58 g; 11 %
60 g; 11 %
72 g; 14%
45 g; 9%
51 g; 10%
Fat (in g and in % kcal)*
43g; 18%
47 g; 20%
43 g; 18%
38 g; 16%
41 g; 17%
* For rations 1, 2, 3, & 5 the cereal used
for the calculation is maize meal
** This ration has rice as a cereal; the low
percentage energy for protein is acceptable due to its high quality; the
slightly low fat content is in line with food habits in rice-eating
countries
Examples of Typical Daily Rations for SFPs (in grammes per
person per day)
Take-home or dry ration
On-site feeding or wet ration
Item
Ration 1
Ration 2
Ration 3
Ration 4
Ration 5
Ration 6
Ration 7
Blended food, fortified
250
200
100
125
100
Cereal
125
High Energy Biscuits (HEB)
12513
Oil, fortified with vitamin A
25
20
15
20
10
10
Pulses
30
30
Sugar
20
15
10
10
Salt, iodized
5
Energy (Kcal)
1250
1000
620
560
700
605
510
Protein (g)
45
36 25
15
20
23
18
Fat % Kcal
30
30
30
30"
28
26
29
12 WFP/UNHCR Guidelines for
estimating food and nutritional needs. December, 1997.
13WFP Specification.
14 High Energy biscuits with
15% fat meet the energy density requirement.
Annex 3 - Main Nutritional Deficiency Disorders in
Emergencies"
Protein-energy malnutrition (PEM) is likely to be the
most important health problem and a leading cause of death during an emergency.
There are several forms:
Marasmus is marked by the severe
wasting of fat and muscle, which the body has broken down for energy, leaving
"skin and bones". It is the most common form of PEM in nutritional emergencies.
Kwashiorkor is characterized essentially by oedema
(swelling which usually starts in the feet and legs), sometimes accompanied by a
characteristic skin rash and/or changes in hair colour (reddish). The hair
becomes sparse.
In Marasmic kwashiorkor there is a combination of
severe wasting and oedema.
Children under 5 years are usually the most affected, but older
children and adults are also often at risk or affected. The treatment of severe
forms of PEM is presented in the section on selective feeding programmes.
Vitamin and mineral deficiencies can cause long-lasting
or permanent disabilities and can be fatal. The deficiencies most likely to
occur include:
Iron deficiency (1) causes
anaemia. (signs: pallor of skin and eyelids, fatigue,
weakness and shortness of breath); (2) increases the risk of haemorrhage,
infection and death associated with childbirth; (3) increases rates of
low-birth-weight and (4) impairs the cognitive development of infants and
children.
Iodine deficiency causes not
only goitrebut also some impairment of intellectual development
of children and of reproductive performance in women. Severe maternal deficiency
can cause cretinism in the offspring. Best prevented in emergencies by the use
of Iodized salt.
Vitamin A deficiency causes
Xerophthalmia, blindness and death. Eye signs: poor vision
in dim light, dryness of conjunctiva or cornea, foamy material on the
conjunctiva or clouding of the cornea itself. These signs may appear after
several months of an inadequate diet, or following acute or prolonged
infections, particularly measles and diarrhoea.
Vitamin B1 (Thiamine)
deficiency causes beri-beri. Symptoms and
signs: loss of appetite, malaise and severe weakness, especially in the legs;
may also lead to paralysis of the limbs or swelling of the body, heart failure
and sudden death. Beri-beri occurs when the diet consists almost exclusively of
white polished rice or starchy staple such as cassava.
Vitamin C deficiency causes
scurvy. Signs: swollen gums which bleed easily, swollen
painful joints, easy bruising. This occurs due to a lack of fresh vegetables and
fruits.
Niacin deficiency causes
pellagra. Signs: skin rash on parts of body exposed to sunlight;
diarrhoea; and mental changes leading to dementia. This occurs especially where
maize and sorghum are the staples and there is a lack of other
foods.
Prevention involves ensuring that people receive or have
access to a variety of foods that contain sufficient quantities of essential
vitamins and minerals. This also includes fortified food items distributed in
food aid, access to local markets, and produce from home gardens.
Treatment consists of administering therapeutic doses of
the missing nutrients. The distribution of multi-vitamin tablets to the entire
refugee population is a waste of time and money, since they contain insufficient
quantities of individual vitamins to correct deficiencies.
15Adapted from: The Management of
Nutritional Emergencies in Large Populations, WHO, Geneva, 1999 (in
press).
Total population: Under (<) 5 population Moderate
malnutrition rate: Target <5 (moderate malnutrition rate *<5
pop): Theoretical coverage <5 (new total (J)/Target):
CATEGORIES
< 5 years
³ 5 years
Pregnant
Lactating
TOTAL
M
F
M
F
women
women
Total at end of last month (A)
New Admissions:
< 80% WFH or < -2 Z-score
Others
Total New Admissions (B)
Re-admissions (C)
Total Admissions (D=B+C)
Discharged in this period:
percentage for <5 yrs (target):
Discharges (E)
E/I*100%= (>70%)
Deaths (F)
F/l*100%= (<3%)
Defaulters (G)
G/l*100%= (<15%)
Referrals (H)
Total Discharged (I=E+F+G+H)
New Total at end of this month (J=A+D-I)
Average length of stay in the programme
(from all or a sample of 30 recovered children) (target <60
days) =
Total No of days of admission of all (or 30) recovered
children
Total population: Under (<) 5 population Moderate
malnutrition rate: Target <5 (moderate malnutrition rate *<5
pop): Theoretical coverage <5 (new total (J)/Target):
CATEGORIES
< 5 years
³ 5 years
Adults
TOTAL
M
F
M
F
M
F
Total at end of last month (A)
New Admissions:
< 70% WFH or < -3 Z-score
Kwashiorkor
Others
Total New Admissions (B)
Re-admissions (C)
Total Admissions (D=B+C)
Discharged this month:
percentage for <5 yrs (target):
Discharged (E)
E/l*100%= (>75%)
Deaths (F)
F/l*100%= (<10%)
Defaulters (G)
G/l*100%= (<15%)
Referrals (H)
Total Discharged (I=E+F+G+H)
New Total at end of this month (J=A+D-I)
Causes of death:
Average weight gain during last month (from all or
a sample of 30 children) (target: >8 g/kg/day) =
weight at end of month (or on exit) - lowest weight
recorded during month
lowest weight recorded in last month × No of days between
lowest weight recorded and end of month (or on exit)
Average weight gain formarsmus (include only
children in phase II) =
Average weight gain forkwashiorkor (include only
children in phase II after complete loss of oedema) =
Average length of stay in the programme (from all
or a sample of 30 recovered children) (target <30 days) =
Total No of days of admission of all (or 30) recovered
children
No of recovered children (or 30)
Annex 6 - Nutrition Survey Reporting Form
Country: Camp: Date of reporting:
Population
Male
Female
Total
number
%
number
%
number
total population
under five population
Survey
date:
............/............/............/
method:
random - systematic - cluster
sample size:
under five population
Male
Female
Total
(6-59 month or 65-110 cm)
number
%
number
%
number
Results
weight-for-height % median
weight-for-height Z-score
category
number
%
confidence interval
category
number
%
confidence interval
<70% and/or oedema
£ 3 and/or oedema
>70 and >80%
³3 and ³2
total
total
Other results:
(mean Z-score, mean SD, family size, % children in each category
that is attending feeding center)
Comments/Observations:
Action/Intervention:
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
16. Water
(introduction...)
Overview
Introduction
Assessment and Organization
The Need
Immediate Response
Water Supply Systems
Water Sources
Pumping Equipment
Treatment
Storage
Distribution
Key References
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
16. Water
Figure
Overview
Situation
Water is essential to life and health. In emergencies, it is
often not available in adequate quantity and quality, thus creating a major
health hazard.
Objective
To provide sufficient safe water for the refugees and to meet
communal needs in the most cost-effective way.
Principles of response
· Give priority to
quantity while respecting quality;
· Refugees should be
directly involved in the development and operation of the water
supply;
· Ensure
consideration of water supply at the site selection and planning stages and
coordinate response closely with physical planning, public health and
environmental sanitation measures;
· If at all
possible, avoid the need to treat water - it is better to use a source that does
not need treatment. Treatment plants must always be correctly operated and
maintained. If large numbers of refugees are concentrated in camps, disinfection
of drinking water is absolutely necessary. Other types of treatment should be
considered according to the characteristics of the raw water;
· Provide a reserve
supply and spare capacity to meet temporary difficulties and the needs of new
arrivals;
· Take account of
seasonal variations in water quantity and quality;
· Seek expert advice
and coordinate closely with the appropriate national services.
Action
· Calculate the
water requirement and organize an immediate assessment of water supply
possibilities;
· Make an inventory
of water sources and assess all sources in terms of their water quality and
yield;
· Protect existing
water sources from pollution and provide good quantities of water of a
reasonable quality;
· Improve access to
supplies by developing sources and a storage and distribution system to deliver
a sufficient amount of safe water, including a reserve supply;
· Ensure regular
testing of water quality;
· Set up
infrastructure for operation and maintenance;
· Maintain and
update information on water resources obtained during needs assessment;
planning, construction, operation and
maintenance.
Introduction
1. People can survive longer without food than without water.
The provision of water demands immediate attention from the
start of a refugee emergency. The aim is to assure availability of enough water
to allow its effective distribution in the required quantities, and to ensure
that it is safe to drink.
Adequate storage capacity and back up systems for all components
of a water system must be assured; interruptions in the supply may be
disastrous.
2. If it is evident that available sources are inadequate (in
terms of yield or water quality), arrangements must be made to find alternative
sources. If necessary, water may have to be imported to the site (by truck,
barge, pipelines, etc.). Where even the most basic needs for water cannot be
safely met by existing resources, or when time is needed for further exploration
and development of new sources, refugees should be moved to a more suitable
location.
3. Water quality is difficult to assess. Always assume that all
water available during emergencies is contaminated, especially if it is taken
from surface water bodies (lakes, ponds, rivers, etc.). All sources of water
used by refugees must be separated from sanitation facilities and other sources
of contamination. In many circumstances, treatment will be needed to make the
water safe to drink. Safety of the water must be assured right through to its
consumption in the household.
4. As it is difficult to predict the life-span of a refugee
camp, it is best to plan on a cost-effective, long-term basis.
5. Figure 1 (a and b) shows some of the considerations for
planning an emergency water supply system.
6. The sectors of water, sanitation and site planning are highly
interdependent. This chapter should be read in conjunction with the chapters on
these
topics.
Assessment and Organization
· An immediate, on
the spot, assessment of local water resources in relation to needs is
essential;
· Technical
expertize is required and local knowledge is most important. Outside expertize
should be brought in only when clearly necessary;
· Involve the
refugees, use their skills and train them to operate and maintain the
system;
· Technology and
equipment should be simple, reliable, appropriate and familiar to the
country;
· Refugees may
compete with the local population for water resources. This may cause problems
between the two groups;
· Available sources
must be protected from pollution at once;
· The water supply
system must be supported by appropriate environmental health measures and
hygiene.
An immediate, on the spot assessment in relation to needs is
essential.
7. The government's central and local authorities should be
involved as much as possible in this assessment. Knowledge of the local terrain
and conditions is indispensable and expertize from outside the country should be
brought in only when clearly necessary.
Figure 1a - Needs and Resources
Assessment
General considerations for planning an emergency water supply
system
Figure 1b - Needs and Resources
Assessment
General considerations for planning an emergency water supply
system
8. Available sources must be protected from pollution at once.
Rationing of scarce water may be needed initially in order to ensure survival of
the weak and equity in distribution to the rest of the refugee population. The
design and construction of a water supply system should be cost-effective and
efficient bearing in mind long term needs, and should use simple but appropriate
technology to facilitate operation and maintenance.
Assessment
9. The objective of an assessment of water resources for human
consumption is to ascertain the availability of water (its quantity and quality)
in relation to the demand.
10. Estimating the need, or demand, for water does not require
special expertize, however, the assessment of supply possibilities does.
Assessing the supply means identifying possible sources, and assessing the
potential for developing and exploiting those resources.
11. Sources of water can be identified by: the local population,
the refugees themselves, the lie of the land (groundwater is often near the
surface in the vicinity of rivers and in other low places; its presence at
shallow depths is usually indicated by some types of vegetation); maps
(topographical, geological), remote sensing imagery (satellite images, aerial
photography), previous surveys of water resources; national or foreign experts
(hydrologists, hydro-geologists); and water diviners.
12. Assessing the water resources requires expertise in for
example water engineering, sanitation and in some cases logistics. It includes
assessing topographical advantages (gravity) and disadvantages (pumping
requirements), and analysing the overall environment of the refugee sites.
Further surveys will be necessary to organize the water supply system and should
cover relevant information on the refugees, other beneficiaries, and the
socio-economic characteristics of the host community. The results of such
assessments and surveys should be systematically filed to ensure that such data
will be available for future reference.
13. UNHCR maintains a standby arrangement with certain
organizations whereby qualified and experienced water engineers and other
experts can be provided at short notice for deployment to emergencies. (See
Appendix 1, Catalogue of Emergency Response Resources, for further details). If
it becomes clear that locally available expertize will not suffice, assistance
from the Programme and Technical Support Section at Headquarters should be
requested without delay.
14. Seasonal factors must always be carefully considered.
Supplies that are adequate in the rainy season may dry up at
other times.
Local knowledge, historical and hydrological information and
statistical interpretation should all be taken into account to determine the
seasonal patterns.
Organization
15. Bear in mind that the economic and social bases of refugee
groupings differ from those of the host communities. In addition, an influx of
refugees may over-strain water resources used by the local population and lead
to tension between the two groups. Special arrangements should be made with
local authorities and other implementing partners for adequate operation and
maintenance arrangements; the technology used in the water supply systems should
be carefully evaluated to ensure it is appropriate and that long term
operational needs (fuel, spare parts, management, etc.) will be within reach of
the refugees and camp managers.
16. The provision of safe water could become impossible without
the beneficiaries' understanding and cooperation. To the extent possible the
system should be developed in collaboration with the refugees who should be
involved with its operation and maintenance from the start.
Even the best system needs continuing maintenance, otherwise
it will break down.
Refugees without prior experience should be trained.
17. In order to be effective, water quality control and
treatment have to be combined with improved personal hygiene and environmental
health practices. Basic public health education stressing the importance of
avoiding pollution of the water by excreta and of the use of clean containers in
the household, will be essential. The water supply system design and
construction must be closely coordinated with site planning and layout and must
be supported by health, education and environmental measures, in particular
sanitation.
As a general rule, technology should be kept simple. It
should be appropriate to the country and should draw on local experience.
Where pumps and other mechanical equipment are necessary,
supplies should be standardized as far as possible.
Locally available material and equipment should be used as
much as possible.
Local familiarity, availability of spare parts, fuel and ease of
maintenance are priority considerations.
18. Both organizational and technical aspects of the complete
water supply system need to be carefully monitored. The use of the system must
be controlled and water wastage or contamination prevented. Maintenance must be
assured, and technical breakdowns quickly
repaired.
The Need
· Demand: Calculate
on at least 15 litres per person per day. Absolute minimum survival allocation
is 7 litres per day.
· Quality: To
preserve public health, a large amount of reasonably safe water is preferable to
a smaller amount of very pure water;
· Control: The water
must be safe: test the physical, chemical and bacteriological quality of new
sources before use and regularly thereafter, and immediately following an
outbreak of a disease which might be caused by unsafe water.
Quantity
19. Minimum water needs vary: it increases with air temperature
and physical exercise. As a general indication, the following amounts of water
are desirable:
Minimum daily requirements:
Minimum survival allocation: 7 litres per person per day.
This should be increased to 15-20 litres per person as soon as possible.
Communal needs and a spare capacity for possible new arrivals
should be added.
Health centres: 40-60 litres per patient per
day;
Feeding centres: 20-30 litres per patient per
day.
20. Further needs may include: livestock, sanitation facilities,
other community services, irrigation and construction of camp infrastructure
(e.g. roads or concrete structures). The more convenient the supply, the higher
will be the consumption.
21. Give priority to quantity while respecting quality. A
reduction in the quantity of water available to individuals will directly affect
the overall health status of the refugee population. As supplies are reduced,
personal and domestic hygiene suffers, and the reduction is reflected in
increased incidence of parasitic, fungal and other skin diseases, and diarrhoeal
diseases. Even those individuals who may have traditionally lived on less than
the normally recommended amount of water will require more water when living in
a refugee camp, because of crowding and environmental factors.
22. The availability of water will be a factor in deciding on a
sanitation system. Pit latrine systems do not need water to function; but
showers, washing, laundry or pour-flush toilet facilities all require water.
23. Water will also be needed for livestock in many refugee
situations. Take great care to avoid pollution or depletion of scarce water
resources by livestock, separation of human water supply points from those used
by animals is a must. As a rule of thumb, cattle need about 30 litres of water
daily. Water will also be needed to irrigate food (vegetable gardens, crops)
cultivated by refugees. Annex B of UNHCR's Water Manual provides additional
indicative figures on water requirements including livestock and agricultural
crop needs.
24. Water will probably be of little use in controlling major
fires on refugee sites owing to a lack of sufficient quantity and pressure.
If more refugees are expected to arrive, plans must allow for
a substantial spare capacity over the initially assessed needs.
Quality
25. The water must be both acceptable to the refugees and safe
to drink. Water that tastes and looks acceptable will be drunk by refugees who
may unknowingly expose themselves to the dangers from microbiological organisms.
Water-borne diseases are not usually as serious or widespread a problem as the
water-washed diseases such as skin and eye infections which result from
insufficient water from personal hygiene.
Thus, a large quantity of reasonably safe water is preferable
to a smaller amount of very pure water.
26. The most serious threat to the safety of a water supply
system is contamination by faeces; once the water has been contaminated it is
hard to purify it quickly under emergency conditions.
27. Water may contain pathogens, particularly certain viruses,
bacteria, protozoan cysts and worm eggs which are transmitted from faeces to
mouth. Water contamination by human faeces is the major concern, although animal
faeces in water may also cause disease transmission. Water contamination by
urine is a significant threat only in areas where urinary schistosomiasis
(Schistosoma haematobium) is endemic.
By far the greatest risk associated with polluted drinking
water is the spread of diarrhoea, dysentery and infectious hepatitis (Hepatitis
A).
28. Diarrhoea and dysentery are caused by a variety of viruses,
bacteria and protozoa. The numbers of viruses and protozoa in water will always
decrease with time and will always decrease most rapidly at warm temperatures.
Bacteria behave similarly, but in exceptional circumstances may multiply in
polluted water, The infectious dose of the viruses and protozoa is typically
very low, whereas the dose of bacteria needed to establish an infection in the
intestine may be large.
29. New water supplies should be tested for bacteriological
quality before use and existing ones checked regularly and tested again
immediately following any outbreak of disease which might be caused by unsafe
water.
30. Potability analysis involves studying the chemical, physical
and bacteriological characteristics of the water. Although it is possible to
examine water for a specific pathogenic organism, a much more sensitive test for
routine analysis uses an indicator organism, called Escherichia coli (coliform,
or E-coli), which is a normal inhabitant of the intestine of warmblooded animals
and is excreted in large numbers. If these bacteria are found in water, faecal
pollution is indicated and the sample is therefore potentially dangerous.
31. Concentrations of faecal coliform are usually expressed per
100ml of water. As a guide:
Faecal Coliform/100 ml 1-10
Water Quality reasonable quality
10-100
polluted
100-1000
very polluted
> 1000
grossly polluted
32. In cases where the water is disinfected by chlorination, it
is easier and more appropriate to test for the presence of free available
chlorine than for bacteria. The presence of free chlorine in the range between
0.2 mg/l and 0.5 mg/l at the distribution point shows that the bacteria have
almost certainly been killed and that the water cannot be heavily polluted with
faecal or other organic matter.
33. The water must, of course, be safe at the time of
consumption or use in the household, not just at the distribution point.
Domestic hygiene and environmental health measures to protect the water between
collection and use are important. The water in storage tanks and any tanker
trucks should also be tested periodically.
34. Where drinking water is scarce, use non-potable, brackish or
salty water for
washing.
Immediate Response
· If even the
minimum amount of water cannot be made available in time from local sources, the
refugees should be moved.
· Whatever the water
source, take immediate action to prevent pollution by excreta. (See chapter 17
on environmental sanitation for further details).
· Organize a
distribution system that prevents pollution of the source and ensures equity if
there is insufficient water.
35. Short-term emergency measures may be necessary while the
longer term supply system is being developed or pending the move of the refugees
to a more suitable site. If the locally available water supply is insufficient
to meet the minimum needs of the refugees, arrangements must be made to bring in
water by truck.
36. If this is not possible, the refugees must be moved without
delay. Often, however, the quantity of water available will meet initial minimum
needs; the immediate problem would be water quality.
37. The refugees will be using either surface water or, less
often, ground water (well or springs) - usually whatever water is closest,
regardless of quality. Whatever the water source, take immediate steps to
prevent pollution by excreta.
The best immediate response is likely to be
organizational.
38. Work with community leaders to organize the refugee
community and make the community aware of the possibilities and dangers of
existing water sources and convey the idea of trying to prevent pollution of
these sources by excreta. If the source is flowing, supplies must be drawn off
upstream and a special area set aside for this. Then allocate an area for
washing, and finally downstream of the settlement, allow any livestock to drink
(see figure 2). Fence off parts of the river banks as necessary, and beware of
any dangers in the water, such as reptiles.
39. Where the source is a well or spring, fence off, cover and
control the source.
Prevent refugees from drawing water with individual
containers that may contaminate the source.
40. If possible, arrange to store water and to distribute it at
collection points away from the source. Not only does this help avoid direct
contamination but storage can make water safer.
41. From the start, families will need to be able to carry and
store water at the household level. They must be able to transport at least 10
litres (from water distribution points to the household) and store at least 20
litres per household (1 household = 5 persons). Suitable containers
(10-20 litres) are essential. Collapsible jerry-cans are recommended, especially
when their transportation to the site may involve airlifts. Jerry-cans must have
narrow inlets to prevent contaminating objects getting in. For this reason,
buckets and other wide necked containers are not recommended. Sometimes empty
cooking oil containers or the like are available which may be appropriate.
If the immediately available supplies of water are
insufficient, action to ration supplies and to ensure equitable distribution
will be a priority.
42. Rationing is difficult to organize. The first step is to
control access to the sources, using full-time guards if necessary; uncontrolled
distributions are open to abuse. Distribution at fixed times for different
sections of the site should be organized. Vulnerable groups may need special
arrangements. Every effort must be made to increase the quantity of water
available so that strict rationing is unnecessary.
43. In parallel to these steps, action must be taken to improve
the quantity from existing sources and the effectiveness of any distribution
system. Plan how the need for water may best be met in the longer term. The
following sections outline the main
considerations.
Water Supply Systems
(See Water Manual, Chapter 12)
· A water supply
system is a combination of structures (intakes, pumping sets, treatment, storage
and distribution facilities and drainage outlets) necessary for the production
(collection, treatment, storage) and distribution of potable water;
· Ensure the system
components are compatible with each other and appropriate in view of the supply
and demand, and can be maintained from locally available resources and at the
lowest possible cost;
· The system will
have to be planned, designed, constructed and put into operation in a short
period of time (involving the refugee population as much as possible). The
complexity of the task requires professional expertize which should be sought at
the beginning of the project. Pay attention to long-term operation and
maintenance requirements from the start.
44. As soon as possible, make an overall plan for the longer
term water supply system. At least some elements of the plan will be problematic
- there is often a lack of basic data or difficulty in obtaining the planning or
design tools (cartography, hydrological data, etc.). The following steps should
be taken:
i. Search for adequate sources;
ii. Preliminary surveys. Assess water quantity and
quality (see above). Assess topographical advantages (gravity) and disadvantages
(pumping requirements). Collect additional, relevant information on the refugee
community, on any other beneficiaries, on the social and economic
characteristics of the host community, on the overall environmental framework of
the refugee sites;
iii. Implementation arrangements. Analyze the
possibilities and constraints of all parties interested in the project and
allocate responsibilities for project implementation, including operation and
maintenance. Clarify arrangements for funding, contractual procedures, project
monitoring, financial matters and reporting;
iv. Production of the design concept (see Chapter
12, paragraph 2, UNHCR's Water Manual). Consider the alternatives, taking into
account implementation time, technology considerations and cost-effectiveness;
v. Detailed surveys. To refine all aspects and
details of the adopted design. These include further water analyses, identifying
building materials, further measurements of water production at sources,
detailed topographical surveys of the position of water sources, storage tanks
and distribution points;
vi. Production of final designs;
vii. Organization of refugee involvement on the
project. Identify relevant skills and expertize among the refugees. Organize
refugee committees;
viii. Implementation of the project. Besides
construction, other inputs are required, such as the technical supervision to
ensure that construction is carried out in accordance with previously approved
plans and that payments for construction reflect the real value of the works
accomplished;
ix. Organization of operation and maintenance,
including the organization of a committee in which refugees and relevant
assistance sectors are represented (health, sanitation, community services).
Ensure there is continuous engineering support and employ a caretaker or a group
of caretakers to carry out the operation and maintenance tasks.
45. See UNHCR's Water Manual for additional information and
details on these issues (chapter 6, paragraphs 1, 36; chapter 11, paragraphs 2,
3, 11; chapter 12, paragraphs 5, 12-8,16).
46. An ill-conceived or badly managed water supply system will
soon create problems. The long-term needs of the refugees should be considered
while searching for solutions to the emergency needs. All efforts to avoid
long-term problems will prove, with time, very
valuable.
Water Sources
(See UNHCR Water Manual Chapter 6)
· Rain water,
groundwater from springs and wells or water from municipal and private systems
are usually of better quality than surface water from sources such as rivers,
lakes or dams and should be used if available;
· Surface water
should be considered to be contaminated and must be treated prior to
use;
· Physical
protection of the source from pollution will be essential;
· New or repaired
sources and equipment should be disinfected before use;
· Develop a data
bank of water sources.
Introduction
47. There are three main natural types of fresh water: surface
water (streams, rivers, lakes), groundwater (underground or emerging as springs)
and rain water.
48. Considerations in choosing between alternative sources of
water in an emergency include:
i. Speed with which source can be made operational;
ii. Volume of supply;
iii. Reliability of supply (taking into account
seasonal variations and, if necessary, logistics);
iv. Water quality, risk of contamination and ease of
treatment if necessary;
v. Rights and welfare of local
population;
vi. Simplicity of technology and ease of
maintenance;
vii. Cost.
49. Take careful account of systems and methods already in use
locally. Adoption of well-proven and familiar techniques, combined with action
to improve protection against pollution is often a sound solution.
50. Besides organizational measures to protect the water supply,
some form of treatment may be necessary. However, if possible use sources that
do not require treatment. The treatment of unsafe water, particularly in remote
areas, can be difficult and requires trained supervision to be reliable.
51. Gather as much technical information as possible on the
different water sources to allow a simple cost-benefit analysis of alternative
solutions. The decision on which sources to develop and the technological
approaches to be used should take into account the need to develop systems to
efficiently cover both immediate and longer-term needs.
Surface Water
Water from streams, rivers, ponds, lakes. dams and reservoirs
is rarely potable; its direct use is likely to require treatment measures that
may be complicated to plan and implement during most refugee emergencies.
Rainwater
52. Reasonably pure rain water can be collected from the roofs
if these are clean and suitable. This method can only be the major source of
water in areas with adequate and reliable year-round rainfall; it requires
suitable shelter and individual household storage facilities. It is, therefore,
not a suitable solution in most refugee emergencies.
Every effort should be made to collect as much rainwater as
possible.
53. Small rainwater collection systems, for example using local
earthenware pots under individual roofs and gutters, should be encouraged. Allow
the first rain after a long dry spell to run off, thus cleaning the catchment of
dust, etc. The supply of water that may be collected by this method is estimated
as follows:
54. One millimeter of yearly rainfall on one square metre of
roof will give 0.8 litres per year, after allowing for evaporation. Thus, if the
roof measures 5 × 8 metres and the average annual rainfall is 750 mm, the
amount of rain water which may be collected in a year equals: 5 × 8 ×
750 × 0.8 = 24,000 litres per year or an average of 66 litres per
day (on many days there will be none).
55. Rain water may be a useful supplement to general needs, for
example through special collection for community services such as health and
feeding centres, where the safety of water is most important. It should also be
noted that surface water is particularly likely to be contaminated in the rainy
season. Thus rain water may be a useful source of safe water for individual use
at a time when other water is plentiful but unsafe.
Groundwater
56. Groundwater is contained in aquifers. Aquifers are rocks or
groups of rocks capable of transmitting, storing and yielding water.
They may be formed by loose sediments (silt, sand, gravel),
fractured rocks or otherwise porous rocks (fractured lavas, granites,
metamorphic rocks, sandstones, etc.). The microbiological quality of groundwater
is usually very good in view of the filtration undergone by water in its transit
through rock pores (An exception to this filtering effect is when the size of
the fractures in the rock is large.)
57. The use of groundwater during refugee emergencies would
almost always be the preferred solution: if available, groundwater usually
provides the most cost-effective alternative to obtain quickly the necessary
quantity and the best quality. However, the decision to use it for long term
needs should be made after a detailed assessment of the aquifer and all factors
relating to the recharge, transmission and release of water and on the
availability of relevant expertize and equipment.
Springs are the ideal source of groundwater.
58. Water from a spring is usually pure at the source and can be
piped to storage and distribution points. It should be taken off from above the
refugee camp site if possible. Care should be taken to check the true source of
spring water, as some apparent springs may really be surface water which has
seeped or flowed into the ground a short distance away. The yield of water from
a spring may vary widely with the seasons. It will be at its minimum at the end
of the dry season and early in the rainy season. Seek local advice.
It is essential that spring water be protected against
pollution at the source.
59. This can be by a simple structure built of bricks, masonry
or concrete, from which the water flows directly through a pipe to a tank or
collection point. Care must also be taken to prevent contamination above the
take off points.
If the need for water cannot be met by springs, the next best
option is to raise groundwater.
60. Groundwater can be raised by infiltration galleries, tube
wells, dug wells or boreholes. (Infiltration galleries extract ground-water
horizontally, for example through tunnels and/or ditches). The choice of method
will depend on the depth of the water table, yield, soil conditions and
availability of expertize and equipment.
61. Without good groundwater resource surveys, preliminary test
drilling, or clear local evidence from nearby existing wells, there is no
assurance that new wells or boreholes will yield the necessary amount of water
of the right quality. They can also be expensive.
A hydrogeological survey must be undertaken before starting
any extensive drilling programme.
62. The yield of infiltration galleries, wells or boreholes
depends on the geological formation in which they are constructed, the
topographical characteristics of the site, the construction techniques and the
pumping equipment to be used. Any new well or borehole must first be developed
to full yield by an initial period of pumping at a fast rate. This pumps out
finer soil particles, allowing water to pass more easily into the well. Yields
can be raised by increasing the size of the well below the water table, for
example in the case of a shallow well, by an infiltration gallery across the
line of groundwater flow. If wells are sited too close together, yields will be
reduced.
63. Wells, boreholes, infiltration galleries and pumps should be
disinfected immediately after construction, repair or installation, as they may
have been polluted during the work -two or three buckets of a 2.5% chlorine
solution in water would be a suitable disinfectant. They should be located where
surface water and, in particular, any seasonal rain or flood water, will drain
away from the well head. They should be above and at least 30 metres away from
any sanitation facilities and their discharge. Special techniques are used in
the design and construction of these facilities to avoid the pollution of their
water.
Sea Water
64. Sea water can be used for almost everything but drinking,
thus reducing fresh water requirements. In locations where no adequate sources
of fresh water exist but where sea water is near, desalinisation is one possible
but costly option. Neither of the two basic methods - distillation using the
sun's heat nor the use of modern desalinisation plants - is likely to meet
immediate fresh water requirements in a major refugee emergency, and is
therefore strongly discouraged. If no fresh water sources are available at a
given site, relocation of the refugees must be considered as a matter of
urgency.
Municipal and Private Systems
65. Existing municipal and private water supply systems in the
vicinity of the refugees, for example those belonging to industrial or
agricultural establishments, may be able to meet part or all of the need during
the emergency phase and should be used where possible before taking unnecessary
measures to develop other sources. A substantial increase in the yield and
quality of such systems may be
possible.
Pumping Equipment
(See UNHCR Water Manual, chapter 7)
· Pumps will
generally be needed in refugee emergencies. Seek expert local advice on what is
suitable and remember that operators, fuel and spare parts will be
needed;
· As much as
possible, use gravity rather than pumps for water distribution and treatment
systems;
· Emergency water
supply solutions involving pumps should be designed to ensure long-term and
effective operation: avoid ad-hoc solutions;
66. Once an adequate source of water has been established,
arrangements are needed to store and distribute the water to meet minimum needs.
The distribution system should use gravity whenever possible:
gravity fed systems are much less costly and easier to maintain than pumping
systems.
67. In areas subject to seasonal flooding, or where the level of
a river source varies markedly, great care must be taken in placing any pumps,
distribution, storage and treatment systems. It may even be necessary to mount a
pump on a raft.
68. Water can be raised in two basic ways: by hand, using some
kind of water container or bucket, or by using pumps (which may be driven by
hand or engine). Nobody should be allowed to put individual containers into the
source. A captive rope and bucket carries a low pollution risk. In this system,
only the single rope and bucket that is fixed to the well is used to draw water
- refugees fill their own containers from this captive bucket. The system is
more reliable and much cheaper than a pump.
Where it can meet the demand, a hand operated system is to be
preferred. Not more than 200 people should depend on a well with one rope and
bucket
69. The main uses of pumping equipment in refugee water supply
systems are:
i. Pumping water from wells or
boreholes;
ii. Pumping water from surface water
intakes;
iii. Pumping water into storage
reservoirs.
70. Additionally there may be a need to use pumping equipment
for other purposes, for example, feeding water treatment plants, boosting the
flow through long pipelines, feeding water tankers. Gravity flow systems should
be used as much as possible for these purposes as a way to minimize pumping
requirements.
71. All pumps have moving parts and require regular maintenance.
Professional advice should be sought on the selection and placing of pumps.
Local familiarity, fuel supplies, spares, ease of maintenance and, above all,
reliability, will be the major considerations in pump selection. Hand-pumps may
be appropriate because they reduce dependence on outside supply of spare parts
and fuel. However, in a refugee emergency, the sudden and large concentration of
people requires maximum output of available water. Motorized pumps have a far
greater output and may, therefore, be indispensable.
72. In some circumstances, pumps powered by solar panels may be
suitable. The currently available pumps are expensive for their output but very
reliable and involve no direct running costs. The pumps naturally work best in
direct sunlight but will still work with light cloud cover. A solar pump might
be a solution when the output of a handpump would be insufficient but large
mechanised pumps are not necessary.
73. The theoretical capacity required of the pump depends on
available storage, likely demand, and variations in demand throughout the day. A
reserve for breakdowns, new arrivals, etc. should be provided. The minimum daily
period during which a pump should be idle is that required to allow the level of
water in the source to recover to its old level. Pumps should not be operated at
night. Always have a pump on standby in a major supply system to cover repairs
and
maintenance.
Treatment
(See Water Manual, Chapter 8)
· The most serious
threat to safety of a water supply is contamination by faeces;
· Only treat water
to the extent necessary. Disinfection of drinking water is required if large
numbers of refugees are concentrated in camps;
· All water
treatment methods require some expertize, regular attention and
maintenance;
· In refugee
emergencies, the priority is to improve the physical and the bacteriological
characteristics of drinking water. Only under very special circumstances would
the improvement of chemical quality be considered;
· Cloudy or turbid
water should be clarified before disinfection because chlorinating cloudy or
turbid water is ineffective;
· Water purification
tablets or boiling are not generally appropriate for large scale water
treatment.
Introduction
74. The potability of any source has to be assessed before a
decision to use it for human water supply is taken.
75. The importance of trying to find a source that does not
require treatment is obvious.
If treatment is necessary it should be the minimum required
to ensure acceptably safe water, using appropriate technology and a reliable
operational and maintenance system.
76. Correct plant operation and maintenance must be assured. If
large numbers of refugees are concentrated in refugee camps, disinfection of
drinking water is absolutely necessary. Other types of treatment should be
considered in accordance with the characteristics of the raw water
77. Determining how to treat water on a large scale is best done
by experts. However, simple and practical measures can be taken before such help
is available. Full explanations of all treatment methods applicable in refugee
emergencies are given in Chapter 8 of UNHCR's Water Manual. All methods require
regular attention and maintenance.
78. Besides the physical measures to protect water at its source
and initial disinfection of water sources (usually by chlorine), there are four
basic methods of treatment: storage, filtration, chemical disinfection and
boiling. These can be used singly or in combination.
Storage and Sedimentation
79. Storage is the simplest method of improving water quality.
It causes some pathogens to die off and any heavy matter in suspension to settle
("sedimentation").
Leaving water undisturbed in containers, tanks or reservoirs
improves its, quality.
80. Storage of untreated surface water for 12 to 24 hours will
already cause considerable improvement in its quality; the longer the period of
storage and the higher the temperature, the greater the improvement. Be aware,
however, that in refugee emergencies, it is very seldom that the amount of water
available would be enough to allow the water intended for drinking purposes to
be stored for more than a few hours before it is distributed to users. Where
sedimentation tanks are used, their capacity alone should equal one day's
consumption, thus allowing sedimentation to take place overnight.
81. Longer storage time can help control schistosomiasis
(bilharzia), as the parasites die if they do not reach the fresh water snail
within 24 hours of excretion by an infected person, or if they do not reach a
human or animal host within 48 hours of leaving infected snails. Thus two day's
storage would provide an effective barrier to transmission of the disease,
provided snails do not enter the tank.
82. Sedimentation clarifies cloudy water which can be greatly
speeded up by the addition of aluminium sulphate (Alum). A two-tank system is
often used, the first tank being a settling tank with the second storing the
clarified water. If additional treatment (e.g. chemical disinfection) is
required, it can be done in the second tank, and a third one used for storage if
necessary.
83. Great care should be taken to prevent pollution of stored
water. Storage tanks must always be covered: the dangers of contamination of
open tanks more than offset the advantages of direct sunlight. The storage area
should be fenced off, and if necessary guarded, to prevent children playing or
swimming in the water.
Filtration
84. Sand filtration can be an effective method of water
treatment. A proper slow sand filter works in two ways. Passage of the water
through the sand physically filters out solids, and, more importantly, a thin
and very active layer of algae, plankton, bacteria and other forms of life
develops on the surface of the sand bed. This is called the "schmutz-decke",
where micro-organisms break down organic matter.
85. The rate of filtration depends on the surface area, depth
and type of sand through which water is passed, and the depth of water above the
level of the sand surface. The usual size range of the sand is 0.3 - 1 mm.
Provided the rate of filtration is slow enough, the quality of the treated water
is very good.
86. Many types of sand filters are described in the available
technical guides (See key references). A packed drum filter can be improvized if
drums and sand are available and this may be a good way of providing limited
quantities of safer water quickly, for example for a health centre. The water
passes down through sand on a 5 cm layer of gravel and is drawn off at a rate
that should not exceed 60 litres per hour for a 200 litre drum. If a tap is
used, unfiltered water equal to the amount drawn off is simply added to the top.
Other types of sand filters include the slow sand filters, the horizontal sand
filters and the river bed filters or infiltration galleries (suitable only where
the bed is permeable). These can be used to treat larger amounts of water but
are likely to be more difficult to set up quickly and effectively. For a river
source a possible intermediate measure is to dig a well close to the bank. The
water recovered will be river water but will have been filtered through the bed
and bank.
Chemical Disinfection
87. Disinfection of water on a large scale is a rule in all
refugee emergencies. Purification of wells, sand filters, pumps and piped water
systems will be required initially. Iodine or various forms of chlorine can be
used for disinfection and purification. Chlorine is more widely used, cheaper
and often more readily available. The most generally suitable form of chlorine
for refugee emergencies is calcium hypochlorite powder. Expert advice is
essential for large-scale chlorination. As with all other water treatment
methods, disinfection requires regular attention; it will be of little value if
it is not fully reliable. Whilst clear water usually only requires chlorination,
turbid water usually requires sedimentation and/or filtration before the
chemical disinfection. Chlorination should therefore take place after any
sedimentation or filtration process has been undertaken. It requires at least
thirty minutes to act.
88. Care must be taken to ensure strict control of any chemical
disinfection process and particularly to test the water for chemical residual
levels after each disinfection and before distribution. After chlorination, and
once chlorine has reacted, (about 30 minutes after dosage) there should be at
least 0.5 mg/l (0.5 parts per million) of free available chlorine left in
solution, in other words, still available to kill bacteria. The amount of
chlorine required to achieve this is usually a broad indication of the level of
pollution. If the amount of free available chlorine is much above 0.5 parts per
million, people may not be prepared to drink the water; over-chlorinated water
tastes unpleasant and will have the reverse of the desired effect if people
therefore prefer untreated water.
89. A pocket size chloroscope (chlorine comparator kit,
preferably of the DPD1 type) tests for residual chlorine levels. It
consists of two tubes, each containing a measured quantity of the water under
test, which can be visually compared for colour. One of the two tube samples is
coloured by the addition of a chlorine sensitive reagents (o-toludine, a common
reagent, should be avoided, as it decomposes in hot climates; it is also a poor
indicator if the water has been over-chlorinated). The other tube is looked at
through a range of standard coloured glass slides; the chlorine concentration
can be read-off directly after matching the colour of the tube with the added
reagent with that of the nearest standard. This test is simple and all treatment
plant attendants should be trained to use it to check frequently the water
quality. In view of the fact that water may be kept in storage, after
chlorination, for some time before distribution, and bearing in mind that
residual chlorine levels tend to drop with time, it is important to ensure any
water leaving the plant should have, at least, a residual chlorine content of
0.4 mg/l (or parts per million) of free available chlorine to be regarded as
safe.
90. When chlorination equipment is not working, the water should
not normally be distributed. Therefore to ensure a continuous water supply,
back-up chlorination equipment should be available in any water treatment plant.
91. Chlorine and iodine water purification tablets are also
available, but are rarely suitable for water treatment for large populations.
They may be used in health or supplementary feeding centres.
1DPD is Diethyl-P-Phenylene
Diamine.
Boiling
92. Boiling is the surest method of water sterilization. At low
altitudes, water that is simply brought to the boil can be assumed to be free of
pathogenic bacteria. Boiling should, however, be continued for one minute for
every 1,000 metres of altitude above sea level, as the boiling temperature
reduces with altitude. Prolonged vigorous boiling is often recommended but is
not necessary to destroy the faecal-orally transmitted pathogens; it wastes fuel
and increases the concentration of nitrates in the water. Water with high
nitrate content is dangerous for very young babies. Domestic fuel supplies may,
in the longer term, be the determining factor: boiling requires about 1 kg of
wood per litre of water. However, if the refugees have traditionally boiled
their water and can continue to do so, this should be encouraged and, at least
initially, might make the need for other types of treatment less urgent.
Figure
Storage
· All refugee sites
must be provided as soon as possible with adequate water storage
facilities;
· Water storage may
be the only means of ensuring a constant availability of water to cover the
needs of a camp population at a given site;
· In general, use
local technology for the design and construction of storage tanks or reservoirs.
However, using prefabricated tanks may sometimes be the only way to provide
water quickly enough;
· Ensure that the
size, location and overall design of storage tanks are compatible with all other
system components and design characteristics.
93. In nearly all systems, it will be necessary to store water
in covered tanks between the sources and distribution points. As well as
providing an essential reserve both during the emergency and for long-term use,
storage will facilitate monitoring, collecting, treating and distributing safe
water.
All refugee sites must be provided as soon as possible with
facilities to store an adequate reserve of water.
94. The size of the reserve to be used will depend on the number
of people and on the nature of the water supply system.
Water can be stored in various locations:
i. At the water collection point in
tanks;
ii. In central storage tanks (before or after
treatment) to balance supply with demand and to allow for gravity-fed
distribution;
iii. At distribution points in tanks, including
public stand-pipes or other service points at health centres, camp
administration facilities, staff houses, etc.;
iv. At the refugee household level in small
containers. These containers should not be the same as the ones used to collect
and transport water from distribution points.
95. Whatever the type of storage needed, adequate enclosure
should be provided to prevent any contamination from humans, animals, dust or
any other source. A tight cover and dark storage also prevent algal growth and
breeding of mosquito larvae.
96. In areas with pronounced dry and rainy seasons, the
construction of a reservoir to collect water may be an option, despite the
dangers of pollution and of mosquito breeding. An erosion-protected overflow
spillway should always be provided in this case. Catchment tanks for the
collection of surface water can also be considered. Pits are dug in the ground
to catch and hold the water which runs off hard ground during heavy storms. They
need special lining to hold the water and should be covered if possible.
97. Tanks above ground may be needed where the water table is
very high and contamination cannot otherwise be avoided. Many types of simple,
air portable, butyl rubber storage tanks are available, and some can be supplied
with a complete distribution system. Headquarters' advice should be sought if
local resources cannot meet this
need.
Distribution
(see Water manual, Chapter 10)
· An appropriate
water distribution system should ensure an even coverage of water needs among
camp beneficiaries;
· Keep the
distribution system simple;
· Under normal
circumstances, water distribution in refugee camps should be carried out through
public distribution stand-pipes;
· The water
distribution system should minimize waste.
Refugees must have easy but controlled access to water.
Ideally, no dwelling should be further than 100 metres or a
few minutes' walk from distribution points.
98. Experience has shown that where people have to fetch water
from considerable distances, they tend either not to fetch enough to limit
water-washed diseases or to collect water from closer but contaminated sources.
Water distribution will be an important consideration in the layout of the site.
The areas round the distribution points should be paved with stones or gravel,
or protected by boards, with a run off structure to allow proper drainage.
99. Water can be distributed to individual users in many ways,
depending on local conditions. Uncontrolled access by individual co sumers to
primary water sources should be avoided.
A distribution system should have a sufficient number of
outlets to ensure that people do not need to wait for long periods to have
access.
100. Service and administrative buildings should be provided
with private connections.
Equity in the distribution of scarce water is an extremely
important consideration.
101. While vulnerable groups (the sick, wounded, most severely
malnourished, children, pregnant and lactating women and the disabled) should
have adequate and assured allocations, scarce water must be evenly shared among
the rest of the population. Refugees should be encouraged to assume
responsibility for equitable distribution. Arrangements should be carefully
monitored to detect and prevent abuses. In some situations, water meters have
proved a cheap and effective way of identifying excessive use and reducing
consumption.
102. The main components of a water distribution system are the
pipes themselves. Between source, storage and distribution points, water for
domestic use should flow only in pipes to protect its quality. Other system
components are break-pressure tanks, valves, service reservoirs and the watering
points.
103. Standpipes and push taps are recommended to be used as
outlets where possible. Multiple tap standpipes are normally constructed, each
installation having usually between 5 and 10 individual taps. Taps are very
vulnerable and spares must be available. Where water supplies are limited and
the site is crowded, valve distribution points which can be chained shut may be
the only effective solution.
There should be at least one tap per 80-100 refugees and no
more than 200 refugees per handpump or per well with one rope and bucket.
104. The larger the number of people using a single source or
outlet of water, the greater the risk of pollution and damage. Whatever the
final distribution system, this must be carefully controlled and supervized -
guards are often needed.
105. The design, construction, operation and maintenance of the
water supply system should be carried out bearing in mind the need to minimize
water wastage (from taps, pipes etc.) This is particularly important in systems
based on low yield water sources or on those requiring treatment or pumping.
106. The community itself will also generate a certain amount of
waste water. This must not be allowed to become a danger to public health, and
it may instead be usefully recycled, for example to water livestock, irrigate
vegetable gardens or in pour-flush
latrines.
Key References
Assisting in Emergencies, A resource Handbook for UNICEF
Field Staff, Emergency Operations Unit, UNICEF, New York, 1986.
Community Water Supply. The Handpump Option, A Joint
Contribution by the United Nations Development Programme and the World Bank to
the International Drinking Water Supply and Sanitation Decade, World Bank,
Washington, 1987.
Emergency Water Sources, Guidelines for Selection and
Treatment, S. House & B. Reed, Water Engineering Development Centre
(WEDC), Lough-borough University, 1997.
Engineering in Emergencies, A practical Guide for Relief
Workers, Davis J., Lambert R., IT Publications on behalf of RedR.
Intermediate Technology Publications Ltd., London, 1995.
Environmental Health Engineering in the Tropics:
An Introductory Text, Cairncross S., Feachem R., John
Wiley & Sons, Chichester, 1983.
Guidelines for Drinking Water Quality, 3 Volumes, Second
Edition, WHO, Geneva, 1993.
Handbook of Gravity-Flow Water Systems for Small
Communities, Jordan Jr. T.D, UNICEF/Nepal, Kathmandu, 1980.
Hand Dug Wells and their Construction, Watt S., Wood W.,
Intermediate Technology Publications Ltd., London, 1977.
Handpumps, Technical Paper Series 10, International
Reference Centre for Community Water Supply and Sanitation, The Hague, 1977.
Principles of Water Quality Control, Tebbutt, T.H.Y.,
Pergamon Press, Oxford, 1973.
Stow Sand Filtration for Community Water Supply in Developing
Countries, A Design and Construction Manual, Technical Paper Series 11,
International Reference Centre for Community Water Supply and Sanitation, The
Hague, 1982.
Small Community Water Supplies, Technology of Small Water
Supply Systems in Developing Countries, International Reference Centre for
Community Water Supply and Sanitation, John Wiley & Sons., Chichester, 1983.
Small Water Supplies, Cairncross S., Feachem R., Ross
Bulletin No. 10 The Ross Institute of Tropical Hygiene, London, 1978.
Water Manual for Refugee Situations, Programme and
Technical Support Section, UNHCR, Geneva, 1992.
Water and War, Report on the Symposium on Water in Armed
Conflicts (Montreux, Nov. 1994), International Committee Of The Red Cross,
Geneva,
1995.
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
17. Environmental Sanitation
(introduction...)
Overview
Introduction
Basic Principles And Standards
Human Resources And Organization
Human Excretia Disposal
Solid Wastes
Wastewater
Pest and Vector Control
General Hygiene
Disposal Of The Dead
Key References
Annexes
Annexes
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
17. Environmental Sanitation
Figure
Overview
Situation
Overcrowding, a harsh environment and disruption of normal
sanitation habits can threaten the lives and well-being of the refugees in
emergencies. Proper sanitation is a key aspect of the hygiene cycle involving
water and health and is fundamental to a multi-sectoral approach in emergency
response.
Objective
To prevent the spread of disease and promote a safe environment
for the refugees.
Principles of Response
· The co-operation
of the refugees is essential for success. Programmes must be developed with
them, and, to the extent possible, run by them. The measures taken must be
culturally acceptable to the refugees;
· Swift provision of
a basic system for human waste disposal is better than delayed provision of
improved systems;
· Take full account
of sanitation needs in site selection and layout;
· Make full use of
locally available human, material and technological resources. This includes
using both skilled and unskilled refugee labour, using public health or sanitary
engineering expertise available in the national institutions, and relying on the
traditional practices of the refugees and the local people;
· The materials and
technology chosen should be as simple as possible;
· The sanitation
programme must include provisions for continuous maintenance of the sanitation
facilities and services;
· The best guarantee
that latrines will be used and kept clean is to allocate them on an individual
or family basis. Refuse disposal should be arranged on a community
basis;
· Wherever possible,
restrict the use of chemicals (for the control of rats, flies and other pests
particularly) to specific places and for a limited period of time. Environmental
measures should be favoured instead.
Action
· Localize
defecation and prevent contamination of the water supply;
· Collect baseline
data on the site and draw a sketch of the area to locate potential zones for
sanitary facilities;
· Develop
appropriate systems for disposal of excretia, garbage, and wastewater. Control
vectors of public health importance such as mosquitoes, flies, fleas, lice,
bugs, rodents and other vermin;
· Plan the amount of
facilities and services to be provided. Optimum standards are: for excretia
disposal: one latrine per family; for refuse: one bin of 100 litre capacity for
10 families or 50 persons; one sanitarian for every 5,000 persons, and one
sanitation assistant for every 500 persons;
· Establish
sanitation teams for the construction and maintenance of
infrastructure;
· Set up services
for vector control and burial of the dead;
· Establish a
monitoring and reporting system for all environmental health services in
co-ordination with the general health surveillance system;
· Include
environmental sanitation as an integral part of health
education.
Introduction
1. Environmental sanitation includes: safeguarding water
quality; disposal of human excretia, waste water and garbage; insect and rodent
control; safe food-handling practices; and site drainage. All these services,
and the provision of health care, are very much interrelated and should be
considered together. In particular, this chapter should be read in conjunction
with the chapters on water, on health and on site planning.
2. Disruption and crowding people together who are accustomed to
living in different and less crowded conditions, makes adequate sanitation of
critical importance. Basic services are often lacking and habits may have to
change. In these conditions, indiscriminate disposal of human and other waste
poses a serious threat to health.
3. Due to unfavourable environmental factors or unfavourable
socio-cultural habits the implementation of sanitation programmes in refugee
camps can be difficult. Additional constraints include:
i. Sites that are easily flooded, barren and/or
inaccessible;
ii. Lack of space;
iii. Limited availability of local materials due to
either natural factors or considerations related to environmental
protection;
iv. Limited time for the community to get organized
if only in a rudimentary way; and;
v. Lack of qualified personnel.
4. The key to reducing health hazards is to have acceptable and
practical waste disposal systems. These must be developed in co-operation with
the refugees and be culturally appropriate, even if circumstances necessitate a
departure from traditional practices. Special public health education may be
required.
5. The refugees must also run the services to the extent
possible. Monitoring will be essential: the effectiveness of the services will
depend to a significant degree on regular and thorough maintenance and
inspection.
Basic Principles And Standards
· Take full account
of sanitation needs in site selection and layout;
· Analyse sanitation
and environmental hygiene issues as part of the initial needs and resources
assessment;
· Seek professional
advice from those with local knowledge;
· Consult and
involve the refugees in the design and location of sanitary facilities, and
particularly their maintenance;
· Educate the
refugees as part of the public health education programme and devote special
attention to sanitation matters at school for refugee children.
6. As stressed in the chapter on site planning, environmental
sanitation will be a very important consideration in site layout, and the
organization and operation of the sanitation services must be integrated with
other community services.
7. Developing adequate sanitation in a refugee emergency is
difficult; but correcting mistakes is even more difficult. Expert advice should
be sought from a public health engineer who is familiar with the habits of the
refugees and nationals of the country of asylum, and if possible has experience
of refugee emergencies. Assistance should first be sought locally from sources
such as government departments, the UN system, NGOs, universities, consultants
or contractors. If these cannot meet the need. Headquarters' assistance should
be requested.
8. Good sanitation depends to a great extent on the attitudes of
the community and the people who run the system. The systems and services
developed should be able to operate effectively with a minimum of outside
involvement. Refugees themselves must be trained to run the environmental
sanitation programmes.
9. The public health education programme must place proper
emphasis on the importance of sound environmental sanitation practices. The link
between excretia contamination and disease must be clearly understood by all.
Whatever the success of the sanitation system with adults,
children will present a special challenge.
Children are both the main sufferers from excretia-related
diseases and also the main excreters of many of the pathogens that cause
diarrhoea. Teaching environmental sanitation in schools is therefore essential.
Table 1 - Number and Types of Sanitary Facilities
Required
1 pit (2 m × 5 m and 2 m deep) / 500 persons 1 deep
pit for each clinic
10. Measures to contain human excretia and to dispose of refuse
should be taken immediately. Since it is almost impossible to estimate how long
refugees will stay in a given site, more durable facilities should also be
established simultaneously. For example, once a defecation field has been
established, latrine construction should begin at once; the greater the time lag
between those two actions, the more difficult to shift people from their
previous habit (defecation in the open) to subsequent building and use of
latrines. Even in hot, dry climates, human excretia disposed of on the ground
can favour the transmission of diseases.
11. Communal facilities, especially latrines are difficult to
maintain in a permanent state of cleanliness. However, refuse management
(especially transportation and final disposal) is better to organize on a
communal basis. Domestic wastewater drainage requires a combination of both
individual and communal systems. Drains collecting wastewater from each
household have to be connected to main ones which will channel those waters away
from the living quarters.
12. General norms and standards related to specific activities
(excretia disposal, solid waste, vector control, etc.) should be seen as
indicative only and be adapted in each case to the prevailing social, cultural
and physical conditions. Table 1 above gives standards which can help to work
out a preliminary quantitative estimate of the most urgent needs.
13. Surveys of the status of environmental sanitation programmes
should be carried out regularly and corrective action taken (see Annex 1,
Environmental Sanitation Survey
Form).
Human Resources And Organization
· Appoint a focal
point;
· One sanitarian for
every 5,000 persons and one sanitation assistant per 500 persons should be
recruited from among the refugees or from other sources;
· Community
participation is the key to successful sanitation projects.
14. A focal point for sanitation must be appointed at the very
start of the emergency, and responsibilities of various partners clearly
defined. There are not many agencies specializing in environmental sanitation.
15. The first step in appointing the focal point is to
investigate the availability of local expertise (a civil engineer specialized in
sanitary engineering as an ideal example). Recourse to outside assistance has to
be contemplated if local expertise is not available.
16. At camp level, sanitation teams or brigades, provided with
basic hand-tools, should be set up to carry out urgent tasks (digging trenches
or pits for excretia and waste disposal). A health education programme should be
launched simultaneously. Each team should be headed by staff who have good
knowledge of sanitation (including medical and engineering aspects).
One sanitarian for every 5,000 persons and one sanitation
assistant per 500 persons should be recruited.
17. It is always more efficient to have only one agency
responsible for both sensitizing people to environmental sanitation and
supervising related activities. Education for environmental sanitation should
focus on the "how and why" of hygienic containment of human excretia, and simple
methods for waste disposal and hygiene at household level (water storage in the
home, habitat and personal hygiene, etc.) Women, teachers, leaders, and school
children should be the first target of such a programme.
18. Community participation is a key to the success of
sanitation projects. Health education and sensitization are a prerequisite to
that participation. It should nevertheless be recognized that it takes time to
convince both the community and individuals about benefits they can expect from
a sanitary environment. Concrete examples such as pilot latrines near clinics,
market or other places are therefore very important to support environmental
health programmes.
19. Refugees should be provided with tools and basic materials
(and incentives in some cases) to encourage them to contribute to the
improvement of their own living conditions. They should be gradually integrated
into the sanitation teams, the ultimate goal being that the refugees themselves
should do most of the maintenance tasks.
20. Annex 2, Resource Inventory Form, gives a checklist of the
human and material resources needed for environmental
sanitation.
Human Excretia Disposal
· Take immediate
action to localize excretia disposal and prevent contamination of the water
supply;
· Carefully consider
cultural and physical factors and ensure that appropriate anal cleaning
materials and hand-washing facilities are available;
· Communal trench
latrines may be needed initially, but in most circumstances pit latrines are
much better;
· Ensure that
latrines can be used at night and are safe for women and children.
Introduction
21. The priority is to create an efficient barrier against
faecal contamination. This can be assured through a sufficient number of
sanitary facilities, ensuring that these facilities are properly used and kept
clean, and do not become the source of problems such as bad smells and flies,
and do not collapse when it rains.
The most common cause of breakdown is inadequate maintenance,
even for properly designed and installed systems.
22. The best guarantee of proper maintenance is the individual
family allocation of latrines. Breakdown of latrines will lead to contamination
of the environment and a high risk of infection and disease. There must be
regular inspection and maintenance.
Even when in working order, latrines will not be used unless
they are clean. Latrines must be cleaned daily.
23. Individual families will be responsible for their own units,
but where communal latrines are unavoidable, special arrangements to keep them
clean will be essential. Particular attention must be given to the maintenance
and cleanliness of the latrines serving community facilities such as health
centres. Refugee workers with proper supervision will be required. It may be
necessary to pay or otherwise compensate those who are responsible for keeping
communal latrines clean and operational.
24. Disinfectants would prevent the biological degradation of
excretia. However the regular addition of soil, ashes or oil, if available, to
trench or pit latrines may help control insect breeding and reduce odours.
Disinfectants should not be poured into the pits or tanks of
latrines.
25. Two main factors will affect the choice of an excretia
disposal system: the traditional sanitation practices of the refugees and the
physical characteristics of the area, including the geology, the availability of
water, rainfall and drainage. Failure to take proper account of these can easily
result in the system itself rapidly becoming a health hazard.
26. The essential starting point is to find out the traditional
sanitation practices of the refugees and how these can be modified to reduce
health risks in a refugee emergency. The following information will be required:
Previous sanitation system
and practices;
Method of anal
cleaning;
Preferred position (sitting
or squatting);
Need for
privacy;
Segregation of sexes and
other groups or individuals with whom it is culturally unacceptable to share a
latrine;
Cultural practices for
children;
Cultural taboos (for example,
against contact with anything that may have touched excretia of
others);
Social factors, including
likelihood of community action to ensure proper use of proposed
system;
Need for special orientation
(direction) of latrines in some cultures;
Systems used locally in
neighbourhood of site.
27. Arrangements must be made to assure the availability of
appropriate anal cleaning materials at or near all latrines. This is essential
for hygiene.
The latrines must be safe 'for children, and must be able to
be used at night.
Pay attention to security for women: for communal units some
form of lighting should be provided and it may be necessary to provide guards.
Immediate Action
28. Initially the refugees are likely to defecate
indiscriminately, contaminating their environment and often the water supply. In
consultation with the community leaders, the best first step is to demarcate
defecation fields to localize and contain excretia.
29. Designate an area or areas (about 50 m × 50 m each)
away from the dwellings and down wind, but sufficiently close to be used.
Separate areas for men and women are usually desirable. Within the defecation
field, strips of land - roughly 1.5 m wide, 20 m long, on each side of a central
access path - will be used, one after the other, beginning with strips farthest
from the entrance.
30. Based on a recommended surface area of 0.25 m2
per person per day, exclusive of access paths, defecation fields of the size
above would be sufficient for about 250 people during a month, or 500 people
during two weeks. Operating defecation fields beyond one month is not advisable.
31. Fence the area(s) and provide privacy by means of partitions
and shallow trenches (in the strips) and spades, if possible. Covering excretia
with ash, lime or just soil lessens health risks. Locate such areas where the
surface water run-off will not cause contamination. Protect the area with
cut-off ditches.
32. A publicity campaign will be required to encourage refugees
to use these areas and not defecate indiscriminately near dwellings or the water
supply. At least one attendant should be assigned to each defecation field. To
the extent possible, hand-washing facilities should also be installed nearby.
Selection of a System: Basic Considerations
33. The selection of an excretia disposal system suitable for a
particular situation requires consideration of a number of factors. In an
emergency, however, time is the critical factor. Pollution of the environment by
excretia, with all its attendant risks, cannot be stopped without immediate
sanitation measures. Thus the range of choice is always much more limited at the
very outset of an emergency.
34. Temporary systems, to meet the most immediate needs, will
have to be improved or replaced by others as soon as possible, in order to
maintain adequate sanitation standards.
In emergency sanitation, act first and improve later.
Figure 1 - Considerations in
Excretia Disposal
35. Figure 1 illustrates some considerations to be taken into
account in excretia disposal.
36. The design of sanitary facilities should be governed by
cultural factors (discussed above) and by the following physical considerations:
i. Flies and smells: these can be reduced by:
installing vent pipes topped with anti-corrosive screens; covering faeces
regularly with ash; treating latrines with biological larvicides to control fly
larvae; using fly traps, etc.;
ii. Flooded pits or collapsed walls: these
can be avoided by ensuring proper construction including having a raised
superstructure, well-built base and mound, pit lining, and good drainage.
Sometimes these steps are not taken because of, for instance, financial
considerations. However, a large number of latrines built quickly and cheaply
will not necessarily solve environmental health problems;
iii. Life-span: to dig a pit for excretia is
not a very exciting exercise. Normally, the pit should be designed to last two
to three years (the capacity of a dry pit should be at least 0.07 cubic meters
per person per year). If its dimensions have not been properly calculated,
people will have to dig a new pit a short time later. Community members would
understandably be reluctant to do this and the site would become covered with
pits, some containing unstabilised faecal matter hazardous to human health. In
addition, shortage of space limits the number of latrines which can be
built;
iv. Cleanliness and privacy: Communal
installations are rarely kept clean and become unusable within a very short
period of time and encourage transmission of diseases. Therefore family latrines
should be preferred whenever possible. Sanitary facilities should preserve
users' privacy. Cubicles should be partitioned off within each block. At family
and individual level, socio-cultural considerations often make it compulsory to
build separated units for men and women. Disregard for these simple criteria
might result in misuse and abandonment of facilities;
v. Location: groundwater pollution must be
nil or at a minimum. Latrines should be at least 30 m from any groundwater
source and the bottom of any latrine at least 1.5 m above the water table.
Latrines must be close enough to users' shelters to encourage their use (not
more than 50 m). They must be far enough from shelters and other buildings to
prevent potential smells and pests from bothering or harming the population (at
least 6 m from shelters if possible).
37. There are a number of latrine options: once cultural and
physical factors have been taken into account, the key factors to consider are
low cost, simplicity of construction and ease of maintenance.
Trench Latrines
38. Trenches can be used for a few months. If necessary, and
where space is available, this solution can continue for longer periods, with
new trenches being dug as old ones fill up.
Trench latrines should be dug 1.8 to 2.5 m deep and 75-90 cm
wide. Recommended length per 100 persons is 3.5 m.
39. A platform and structure will be needed, providing a seat or
squatting hole as appropriate, with lid. When the trench is filled to within 30
cm of the top, it must be covered with soil and compacted. Trench sides must be
shored up if there is a danger of collapse.
Pit Latrines
40. The pit latrine is the most common excretia disposal system
used around the world
Figure 2a
(see figure 2a). It has major advantages over a trench latrine.
It consists of four basic components: a pit, a base, a squatting slab (or plate)
and a superstructure.
41. If used by only one family these latrines are usually well
maintained. Pit latrines can also be used in clusters as communal facilities.
42. Pit latrines are most suitable in conditions of low to
medium population density -up to about 300 persons/hectare - but have been used
satisfactorily in areas with twice this density. Space is needed not only for
the construction of one pit latrine per family, but also for new pits when the
old ones are full. This is an important consideration when pit latrines are used
as communal facilities.
43. When the pits are three-quarters full, they must be filled
with soil and the superstructure and squatting plate moved to a new pit.
Applying layers of ashes as the pit fills will speed up the decomposition of
excretia and in time the site can be used again.
44. The pit should be about one meter across and over two meters
deep. The rim of the pit should be raised about 15 cm off the ground and ditches
should be dug around the base to divert surface run off. The pit wall should
always be reinforced for one meter below ground level to prevent collapse.
45. The basic variety has both odour and insect problems, but
these can be considerably reduced by making the simple improvements of the
ventilated improved version (VIP) (see figure 2b), and by adding oil and using
lids.
Where pit latrines are used, the ventilated improved version
should be built whenever possible.
46. In a VIP latrine the vent pipe should be at least 15 cm in
diameter, about 2.5 m high, painted black and placed on the sunny side of the
latrine for maximum odour and insect control. Blackening the external surface of
the vent pipe only marginally increases the venting velocity, but this factor
may be of greater importance under "no wind" conditions. The vent pipe must be
fitted with an insect proof gauze screen (so it works as a fly trap). The hole
should not be covered by a lid as this impedes the air flow.
Bore-Hole Latrines
47. Bore-hole latrines (figure 3) are dug with a hand auger or
mechanical drill and require a smaller slab than a pit. The bore-hole is 35-45
cm in diameter and any depth up to 7 meters. The advantage of the bore-hole
latrine is that it can be constructed quickly as a family unit if augers are
available. The disadvantages are that the side walls are liable to fouling and
fly breeding, they are smellier than vented systems and the risk of ground water
contamination is greater because of the depth.
Figure 2b
Figure 3
Ventilated Improved Double-Pit (VIDP) Latrine
48. Raised (or built-up) pits can be used where it is not
possible to dig deep pits because the water table is high or excavation is
difficult (for example in rocky ground).
49. The VIDP latrine (figure 4) (also called alternating-twin
pit ventilated latrine) has two shallow pits, both of which are ventilated by
separate vent pipes capped with fly screens. It is a good option in crowded
areas which may become even more crowded, as it preserves the space needed for
replacement latrines.
50. Two pits give more flexibility. A pit fills up in two to
three years, and it should then stand for at least one year. This gives enough
time for the night soil to dry out and decompose, so that it can be removed more
easily and not pose a health hazard. While the full pit is decomposing, the
other pit is used. The two pits must not be used at the same time.
Figure 4
Pour-Flush (PF) Latrine
51. Pour-flush latrines (figure 5) are simple in design but need
permeable soil for their soak-away. A water seal is made by a U-pipe filled with
water below the squatting pan or seat. It is flushed by hand with some 1-3
litres of water into a pit or soak-away. This system is suitable where water is
used for anal cleaning and where refugees are used to flushing. It is not
suitable where paper, stones, corncobs or other solid materials are used for
anal cleaning. Pour-flush latrines will be used properly only if water is
readily available. A large container with a 3 litre dipper should be made
available close by the latrines.
Figure 5
Stabilization Ponds
52. Where liquid effluent has to be disposed of in impermeable
soil, stabilization (oxidation) ponds are a simple and cheap solution,
particularly in hot climates. Various systems are described in the technical
references. If ponds are used they must be securely fenced
off.
Solid Wastes
· Improper garbage
disposal increases the risk of insect and rodent-borne diseases, and an
effective system must be established for the storage, collection and disposal of
garbage;
· Garbage disposal
areas must be designated and access to them restricted;
· Large amounts of
dust can damage health. Preventing destruction of vegetation is the best
preventative measure against dust.
General Considerations
53. The quantity of garbage generated by refugees is often not
considered substantial and it therefore tends to be neglected. However, the
daily amount of garbage as well as its weight can be significant, in market
places in particular.
Uncontrolled accumulation of garbage is unhealthy, and
promotes an increase in rodent and insect borne disease.
At the beginning of an emergency hygiene and waste disposal is
usually poor, so vermin and other pests including rodents proliferate very
rapidly.
54. Food is occasionally distributed to refugees in metal cans.
How those are disposed of should be given particular consideration not only for
aesthetic reasons but also because of health hazards (injuries to children,
potential breeding sites for mosquitoes, etc.). In addition, this kind of
garbage is far from biodegradable.
55. Medical waste (used syringes and needles, contaminated
bandages, laboratory specimens, etc.) generated by health centres, are a hazard.
Access to medical sanitary services should be well controlled, and the waste
should be treated separately, without delay (see below).
The safe disposal of all medical waste requires particular
attention.
There should be routines for the storage, collection and
disposal of garbage - this will be particularly important in high-density sites.
Garbage Management
56. Storage: metal drums can be used as refuse bins at
individual dwelling level. A 200 litre drum cut in half is often used. Bins
should have lids if possible and drainage holes in the bottom. A ratio of one
container (100 I capacity) per 10 families has proved to be effective. The
containers should be placed throughout the site in such a manner so that no
dwelling is more than about 15 meters away from one. Using concrete structures
as refuse bins is neither economical nor practical: they are difficult to empty
properly so rodents are encouraged and garbage is dispersed around the area.
57. Collection and Transportation: garbage should be collected
from the containers regularly, daily if possible. Camps near a city could
benefit from existing refuse-dump services. Using tractors with trailers is
expensive and should be considered as a last option and only for large and
densely populated camps. Wheelbarrows and/or carts (hand or animal carried) are
usually more appropriate.
58. Disposal and Treatment:
i. Sanitary land-filling (also known as controlled
tipping) remains the most advisable method. Areas designated for burying garbage
should be well away from dwellings, and fenced off;
ii. Incineration is justified on a small scale and
usually only for medical waste. After each incineration, cover the waste with a
layer of soil;
iii. Composting is an attractive option but requires
technical knowledge, which may not be available. In addition, garbage must be
sorted to produce good compost.
Dust
59. Large amounts of dust carried in the air can be harmful to
human health by irritating eyes, respiratory system and skin, and by
contaminating food. The best preventive measure is to stop the destruction of
vegetation around the site. Dust can also be controlled by spraying roads with
water or oil, especially around health facilities and feeding centres, and
limiting or even banning
traffic.
Wastewater
· Sources of waste
water must be controlled as soon as possible and drainage provided.
General Considerations
60. This aspect of environmental sanitation should always be
considered from the beginning. Drainage prevents water from stagnating around
water distribution points, and drains the rainfall as well as domestic
waste-water originating from various sources (toilets, showers, kitchens, etc.).
Other measures to help control vectors include eliminating ponds.
61. Drainage can very quickly become a problem and corrective
measure are difficult once shelters and other infrastructure have been built.
For example, people often wash next to water sources, causing problems which
could be avoided if special separate washing areas are constructed with
duckboards or stones and proper drainage.
62. Some families manage to channel waste-water away from their
homes and use it to irrigate vegetable gardens. Although this should be
encouraged it should not disrupt the main drainage system.
63. Good drainage should be a priority at the following
locations:
i. Water points (standpipes, taps,
hand-pumps);
ii. Sanitary facilities such as showers, toilets and
washing areas. Waste water from these places should either be used to irrigate
vegetable gardens and fruit trees or drained into absorption trenches or
soak-away pits;
iii. Shelters: household members usually manage to
protect their shelters from runoff waters by means of perimeter drains. It is
nevertheless important to ensure that such water is collected and disposed of
through main drains.
Treatment
64. In some circumstances, waste water should be treated, for
example waste from sewers collecting effluent from pour-flush toilets. Some
treatment package units are available on the market; but these are usually
expensive, complex, and difficult to operate and maintain.
65. However, there is a broad range of waste water treatment
technology. Sanitary engineering professionals should be consulted to select the
most appropriate
technology.
Pest and Vector Control
· Insects and
rodents carry and spread diseases and can spoil food supplies;
· Physical screens
are the best immediate measures;
· Preventive action
to eliminate or limit breeding areas and conditions favourable to the vectors is
the best long-term solution;
· Specialist
supervision of all chemical measures and local knowledge of resistance is
necessary;
· Avoid chemical
control where possible.
General Considerations
66. The environment in a refugee emergency is typically
favourable to the proliferation of disease-carrying insects and rodents
("vectors"), which can also destroy or spoil large quantities of food.
67. Flies tend to breed in areas where food or human excretia
are present, mosquitoes where there is stagnant water, and rats where there is
food, garbage and cover. As a result of overcrowding and inadequate personal
hygiene, lice, fleas, mites, ticks and other arthropods may also cause health
problems. Table 2 gives an indication of common vectors and related diseases.
68. Reducing the numbers of flies, mosquitoes and rodents
quickly in an emergency is difficult and physical screens may be the best
immediate measure. Over the longer term, the most effective method of
controlling insects and rodents is preventive: to improve personal hygiene,
sanitation, drainage, garbage disposal and food storage and handling practices
and thus make the environment less favourable for the vectors. Examples of
practical measures are the removal of stagnant waste water, regular garbage
collection, use of oil in latrines and provision of soap and sufficient water
for washing. The recommended monthly supply of soap is 250 g soap per person per
month. The programme should provide for regular inspection and be integrated
with other public health measures.
69. The problems should be discussed with the refugees and
education given on the significance of vector control. Where solutions
unfamiliar to the refugees are employed, these must be carefully explained.
70. Whatever the nature of nuisances and pests, one should avoid
having systematic recourse to chemical control by means of pesticides
(insecticide, rodenticide, molluscicide, etc.). Such products are costly and
toxic to both human beings and the environment. There is a risk of poisoning
during transport, storage, handling and of course spraying the chemicals. Also,
pests can develop resistance to the chemicals.
Table 2 - Vectors Which May Pose Significant Health Risks
VECTOR
RISKS
Flies
Eye infections (particularly among infants and children),
diarrhoeal diseases
71. Measures described in this chapter to deal with excretia and
waste disposal will also help control pests (flies and rodents particularly).
72. The elimination of stagnant water and other breeding and
resting sites for mosquitoes through drainage is important and the drainage
network must be maintained.
Chemical Control
73. Obtaining precise information on chemicals which are used or
authorized to be used in the country (i.e. registered list of pesticides if any)
should be the first priority.
Insecticide spraying carried out on a routine basis must be
avoided, and in any event should be consistent with the rules and procedures in
force in the host country.
74. Advice from specialists, particularly medical entomologists,
should be sought to minimize the risks and to maximize the impact on
target-species.
75. Staff assigned to such tasks must be trained on technical
aspects, informed about health hazards linked with handling and spraying of
pesticides, and protected by means of adequate clothing (mask, boots, gloves,
etc.).
76. The use of rodenticides should always be adopted in
agreement with medical staff. Rats are favoured carriers of vectors (such as
fleas) of bubonic plague and murine typhus. When these diseases may be present
it is more important to take measures directly against the vectors themselves -
i.e. the fleas, rather than the rats - because destroying the rats will simply
cause the fleas to leave the dead bodies of the rats and become more of a threat
to people.
77. The body louse is the only proven vector of louse-borne
epidemic typhus and relapsing fever. If there is a serious increase in body
louse infestation, quick action is required by properly trained personnel. This
generally involves dusting individuals' inner clothing and bedding with an
insecticide or the use of clothing fumigants. There is widespread resistance in
lice to some insecticides and expert local advice must be
sought.
General Hygiene
· Sanitary
engineering must be complemented with sufficient health education, sensitization
and community participation.
78. Habitat hygiene, food hygiene and personal hygiene, while
being integral parts of environmental sanitation, are a matter of health
education and community sensitization rather than of sanitary engineering. It is
nevertheless worth underlining that the most effective manner to sustain "soft"
activities such as education in general and health education in particular is to
complement them with "hard", visible and concrete activities on the spot.
79. Community participation in sanitation activities is a key to
successful implementation, however, to make participation work in practice, the
community members must have the necessary resources - human, institutional and
material - to enable them to take on their responsibilities.
80. Activities to improve living conditions should take place at
all levels - site, community, family and individual - and not be restricted to
just one level. Elementary rules of hygiene should be observed by everyone.
81. There are three essential steps to improve living
conditions:
Avoid overcrowding and
overpopulation, which increase transmission (through direct or indirect contact)
of diseases brought about by vectors such as fleas and lice;
Reduce faecal/oral
transmission risks by ensuring systematic hand-washing before cooking and
eating;
Encourage personal hygiene
including clean clothes by providing amenities such as showers and laundering
areas and basins. This will also reduce contact with water bodies that have been
polluted by excretia, reducing the risk of disease including bilharziasis
(schistosomiasis).
Figure
Disposal Of The Dead
· Suitable
arrangements for disposal of the dead are required from the start of an
emergency;
· Action should be
co-ordinated with the national authorities;
· Burial is the
simplest and best method where acceptable and physically possible. Arrangements
should be made to allow traditional rituals;
· Before
burial or cremation, bodies must be identified and the identifications
recorded.
82. Suitable arrangements for the disposal of the dead are
required from the start of a refugee emergency. The mortality rate may well be
higher than under "normal" conditions. The authorities should be contacted from
the outset to ensure compliance with national procedures, and for assistance as
necessary.
83. Dead bodies present a negligible health risk unless the
cause of death was typhus or plague (when they may be infested with infected
lice or fleas) or cholera. Funerals for persons dying from cholera should be
held quickly, near the place of death. Efforts should always be made to restrict
funeral gatherings of persons dying from any of these three diseases, and to
restrict feasting and ritual washing of the dead, by intensive health education
or by legislation, as appropriate.
84. Health considerations provide no justification for
cremation, for which sufficient fuel may often not be available. Whenever
possible, the customary method of disposal should be used, and the traditional
practices and ritual should be allowed. Material needs, for example for shrouds,
should be met. The necessary space for burial will need to be taken into account
at the site planning stage, particularly in crowded conditions.
85. Before burial or cremation, bodies must be identified and
the identification recorded, and, if possible, cause of death recorded. This is
particularly important for the control, registration and tracing of disease. If
the whereabouts of relatives are known, the most immediate relation should be
notified; and steps must be taken to assure the care of minors who, as the
result of a death, are left without an adult to look after them.
86. When handling corpses workers should protect themselves with
gloves, face masks, boots and overalls. The workers should wash thoroughly with
soap and water afterwards. Although the HIV virus cannot survive for long in a
dead body, care should be taken with bodily
fluids.
Key References
A Guide to the Development of On-Site Sanitation, WHO,
Geneva, 1992.
Chemical Methods for the Control of Arthropod Vectors and
Pests of Public Health Importance, WHO, Geneva, 5th edition 1997.
Manuel d'Utilisation des D�sinfectants, UNHCR, Geneva,
1994.
Sanitation and Disease: Health Aspects of Excretia and
Wastewater Management, Feachem & al, Wiley & Sons, 1983.
Vector and Pest Control in Refugee Situations (also in
French), PTSS, UNHCR, Geneva, 1997.
Vector Control: Methods for Use by Individuals and
Communities, WHO, Geneva,
1997.
Annex 2 - Environmental Sanitation - Resource Inventory
Form
Country:
Prepared by:
Camp:
Population:
Date:....../....../......
A. Implementation
Name(s)
Governmental authorities
International organisations
Private sector
NGO's
B. Human Resources
Number of Workers
Is there a spraying team?
Y
N
Is there a drainage team?
Y
N
Is there a sanitation team?
Y
N
Is there an organised workshop?
Y
N
Number of sanitarians:
Number of health workers:
(assigned to sanitation tasks)
C. Tools
Description
Specification
Quantity
Axe
Crowbar
Iron bar cutter
Pickaxe
Shovel
Spade
Tape metre
Other (please specify)
D. Equipment
Description
Specification
Quantity
Cement mixer
Mortar bucket
Mould (latrine slab)
Mould (brick)
Wheelbarrow
Sprayer
Spraying equipment
- overall clothing
- masks
- gloves
- boots
Other (please specify)
E. Chemicals
Item
Unit
Quantity (stock in Hand)
Comments
Vector control
-
Water Treatment
-
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
18. Supplies and Transport
(introduction...)
Overview
Introduction
Organization of the Supply Chain
Supplies
Transport
Reception of Goods
Storage
Stock Management
Key References
Annexes
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
18. Supplies and Transport
Figure
Overview
Situation
Refugee emergencies are often in locations removed from the main
sources of supply and communications arteries. Exceptional efforts may be needed
to ensure the provision of supplies and services. However without these, the
whole operation will fail.
Objective
The timely delivery of the materials needed for the refugee
operation.
Principles of Response
· There should be a
single, unified "supply chain" with standardized procedures and coordinated with
external agencies such as WFP. The term "supply chain" includes the sourcing,
procurement, transport, import, management, storage and distribution of goods
and services required to meet operational needs;
· Duplication of
supply chain support within the UNHCR operation must be avoided;
· A single
coordinating body of all the relevant UN agencies may be required to implement
certain aspects of the supply chain such as transportation and storage (e.g. a
"UN Joint Logistics Cell");
· Request urgently
needed supplies from the UNHCR Central Emergency Stockpile if they are not
available locally;
· Ensure there is
good communication between offices involved in the supply chain and timely
information exchange regarding logistical capacities and
constraints;
· Transport and
storage arrangements must have spare capacity: things often do not go according
to plan, needs, and the demand for supplies, may increase;
· Seek technical
assistance when necessary.
Action
· Make a
comprehensive plan for all supply chain functions. Integrate supply chain
arrangements in the overall planning from the start, coordinate with all
sectors, and take into account any special requirements;
· Identify weak
elements in the supply chain and inform operational managers of actions rendered
critical due to lead time (the delay between the request for material and its
arrival);
· Seek out knowledge
on local conditions and assess implementing possibilities with local suppliers,
or other
agencies.
Introduction
1. The vital role of the supply chain must not be overlooked in
the initial planning, and the input of a logistics specialist is required on any
assessment mission. The more remote the location of the refugees, the more
difficult will be the logistical problems, yet these are the situations where
logistic support or the lack of it becomes the key to success or failure.
The ability to deliver the right supplies to the right place
at the right time and in the right quantities is a prerequisite for an effective
emergency operation.
2. The supply chain must provide for international purchase,
transport, swift unloading and duty-free clearance on arrival, local purchase,
transit storage, onward transportation, and final distribution, with proper
stock control at every stage. Figure 1 shows the likely major components of the
system in diagrammatic form.
3. Logistical support can be disrupted by unpredictable events
and many factors outside UNHCR's control including customs delays, breakdowns,
looting, and the vagaries of nature. Furthermore, the numbers requiring
assistance often increase during the emergency phase of an operation.
The supply chain must provide for spare capacity because
available capacity may become quickly overwhelmed.
Organization of the Supply Chain
· A single
coordinated operation is essential and duplication of supply chain services must
be avoided;
· This requires a
clear understanding of overall needs and the responsibilities for meeting
them;
· Three key
qualities of a good supply chain are: rapidity, flexibility and
security.
Assessment
4. A clear understanding of the overall needs by all concerned
is essential. Needs assessment and planning should be carried out together with
government, WFP and NGO partners.
5. An easily understood and comprehensive list of requirements
is essential as the starting point for meeting the basic material needs.
Without it, great confusion can result. With such a starting
point, the balance of needs, requirements and distribution can be continuously
monitored, and the effect of these relief goods or services will be immediately
apparent.
Planning
6. Three key qualities of a good supply chain are: rapidity,
flexibility and security. These three qualities depend on good coordination and
communications as well as good planning. When planning for and developing the
supply chain, ensure:
i. Rapidity: Response time is critically
important in emergencies, and advance planning is essential to optimize
resources, and not waste time correcting avoidable mistakes or inefficiencies.
Planning must take into account lead times;
ii. Flexibility: Logistics is dictated by the
circumstances of the operation and terrain, and must be able to quickly adapt to
rapid changes in circumstances. Plan for the worst case scenario, and build in
the required flexibility and adaptability;
iii. Security: The security of personnel and
relief goods must be a priority in the logistics plan. Security risks vary from
theft and looting to war;
iv. Coordination: Coordinate planning and
implementation with other agencies, in particular WFP who often have good local
transport and logistical capacity. WFP is normally responsible for food supplies
up to the agreed Extended Delivery Point -see chapter on food and
nutrition.
Avoid duplication of logistical services by different
organizations and ensure a single, coordinated operation.
A single coordinating body of all the relevant agencies may be
required to implement certain aspects of the supply chain such as transportation
and storage (a "UN Joint Logistics Cell") - guidance on setting this up is given
in MCDU's UN Joint Logistics Cell: Standard Operating Procedures. Ensure
effective coordination by: advising team members and staff from other
organizations of minimal lead times, respecting deadlines and delivering the
expected supplies at the time and place agreed and keeping to agreed loading and
transport schedules;
v. Comprehensive planning: Have an overview
of the whole operation when planning for and managing services, materials, staff
and time;
vi. Spare capacity: The logistics plan must
provide spare capacity, taking into account factors which would cause delays
(such as vehicle breakdowns);
vii. Cost-effectiveness: Ensure proper
maintenance of warehouses, efficient stock control, and well negotiated
contracts (e.g. for transport, warehouses, customs clearance, and maintenance).
Ensure purchases are made from competitive sources in accordance with UNHCR
regulations - although initial purchases may be made with speed as a foremost
concern, plan follow on supplies in good time to be able to purchase from
competitive sources;
viii. Good communication: A regular exchange of
information between the offices involved in the supply chain is essential.
Headquarters should give the Field as much notice as possible of procurement and
shipment of goods or services, estimated times of arrival (ETA), changes in
delivery schedules, and of contributions in kind. The field should advise
Headquarters of any changes to importation laws, acknowledge receipt and
distribution of consignments, and advise Headquarters of contributions in kind.
Figure
There must be good communications facilities at dispatch and
arrival points as well as mobile communications sets on surface transport.
ix. Clear responsibility:
Whatever the arrangements in the field, the, line of
responsibility and reporting to UNHCR by the operational partners must be
dear.
The major decisions about supply chain issues should
be taken by the same person with the appropriate responsibility and
authority;
Local and Other Resources
7. The supply chain should use local resources and knowledge to
the extent possible. Where there is a good existing warehousing and distribution
system, outside assistance may not be necessary. Where outside assistance is
required, sources include:
i. Supply and Transport Section at Headquarters
(which handles procurement, logistics, fleet management, and
contracting);
ii. Government disaster agencies or emergency corps,
and Government Service Packages from donor governments (see chapter on
implementing arrangements);
iii. An NGO or commercial firm with appropriate
experience.
Setting up the Supply Chain
8. The circumstances of each emergency will determine what type
of supply chain support is required - whether it is directly implemented by
UNHCR, through an operational partner or as a commercial contract.
9. Steps to establish the supply chain include the following:
i. Make arrangements for the duty-free import/export
of relief goods, and duty free and tax free purchase of relief goods with the
appropriate governmental authorities. To avoid delays, this must be done before
the goods are due to arrive;
ii. Investigate the possibility of using local
suppliers;
iii. Select warehouses appropriate for their purpose
(for storing food or non-food items; for transhipment, storage or distribution).
Ensure that access roads and doors allow easy loading and
offloading;
iv. Select appropriate transport for goods and/or
passengers: determine the type and the number of light and heavy vehicles,
vessels, aircraft and trains needed. Calculate fuel and maintenance requirements
(tyres, lubricants, parts and mechanics);
v. Use temporary assistance during peak demand for
staff;
vi. Provide the necessary staff support equipment
such as office equipment and supplies, light and water, vehicles, freight
handling items, power, communications, and accommodation;
vii. Put in place a documentation and filing system,
and use standard forms to report on the status of relief goods. Advise and train
personnel on
procedures.
Supplies
· Assess what is
readily available on the local market: if locally available items are
appropriate, make at least initial purchases locally;
· The basis for
UNHCR procurement is competitive tendering;
· Standard
specifications have been developed for common items;
· Certain emergency
relief items are stockpiled centrally by UNHCR and can be accessed quickly in an
emergency.
Introduction
10. The basis for all UNHCR procurement is competitive
tendering. This process is made easier and more efficient by standard
specifications.
11. Headquarters' Supply and Transport Section gives advice and
provides support on all procurement and logistics matters and is responsible for
international procurement. Guidance on local purchase can also be sought from
other UN organizations. Tendering procedures are described in Annex 2 to chapter
8 on implementing arrangements.
12. When drawing up tender documents and purchase orders it is
essential that all specifications, quantity, required delivery, packaging and
payment terms be clearly stated. Care must be taken to ensure that contract
terms protect the rights and immunities of UNHCR. Requests for tenders should in
any event include UNHCR's standard conditions of sale. Advance payments and cash
transfers to suppliers must be authorized by Headquarters.
13. If procurement is to be undertaken by implementing partners
on behalf of UNHCR, the principles of competitive bidding must be followed
(see A Programme Management Handbook for UNHCR's Partners, section 4).
UNHCR staff should monitor local and international procurement made by
implementing partners for the UNHCR-funded programmes.
14. Care should be taken to avoid purchasing different qualities
of the same items.
Local and International Procurement
15. If emergency relief items are available locally, compare
prices where possible with the international market. Use catalogues or send
local prices to the Supply and Transport Section in Headquarters who will advise
on the most appropriate course of action. Assess what is readily available on
the local market: if locally available items are appropriate, make at least
initial purchases locally. At the same time however, consider the
cost-effectiveness of continuing such local purchases beyond the initial phase
of the emergency, compared with making those purchases internationally.
16. Local procurement can offer a number of advantages over
international purchases. These could include:
i. lower prices;
ii. speed and flexibility of delivery;
iii. local acceptance;
iv. benefits and incentives to the local economy
(particularly in areas affected by a large refugee influx).
17. However, the disadvantages of local purchase could include:
i. higher prices;
ii. inappropriate quality;
iii. sudden price increases (due to sudden heavy
demand) on the local market, adversely affecting the local consumer population
and causing resentment; iv. higher maintenance costs.
18. As a rule, no more than 15% would be an acceptable premium
for prices of locally procured goods over the total delivered cost of
internationally procured goods1.
1IOM116/94 FOM120/94, UNHCR
14.12.94.
Local Procurement
19. When the capacity of the local market is limited, care must
be taken to avoid price increases caused by organizations bidding against each
other for the same supplies. Provided there is clear agreement on the needs,
coordination of purchases and even combined orders among the organizations
concerned should be possible.
International Procurement
20. UNHCR has entered into a number of long term supply
agreements ("frame agreements") for a range of products. The purpose of these
agreements is to ensure the availability of goods of a standard quality at
competitive prices, and reduce total lead time. These items include blankets,
plastic sheeting, essential drugs, kitchen sets, semi-collapsible jerry cans,
and buckets. Support and office items supplied under frame agreements include
light vehicles, vehicle tires and tubes, generators, ballistic armour, computer
and telecommunications equipment, and some office equipment and supplies.
21. The UNHCR Catalogue of Most Frequently Purchased
Items gives summary specifications, reference number, price (US$), country
of origin, and, where relevant, production capacity, production lead times and
estimated shipping times. It also includes a list of current frame agreements.
22. When requesting Headquarters to make a purchase, be sure to
use both the reference number for a product, and the name and date of
publication of the catalogue. If specifications are not available for the
product wanted, inform the Supply and Transport Section of the purpose of the
product and the context in which it will be used.
23. Bear in mind lead times for international purchase can be
lengthy.
Emergency Stockpiles
24.
Certain common relief items are stockpiled centrally by
UNHCR, or by suppliers on behalf of UNHCR, and can be accessed quickly in an
emergency.
The UNHCR stockpile includes the operations support items listed
in the Catalogue of Emergency Response Resources (see Appendix 1). These items
can be ordered through Headquarters.
25. Other UNHCR operations in the region may hold stocks that
could be made available - these offices should be approached directly about the
most urgent requirements.
26. UNICEF, WHO, WFP, the IFRCS and NGOs also maintain emergency
stockpiles with supplies which may be available to UNHCR.
Specifications and Catalogues
27. There are a number of catalogues of products with detailed
specifications. Using standard specifications (and frame agreements) is not
intended to limit choice, but simplifies supply, and ensures better integration
of equipment, spare parts and services. Generic specifications also make the
procurement and tendering process fairer (e.g. comparing prices). Annex 1 gives
detailed specifications of certain common relief items.
28. Catalogues of specifications include:
i. UNHCR Catalogue of Most Frequently Purchased
Items. This is published annually by UNHCR's Supply and Transport Section,
and distributed to all field offices. It gives brief specifications, price, and
lead times.
ii. IAPSO Emergency Relief Items. This is a
two volume catalogue published by the Inter Agency Procurement Services Office
(IAPSO) of the United Nations. A large number of standard specifications adopted
by UN are available in this catalogue, and there are additional IAPSO catalogues
on other items (see key references).
iii. UNICEF Supply Catalogue. UNICEF also
produces a large illustrated catalogue.
Considerations in Product Choice
Environment
29. UNHCR has a policy, also applicable in emergency situations,
to ensure awareness and supply of environmentally friendlier products. Impact on
the environment is considered an integral part of product quality. Where two or
more suppliers are offering items which are substantially the same in terms of
specifications, price, quality, and delivery time, the policy is to select a
product whose manufacture, use and disposal is less harmful to the environment.
For further details see Environmentally Friendlier Procurement Guidelines,
UNHCR, 1997.
Shelter
30. For shelter, local materials and methods of construction
should be used where possible, combined with tarpaulins or polythene sheeting if
necessary. Except for nomadic tribes, tents are not a satisfactory type of
long-term shelter. They are, however, a valuable last resort in emergencies.
Remember that tents may deteriorate rapidly if stored for any length of time,
particularly if humidity is high.
In-Kind Donations
31. In-kind donations should always be evaluated against actual
needs and cultural appropriateness. All offers for in-kind donations should be
discussed with Donor Relations Services and the Supply and Transport Section in
Headquarters before being accepted (see chapter on implementing arrangements).
Particular attention should be given to packaging (which must meet transport
requirements) and expiry dates of products offered.
Clothing
32. Used clothing is often offered in emergencies but is
generally an unsatisfactory way of meeting a need for clothing and should be
discouraged. It often arrives in poor shape, dirty or badly sorted and will
frequently be inappropriate for the customs of the refugees. Consider the
alternative of purchasing particularly locally made clothes, and ensure that
what is provided is culturally
acceptable.
Transport
· Vehicle fleets
should be standardized (same makes and models);
· Ensure there are
sufficient drivers, fuel, lubricants, spare parts, tyres, maintenance personnel
and facilities;
· It may be
necessary to improve access roads, bridges, airport, or other
infrastructure;
· A substantial
margin of spare transport capacity (10-20%) must be provided;
· With health and
community services, assess particular requirements for transporting refugees in
a repatriation operation, and/or distribution for vulnerable
groups.
International Transport
33. Arrangements must be made in advance with the relevant
authorities for priority clearance and duties exemptions.
Air
34. In the emergency phase, supplies from abroad may arrive by
air. Provide Supply and Transport Section at Headquarters with an update on the
handling capacity of the airport (state of equipment, working hours, etc.) and
the list of documents required for import and export of relief supplies.
Sea
35. As soon as details of the arrival of relief supplies by sea
are known, arrangements should be made for clearance and priority allocation of
an alongside berth and/or handling of cargo. In principle, relief supplies
should be loaded only on vessels with the capacity for self-discharge. Whenever
discharging alongside, they should do so directly onto trucks if possible.
Arrangements for onward movement of the supplies and any interim storage
necessary must also be made well in advance of the estimated time of arrival of
the ship.
National Transport
Transport Networks
36. In many countries, existing transport services do not have a
large spare capacity or may not serve the area where the refugees are located.
37. Where a suitable rail network exists, this can be an
effective way of moving supplies. However, many railway systems are either
congested or short of rolling stock (the locomotives and carriages used by
railways) and long delays may be encountered. In most cases, onward movement by
road to the final destination will be necessary.
38. Assess rail, road and inland waterway capacity, journey
times, reputable transport contractors, freight rates, capacities and facilities
at transhipment points (for example transferring goods from ferry or rail to
road), and availability of fuel supplies and maintenance facilities.
Evaluate various transport corridors (including reception
capacity) for cost and speed Of delivery - even airlifts may not always
significantly reduce delivery time.
Road Transport
39. Light vehicles will be needed for staff and for specific
purposes such as ambulances, and heavy vehicles for transporting cargo, and for
transporting refugees in repatriation operations.
40. There must be appropriate servicing facilities, including
fuel, spare parts, and administrative support. Special arrangements, e.g.
establishing workshops, may be necessary.
Managing a transport fleet: requires strong administrative
skills, good communications and dose coordination With the procuremert and other
functions to ensure efficient timing for collection and delivery.
Assessing and planning vehicle needs and servicing facilities is
described in Annex 2.
41. Drivers must be given training in UNHCR procedures. A
sufficient number of drivers must be hired to ensure that recommended working
hours are not exceeded.
Accident rates increase markedly with tired drivers.
A system must be established to monitor and control vehicle use,
(see Annex 4 for an example of a vehicle log sheet). For light vehicles, drivers
should be assigned to a specific vehicle for which they should be responsible.
42. In some situations, urgent action may be necessary in order
to improve access roads. Technical advice will be of paramount importance in
deciding how improvements should be made (seek advice through Programme and
Technical Support Section at Headquarters). These improvements could be
undertaken by the ministry of transport (or appropriate authority), perhaps
supported by refugee labour. In some situations, careful briefing will be
required about alternative routes in case usual roads are impassable.
43. Vehicles, bicycles, or animal or hand carts could be used
for final distribution. Observe how local movement of supplies normally takes
place.
Transport Capacities
44. If a commodity is to be transported by truck, the number of
trucks needed should be calculated from the following information:
i. The quantity of goods to be transported in weight
and volume;
ii. Type of truck available and its capacity in
weight and volume;
iii. How long a round trip takes (including loading
and offloading);
iv. Time allowed for routine maintenance capacity or
time allowed for other known factors (driver breaks);
v. A margin for unpredictable events (such as
breakdowns, accidents, bad weather, road and bridge repairs). The size of this
margin will depend on many factors including the likelihood of new arrivals and
the need to build up buffer stocks near the refugees. In difficult conditions,
the theoretical capacity might need to be increased by 25% or more.
45. To give an example for food:
i. The number of refugees served is 30,000 who need
500 g/person/day, which is total 15,000 kg / day, or 15 MT /day;
ii. Truck capacity is 20 MT per truck;
iii. The rainy season journey time from the port of
entry to a regional warehouse serving the 30,000 refugees is 3 days out and 2
days back;
iv. One day per round trip is added for routine
maintenance;
v. The road surface can take a truck and trailer
with a combined payload of 20 MT.
46. Therefore it will take 6 days for one truck to transport one
20 MT load, and 30,000 refugees will require 90 MT of food every six days.
Therefore the theoretically required capacity is for 4.5 such
trucks. In such circumstances, it is clear that six trucks would be the prudent
minimum.
47. Appendix 2 (Toolbox) sets out the capacities of different
means of transport.
Transporting people by road
48. Logistical support will be necessary when transporting
people for e.g. repatriation operations or relocating refugees to another site.
Ensure there is close coordination with health and community services. Take
particular care to look after vulnerable individuals, and minimize any risk of
family separation. Passengers must be registered on a passenger manifest,
wristbands should be used whenever possible, and water and food provided if it
is a long journey. Ensure trucks have safe access (for example ladders).
49. When transporting medically vulnerable individuals such as
pregnant women, it is preferable to use buses or ambulances. If trucks must be
used, weigh the trucks down with sand bags to minimize the roughness of the
transport. If there is a risk that some passengers might have a contagious
disease, disinfect the vehicles after the journey.
50. Determine the number of light and heavy vehicles needed.
These could include minibuses for 8-12 passengers to transport staff and
vulnerable individuals, ambulances or mobile clinics (ask health staff about
specifications), vehicles for transporting possessions, and mobile workshops.
51. If a convoy is necessary, plan for escort vehicles at the
front and back of the convoy. If the operation involves many journeys over a
short distance, consider having roving patrols with telecommunications, in case
there are problems or
breakdowns.
Reception of Goods
· Have a single
consignee and address and inform Headquarters of any changes;
· Use the
internationally accepted marking and packaging standards;
· Inspect goods on
arrival and register insurance claims: supplies can get lost or arrive
damaged;
· Advance
arrangements with appropriate government authorities and freight forwarders will
be necessary for rapid handling of supplies from abroad;
· Develop and
promulgate a clear policy for customs clearance procedures for
NGOs.
Consignment
52. Ensure offices sending supplies know who the consignee is.
The consignee would normally be the Representative, with an indication in
brackets of any special instructions, for example "For (name of
project/NGO)".
Have the same consignee and address for all items required
from abroad for the UNHCR emergency operation.
However, where UNHCR was not previously present it may be better
to consign c/o a UN organization already well known in the country, for example
UNDP, provided no delays will result. Similarly, there should be a single
consignee and address at the camp level.
53. Whether purchases are made locally or abroad, proper
packing, labelling, marking are essential. All organizations and donors need to
use a uniform system for marking or labelling relief consignments - use the
following guidelines:
i. Colour code: the colours used for the
relief supplies are: red for foodstuffs, blue for clothing and household
equipment, and green for medical supplies and equipment;
ii. Labelling: if necessary the consignment
should bear one of the international hazard warning signs (fragile, no hooks,
keep dry, etc.). Consignments of medicines should state on the outside of the
package the content and the medicines' expiration date and whatever temperature
controls are necessary. English or French should be used on all labels and
stencilled markings, though another language may be added. It is essential that
the final destination (or port of entry) appears at the bottom of the label in
very large letters;
iii. Markings: all international or
regionally procured goods will normally be marked with the UNHCR project code,
purchase order numbers, commodity, packing specifications, port of entry and the
consignee. Relief supplies should always be packed by commodity type. Mixed
consignments create problems in warehousing and in the ultimate distribution at
the receiving end. The colour code recommended loses its value if, for example,
medical supplies are packed in the same container as food;
iv. Size and weight: packing units should be
of a size and weight that one person can handle (ideally, 25 kg; up to a maximum
of 50 kg) since mechanical loading and unloading equipment may not be available
at the receiving end.
Advance notice should be sent to the consignee. The following
information (preferably in one document) is essential, for safe transport and
ease of handling at the receiving end:
i. Name of sender (or "shipper") - normally the
Supply and Transport Section in Headquarters;
ii. Name of consignee;
iii. method of transport, the name of the vessel or
the number of the flight or truck, estimated time of arrival, port or airport of
departure, and name of transporter (e.g. aircraft of shipping
company);
iv. A detailed list of contents, including weight,
dimensions, and number and type of packing units;
v. A pro-forma invoice or gift certificate showing
the value of the consignment;
vi. If the consignment is insured then the type of
insurance, name of company, etc.;
vii. The clearing agent, including the name of the
person to be contacted in the receiving country;
viii. Instructions or special requirements for
handling and storing the supplies.
An acknowledgement should be sent to the sender as quickly as
possible after consignments are received, and indicate whether the goods were
received in good order and/or there was any loss or damage.
Clearance Procedures
54. The supplies coming in for the operation may far exceed the
scope of the routine arrangements between the authorities and the local UN
community. Problems and delays may be avoided by discussing in advance the
procedures to be followed by UNHCR with senior officials in the foreign
ministry, ministry of finance, customs authorities, and airport and port
authorities. The aim is immediate release of incoming supplies.
Arrangements for clearance procedures and duties exemptions
must be made in advance.
55. Arrangements will need to be made with:
i. The Civil Aviation Authorities (CAA) and airport
authorities for priority clearances for relief flights (whether international or
national) and waiver of fees. These arrangements include: over-flight clearance;
free landing rights, air traffic control and parking; priority handling of
aircraft and charges at cost for handling services;
ii. The ministry of finance and customs authorities
for exemption from duties and taxes of goods and services (such as the tax
element of landing fees and fuel tax). Ensure the ministry of finance (as well
as the CAA) have been advised in advance of planned airlifts for the
operation.
56. UNHCR's cooperation and/or implementing agreement with the
government should allow for the duty-free import of all items, provided that
they are required for the operation (see chapter on implementing arrangements,
and the UNHCR Checklist for the Emergency Administrator). Special duties
exemption and customs clearance procedures may have to be developed for the
emergency.
Implementing partners' clearance
57. UNHCR can undertake the customs clearance for implementing
partners' relief supplies, provided these meet the purposes of the emergency
operation. This will allow some control over the arrival of clearly unsuitable
goods, and help in the coordination of material assistance.
58. Guidelines should make it clear to all potential consignors
that UNHCR will undertake to clear only supplies for which notification is
received prior to dispatch and which are considered appropriate. The guidelines
should be made available to implementing partners active in the operation and to
new implementing partners on arrival.
Guidelines on customs clearance for implementing partners should
be drawn up as early as possible in the operation.
A copy of these guidelines should be shared with Headquarters
and reference to this general procedure made in any NGO briefings at
Headquarters, as well as in the first few general sitreps.
Handling costs and other fees
59. The expenses incurred in customs clearance, handling,
storage, and onward movement of supplies belonging to UNHCR should be budgeted
for. UNHCR might receive supplies procured by an implementing partner on their
behalf, in which case all expenses involved should normally be borne by the
implementing partner, and UNHCR will be the "consignee of convenience" (not the
"owner" or "donee"). However, in certain circumstances and provided the supplies
are items directly foreseen in the UNHCR operation (for example blankets,
tents), UNHCR may also meet onward transportation costs.
Inspection and Damage
60. All consignments must undergo a visual and quantitative
inspection on arrival (by staff) and some deliveries will be required (under
government regulations) to undergo a qualitative inspection by a government
designated inspection company.
61. If during the inspection, visible damage is noted, the
damage must be clearly indicated on the shipping documents and a claim lodged
against the last transporter within three days of receipt of the goods. The
claim should indicate the dollar value at which UNHCR holds the transporter
fully responsible for the loss or damage. A copy of the claim should be sent to
the Supply and Transport Section in Headquarters who will follow up. The value
of the loss or damage must include any associated transport costs. If damage is
not visible and the packaging is undamaged, transporters will only accept a
claim if it is lodged within seven days of receipt of the goods.
Do not accept supplies that do not meet contract
specifications.
Headquarters should always be informed immediately of any damage
or shortfalls or if the products do not meet specifications.
Insurance
62. Some damage, whether during transport or storage, is
inevitable and considerable sums may be involved in the loss. Internationally
procured supplies are insured against loss or damage in transit if their value
is over a certain threshold ($200,000 in 1998) or the goods are non-expendable
(such as vehicles and computers). Insurance claims must be registered at
once.
Storage
· There must be
appropriate storage capacity, correctly sited;
· The requirement
for buffer stocks must be properly calculated and forecasted - do not hoard
"just to be prepared".
Basic Requirements
63. Goods must be protected from damage due to bad handling or
improper stacking; the adverse climatic effects of the sun, rain, cold or
humidity; attacks by pests; and bacteriological decomposition of both food and
non-food items over time.
64. Storage facilities may be required for:
i. Initial storage near the port of
entry;
ii. Transit storage at certain key transhipment
locations;
iii. Local storage no farther than one day's
transport from the refugees;
iv. Storage at camps.
See figure 1 for information about location of storage
facilities.
65. Warehouses must be accessible in all seasons and weather -
plan well in advance of the winter or rainy seasons. Existing government
warehousing should be used if it meets operational requirements.
66. Security of supplies must be ensured. Warehouses must be
secure against theft, and should be lit if possible. Storage for local purchases
should be the responsibility of the supplier whenever possible. Particular
attention must be paid to those items requiring special storage.
67. A single large building is better than several small ones,
as long as there are sufficient loading doors and access ramps. The doors must
be large enough to allow for quick loading and offloading and small enough to
keep control of the entry and alleyways.
68. Organize the distribution and storage system so that
supplies are handled a minimum number of times. This will not only incur less
costs, but also less damage and loss. Remember the rule "first in first out" for
stock management and avoid offloading in the rain.
Considerations in Warehouse Selection
69. Warehouses should be well-constructed, dry, well-ventilated,
and provide protection from rodents, inserts and birds. The floor should be flat
and firm and the building should be easy to access, with suitable arrangements
for loading and unloading (e.g. a ramp or platform).
70. When selecting a warehouse check the following:
State of the roof and
ventilation;
State of the walls and
whether they are watertight;
State of the floor, its
insulation and general water drainage;
Number of traffic lanes and
doors;
Availability of handling
equipment and labour;
Utilities (water,
electricity, toilets, fire protection);
Office space and lodging for
drivers and guards;
Special configuration as
necessary for example for fuel, construction material, water
reserves;
Fences, guards, and secure
doors and windows.
71. Warehouse capacity required will depend on the nature,
variety and quantity of goods supplied, the numbers of refugees they serve, and
what outside support they need. Buffer stocks of essential items, particularly
food and fuel, should be built up close to the refugees.
Sufficient stocks should be on hand to cover likely
interruptions in the delivery schedule. As a rule of thumb, this should cover
one to three months distribution.
Conversely, care should be taken not to hold unnecessarily large
stocks of items that are not immediately required by the refugees, e.g. seasonal
items such as heaters or blankets.
72. The volume of a warehouse necessary to store a given
commodity may be roughly estimated as follows. First calculate the volume of the
goods. As an indication:
1 Metric Tonne of
Occupies approximately
grain
2 m3
medicaments
3 m3
blankets (approx. 700 heavy blankets per bale)
4-5 m3
blankets (loose)
9 m3
tents (approx. 25 family tents
4-5 m3
If the goods can be stored to height of 2 metres, the minimum
surface area occupied by the goods will be half their volume. Increase this
surface area by at least 20% to allow for access and ventilation.
73. For example, the approximate size of a store to hold 2
months' supply of the cereal staple for 30,000 refugees receiving an individual
cereal ration of 350 g/day would be:
350 g × 30,000 × 60 days = 630 MT
1 MT of grain occupies 2 m3
Therefore 630 MT occupies 1,260 m3.
1,260 m3 stored to a height of 2 m gives a surface
area of 630 m2, add 20% for access = 756 m2 of floor
space. A building some 50 m long by 15 m wide would therefore be indicated.
Warehouse construction
74. If suitable storage facilities do not exist, they may have
to be built. Local techniques, materials and practices are likely to be the most
appropriate in the longer term. However, for rapid construction, it may be
necessary to use prefabricated (tent) warehouses as a temporary measure. These
should be carefully sited, protected from surface water by digging ditches if
necessary, and with raised platforms inside (for example using pallets, or
groundsheets on sand). The contents must not touch the tent walls. Prefabricated
warehouses are held as part of the UNHCR central emergency stockpile. They are
24 m long × 10 m wide with a capacity of between 750 to 1,100
m3.
Stock Management
· Effective stock
management and security are imperative and must cover the whole supply chain
through to the final distribution to families or individuals;
· Report on stock
levels, movements, losses, damage and distribution using the UNHCR Commodity
Tracking System (CTS).
75. The stock management system should ensure that initial low
quantities of goods can be put to best use and quickly into distribution.
A sound stock management and distribution system is essential
in order to identify potentially critical shortages in time and assure final
delivery to the beneficiaries.
Levels of relief may not meet total requirements of the
beneficiaries - the agencies involved must identify what goods should be
immediately distributed and to whom.
76. The stock management and distribution system should identify
what has been ordered, where the goods are, when they will be delivered, and
where they have been distributed. This information must be available to those
responsible for the operation.
77. Control mechanisms include verifying the bulk consignments
on arrival, physical stock checks in the warehouses, individual ration cards or
distribution checks at the sites and carefully calibrated measures (scales) for
final distribution. The nature of these mechanisms will depend on the
circumstances, but they must be in place from the start and they must provide
real and not just theoretical control. The supplies actually distributed to the
refugees must be reconcilable with those known to have been delivered, those
remaining in storage, and those which are lost or damaged.
78. In the emergency phase certain basic controls should be
established at once, in addition to the controls over actual distribution. These
are described in Annex 3.
79. The UNHCR Commodity Tracking System (CTS) is a computerized
tool for stock management, which uses information from purchase orders and
shipping and warehouse documentation (described in Annex 3), to track goods from
their arrival at the port of entry of the country of operation, to the final
distribution point. An additional module ("pipeline management module"), which
can be attached to the CTS, tracks goods from the point of source (globally) to
the port of entry.
80. The stock control and distribution system (including CTS)
provides information to fulfil reporting obligations - ensure the system takes
account of reporting needs as specified by Community Services, Field and
Programme Officers. See UNHCR Commodity Distribution, A Practical Guide for
field staff for further guidance, in particular on setting up a reporting system
for distribution.
81. A Motor Item Management system, (MIMS) is a computerized
tool for fleet management, which keeps track of the maintenance and repair of
vehicles, generators, etc., of fuel consumption, vehicle insurance, and the
registration of vehicles, their re-deployment and disposal.
82. Assistance with setting up the CTS or MIMS can be obtained
from Supply and Transport Section,
Geneva.
Key References
Commodity Distribution - a practical guide for field
staff, UNHCR, Geneva 1997.
Supplies and Food Aid Field Handbook, UNHCR Geneva, 1989
(this is the same as Chapter 10 of the UNHCR Manual).
UNHCR Manual, Chapter 4, UNHCR, Geneva, 1996.
UN Joint Logistics Cell: Standard Operating Procedures,
MCDU, Geneva,
1997.
Annexes
Annex 1 - Standard specifications for certain common relief
items
These specifications can be useful in drawing up tender requests
where local purchase is possible, to assist in negotiations with suppliers, and
to give a clear indication of what could otherwise be supplied at short notice
through Headquarters (some items are available in the emergency stockpile -see
Appendix 1, Catalogue of Emergency Response Resources).
1. Woven Dry Raised Blankets (Type A) (for warm climates)
Composition:
Woven, minimum 30% wool. Balance of new cotton/synthetic fibres;
Size:
150 × 200 cm, thickness 4 mm;
Weight:
1.5kg;
T.O.G.:
1.2-1.6;
(thermal resistance
of garment)
Finish:
10 stitches/decimetre or ribbon bordered 4 sides;
Packing:
In compressed water tight wrapping in pressed bales of 30 pcs.
Each bale of 30 pcs would be about 0.3 m3 volume and weigh approx. 48
kg.
2. Woven Dry Raised Blankets (Type B) (for cool climates)
Composition:
Woven, minimum 50% wool. Balance of new synthetic fibre;
Size:
150 × 200 cm, thickness 5 mm;
Weight:
1.5kg;
T.O.G.:
2.0 - 2.4;
(thermal resistance
of garment)
Finish:
10 stitches/decimetre or ribbon bordered 4 sides;
Packing:
Compressed water tight wrapping in pressed bales of 30 pcs. Each
bale of 30 pcs would be about 0.35 m3 volume and weigh 50 kg.
3. Heavy duty plastic bucket, 10 litre
Type:
Heavy duty plastic bucket, multi purpose, with lid;
Material:
High density polyethylene (HDPE), food grade material, conical
seamless design.
Handle:
Steel-wire bale handle, fitted with plastic roller grip, rust
proof;
Thickness:
Minimum 1.0 mm;
Dimensions:
Approx. top diameter: 30 cm Approx. height: 30 cm; volume 0.01
m3
Weight:
450 g.
4. Jerry Cans, 10 litre Semi-collapsible jerry
cans
(Semi-collapsible jerry cans are the preferred option because of
the much lower shipping volume, but they are sometimes difficult to obtain
locally.)
Type:
Semi-Collapsible plastic jerry cans for drinking water;
Material:
Manufactured of food grade HDPE (i.e. containing no toxic
elements);
Construction:
Semi-collapsible; built-in carrying handle, wide enough for
adult hand; screw cap linked to container by polymide string; jerry can opening
35 mm (inner diameter); 0.6 mm thick walls; Impact resistance: Must withstand
drop from minimum 2.5 m containing maximum volume;
i) 1 kitchen knife with stainless steel blade,
cutting edge 14/15 cm long, 2.5 cm wide with moulded plastic
handle.
j) 1 galvanized steel bucket, 15 litre, 0.5 mm
thick, tapered with raised bottom, curled brim and metal arch
handle.
Packing:
Individual carton: 30 × 30 × 33 cm = 0.02
m2
Weight:
Approx. 5.5 kg
Kitchen Sets - Type B
Consists of the
following items: a, b, c, (or d) e, f and optionally i).
Packing:
4 sets per carton: 56 × 56 × 19.5 cm = 0.06
m2
Kitchen Sets - Type C
Consists of the following items: a, c, (or d) e and f.
Packing:
4 sets per carton: 54 × 54 × 19.5 cm = 0.05
m2
6. Reinforced plastic tarpaulins in sheets
Sheets are 4 m × 5 m each.
Material:
Made of woven high density polyethylene fibre; warp × weft
(12/14 × 12/14 per inch); laminated on both sides with low density
polyethylene with reinforced rims by heat sealing on all sides and nylon ropes
in hem; 1000 dernier Min. Stabilized against ultraviolet rays and excess heat
for long outdoor exposure (1.5% loss of strength in yarn and in lamination);
provided with strong aluminium eyelets or equivalent on four sides of the sheet
at 100 cm centre to centre.
Dimensions:
Thickness: 200-230 microns; weight 190 g/m2; density
0.9-.95 kg/cubic decimetre.
Tensile
strength:
Min. 600 N both directions of warp and weft (BS 2576, 50 mm grab
test or equivalent).
Tear resistance:
100 N Min. both directions (BS 4303 wing tear or equivalent).
Heat/cold
resistance:
Flammability: flash point above 200°C.
Colour:
Blue one side white on reverse; UNHCR logo.
Weight:
4.8 kg per piece, packed in bales of five, weight per bale 22.5
kg; volume per bale 0.045 m3.
7. Soap bars:
Composition:
Min. 70% fatty acid: max. 20% moisture, max. NAOH 0.2% max. NACL
1.25%; no mercury content. Local standards of lower content of fatty acid might
be acceptable.
Weight:
Soap bars should be approx. 125 g/piece.
8. Double Fly double fold centre pole tent
Family sized tent.
External dimensions:
4.4 m × 4.4 m (outer fly), surface area 19.36
m2, centre height 3 m.
Internal
dimensions:
4 m × 4 m, floor area 16 m2, centre height 2.75
m, side wall height 1.8 m (25 cm distance between outer and inner fly).
Material:
Cotton canvas; 100% cotton yarn (10/2 × 10/2 twisted in
warp 42/44, weft 24/26 threads per inch, plain weave); 15-16 oz/m2.
Canvas to be free of weaving defects and finishing faults adversely affecting
strength, waterproofness and durability. Water proofing/resistance to water
penetration by paraffin wax emulsion and aluminium acetate to withstand 20 - 30
cm hydrostatic head. Stabilization against decomposition of the fabric
(rot-proofing) with copper napthanate.
Poles/ropes/pegs:
4 aluminium or bamboo poles for roof corners (2 m × 22 mm
diameter); heavy duty sectional steel tube (or aluminium or bamboo) centre pole,
plastic clad or galvanized (3 m × 50 mm diameter). Complete with ropes made
of 9mm 3 strand polypropylene; 24 T-Type bars 40 mm × 40 mm, 50 cm long; 12
iron pegs (25 cm × 9 mm diameter), one iron hammer of 1 kg; one repair kit
with one straight and one curved needle with 20 m of suitable thread for tent
repair, illustrated assembly instructions with list of contents.
Groundsheet:
Reinforced PVC groundsheet 250g/m2.
Packing:
All rolled into a canvas bag. Weight 100-130 kg, dimensions: 2 m
× 50cm diametre (0.4 m3).
Annex 2 - Planning Vehicle Needs
1. Assessing needs
Assessing vehicle needs involves not only calculating the
vehicles which are needed, but also assessing what vehicles it will be possible
to operate and maintain in the area of operation. Make sure that the existing
infrastructure (roads, workshops and fuel) is fully evaluated before obtaining
vehicles.
What will the vehicles be used for and how many are
needed?
Heavy vehicles
i. Will the vehicles be used for - transporting
people or relief supplies?
ii. What will be the frequency of use (one off
transport, or scheduled deliveries for distribution)?
iii. What is the total quantity (of goods or people)
to be transported?
iv. Are any special configurations necessary: if a
truck is to carry dangerous goods e.g. fuel, ensure that dangerous goods
regulations are followed.
Light vehicles
i. How many vehicles are needed for staff? In an
emergency, it is advisable to have a ratio between light vehicles and
international staff of 1:1. In more stable situations, slightly fewer vehicles
per staff member may be acceptable.
ii. What special vehicles might be needed (e.g.
ambulances for transporting vulnerable refugees)? The main categories of light
vehicles which might be useful are: sedan and minibus (4x2 only), and station
wagon, van, pick-up, and ambulance (both 4x2 or 4x4).
What configurations of vehicles are needed?
i. What is the condition of the routes that will be
used? tarmac roads, good unpaved roads (with stone or macadam surface), sand or
dirt trails, or no roads (in which case consider animals for
transport).
ii. How long are the journeys expected to
be?
Light vehicles
i. What configuration light vehicles should be used
according to road conditions: 4×2 or 4×4?
Heavy vehicles
i. What configuration for heavy vehicles should be
used according to the road conditions: 4×2, 4×4, 6×2 or
6×4?
ii. Should trailers be used? Trailers can be more
economical, i.e. - with a relatively small investment one is able to transport
twice the amount of cargo. The following configurations for heavy vehicles
(trucks/trailers) could be appropriate:
i. Truck with trailer (6×2 or 6×4) with a
combined capacity of 20-40 MT for transport up to 3,000 km 2-7 day trip,
normally for use on tarmac roads;
ii. Truck (6×4, 4×4, 4×2) for
intermediary distribution with a capacity of 10-15 MT (normally 1 day trip) on
unpaved roads with stone or macadam surface;
iii. 5-10 MT capacity trucks on tracks and trails
(generally for trips of half a day or less up to distribution
points).
Trailers
Prior to purchasing trailers, the following additional questions
should be considered:
i. Are the roads and bridges suitable to drive on
with trailers?
ii. Are the drivers capable of driving with
trailers?
iii. What are the regulations in the country
regarding the weight and length of truck-trailer combinations?
iv. What type of trailer is needed? Can the trucks
be operated with trailers or would tractor trailers be better? Can the trailer
be transported on the truck on empty runs? Ensure there are air-brakes, a towing
hook, extra fuel tanks and spare wheels. Particular attention must be paid to
the tow-bar strength and number of axles.
What makes and models of vehicles would be appropriate?
i. What makes of vehicles are maintained (to
supplier specifications) by local service dealers? The heavy vehicle fleet must
be standardized to suitable makes and models already operating in the country.
If a mixture of models of truck is unavoidable, it may still be possible to
standardize to a single make.
ii. What is the availability of vehicles: the spare
capacity of local transport companies, and possibility of purchasing new or
second hand vehicles?
Infrastructure (fuel, workshops)
i. Is there a service network available with the
know how to maintain the fleet, or will it be necessary to set up dedicated
workshops and fuel stations?
ii. Are there sufficient spare parts and tyres in
the local market, or must they be imported?
iii. Is fuel (diesel and gasoline) and are
lubricants readily available in the area of operation? (note the number of fuel
stations, capacity and likely availability of fuel at each).
2. Sourcing vehicles
Vehicles (whether light or heavy) can be: rented locally,
provided by the government, loaned from another UN Office in the region,
re-deployed from another UNHCR operation, or purchased. Heavy duty vehicles can
also be provided under a standby arrangement (see Catalogue of Emergency
Response Resources, Appendix 1). If trucks are to be purchased internationally,
send a request to the Supply and Transport Section in Headquarters by completing
the appropriate form (Operations Analysis Form for Trucks - request this from
Headquarters if necessary). In order to analyze the procurement options, take
into account the following:
i. Expected length of operation. If the expected
length of the operation is short, (3 - 6 months), or the situation is very
unstable, it may be better to rent, loan or re-deploy rather than purchase
vehicles, because of high initial costs;
ii. Comparative costs. Compare the cost of renting
vehicles with the cost of purchasing them (including delivery costs). Consider
purchasing second-hand vehicles if they are in good enough
condition;
iii. Servicing and other benefits. Take into account
that renting vehicles will include servicing and other benefits (such as
drivers, insurance) which would need to be separately arranged if the vehicles
are re-deployed, purchased, or loaned;
iv. Time. Light vehicles can be quickly deployed
from the UNHCR emergency stockpile (see Appendix 3). Purchasing new vehicles can
be very time consuming, because of long delivery times (up to 8 months if they
are manufactured to order, which is usually necessary for the configuration of
heavy duty vehicles for UNHCR operations). If there is an urgent need for heavy
vehicles, inform Supply and Transport Section at Headquarters of the vehicle
requirements and infrastructure, who will look into possible options
(re-deployment, purchase etc.) in the international market and regionally. If it
becomes necessary to purchase vehicles, early notification and action will be a
priority;
v. Other options. Consideration could also be given
to the possibility of "grafting" the heavy vehicle fleet onto a large national
or regional transport organization. That organization's infrastructure,
including workshops, offices, etc., would then be immediately available as would
its accumulated experience of operating in the country.
The vehicles exclusively involved in the operation should be
individually numbered and distinctively marked -for example, white with blue
markings.
3. Fuel and Maintenance Facilities
There must be adequate servicing facilities, including
sufficient supplies of fuel and spare parts. Maintenance and repair must be
carried out regularly and as per manufacturers' standards, either through local
service dealers or through a UNHCR workshop. Regular maintenance will prevent
minor problems turning into major ones. Proper driving and care by the drivers
can be an important factor in keeping vehicles on the road and prolonging their
life. Adequate training, incentives and supervision will be the key to this.
Fuel and lubricants
· Assured supplies
of fuel and lubricants must be available where they are needed (make sure oil
and lubricants are in accordance with manufacturer's specifications - and new).
This may require separate, secure storage arrangements and an additional fleet
of fuel tanker vehicles. It may be necessary to establish fuel stations to
ensure fuel supplies.
Spare parts and workshops
Consumable items (filters, shock absorbers, brake linings etc.)
and spare parts must be available, especially tyres: tyre life may be no more
than 10,000 km in rough desert or mountain conditions. Arrangements for
maintenance and repair include:
i. Making use of or strengthening existing
facilities:
Existing commercial, government or UN facilities
(e.g. WFP or UNDPKO) may be able to service additional UNHCR vehicles or could
be strengthened in order to do so;
ii Establishing dedicated workshops:
Workshops may have to be established by UNHCR solely
for the operation - for example a central, fully equipped workshop, including
personnel, tools, soldering capacity, spare parts store, and transport
administration office. In addition, depending on the size and area of the
operation, consider also having smaller workshops and transport administration
offices closer to isolated destinations;
iii. Mobile workshops and heavy recovery vehicles
may also be necessary:
Always ensure there is recovery capacity for trucks,
such as mobile workshops, recovery trucks, winches, etc.
Annex 3 - Stock Management Systems
This annex gives an indication of the basic components of a
stock management system. The minimum level of controls necessary will vary with
each operation. Simple controls and accounting established from the start will
be much more effective than a sophisticated system later. No system will be
effective unless it is understood by those required to operate it. Training will
be required for all staff involved. All these documents are UNHCR forms apart
from waybills. The computerized UNHCR Commodity Tracking System (CTS) relies on
the information contained in this paper system.
1. Stock Control
i. Pipeline report: each order or consignment
(including contributions in kind), should be tracked using a pipeline report.
This records all stages of stock movement from the initial request for goods
through, as applicable, requests for tenders, placing of order, notification of
shipment, planned delivery time and place, actual time of arrival, and
distribution details.
ii. A simple board where progress can be monitored
visually is likely to be very useful and can be set up at once.
2. Source Documents
Source documents identify the quantity of the commodity,
specifications, packaging, value and origin.
i. Purchase order. This defines the order:
specifications, number of units ordered, price/unit, total price, packaging,
date of purchase, supplier, destination etc. It should make reference to the
legally enforceable standard conditions of contract.
ii. Contribution Advice Form (CAF)/Donation Advice
Form (DAF). When contributions in kind are pledged, Fund-raising and Donor
Relations Services in Headquarters issues a CAF or DAF. This gives similar
information to a purchase order and the information should be used to track the
goods until final distribution in order to account to the donor as stipulated in
the CAF/DAF.
3. Authorization Documents
i. Release Request. This is a formal request for
goods which authorizes warehouse staff to release goods from stock.
ii. Transporting/Warehouse Request. This gives
formal approval for NGOs to use UNHCR transport or warehouse facilities for
their goods.
4. Certification Documents
There are a number of documents which are used to certify that
goods have been received, delivered, and/or sent in good order.
i. Waybill/Air Waybill/Bill of Lading. This is the
shipping document and contract with the transporter showing the destination and
accompanies the goods from the port of loading to the contracted destination in
duplicate. This document is the basis for customs clearance and enables staff to
check goods actually received against those loaded. Duplicate copies are also
used by procurement staff to verify goods dispatched against those ordered (i.e.
against the purchase order form). Where the movement is between UNHCR
warehouses, use the delivery note (attached as Annex 4).
ii. Release Note. This is used when goods are
collected at the warehouse and the goods leave UNHCR's stock control system -
the person (driver or consignor, for example an NGO) who collects the goods
certifies that goods have been received in good order.
iii. Delivery Note (see Annex 4). The delivery note
is sent with the goods when they are transported (under UNHCR's control) to
another location (for example another UNHCR warehouse). The receiver of goods
signs the delivery note to certify that the goods have been received in good
order, and a signed copy is returned to the sender. It is used when the goods
have been sent by rail, road or barge (an "Aircargo Manifest" is used where the
goods have been transported by air).
iv. Receipt Note: Where goods have been received
without a delivery note or waybill/bill of lading, a receipt note is signed by
the receiver of the goods and sent to the sender for certification.
5. Warehouse documents
Whatever the size of the warehouse or store and wherever it may
be located, the minimum recommended book-keeping controls are those outlined
below. They must be complemented by routine inspection to ensure goods are
properly stored and protected, and by a periodic audit.
i. Daily Incoming Shipment Log Sheet. This is used
to record basic details of all inward consignments - description of goods,
quantity, supplier, name of person receiving and date of receipt, with cross
reference to waybills (above).
ii. Daily Outgoing Shipment Log Sheet. This is used
to record basic details of all outward consignments - description of goods,
quantity, destination, and date of dispatch, (with cross reference to waybill,
delivery or receipt note).
iii. Stock card (sometimes called a bin card). One
stock card for each different commodity in the warehouse is used to record every
in and out movement of that particular commodity, with cross reference to the
appropriate entries in the incoming/outgoing log sheets. It gives a running
balance. Where possible those actually receiving and issuing the goods should
not also be responsible for maintaining the stock card.
iv. Daily stock report (see Annex 4). This gives
basic details of goods in stock and the quantity, value, weight of these
commodities for each warehouse location.
v. Loss/damage report: to report loss or damage to
stock (whether incurred during transport or storage).
Movement of goods
The easiest control to ensure that goods reach their destination
may be to make (final) payment (for the goods, of the driver or transporter, as
applicable) conditional on return of the certified duplicate of the Delivery
Note or Waybill. More comprehensive controls and measures (e.g. monitors) may be
required later, and are anyway needed to ensure that goods reach their
destination (in the worst case, this control only indicates that they did not).
But provided the signatories for both authorization and receipt are carefully
chosen, and signatures controlled (combining them with a UNHCR seal is
recommended), this should be an effective initial safeguard.
Annex 4
Annex 4
Figure
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
19. Voluntary Repatriation
(introduction...)
Overview
Introduction
UNHCR's Role in Voluntary Repatriation
Conditions For a Voluntary Repatriation
On Route
On Arrival in Country of Origin
Key References
Annexes
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
19. Voluntary Repatriation
Figure
Overview
Situation
Voluntary repatriation operations, even when planned in advance,
may have many of the characteristics of an emergency, as defined in this
Handbook. They often have to be organized at short notice and require "an
extraordinary response and exceptional measures". Mass unplanned repatriation,
especially when carried out in less than optimum conditions can resemble an
emergency caused by a sudden influx of refugees.
Objectives
To seek permanent solutions for the problem of refugees by
assisting with their voluntary repatriation in safety and dignity and their
successful and durable reintegration into their home society.
Principles of Response
· The decision
whether or not to return home belongs to the refugees. They should neither be
forced to return, nor prevented from doing so;
· The voluntary
nature of the repatriation must be verified and safeguarded by
UNHCR.
Action
· Deploy sufficient
staff to collect information on the intentions of the returnees and to assess
whether the repatriation is voluntary or not;
· Collect
information in the country of origin concerning the conditions for return, share
this information with the refugees;
· Define the nature
of UNHCR's involvement in the repatriation, communicate this to all staff, and
to governments and other agencies as appropriate;
· Provide assistance
to returnees on the way home and upon arrival, if required, in line with the
nature of UNHCR's involvement in the
repatriation.
Introduction
1. Voluntary repatriation operations can have many of the
characteristics of an emergency operation in that they too may require
"extraordinary response and exceptional measures" and often have to be organized
on short notice. This chapter gives brief guidance on voluntary repatriation
particularly in emergency circumstances, but further reference must always be
made to the Handbook, Voluntary Repatriation: International Protection, UNHCR,
1996.
2. Voluntary repatriation is the preferred solution for the
plight of refugees. Article 1 of the Statute requires the High Commissioner, to
assist "Governments and, subject to the approval of the Governments concerned,
private organizations to facilitate the voluntary repatriation" of refugees
falling within the scope of the Statute.
3. Voluntary repatriation is usually characterized either as:
i. "Organized" - i.e. where refugees return in an
organized manner assisted by UNHCR, or
ii. "Spontaneous" - i.e. where refugees return by
their own means rather than as part of an organized operation.
4. Spontaneous return may take place unexpectedly, sometimes in
conflict situations. UNHCR needs to position itself to provide timely and
effective protection and assistance along routes of return and in the country of
origin. In addition information on the conditions prevailing in the country of
origin should be provided to the refugees (e.g. concerning landmines, routes of
return and border conditions).
Spontaneous, mass repatriations are the most likely to require
an exceptional response and extraordinary
measures.
UNHCR's Role in Voluntary Repatriation
5. UNHCR's role in voluntary repatriation includes the
following:
i. Verify the voluntary character of refugee
repatriation;
ii. Promote the creation of conditions that are
conducive to voluntary return in safety and dignity;
iii. Promote the voluntary repatriation of refugees
once conditions are conducive to return;
iv. Facilitate the voluntary return of refugees when
it is taking place spontaneously, even if conditions are not conducive to
return;
v. Organize, in cooperation with NGOs and other
agencies, the transportation and reception of returnees, provided that such
arrangements are necessary to protect their interests and well-being;
and;
vi. Monitor the status of returnees in their country
of origin and if guarantees given by the country of origin are adhered to.
Intervene on behalf of the refugees if necessary.
6. UNHCR should maintain objective and up-to-date information
about the situation in the country of origin. Personnel on the ground should
stay in close touch with refugees' thinking on the possibility of voluntary
repatriation, and keep the refugees and concerned governments informed
accordingly.
7. A distinction should be made between "promotion" and
"facilitation" of voluntary repatriation. Repatriation should only be promoted
when it appears, objectively, that the refugees can return in safety and with
dignity1 and the return has good prospects of being durable. UNHCR
can promote voluntary repatriation without being in charge of organizing all
aspects of the return movement. Frequently, members of a group will make their
own arrangements for return, with or without assistance from UNHCR.
8. When UNHCR does not consider that, objectively, it is safe
for most refugees to return, but even so refugees indicate a strong desire to
return voluntarily and/or have begun to do so on their own initiative, UNHCR
must be careful not to promote the repatriation, but may take some steps to
facilitate it.
UNHCR must make clear to the authorities and the refugees
that support for such repatriation is based on respect for the refugees' free
decision to repatriate and cannot be interpreted as an indication of adequate
security.
9. Facilitating repatriation can, depending on the
circumstances, include providing information to the refugees, advising on the
limits of UNHCR protection and material assistance during and after their
return, negotiating amnesties, establishing a presence in the country of origin
and monitoring their treatment. The issue of material assistance requires
careful handling, so that assistance is not interpreted as a pull factor nor as
promotion of repatriation by UNHCR.
10. Where there is a mass spontaneous repatriation in conditions
where UNHCR does not consider that, objectively, it is safe for most refugees to
return, and in emergency conditions, Headquarters advice should be sought to
define UNHCR's role in such circumstances.
1"Safety" means legal safety,
physical security and material security or access to land or means of
livelihood. "Dignity" includes the concept that the refugees are treated with
respect by national authorities including restoration of all their
rights.
Conditions For a Voluntary Repatriation
11. In a voluntary repatriation, there must be:
· Safeguards as to
the voluntary nature of the return;
· Safeguards as to
treatment upon return;
· Continued asylum
for those who do not repatriate and remain refugees.
Voluntary Nature of the Return
12. Ensuring the voluntary nature of the return includes
ensuring
i. The decision to repatriate is made
freely;
ii. The refugees are making an informed decision
based on an accurate country profile;
iii. The decision is made expressly.
13. Voluntariness must be viewed in relation both to conditions
in the country of origin (calling for an informed decision) and the situation in
the country of asylum (permitting a free choice).
Voluntariness means there should be no pressure on the
refugee to repatriate.
14. A field office should analyze both factors, relying for the
first, to a large extent, on direct interviews with all segments of the refugee
community, including women. Consider refugee attitudes both towards changed
circumstances in their home country and towards the situation in the country of
asylum.
15. Voluntariness also means that the refugees should not be
prevented from returning. In certain situations, economic and political
interests in the country of asylum may lead to interest groups trying to prevent
repatriation.
16. What ever the nature of the repatriation, the refugees
should be kept fully in formed of the situation in the country of origin in
order to guarantee the voluntary nature of the return. Though refugees are often
already well informed, it may be necessary to provide additional information on
the situation in their home country.
17. Information should be available about their planned
reception and prospects for reintegration into national life. They will want to
know if they have the right to repossess their old houses and land, what the
type and amount of material support they will initially receive, what they can
take with them, etc.
18. Many of their questions may be best answered by:
i. Arranging for refugee representatives (including
women) to make a visit to the home area to see the situation at first hand, if
this is possible (go and see visits);
ii. Assisting with the exchange of
letters;
iii. Enabling communication by radio with relatives
in the country of origin;
iv. Displays of information about home
conditions;
v. Formal or informal discussions with recent
visitors to the area of return, or through visits to the refugee camps of
returnees or country of origin local authorities.
19. Whatever the method, care must be taken to ensure that the
refugees are given as fair (and objective) a picture as possible of conditions
in their home area.
20. The refugees must freely express their intent to repatriate.
They may be unused to taking individual or family decisions of this nature, but
programmes must be structured so that their rights in this regard are
safeguarded, for example by using volrep declaration forms.
21. In instances of organized return, the use of a voluntary
repatriation declaration form is recommended (see Annex 1). Where there is any
risk of coercion, either from outside or by factions among the refugees, the
form should be signed in private in front of a UNHCR officer or other neutral
witness. He or she may need to interview the refugees to ensure that their
decision is truly voluntary. Where circumstances allow, more informal
confirmation of Voluntariness than these may be used and simple lists of names
may suffice.
In cases of massive spontaneous return, completion of a
voluntary repatriation form will not be realistic and UNHCR must position
officers along the routes of return to monitor, interview and intervene where
necessary to determine if instances of coercion are taking place.
Treatment on Return
22. The durability of voluntary repatriation depends, to a large
extent, on the protection given to returnees during their reintegration into
their home country.
23. The state of origin bears responsibility for the protection
of returnees, its nationals. However, UNHCR involvement with returnees is
justified by virtue of its protection role on behalf of refugees and the
Office's statutory responsibility to seek voluntary repatriation as a durable
solution for refugees.
24. UNHCR cannot guarantee safe treatment to the returnees,
though they will often request such assurances. UNHCR's involvement with
returnees is set out in more detail in the UNHCR Handbook, the Voluntary
Repatriation Handbook, which includes information on amnesties and monitoring.
Amnesties, Assurances. Guarantees
25. In any voluntary repatriation, appropriate legal safeguards
are essential. UNHCR recommends that, in addition to conditions set out in a
repatriation agreement, governments independently promulgate amnesties or legal
guarantees for returnees. Such declarations should include the right to return,
freedom of residence, and the provision of an amnesty. As a minimum, they should
stipulate that returnees not be subjected to any punitive or discriminatory
action on account of their having fled their country.
26. If the government consults UNHCR when drawing up an amnesty,
it is particularly important to propose that the amnesty should be both:
i. A group amnesty - the amnesty should be extended
on a group basis, rather than requiring individual determination;
ii. A blanket amnesty - the amnesty should whenever
possible be a blanket one, not distinguishing between different types of prior
'crimes'. Such distinctions can create major problems, for example in a
situation where a clear differentiation between political and criminal offenses
may not be possible. Unless the amnesty is a blanket one, repatriates may not
know if they are covered until they return, which may be too late. If a complete
blanket amnesty is not possible, then a time limitation on the amnesty (offenses
committed before or after or between given dates) should be the
aim.
Monitoring
27. UNHCR must have direct and unhindered access to returnees to
monitor their safety and reintegration conditions. This should include access to
prisons or detention centers (liaison with ICRC and Human Rights will be
important in this regard as well as information-sharing with other NGOs working
with returnees).
28. If returnees are at risk due to inadequate state protection,
UNHCR should intervene on their behalf as appropriate, for example by remedial
action, or formal protest at local, national or even regional level, and ensure
there is good reporting. If the insecurity persists, UNHCR would have to review
its policy on return.
29. UNHCR's returnee monitoring role alone will never provide a
mechanism for ensuring the safety of returnees and respect for international
human rights standards in the country of return. It can be a helpful influence
to enhance respect for amnesties, guarantees, the rule of law and human rights
but should never be seen as a substitute for state responsibility.
Continued Asylum for Those who Remain Refugees
30. Any voluntary repatriation programme must be complemented by
measures to ensure continued safe asylum of refugees and international
protection for those who choose to stay longer in the country of asylum. Some
refugees may continue to harbour a well-founded fear of persecution and who
therefore do not wish to repatriate. There may be others who delay their
decision, or even initially decide against repatriation, in order to see how the
first fare.
31. This may mean the continuation of any existing operation,
but for a reduced number of beneficiaries. Local integration in the country of
asylum is the preferred option for a residual caseload of refugees who remain
after the completion of a repatriation programme and who are unable for one
reason or another to return to their country of origin. However, in rare
circumstances, it may mean a resettlement project of some kind for those who
remain refugees.
32. If there is a serious problem of coercion, or intimidation,
it may be necessary to move those who decide not to repatriate to another
location immediately after they have reached this decision. This, too, should be
foreseen and covered in any voluntary repatriation agreement.
Other Protection Concerns
Vulnerable groups
33. Throughout all phases of the operation particular attention
has to be paid to vulnerable groups such as unaccompanied children,
unaccompanied elderly, the disabled and chronically ill as well as specific
needs of unaccompanied women and single heads of households. In large scale
spontaneous repatriation movements, family members may become separated during
the operation and it will be necessary to establish tracing services to reunite
families. During registration the identity of vulnerable refugees, particularly
those with special needs, and of persons with close links to the vulnerable in
the country of asylum or country of origin, should have been recorded.
Preparing for Repatriation
34. The steps below should be considered in any kind of
repatriation, including in emergency circumstances. The management principles
described in chapters 1 to 9 should be referred to (e.g. planning, needs
assessment and implementation) and reference should also be made to chapter 18
on supplies and transport.
Being Prepared for Spontaneous Repatriation
35. Proactive steps to ensure preparedness for spontaneous
repatriation include:
i. Being well informed about the refugee caseload,
in particular its origin, history, composition, reasons for flight, and its view
of developments in the country of origin;
ii. Liaising closely with the UNHCR office in the
country of origin to determine whether internally displaced people are returning
home or other developments which could lead to a return movement. Such return
movements are often sparked by refugee fears that they could lose their land,
property or jobs if they do not return;
iii. Being in close touch with the prevailing
concerns of the refugees.
36. If indicators for a spontaneous repatriation are present,
contingency planning should take place, including identifying protection and
material assistance needs in the country of origin and en route, and
establishing a capacity for monitoring in areas of return including a direct
UNHCR or operational partner presence.
Agreement Between the Parties
37. Whenever possible, a formal voluntary repatriation agreement
should be concluded between the governments of the countries of asylum and
origin and UNHCR in the form of a tripartite agreement. A tripartite commission
should in any event be established as soon as possible when voluntary
repatriation is forseen. However, it is important that UNHCR not enter into
tripartite repatriation arrangements without due consultation with the refugees,
and that their preoccupations are always kept foremost.
38. UNHCR's role in developing repatriation agreements is to:
i. Work with the two governments to ensure that any
such agreement respects the basic protection considerations already
outlined;
ii. Help provide material assistance, where
necessary, to enable the agreement to be implemented;
iii. Monitor the return programme, with particular
attention to protection, and to ensure free and unhindered access will be given
to returnees. UNHCR should also be present in the country of origin to monitor
returnee reintegration.
39. The actual content and scope of the formal agreement will
depend on the circumstances. An example can be found in Annex 5 in the Handbook
Voluntary Repatriation International Protection Handbook.
40. The question of whether those wishing to repatriate are in
fact nationals of their claimed country of origin may arise. Responsibility for
determining this rests with the government of the country of origin. However, if
particular issues arise over nationality claims or problems related to
statelessness that cannot be resolved at field level, contact HQ for advice on
how to proceed.
Coordination
41. UNHCR is likely to be responsible for the practical
coordination of an operation which by definition will involve more than one
country.
42. Cross border communication and coordination between UNHCR
offices on both sides of the border can make or break an operation.
The underlying principle of cross border coordination should
be that voluntary repatriation operations have to be determined by the
conditions, absorption capacity and preparedness in the country of origin.
43. One UNHCR officer should be designated with overall
responsibility for the repatriation operation in countries of asylum and origin,
and for the actual movement, for example the Representative in the country of
origin. The need for a coordinator is even greater when substantial repatriation
will take place from more than one country of asylum. The designation of a focal
point officer at Headquarters is equally important.
Staff
44. Because of UNHCR's protection responsibilities, such
operations are often staff-intensive in the field. UNHCR staff may be needed to:
Witness the refugees'
voluntary declaration of a wish to repatriate;
Maintain a presence,
sometimes a continuous one, in the settlements, along routes of return, at
border crossing points and in the transit and arrival centers;
Accompany the returnees
during the journey;
Monitor treatment of the
returnees on return;
Mount those parts of the
logistical operation not contracted out to operational partners and monitor
those that are.
Estimation of Numbers
45. An important element for planning is the number of refugees
likely to repatriate, which will rarely be known accurately for a variety of
reasons. Nevertheless, a best estimate will be required, and assumptions will
need to be made. Plans must be flexible, taking into account the fact that a
common pattern is a slow start as refugees wait to see how the initial movements
go and how the first repatriates are received.
46. Information should be obtained on:
i. The numbers of refugees intending to repatriate.
Estimates should be obtained by random sampling of intentions, discussions with
refugee elders, leaders, women, teachers and others in touch with the community
and who are aware of likely intentions. Assumptions can also be drawn from
observing current spontaneous return and identifying obstacles being faced by
the returnees;
ii. The number of refugees for whom repatriation is
unlikely to be an option at this stage;
iii. Current location and numbers of refugees in the
country of asylum;
iv. Province and district of origin (intended
destination) in the country of origin. Determination of priority provinces and
districts of return will be based on the number of potential
returnees;
v. Lists of those with special needs.
47. Information for a repatriation operation, including iii - v
above, should be computerized if possible using the FBARS (Field Based
Registration System) and consist of information obtained during the initial
registration when the refugees first arrived and periodically updated thereafter
(see chapter 11 on registration and population estimation).
Likely Routes of Return
48. Identify principal routes of return from the refugee camp to
the destination in the country of origin based on the likely methods of return
(roads, trains, airports, etc.). Identify border crossing points (primary,
secondary, tertiary and minor foot paths). Consider which routes are safer, and
where there may be dangers of mines.
49. A range of maps with varying degrees of detail should be
compiled. Data from FBARS can be imported into maps, charts and graphs. Use
standard names and spelling for all locations since in may cases these may have
changed.
Mass Information Campaign
50. In addition to ensuring the refugees have access to accurate
information on conditions in the country of origin, they should also have direct
access to information about the voluntary repatriation operation itself.
Posters, leaflets, verbal presentations, radio and TV programmes, etc. in the
refugees' language(s) should be used to explain as thoroughly as possible the
envisaged voluntary repatriation operation. A simple leaflet, setting out the
formalities to expect on arrival and arrangements made, can do much to help the
repatriates and facilitate the reception process. It is important that at each
stage of this information campaign care is taken to ensure it is as objective as
possible and that no false expectations are raised. Do not hesitate to tell a
refugee that the answer to some questions about specific conditions in the
country of origin is not known.
It should also be made clear to the refugees that on return
he or she is outside the scope of UNHCR's protection responsibilities and once
more subject to national laws.
Departure
51. Registration: Annex 1 contains a sample registration form -
the Voluntary Repatriation Form (VRF), including a declaration of intent to
repatriate. Where the Field Based Registration System (FBARS) for the
computerization of the registration data has been used, precompleted VRF forms
can be produced. These computer printed forms contain the required data on those
individuals and families wishing to repatriate and the print-outs can be signed
by those concerned.
52. Deregistration: Upon departure to their country of origin,
repatriates have to be de-registered from any camp or assistance related records
to ensure a proper scaling down and adjustment of assistance in the country of
asylum.
53. Assembly prior to departure: Unless repatriation can take
place directly from the settlements, special arrangements will be required for
transit centers prior to the actual move, including transport, accommodation,
food and basic health care as well as the orderly completion of the necessary
administrative formalities. In some circumstances, registration may conveniently
take place at the transit centers.
54. If repatriation takes place by means of organized transport,
computerized passenger manifests, allocating passengers to convoys, could be
prepared using the FBARS repatriation module. This will also allow the system to
deregister refugees who are repatriating and exclude them from assistance in the
camps.
On Route
Organized Repatriations
55. Identify sources of emergency assistance already available
along the routes of return (medical facilities and potable water sources). Where
sufficient assistance is not already available there will be a need to establish
temporary "way-stations" for rest and overnight accommodation, food distribution
(prepared food or cooking facilities), first aid stations, water points, etc.
The form and degree of assistance required will, in part, depend on the means of
transportation used by the returnees. Other issues for consideration include
availability of fuel and facilities for vehicle repair.
56. A considerable UNHCR presence will be required to monitor
and verify the voluntary nature of return, to assess needs and to coordinate
with offices in the country of origin and asylum. They should provide up to date
information on numbers, needs and likely routes to be used.
Mass Spontaneous Repatriations
57. Where UNHCR is providing assistance in mass spontaneous
repatriation, the same issues need to be considered as above. However, providing
the assistance to a large unorganized mobile population will present challenges,
and there will be additional protection concerns. The following steps should be
taken:
General Arrangements
Establish or strengthen
positions on the routes (way-stations) for the provision of protection and
assistance for the mobile population. Factors determining location of
way-stations include, availability of water and mode of transportation of the
refugees. If the refugees are traveling mainly on foot, the distance between the
way stations en route should be closer to one another than if the refugees are
traveling mainly in vehicles;
Establish a visible UNHCR
presence at way-stations using flags, UNHCR stickers and other visibility
material. Ensure that UNHCR staff can be clearly identified, particularly those
in mobile teams;
Designate which UNHCR office
will have responsibility for which sections of the route;
Make arrangements to support
UNHCR staff living temporarily at way-stations by providing tents or other
accommodation, drinking water, cooked meals, etc.;
Establish mobile assistance
along the routes, between way-stations;
Install fax, PACTOR or other
means of written telecommunication at UNHCR temporary offices along the
route;
Equip all UNHCR vehicles with
communication equipment;
Arrange for a common radio
channel through which all organizations involved can communicate;
Put one experienced radio
operator and/or technician in charge of coordinating the telecommunications
along the whole route;
Have debriefing meetings in
the evening and allocate tasks for the following day;
Introduce a single common
numbering system for all vehicles;
Communicate the daily
movement plan through staff meetings, bulletin boards and daily
sitreps;
Provide information to the
refugees on the location of way stations, etc. through the placement of signs
along the route in languages that the refugees understand, through announcements
on local radio stations and announcements using megaphones;
Make preparations for
reception in the country of origin - at the border transit centers, and in
likely districts of return, e.g. prepare the local population, as well as local
government, and negotiate reception and treatment at the border;
Establish or strengthen a
presence in the country of origin to facilitate integration and monitor
treatment of returnees.
Protection and material assistance
Set up temporary water tanks
with tapstands at way-stations (e.g. using bladder tanks);
Fill water tanks by pumping
from local sources or tankering, ensuring adequate treatment of the
water;
Preposition sufficient
quantities of water treatment chemicals at way-stations and/or water collection
points;
Establish mobile water
maintenance teams;
Arrange for water tankering
and refilling of water tanks at night if necessary;
Fit water tankers with
distribution taps for mobile water distribution;
Provide refugees with small
jerrycans (2-5 liter) which can be carried easily;
Demarcate defecation areas
(or trench or other latrines) at way-stations, designate people to encourage and
control their use;
Identify teams for cleanup of
defecation (or latrine) areas, during their use and to restore the area
following the end of the population movement;
Preposition lime for cleanup
of defecation areas;
Reinforce existing hospitals
and health centers which are on the routes with staff and supplies. Establish
health facilities at way-stations and mobile health teams in between the
way-stations. Ensure that there are adequate supplies of Oral Rehydration Salts
with health centers and mobile health teams;
Try to prevent refugees
concentrating in one area to avoid transmission of epidemics;
Preposition high energy
biscuits or other convenient food (preferably types requiring little or no
cooking) and distribute them at way stations;
Position staff with
responsibility for unaccompanied minors at all way stations;
Establish mobile teams to
identify and collect unaccompanied minors;
Ensure that staff responsible
for the care of unaccompanied minors are highly visible;
Clearly define which types of
people are to be considered "vulnerable" for the purposes of the population
movement and ensure that all the organizations involved are using the same
criteria for identification and care;
Arrange separate transport to
collect vulnerable persons, and their families.
Travel Formalities
58. Immigration formalities: Every effort must be made to avoid
the need for individual or family clearance to repatriate by the country of
origin before movement. Not only would this create major practical problems and
delays, it would also be contrary to the spirit of any properly comprehensive
general amnesty. If individual travel documentation is required at all, the
registration form should suffice.
59. Customs formalities: Customs formalities are generally
waived or simplified in repatriation operations but this should be checked well
in advance. Special arrangements may be needed where the refugees wish to
repatriate with personal possessions such as vehicles or livestock.
60. Health formalities: Health requirements (vaccination
certificates, etc.) should not exceed those required for normal travelers. Extra
vaccinations, e.g. cholera, typhoid, are sometimes requested on the grounds that
without them the refugees would pose special health hazards. Where vaccinations
are required, WHO'S advice should be sought and if necessary they can be
conveniently recorded on the registration form if the refugees are not already
in possession of individual vaccination
cards.
On Arrival in Country of Origin
61. The principle of return in safety and dignity does not cease
to apply once the return movement is completed, but applies and should be
monitored until such time as the situation in the country of origin can be
considered stable, national protection is again available and the returnees are
reintegrated into their community.
Registration on arrival
62. In certain situations, in particular in an emergency
repatriation, it may be the case that no repatriation registration was
undertaken in the country of asylum. In this case a system should be set up to
register the returnee population to facilitate UNHCR access to all returnees in
the different areas of return. In some circumstances, a returnee card may be
appropriate.
Monitoring and UNHCR presence
63. A UNHCR presence is vital for returnee monitoring. Presence
by other appropriate organizations, and liaison with them, is also important.
The purpose of monitoring is to assess whether national protection has been
effectively restored and extended to all returnees. The basic principle is
non-discrimination - that returnees are treated the same as the resident
population and are not targeted or discriminated against in any way. Monitoring
should cover general conditions (human rights violations, and security, food
security, access to basic facilities and property, freedom of movement,
honouring of any guarantees), as well as random individual monitoring.
Reception by resident population
64. Where the return is spontaneous there may be less time to
make preparations in the country of origin. Steps should be taken as soon as
possible to prepare the resident local population for the arrival of the
returnees to promote acceptance and integration if necessary.
Material Assistance
65. Material assistance and protection are interlinked and
should be usually reinforcing. The provision of material assistance to returnees
enhances the possibilities to monitor this population and is important in making
return a lasting solution. Where assistance is given without discrimination on a
community basis it can also help with acceptance of the returnees and
integration. The question of the nature and degree of assistance programmes in
the country of origin, as well as the length of time UNHCR should remain
involved in the country of origin, are covered in more detail in the references
listed below.
Access to land and property
66. Property is a key resource for returning refugees - either
in terms of access to accommodation and return to one's home, or as a means of
livelihood. Resolving this can be very complex, but must be addressed if the
repatriation is to be successful and durable. UNHCR can play a role through
negotiating with the authorities to protect the legitimate rights of returnees.
Landmines
(Please refer to chapter 23 on staff safety for safety advice on
mines.)
67. The presence of landmines on main routes of return and in
returnee settlement areas poses tremendous danger for repatriating refugees and
is therefore a major protection concern to UNHCR.
The need for return "in safety and dignity" means that UNHCR
cannot promote the voluntary repatriation of refugees in patently dangerous
situations with the risk of injury or death.
68. Within the UN system, issues relating to mine clearance are
primarily the responsibility of the department of Peace Keeping Operations
(DPKO). Where necessary UNHCR may help fund minefield surveys and demarcation,
but involvement in actual mine clearance is exceptional and requires approval
from Headquarters. The focus is therefore on less costly measures that lead to
immediate risk reduction for the refugees like mine awareness campaigns. The
danger of mines should be considered from the earliest stages of planning a
repatriation.
69. The following activities should be considered:
Identification of return routes and potentially dangerous
areas of return and landmine survey:
UNHCR should obtain reliable information on areas seriously
affected by the presence of landmines and discourage refugees from traveling to
or through such areas. While a landmine survey is a national responsibility,
UNHCR may also be able to contribute information obtained through its presence
in the country of origin as well as through interviews with refugees in the
country of asylum. DPKO have a database on mines which includes country specific
information on estimated numbers and types, and progress in clearance.
Repatriation method: The presence of mines may have an
impact on the proposed repatriation method - for example it may be necessary to
encourage refugees to repatriate by means of UNHCR organized transport rather
than returning spontaneously.
Mine awareness campaign: If landmines are a factor, then
mine awareness campaign should be part of the mass information campaign prior to
departure in the country of asylum, and continue in the country of origin.
Ensure that the campaign reaches all sectors of the population - both men and
women should be involved with the planning and training activities of the
awareness campaign. The campaign must be sensitive to levels of literacy, roles
in society, and culture. It should cover: existence, appearance and danger of
landmines, how to avoid injury, safe rescue procedures, and recognizing warning
signs.
Demarcation (marking mined areas) and mine clearance.
UNHCR should ensure that returnee areas and routes of return are included as
priorities in national demining and demarcation plans. Returnees and local
population must be taught about the demarcation signs
used.
Key References
Registration - A Practical Guide for Field Staff, UNHCR
Geneva, May, 1994.
Voluntary Repatriation: International Protection, UNHCR,
1996.
Voluntary Repatriation. Training Module. 2nd
Edition, UNHCR, Geneva, 1993.
Figure
Annexes
Annex 1 - Sample Voluntary Repatriation Form
An example of the type of form that might be used for a
large-scale repatriation is given below. Where FBARS is used, it produces a
pre-completed form with information taken during registration, which will then
only need the signature. This form can be modified to suit the requirements of
the operation.
Notes for those drawing up the form
1. Agree the information required with the authorities. All of
the items in the example below may not be necessary.
2. Agree who needs to complete a separate form. The example is
designed to be completed by each person over 18 years old and unaccompanied
children, but it may be sufficient to have the head of the family group complete
one form for all accompanying dependents.
3. Agree on the number of copies and language(s): normally
original plus three copies with the following distribution: original -
authorities; UNHCR in country of asylum; copy 1 - applicant; copies 2 and 3 -for
travel and arrival formalities.
4. If at all possible, print the forms in sets on 'pre-carboned'
paper.
5. Draw up simple completion instructions.
Figure
I, the undersigned principle applicant, declare that I (and my
dependents) after due consideration wish to be repatriated to
____________________
Applicant:
Date:
Witness:
Annex 2 - Types of Transport
General Considerations
Below are some advantages and disadvantages of the common means
of transport. Whichever form of transport is used, the plan should also take
into consideration:
1. Food, accommodation and minimum emergency health care during
the journey. Where distances are short, it is recommended that only material
assistance needed for the duration of the journey, plus, if essential, for the
first few days after arrival, be distributed prior to departure. This will help
reduce any incentive to "repatriate" several times;
2. Capacity to move all reasonable private possessions of the
refugees, if at all possible at the same time as their owners. Remember that
what refugees carry with them on return will be used to ensure more successful
reinstallation and move more quickly towards self-sufficiency (i.e., roofing
material, livestock, etc.);
3. Appropriate security and the maintenance of public order
during all stages of the journey;
4. Arrangements for the safe transfer of the required
documentation, passenger lists, registration forms, etc., and for keeping
statistical records of the progress of the operation;
5. Escort or monitoring of the actual repatriation by or on
behalf of UNHCR. At least for the first movements, a UNHCR staff member should
accompany the returnees. Ensure voluntariness even during the movement stage.
ADVANTAGES
DISADVANTAGES
FOOT
(i) Spontaneous and self-organized
(i) Returnees can take little household effects
(ii) No logistical requirements necessary
(ii) Requires first aid medical stations, provision of potable
water and food along route
(iii) Special assistance required for vulnerable groups
(children, elderly, disabled)
(iv) Increased security risk. Risk of separation of families
TRUCK
(i) Can be used on most roads
(i) Open to elements
(ii) Usually available
(ii) Danger to passengers
(iii) Plenty of space for luggage
(iii) Uncomfortable
BUS
(i) Greater passenger capacity in safety
(i) Limited luggage space except on roof
(ii) Faster than truck if roads allow
(ii) Slower unloading and loading (e.g. at border and road
checks
(iii) More comfortable
Notes for truck and bus
1. Assuming both bus and truck are available, the deciding
factor may well be journey distance. If road conditions allow, a bus is usually
preferred for longer journeys. Check with the refugees if a truck is acceptable,
consider how small children would fare, what passengers would hold on to and how
luggage will be secured. Some form of sun shade or other protection may be
necessary.
2. For both truck and bus, the following facilities will be
needed:
-vehicle fuel;
- food and water for repatriates during journey;
- emergency health care;
- breakdown or recovery service;
- vehicle insurance for the country of destination.
3. For any movement by road, try to avoid having to change
vehicles at the frontier. While it is generally easier to use vehicles from the
country of asylum, consider if having those from the country of origin coming to
fetch repatriates has advantages. Ensure that drivers do not work excessive
hours and that they have immigration and other clearances through to the
destination.
4. It may be difficult to keep trucks together in tightly
grouped convoys, and this is often impracticable on dusty roads in any event.
However, there must be one person clearly identified as responsible for each
group of vehicles. Seek local advice on how to marshal and control the vehicles.
Prearranged stopping points where all vehicles regroup, with the person in
charge in the last vehicle is one solution. Make sure all drivers are aware of
breakdown or accident procedures.
TRAIN
Advantages
Disadvantages
(i) Easy overall control including border crossing
(i) Much less flexible: secondary transport required to and from
railhead
(ii) Plenty of luggage space
(ii) Often slower than road
(iii) Can be made self-sufficient (fuel, food, water, etc.) over
longer distances
Notes
1. Movement by rail rather than road may be the better solution
where large numbers are repatriating to the same initial destination.
2. To avoid delays at the border, try and organize immigration,
customs and health formalities either only at the final destination or by
embarking officials who complete them during the journey.
AIR
Advantages
Disadvantages
(i) Swift, convenient and easily controlled
(i) High cost
(ii) Assembly and reception facilities are likely to
exist already
(ii) Secondary transport required to and from airport
(iii) Optimum means for long distances and especially for the
sick, disabled and otherwise vulnerable
(iii) Limited luggage capacity
Notes
1. For any large scale repatriation, existing commercial flights
will be insufficient (and more expensive than chartering). In general, the most
economical aircraft on a medium or long haul is a full wide-bodied jet (i.e.
jumbo or airbus type).
2. UNHCR has considerable experience in chartering aircraft for
repatriation operations. The agreement is likely to be concluded from Geneva and
advice should be sought from Headquarters (the Regional Bureau and Supply and
Transport Section) regarding procedures and standards of safety.
3. In addition to practical matters such as runway length,
consider requesting from the governments concerned:
- concession to use duty free fuel (check fuel
availability);
-waivers of in-flight route charges, landing and parking fees;
- payment only for actual cost of handling charges rather than
the fixed commercial fees.
BOAT
Advantages
Disadvantages
(i) Greater passenger and luggage capacity
(i) Secondary transport to or from port required
(ii) Assembly and reception facilities already likely to
exist
(ii) Slow and costly
(iii) Comfortable
(iii) Sea sickness
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
20. Administration, Staffing and Finance
(introduction...)
Introduction
Emergency Staffing
Budget and Finance
Non-Expendable Property and Office Supplies
Office Premises
Official Transport
Office Organization
Key References
Annexes
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
20. Administration, Staffing and Finance
Figure
Introduction
1. The purpose of this chapter is to provide general guidance on
UNHCR's basic administrative procedures and actions in an emergency. Nothing in
this chapter should be read as altering any existing rules, regulations and
instructions, in particular the UNHCR Manual. The latest edition of The
Checklist for the Emergency Administrator (hereinafter referred to as the
Checklist) is an essential reference for administration in emergencies. The
Checklist comes in three parts:
i. The actual checklist (a few pages). This is
reproduced as Annex 1;
ii. Annexes to the checklist (in a large folder)
which are primarily samples of the most frequently used administrative forms and
extracts from the UNHCR Manual;
iii. A computer diskette containing many of the
forms.
Throughout this chapter references are given to the relevant
item in the Checklist.
2. The chapter considers particularly the opening of a new
office in an emergency, but may also be helpful when expanding an existing
office or establishing Sub or Field Offices.
3. The status of an established UNHCR office is governed by an
agreement between the host government and UNHCR, called a Cooperation Agreement,
also referred to as a "Branch Office Agreement" or an "Accord de Siege". (See
Checklist section on Premises). Until such an agreement is concluded, UNHCR will
be covered by UNDP's agreement with the host government. In addition, the
Convention on the Privileges and Immunities of the United Nations,
19461, is applicable to UNHCR and covers such matters as the
inviolability of United Nations premises, the right to operate foreign currency
accounts, exemption from direct taxes and customs duties on articles for
official use, and facilities and immunities for communications. Specific
considerations in respect of the emergency operation, for example regarding the
handling of relief supplies, would be set out in the exchange of communications
concerning the government's request for material assistance and in the project
agreement (see chapter 8 on implementing arrangements).
1Contained in UNHCR, Refworld
CD-ROM.
Emergency Staffing
(See Checklist section on Personnel, Staff Conditions &
Security). See also the Staff Rules and the Staff Administration and Management
Manual, also the InSite database available on CDRom.
Introduction
4. As soon as possible the Head of Office should communicate to
Headquarters the projected staff requirements at both general service and
professional levels with the necessary detail to enable Headquarters to review
these in accordance with established personnel procedures and to approve the
staffing table for the emergency. Emergency staffing resources should be used
for the initial emergency period only. In the initial period, prior to the
creation of posts, national staff could be recruited and paid for under
Temporary Assistance.
5. There should be no delay in committing necessary personnel.
However, solely adding personnel will not meet the organizational needs of an
emergency: the operations plan and definition of responsibilities must determine
personnel needs, not vice versa. Experience shows that for a given operation,
smaller teams with clear allocation of responsibilities are usually more
successful than larger teams whose members have less clearly defined roles.
Additional staff, who are unclear as to their role, will add
to the management burden in an emergency
Staffing must be flexible. Numbers are likely to vary over time.
Recruitment
6. It is important that the different advantages of national
(also referred to as local) and international staff are understood, and that
these different strengths are properly incorporated into a staffing plan.
National staff members understand the local situation and are sensitive to
issues that often escape the notice of the international staff member. They
often enjoy a wide range of contacts that enable them to "get things done".
7. Very significantly, national staff may speak the refugees'
language. Correspondingly, international staff members bring to the operation an
impartiality and an embodiment of the international character of UNHCR, which is
essential. They will also have experience from elsewhere to contribute to the
management of the emergency.
8. Headquarters is responsible for international staff
identification, recruitment and deployment. The need for international staff
will depend on the scale of the emergency and implementing arrangements.
UNHCR has developed a number of standby arrangements whereby
suitable international staff can be deployed rapidly to an emergency
operation.
9. The following table shows staff functions which may be needed
in a large emergency.
Type of function
Overall management and leadership
Management of the administration in large emergencies
Core UNHCR functions in an Emergency Team: Field, Protection,
Programme
Administrative and finance functions for an Emergency Team, to
set up new offices and train staff
Community services functions
Supply and transport functions
Technical functions - technical coordinators (e.g. for health,
water, nutrition) and - other technical support e.g. health assessment, epidemic
preparedness and response, health monitoring systems, engineering (physical
planning, water, sanitation, roads)
Support functions, e.g. base camp management, telecommunications
and staff safety
10. The need for at least the following international staff
(comprising an emergency team) should therefore be considered in a large scale
emergency.
Emergency Team Leader (with
one of the senior officers also possibly acting as Deputy to Team
Leader);
International Secretary or
Assistant for the Team Leader;
Senior Protection
Officer;
Protection
Officer(s);
Senior Programme
Officer;
Programme
Officer(s);
Sector Coordinators, e.g.
Community Services, Water, Health, Nutrition;
Field Officers deployed at
the refugee sites;
Senior Administrative
Officer;
Finance Officer/Personnel
Officer;
Staff Safety
Officer;
Public Information
Officer;
Logistics
Officer;
Telecoms
Officer.
11. The emergency team could be composed of staff deployed from
emergency standby arrangements only, or a mix of the latter plus UNHCR staff
already posted to the area. Emergency standby and staffing arrangements include
an internal roster of UNHCR staff and emergency standby arrangements with other
organizations. Details of these arrangements can be found in the Catalogue of
Emergency Response Resources, Appendix 1.
12. For all staff, prior experience of an emergency operation is
of course, a great advantage.
The overriding staffing priority is to fill key managerial
posts with experienced UNHCR staff of the right calibre.
13. In a country where a major emergency is added to a previous
small-scale programme it may be necessary to replace the existing Head of Office
with a more experienced Head of Office at least for the duration of the
emergency.
14. Administrative staff are another priority. An experienced
administrative assistant will be an essential member of the team if a new office
is being opened, and in large emergencies experienced finance and personnel
officers are likely to be necessary. Without persons with these skills, other
staff will have to devote a disproportionate amount of time to UNHCR internal
administration. National administrative staff must be identified and trained,
but this in itself requires experienced supervision.
15. Each refugee emergency will require a certain number of
specialist skills even at the assessment and initial phases of the emergency.
Where these are not available in-country, the assistance of Headquarters for
recruitment of specialists through standby arrangements should be sought without
delay. See Appendix 1, Catalogue of Emergency Response Resources for more
details of these standby arrangements.
16. Informal volunteers, both nationals and members of the
diplomatic and expatriate communities may come forward to help. The value of
these outside volunteers will vary considerably with the situation. It will be
important to assess the skills of the volunteers, the time they can devote and
the availability of management personnel needed to coordinate and support them.
Lack of proper supervisory support may lead to the volunteer
taxing already overextended staff as much as, or more than, the value added.
Reporting lines
17. In situations where an emergency team is deployed to an area
of the country where there is no UNHCR office, the emergency Team Leader will
normally report to the UNHCR Representative in that country or the Regional
Representative or Special Envoy as appropriate in the individual circumstances.
18. When an emergency team is deployed into an area where a
UNHCR office already exists and has responsibility for the operation, then the
emergency team should integrate into the staffing structure of the existing
office. The decision as to who should head the operation, the existing Head of
Office or the Emergency Team Leader, will depend on the circumstances and the
relative experience and seniority of the individuals. The decision as to who
will head the operation must be clearly communicated to all staff at the outset
to avoid any ambiguity in responsibilities and reporting lines.
Management
19. Sound personnel management, supervision and leadership are
very important to the success of an emergency operation, but can easily be
overlooked. The initial motivation of those involved is a major asset, but for
persons at levels that do not allow an overview of the operation, this can be
replaced by disappointment and frustration if supervisors are too busy to plan,
organize, direct, control and continue to motivate their staff.
20.
Responsibilities, roles and tasks must be dearly defined and
understood.
Job descriptions are the most common management tool for
defining individual responsibilities, even if the imperatives of an emergency
mean their frequent revision. They are important for UNHCR staff, and even more
so for seconded staff (such as United Nations Volunteers - UNVs, consultants and
staff deployed through the emergency standby arrangements), and informal
volunteers. Responsibility should be delegated to the lowest possible level, and
with it must go the necessary authority. Responsibility without authority is
useless.
21. Staff meetings should be convened regularly from the start.
Team welfare will have an important bearing on the success of the emergency
operation.
Everyone must be made to feel part of the UNHCR team. This
includes consultants, seconded staff, and volunteers.
22. Very long hours will often be necessary, but supervisors
must ensure that staff have time off, away from the refugee site, and do not get
so overtired that their efficiency and the professionalism of their approach
suffers.
23. All field staff have a particular responsibility to
safeguard their own health, but also have a role to play in ensuring that their
colleagues remain in good mental and physical health (see chapter 22 on coping
with stress). Early corrective action can avert the need to hospitalize or
evacuate key staff.
24. In an emergency there may be many occasions when staff see
clearly that by devoting time to helping individual refugees or families in
distress they could alleviate suffering directly. To seek to do so is very
understandable but it can lead to a personal emotional involvement at the
expense of the staff member's wider responsibilities towards the refugees as a
whole, and to resentment among other refugees. Direct responsibility for
individual care is usually best assured by the refugee community. For all staff,
compassion must be tempered by a professional approach. Guidance by supervisors
is often needed on this point.
25. Particular attention must be paid to proper supervision and
encouragement of newly recruited national staff. Often the Head of Office and
other international staff are extremely busy, out at meetings or in the field,
and the other staff, who may know little about UNHCR and less about the
operation, lack guidance and a sense of involvement. Some of the general
information in the emergency office kit may be useful for briefing newly
recruited national staff. In all cases the new staff should receive a briefing
from their direct supervisor covering, at a minimum, general information on the
operation and the role of the new staff member.
Personnel Administration
26. UNDP may be able to help in determining conditions of
service and even in identifying national field staff.
27. Careful attention must be paid to the administration of
out-posted field staff. A convenient way of administering Field Officers, at
least initially, is to ensure that the Travel Authorization (PT8) issued
authorizing the mission to the country of operation also covers internal travel
and DSA. If the latter is not covered, an addendum to the original PT8 is
issued. Normally in emergency situations, and to avoid staff carrying too much
cash, a DSA advance is given on a monthly basis. This advance is charged to the
suspense account code as indicated on the UNHCR account codes listing (VF 324)
and recorded on the reverse side of the original PT8. Upon completion of the
mission, the office settling the travel claim, must ensure that the travel
advances are deducted from the entitlements.
28. Particular care must also be taken to ensure the proper
administration of out-posted national staff, for example, Field Officers'
drivers. It should be noted here that while Heads of Office can authorize
out-posted staff to drive official vehicles on official travel, as in an
emergency this is likely to be necessary, every effort should be made to provide
Field Officers' with drivers from the start. They can be of great help to Field
Officers in a variety of ways.
29. All out-posted national staff must have contracts,
understand their terms of employment and benefits, including the cost and
benefits of the UN health insurance scheme, receive their salary regularly, work
reasonable hours and take leave due.
All staff should have job descriptions and understand
them.
Obvious as these requirements are, they can be difficult to meet
in an emergency. There may be important extra demands on UNHCR drivers, both
beyond simple driving and also as a result of their working for itinerant Field
Officers and thus spending considerable time away from home. These factors must
be taken into account.
Staff Visibility
30. A means for visual identification of UNHCR staff may be
necessary, particularly outside the capital. Visibility materials, available
from Headquarters, include flags, stickers (including magnetic stickers), vests,
armbands, T-shirts and caps (see the Catalogue of Emergency Response Resources
Appendix 1).
31. Consideration should also be given to adopting a UNHCR
identity card with a visible photograph that can be worn as a pocket badge.
Arrangements should be made as soon as possible for UNHCR staff to receive
diplomatic identity cards issued by the government. Pending that, an official
attestation in the local language could probably be quickly obtained for each
out-posted Field Officer from UNHCR's government counterpart and might be very
useful.
Staff Accommodation
32. At the start of an emergency, international staff will be on
mission status and will generally be accommodated in hotels. Should the daily
subsistence allowance (DSA) not cover the basic cost of adequate hotel
accommodation, Headquarters should be informed at once and all hotel receipts
retained. Conversely, DSA is reduced if official accommodation and/or meals are
provided. If it is clear that special arrangements will be required for personal
accommodation for staff who are assigned to that duty station, Headquarters
should be informed, with details of local UN practice.
33. In extreme hardship areas, where there is no suitable staff
or office accommodation, a standard staff and office accommodation package is
available. This consists of prefabricated units which are stockpiled and which
can be airlifted to the operation. Further information is provided in the
Catalogue of Emergency Response Resources (Appendix 1).
34. Standard travel kits and field kits are also available from
the emergency stockpile, and details of their contents are provided in the
Catalogue of Emergency Response Resources (Appendix 1). The kits have been
developed to provide staff with some basic personal items likely to be of use in
the first days at such places, pending more appropriate local arrangements. The
kits will normally only be issued to staff proceeding to isolated locations from
or via Geneva, and when it is clear that there may not be time to obtain what is
actually needed on arrival in the country of operation. If UNHCR is already
represented in that country, the Field Office should have a good idea of
conditions to be expected and thus of what specific personal equipment may be
needed, and this is probably best purchased locally.
35. Responsibility for the provision of the necessary personal
items rests with staff members. Even when issued with kits, staff should check
carefully what other items may be required; it is unlikely that a standard kit
will meet all needs. Staff receiving kits will be required to account for them
at the end of their mission, and will be expected to at least return the
non-consumable items.
36. In difficult conditions it may be necessary to hire a base
camp manager who will be responsible for organizing living arrangements for
UNHCR staff. A description of the tasks of a base camp manager is provided in
the
Checklist.
Budget and Finance
(see Checklist section on Finance, Equipment & Supplies).
Authority to Incur Expenditure
37 Currently UNHCR classifies expenditure into two types:
i. Project expenditure;
ii. Administrative support expenditure.
This classification of expenditure may change in the future.
38. Authority to enter into obligations for project expenditure
is given by a letter of instruction (LOI). Further details can be found in
chapter 8 on implementing arrangements.
39. Authority to enter into obligations for administrative
support expenditure is given by an Administrative Budget and Obligation Document
(ABOD). This is issued by Headquarters and is addressed to Heads of Offices. It
covers all non-staff costs including temporary assistance and overtime.
40. Authority for additional administrative support expenditure
in an emergency is given to an existing Field Office by amending the existing
ABOD. When an emergency occurs in a country where UNHCR is not already
represented, an initial ABOD will be issued immediately. This can then be
amended when more details of administrative requirements are known. Control of
expenditure against funds allocated is by an Administrative Budget Control Sheet
(ABCS) generated from the computerized accounting system.
Transfer of Funds
41. It is essential to have funds immediately available. Funds
will normally be made available by bank transfer. However, such transfers,
especially to out-posted Field Office bank accounts, sometimes suffer undue
delays because of complicated banking channels. It is very important to select a
local bank with a direct international correspondent relationship, if possible
with Citibank N.A. New York or the UBS Bank in Switzerland. Further information
can be provided by the Treasury Section at Headquarters.
42. At the start of an emergency it may be possible to hand
carry a banker's cheque from Geneva to be credited directly to the Field Office
bank account. If this is done, proper precautions must of course be taken to
ensure the security of the cheque.
43. In very extreme cases, when no banking services are
available, cash may be acquired locally (e.g. through local companies and
traders) upon specific authorization from Treasury. Funds would be transferred
to an account indicated by the trader after receipt of the cash by UNHCR. Cash
may also be provided to Field Offices through professional courier services.
Information about cash transfers, past, present and future, must be treated with
absolute discretion.
44. Subsequently funds will be transferred by Treasury upon cash
replenishment requests in the standard format shown in the box below. Care
should be exercised that funds are called forward as close as possible to the
date of their utilization to avoid unnecessary high bank balances over prolonged
periods.
To: UNHCR Treasury (HQTY00)
From: Requesting Officer/Field Office Location
Subject: Cash Replenishment Request
Please effect an immediate transfer of funds based on the
following information:
Balances on hand (all bank accounts and petty cash) at
(dd/mm/yy): (provide details of amounts and currencies)
Total disbursement needs for the next × (maximum 4) weeks:
(provide details of administrative and programme needs, amounts and
currencies)
Replenishment amount requested: (Indicate amount and
currency)
Complete bank name and address, including UNHCR bank account
number, and the Field Office's accounting system receiving bank code.
45. Disbursements for both administrative and project expenses
are made in the Field either from a local UNHCR bank account or, pending the
opening of such an account, through UNDP. In the latter case, UNHCR Headquarters
will arrange with UNDP Headquarters for the local UNDP office to receive the
necessary authority to incur expenditure on behalf of UNHCR. Settlement with
UNDP will normally take place through the common Inter-Office Voucher (IOV)
system for amounts of less than US$10,000 or through a special transfer of funds
to UNDP New York for larger sums. As a rule, disbursements exceeding the
equivalent of US$100 should be made by cheque; whenever local circumstances
require regular cash payments in excess of this limit, Headquarters' approval
must be obtained.
Bank Accounts
46. All local UNHCR bank accounts are opened by Treasury upon
recommendation from the Field Office. The choice of a bank will be determined by
its reputation, ease of access, services offered and charges. Other UN agencies,
diplomatic missions and NGOs should be consulted. The following information is
required:
i. Full name of the bank;
ii. Address, phone, telex and fax
numbers;
iii. Type and currency of account;
iv. Bank's correspondent bank in New York or
Switzerland;
v. Maximum amount of any one cheque;
vi. Suggested panel of bank signatories
vii. Amount of initial transfer.
47. Treasury will designate the authorized bank signatories. Two
joint signatories are normally required to operate UNHCR bank accounts. In
exceptional circumstances, signature by one Officer may be authorized.
Particular care must be taken to ensure cheque book
security.
Cheques must bear UNHCR in words, be consecutively numbered,
verified on receipt, and kept in a safe by a staff member designated by the Head
of Office. Cheques should always bear the name of the payee and should be
crossed unless there is an overriding reason why this is not practicable. Under
no circumstances should a bank signatory pre-sign either a blank cheque or one
which is only partially completed.
48. Field Offices will normally maintain one non-resident local
currency bank account; circumstances may however also require the opening of a
non-resident US dollar account and perhaps even a resident local currency
account. Where problems of exchange control regulations are encountered, the
Treasury at Headquarters should be informed immediately. Field Offices should
ensure that the most favourable conditions are obtained for the transfer and
conversion of UNHCR funds.
Exchange Rates
49. If there is a significant discrepancy, i.e. more than 3%,
between the actual market rate and the prevailing UN rate of exchange, a request
for a revision of the latter should be made. This request should be coordinated
with UNDP and other UN organizations locally and addressed to UNDP New York. The
communication should contain a summary of the fluctuations over the previous 60
days. If necessary, UNHCR Headquarters should be requested to intervene with
UNDP New York.
Accounting Procedures
50. UNHCR accounting procedures may change. However, currently,
whenever a Field Office operates its own bank account(s), it must report to
Headquarters monthly on all transactions for each account. The procedure is the
same for both administrative and project expenditure. Most importantly, a
properly supported payment voucher must be completed and immediately entered
into the electronic accounting system. Where this system has not yet been
installed, a manual payment voucher (F.10) should be completed and immediately
entered on a bank journal (HCR/ADM/800). It is essential that the voucher quotes
the authority for payment (LOI, ABOD, PT8 (travel authorization). A "Mini
Payment Voucher" book (F.11), designed especially for emergencies, may be used
by out-posted Field Officers. An official UNHCR receipt voucher should be issued
and entered on the bank journal for any receipts other than replenishments from
Headquarters. Similarly, payments from petty cash have to be accounted for in
the petty cash journal (HCR/ADM/800). It is imperative that all vouchers and
journal entries list the correct account code, as indicated in the UNHCR account
codes listing and on the PT8, or the project symbol marked on the LOI against
which the transaction is to be debited/credited.
51.
Whatever the pressures of the emergency, accounts must be
kept up-to-date and the monthly closure done Oft time.
Experience has shown that failure to do so will not only delay
the replenishment of the bank account but will also result in far more work than
would originally have been
required.
Non-Expendable Property and Office Supplies
(see Checklist section on Finance, Equipment & Supplies).
Non-expendable property
52. Authority to purchase office furniture and equipment is
given in the ABOD. Field Offices may purchase locally or regionally if the cost
of the item is less than 15% above that available through the Supply and
Transport Section at Headquarters2.
53. The purchase of computer equipment, vehicles,
telecommunications equipment and security equipment should be coordinated with
Headquarters in order to ensure conformity with the organization's
specifications. Local purchase should be considered and if the cost is within
the 15% limit referred to above, the Field Office should forward three pro forma
invoices, together with the item's specifications, to the Supply and Transport
section at Headquarters for approval.
2 Costs of items available
through Headquarters are quoted in UNHCR's Catalogue of Most Frequently
Purchased Items, UNHCR, Geneva, (updated regularly) and in lAPSO's catalogue of
Office Equipment, IAPSO (updated regularly).
Asset Management System
54. The asset management system is an electronic system to track
and manage all non-consumable assets owned by UNHCR (with a lifespan of over a
year), regardless of funding source or user (including for example all vehicles,
telecommunications and computer equipment, furniture and office equipment,
buildings such as clinics, office, hospitals, and water purification and
construction equipment). The system should be installed into at least one
computer at the country office level. A decision should be made at the beginning
if the extent of the operation requires that the system be installed in other
offices within the country.
The office must also have the system user manuals, bar-code
labels and data entry forms (obtained from the Asset Management Unit at
Headquarters).
55. Whenever an asset is purchased, whether locally, regionally,
through Headquarters, or by implementing partners with UNHCR funding, it must be
bar-coded and recorded in the asset management system.
56. Where items are acquired from stockpiles maintained at
Headquarters, such as computer and telecommunications equipment, relevant data
about the item will be sent to the Field on diskette so that the office can
import the details into the asset management system.
57. Where an asset is re-deployed to another location, data
about it should be sent on diskette to the receiving office for importation into
the asset management system.
58. It is important that all assets are bar-coded and recorded
in the asset management system from the beginning of the operation. Failure to
do so will result in "lost" assets and in far more work than would originally
have been required.
59. Offices maintaining their own asset management database
should regularly send their databases to the country office for consolidation.
The consolidated database should be sent to Headquarters
every three months.
Office Supplies
60. An emergency office kit (see Catalogue of Emergency Response
Resources, Appendix 1) can be used to supply a new office with stationery and
small office equipment. The stockpiled kits weigh approximately 120 kg packed in
two cardboard boxes. Each kit is designed for an office with five international
staff and ten national staff.3
3 Further information is also
contained in the Catalogue of Emergency Response Resources (Appendix
1).
1. Office supplies, as well as printed stationery
and forms, can be purchased locally, regionally, or if this is too expensive,
office supplies and printed forms listed in the UN catalogue may be ordered on a
stationery request form (GEN-236/1) directly from Headquarters. The emergency
kits are not intended for re-supply, even in emergencies.
61. Orders for items not listed in the UN catalogue4
and which are not locally available should be requested from Headquarters,
giving all necessary details and specifications.
4Office Supplies, Forms and Materials,
UN, Geneva,
1990.
Office Premises
(Checklist section on Premises)
62. The order of priority for obtaining offices is:
i. Rent-free from the government;
ii. In common UN premises;
iii. Government-provided offices against
reimbursement by UNHCR and
iv. Commercial rent.
63. Interim arrangements may be necessary, but the early
establishment of the UNHCR presence in a convenient location will be of obvious
importance to the success of the operation.
64. Office space per person should not exceed about
14m2, but an approximate addition of 30% is needed to allow for a
reception area, interviewing room, meeting room, and services area (filing,
copier, etc.) as appropriate to the scale of the operation.
65. Considerations in selecting office premises include:
Location (distances from
ministries, implementing partners, bank, post office, airport,
etc.);
Security (for authorized
access to individual refugees and UNHCR staff, to prevent unauthorized access,
and for the physical security of offices, files, etc.);
Physical layout and
orientation of the building. Ensure that the building and grounds are suitable
for radio and satcom antennas and that there is no interference from
neighbouring installations e.g. pylons;
Provides for a large enough
meeting space for UNHCR to discharge its coordination responsibilities through
coordination meetings;
Room for expansion; in
emergencies the numbers of staff can fluctuate considerably;
The condition of the
office.
66. The use of residential accommodation (e.g. a villa) as an
office may be an option.
67. Once office premises have been selected, the government,
diplomatic community, other UN agencies and NGOs should be informed accordingly,
and the relevant information provided to neighbouring UNHCR offices and to
Headquarters.
Official Transport
(See Checklist section on Communications & Transport. In
addition, chapter 18 on supplies and transport deals with all transport issues,
focusing on transport for operational needs).
Vehicles
68. It is essential for UNHCR staff to be mobile. Action to
ensure enough of the right type of official vehicles will be a high priority.
Consult the Supply and Transport Section at Headquarters regarding the purchase
of vehicles (see chapter 18 on supplies and transport for more information about
the purchase or acquisition of vehicles). Once the vehicle is sold or passes
from UNHCR's control (e.g. at the end of a lease agreement), ensure that any
official UN or UNHCR logos and stickers are removed. Magnetic stickers
(available from Headquarters) can be quickly attached and removed from vehicles
and re-used.
69. Requests to Headquarters for vehicle purchase should give
full details (make, type of body, number of doors, long or short wheel-base,
left or right hand drive, petrol/diesel, special options: sand tires, extra fuel
tanks, air-conditioning, heater, mine protection, anti-theft device, etc.). The
duty-free on-the-road price and delivery time must be given if local purchase is
requested.
70. In many countries duty-free fuel may be available for
official UN vehicles. Details of procedures should be obtained from the
government and other UN organizations. Follow them from the start; retroactive
reimbursement is often impossible.
71. Vehicle daily log sheets should be introduced from the day
the official vehicle becomes operational and these should be designed in such a
way as to show the daily mileage of each vehicle and the purpose of each trip.
The daily log should also include the names of the driver and of the
passengers). Mileage should be regularly checked against the purchase of fuel
for that vehicle.
72. It is important that vehicles are insured and registered
upon arrival. In respect of each official vehicle assigned to a Field Office,
adequate insurance covering third party risks should be arranged locally with a
reputable insurance company.
Light Aircraft
73. There may be situations when a light aircraft is the only
way to ensure satisfactory communications between the various UNHCR locations.
The need may be temporary, for example to expedite needs assessment and the
initial response, or longer-term when the existing communications infrastructure
does not adequately cover the location of the refugees and the journey by road
is long and uncertain. In some circumstances, security is also a consideration.
74. Immediate action to provide the necessary flights is
essential. Initially, or where the need is short-term, this is likely to be by
commercial charter unless the UN system already has a light aircraft and spare
capacity. If locally based charter companies exist, seek impartial local advice
on their reliability, obtain as many offers as possible and send these to
Headquarters with a recommendation. Include details of passenger insurance
coverage. This information should be complemented by an indication of the
required weekly flight plan (e.g. per week: 3 return flights capital/location X;
1 return flight capital/location Y; 1 round trip flight capital/X/Y/capital),
and the estimated cost for the necessary flights (total or per month).
75. Where local charter is not possible or a long-term need is
foreseen, inform Headquarters with as much detail of the requirement as possible
and ways it might be met (for example, of charter companies from neighbouring
countries known to operate in the country of operation). Some government
disaster corps and a number of NGOs operate light aircraft. Some are specialized
in this field like Aviation Sans Frontieres (ASF), and the Missionary Aviation
Fellowship (MAF). If there is already such an operation in the country their
advice should be
sought.
Office Organization
(Checklist section on Filing & Documentation and
Communications & Transport).
Filing and Documentation
76. A simple office communication system should be put in place
immediately. This can be implemented by, for example, pigeon holes (ideally one
for each staff-member and one for each collaborating organization), whiteboards
and notice-boards. This will help to ease communication problems in the
confusing early days of an emergency.
77. A suitable filing system and registry controls should be set
up immediately on the opening of a new office. Annex 2 gives some guidance as to
what might be required and how filing could be organized.
78. A rubber stamp to show date of receipt, file, action officer
and remarks will be very useful. The practice of putting a chronological number
on every outgoing communication is strongly recommended and will be
particularly helpful in the confused early days. Everything should have copies
on the chronological file in addition to a subject file.
79. As a precautionary measure, offices should have a shredder
to destroy any unwanted documents or correspondence. In some countries waste
paper is sold and used in markets for packaging, so care should be taken that
discarded UNHCR documents are not used in this manner.
Communications
80. Communications needs are discussed in the communications
chapter. A simple checklist for a new office is given below; the order will not
necessarily be the priority.
Identify the need for a
telecommunications network as soon as possible (radio, e-mail, satellite,
etc.);
Obtain necessary permission
from the authorities to operate the equipment with the assistance of the RTO or
HQ Telecoms if necessary;
Obtain immediate access to a
telephone and fax and tell Headquarters (and neighbouring UNHCR offices as
appropriate) the numbers and where they are located;
Set up controls and registers
for incoming and outgoing communications from the start;
Establish a pouch system
between the offices within the country of operation and
Headquarters;
Consider communications needs
in selecting office premises;
Obtain a PO box number and
tell Headquarters (and local authorities, etc.) the number;
Once the UNHCR
telecommunications network is installed, inform government, UNHCR Headquarters,
neighbouring UNHCR offices, diplomatic corps and others, and ensure correct
listing in national telephone directories, in the local UN and diplomatic lists,
and in the UNHCR
directory.
Key References
Checklist for the Emergency Administrator, UNHCR Geneva,
1998 (and updates).
Most Frequently Purchased Items, UNHCR, Geneva, 1998
(updated annually).
The UNHCR Manual, Chapter 9, (Chapters on financial
regulations and rules, especially those financial rules for voluntary funds that
are administered by the High Commissioner). UNHCR Geneva, 1995 (and
updates).
Annexes
Annex 1 - CHECK-LIST FOR THE EMERGENCY ADMINISTRATOR
(Note: This checklist is regularly updated, the latest version
should be consulted)
This checklist is intended as a practical tool for UNHCR staff
when responding to emergencies and assigned to duty stations where there is no
established UNHCR presence, or where the existing office needs to be
strengthened as a result of new events. The complete Checklist consists of three
components listed below. Only the first part, the checklist is reproduced here.
The complete checklist in its three components can be obtained from the
Emergency Preparedness and Response Section at Headquarters.
The 3 components are:
1. The Checklist itself which lists most activities
requiring consideration when establishing a Branch, Sub or Field Office. Not all
items will be relevant. The administrative officer together with the Head of the
Office will need to determine what action is to be taken. The list is not
presented in an order of priority and it is therefore important to set your own
priorities depending on the local circumstances. The list does not cover
administrative procedures and action required for the ongoing needs of the
office, but concentrates on those related specifically to the establishment of
an office. Each item is preceded by a box which you may tick off as action is
taken.
2. Annexes, which are primarily extracts from existing
documentation. These have been included for ease of reference and are not
substitutes for existing manuals and instructions of which the most important is
the UNHCR Manual to which frequent reference should be made. Not all relevant
UNHCR forms are included, as these are available in the Emergency Office Kit, or
directly on request from Headquarters.
3. A computer disc which contains the format for all
forms or documents which are indicated by an (*) in the Checklist. These forms
or documents can be copied and amended to suit local needs. (It is recommended
that the original format is not amended directly.)
The importance of setting up effective administrative
procedures from the outset cannot be over-stressed. They will have important
consequences for the effective administration throughout the operation.
ESTABLISHING AN OFFICE CHECK-LIST FOR THE EMERGENCY
ADMINISTRATOR
ACTION
ANNEXES
PREMISES
1. Establish a UNHCR Cooperation Agreement if
not already in place or consider its amendment if one already exists but
circumstances have changed
a. Model Agreement (*) b. Example Agreement c. UN
Convention on Privileges & Immunities
2. Identify need for Sub or Field Offices
a. Excerpt from UNHCR Manual
3. Identify Office Premises, negotiate lease and
seek approval from Geneva
a. Excerpt from UNHCR Manual b. Standard lease (*) c. Note
on selecting
4. Consider the use of UNHCR stickers and UN
flags, posters and visibility material. Request more from HO if
necessary
a. Flag Code b. List of stockpiled visibility material
5. Consider "Base Camp" requirements and need for Base
camp manager, in situations where this is applicable
a. Base camp manager
COMMUNICATIONS AND TRANSPORT
6. Determine immediate needs for and set
up communications: Telephone, E-Mail, fax, telex and/or radio and
pouch. Complete communications questionnaire and send to HQs Attn.
Telecommunications Unit
a. Communications Info Kit including
Communications Questionnaire b. Telecommunications inventory forms
(*) c. Pouch Service Instructions
7. Establish telecommunications procedures.
Train staff and advise procedures
a. Sitor/Pactor Manual b. Voice procedure c. Codan user
instructions (*) d. Handover letter for handsets (*) e. Handset user
instructions (*) f. Radio room discipline (*) g. Communications procedures
8. Establish log for recording long distance phone
calls giving particular attention to private phone calls
a. Excerpt from UNHCR Manual b. FOM 01/93 including Telephone
log form (*)
9. Prepare forms for telex/fax messages
a. Model format (*)
10. Establish communications log and chron files
a. Radio message chron forms(*)
11. Establish a regular system (shuttle) for transport
of mail and personnel between sub office and branch office (if
necessary)
a. Excerpts SFAS Handbook b. Excerpts IAPSU Catalogue
13. Establish procedures for light vehicle use: -
Authority for UNHCR staff to drive official vehicles - Driver trip logs -
Vehicle tracking system - Maintenance logs - Construct key box &
ensure key security - Identify best means for vehicle servicing - Make
arrangements for the purchase of Duty Free petrol - Undertake driver
education sessions
a. Excerpt from UNHCR Manual b. Driver Log format (*) c.
Vehicle Tracking format (*) d. Excerpt from ICRC Handbook e. Authority to
drive official vehicles (*) f. Inventory record form g. Vehicle
inspection check list h. Rules for drivers i. Vehicles in UNHCR
operations j. Fuel receipt voucher (*) k. Mileage rates
PERSONNEL, STAFF CONDITIONS AND SECURITY
14. Establish staffing table with Organigram and
job descriptions. Send to the Desk at HQs
a. Typical field office structures b. Additional example
organigram c. Post creation and review procedures d. Benchmark job
descriptions
15. Identify sources for local staff recruitment.
Prepare simplified Job Application Form for local Staff. (P11 to be used
only for candidates who are being seriously considered)
a. Simplified job application form (*)
16. Recruit essential and urgently required local
staff. Set up local recruitment committee. Following selection, issue
short term contract and arrange appropriate medical check
a. Excerpt UNHCR Manual and related recruitment forms b.
Interview notes & Report Form (*) c. Recruitment tests for local
staff (*) d. Regulations for NPOs - excerpt from APPB regulations
17. Identify UN Examining Physician if necessary if
no UNDP Office and inform SASS for JMS approval
18. Set up Personnel files for all staff
19. Establish leave recording system
a. Secretariat Instruction on time, attendance &
leave b. Example leave recording forms
20. Establish Working Hours, Overtime and DSA
for local staff on mission in country in accordance with UNDP practice
a. Excerpt from UNHCR Manual b. IOM 61/88 and IOM/120/88
on salary advances c. Copy OT recording form (*) d. IOM 76/89 on
Overtime for local staff
21. Establish local mission tracking system
a. Mission recording format (*)
22. Send variable information on "Appendix B" for
your duty station to Geneva
a. Format appendix B
23. Check that DSA appropriate for duty station and
if considered to be inappropriate complete DSA Worksheet if no UNDP Office
and transmit to SASS
a. Excerpt from UNHCR Manual b. DSA Worksheet &
guidelines
24. If new duty station complete Classification of
Duty Station questionnaire & send to HQs
a. Excerpt from UNHCR Manual b. Classification of Duty
Station Questionnaire
25. Review the validity of the post adjustment and
if considered inappropriate advise DHRM
a. Excerpt from UNHCR Manual
26. Determine appropriateness of salary level of
local staff and if inappropriate advise DHRM
a. Excerpt from UNHCR Manual b. Excerpt from CCAQ GS Survey
Manual
27. Arrange payment of salary and allowances
of international staff
a. Salary distribution request form and FOM/20/95 & Add.1
28. Negotiate discounts in local hotels and advise
HQs. Ensure guaranteed room availability for mission staff
29. Consider security procedures and an
appropriate evacuation plan
a. Excerpts from UN Field Handbook b. IOM 47/92 on Field
Security reporting
30. Collect personal data on international staff
and request staff to complete inventories if warranted by security
situation
a. Personal Data form b. Personal Effects Inventory form
31. Identify best means and procedures for
medical evacuation of staff
a. Guidelines for Medevac Plan b. IOM/104/94 and IOM/26/95
- Guidelines on Medevac
32. Establish frequency and procedures for staff
welfare missions through MARS/VARI/STAR
a. Excerpts from FOM/105/94 + addenda
33. Review the living and working conditions, report
to Headquarters and request field kits, travel kits and
staff accommodation as appropriate
a. Structure of living and working conditions report
(*) b. Example of Emergency Operation Living conditions paper c.
Excerpts from Catalogue of Emergency Response Resources (field kits,
travel kits, staff accommodation) d. FOM/70/95 on
Accommodation provided by UNHCR
34. Design and begin training and coaching programmes
in office procedures for local administrative staff
a. Excerpts from UNHCR Training Module b. Notes on
Coaching Skills c. Using Interpreters (*) d. FOM 102/88 on Language
Training
FINANCE, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES
35. Survey local banks. Propose bank signatories and interest
level and request HQ to open bank account. Propose ceiling and request
approval for petty cash account
a. Excerpt of UNHCR Manual b. Questionnaire on Opening Bank
Account
36. Establish accounts procedures: Vouchers, Journals,
files, signatory arrangements etc.
a. Allotment Account Codes For essential guidelines
on accounting procedures refer to Part 5, Chapter IX of the
UNHCR Manual and to the FOAS Manual
37. Request Emergency Allotment Advice if not
already received & finalize administrative budget request
to HQs on ABPS
a. Copy of Emer. Allotment Advice b. Excerpt of
Operating Instructions of ABPS c. FOM 120/94 Field Office Admin Budget
Procedures
38. Purchase and inventorise non
expendable property, particularly furniture, vehicles and
equipment and decide which to be charged to admin allotment and which to
project expenditure (if any)
a. Excerpt from UNHCR Manual
39. Check stocks of stationery and supplies, sort
forms into Manila folders & order stationery and forms required from
Geneva
a. Excerpt from UNHCR Manual
40. Investigate the possibility of the local printing
of stationery. If possible and the cost is reasonable,
request permission to do so from HQs. Proceed only once address, telephone
number, etc. Known and not likely to change
a. Examples of stationary Examplestationery
41. Survey EDP facilities and needs and
recommend improvements/request additional equipment. If necessary request
services of ICSS consultant to assess optimum Admin (and programme) needs
FILING AND DOCUMENTATION
42. Advise BO or HQs which newspapers
and periodicals to be sent on a regular basis. (This is part
of field office budgeting (ABPS) but worthwhile arranging separately)
a. Entitlement
43. Set up file list, chron files and document
registration system
a. Filing principles (*) b. Standard file list (*) c.
Chron Register Format (*)
44. Set up distribution system with central location
of trays. Consider local construction of pigeon holes. Establish document
circulation system
a. Example Action Sheet (*) b. Example Circulation Slip (*)
* Available on the computer disc which
accompanies The "Checklist For The Emergency Administrator".
Annex 2 - Suggested Field Filing System
1. A file list should be set up immediately on the opening of a
new office. It should be done in such a way that it can expand and contract to
take account of new situations. One must achieve the correct balance between
being too specific and too general.
2. Three types of files should always bear a standard format
reference or symbol whether maintained at Headquarters or in the Field:
personnel (PER/IND) files, individual case (IC) files and project files. The
latter symbol is always allocated by Headquarters.
A personnel file bears the file reference PER/IND FAMILY
NAME, Given Names, e.g. PER/IND SMITH, Ms Jane Marie
An individual case file bears IC FAMILY NAME, Given Names
RUR (country of residence)/RUR (country of origin)
e.g. IC SMITH, Ms Jane Marie RUR/RUR
A project file bears Year/Source of fund/Country of
operation/assistance type/project number, e.g. 98/EF/RUR/EM/140.
3. An indication of subject files which might be required is
given below. The number designates a subject not a file. Accordingly, files may
comprise two or more file numbers.
A file should "tell a story".
Do not make subsequent perusal difficult by filing items out of
sequence.
4. Security should be considered when filing documents, in paper
and or electronic form. Files which should be destroyed in the event of
evacuation of the office should be marked in advance. These should include
individual case files and personnel files.
Suggested File List 1. General & External Affairs
100
UNHCR Structure/Mandate & Gen. Info.
101
Executive Committee
102
IOM/FOMs
110
Relations with (host) Government
111
Relations with local Consulates
112
Inter-Agency Meetings
113
NGOs (general & alphabetical by agency)
114
UN Agencies (general & alphabetical by agency)
115
Inter-Governmental Organizations (general & alphabetical by
agency)
120
Reports from the field
121
Situation Reports (SITREPS)
122
Camp profiles
130
Missions to the office (UNHCR & alphabetical)
131
Missions by office staff (alphabetical)
132
Visitors to the office (non-UNHCR & chronological)
133
Public Information Activities & Media Relations
134
Press releases & Press clippings
135
Conferences and Special Events
140
Training/Seminars/Workshops
150
Fund Raising/Contributions
2. Protection
200
Protection General - UNHCR
201
Human rights/Country of Origin Info. (RUR-Alphabetical)
210
Protection (host country)
211
Detention
212
Determination
213
Tracing
214
Family Reunion
215
Physical Security of Refugees
216
Registration
3. Operations & Assistance
300
Field Operations General
301
Field Operations (by site/camp)
310
Programme General (UNHCR) including FOBS
311
Assistance Programme General (host country)
312
Emergency Management
313
Technical Support
314
Procurement
320
Food/Nutrition
321
Health
322
Water & Sanitation
323
Site Planning & Shelter
324
Non-Food Items & Domestic Supplies
325
Logistics (procurement, transport, storage)
326
Community Services, Counselling, Community Development
327
Education
328
Productive Activities & Income Generation
329
Camp Management
330
Repatriation
331
Local Settlement
332
Resettlement
4. Administration & Finance
400
Administrative Policy
401
Administrative Instructions
410
Office Premises
411
Office and Personnel Security
412
Asset Management
413
Expendable property & Supplies
414
Utilities
415
Records Management/Filing
416
Communications
417
Transport/Vehicles
420
Staff Rules & Regulations
421
Office Staffing
422
Applications for Employment/Recruitment
423
Salaries/Benefits/Allowances/Living Conditions
424
Taxation/Exemptions/Privileges & Immunities
425
Leave & Holidays
426
Travel/Mission & Leave Rosters
430
Accounting & Finance Procedures
431
Rates of Exchange
432
DSA Rates
433
Administrative Budget & Obligation Document
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
21. Communications
(introduction...)
Introduction
Communications Management
Telecommunications
UNHCR Telecommunications Network Field Preparations
Key References
Annexes
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
21. Communications
Figure
Introduction
1. Good communications are essential in an emergency. Effective
communications require appropriate equipment, infrastructure, and good
management.
Communications Management
2. With improved means of communications, even from very remote
locations, the proper management of communications has assumed great importance.
The structure and flow of communications should reflect that of the management
of the operation, with communications being channelled in a properly structured
manner.
At each level reports and information received should be
analyzed and consolidated before being passed to the next level.
Raw information should not be routinely transmitted
simultaneously through several levels of the management structure by copying
reports widely, in addition to directing them to the person responsible for
action. Distribution of information should be restricted to those who need it
for the exercise of their functions and communications traffic in general should
be restricted to that which is necessary.
3. Originators of communications should always ask themselves
what the purpose of the message is, who will be receiving it, and whether the
information contained is sufficient and appropriate for the purpose.
4. Under the pressures of an emergency there is sometimes a
tendency to exchange incomplete information. If the information is insufficient
for the purpose of the message, and if the matter cannot wait, then
acknowledgement of gaps may save time and trouble. For example, "further
information being obtained but meanwhile please react on points..."
5. The most appropriate means of transmission for the message
should be considered in view of cost, urgency and bulk. For example, avoid using
the telephone or fax when the message could be passed by electronic mail
(e-mail). Similarly, large amounts of data, unless very urgent, should be sent
via pouch or mail rather than bye-mail.
6. Using or developing standard forms can assist communications
management, as they can act as a checklist for information usually transmitted
in that form of communication (sitreps are an obvious example - see the annex to
chapter 8 on implementing arrangements.)
7. An effective referencing system must be used - this is a
major factor in ensuring good communications.
Use separate messages for clearly separate subjects.
Correct numbering and/or referencing will greatly help identify
earlier communications. It will also provide a means to systematically track
actions required and help maintain orderly and disciplined communication. See
chapter 20 on administration for more information on a filing system. Annex 1
describes the official UNHCR message identification system which is used by the
Telecommunications Unit.
8. The immediate requirement for communications may be satisfied
by telephone, e-mail and fax. However, regular pouch, courier or mail services
should be established as soon as possible. A checklist for communication needs
which should be considered when setting up an office is contained in chapter 20
on administration. In addition, the Checklist for the Emergency Administrator
contains guidance, forms and information for setting up different types of
communications.
Telecommunications
9. Effective telecommunications requires staff and equipment
dedicated to that task. When planning telecommunications requirements, the
Regional Telecommunications Officer and the Telecommunications Unit at
Headquarters should be involved as early as possible. These can help to identify
experienced UNHCR telecommunications staff who could be deployed to the
operation. Emergency staff can include telecoms officers from UNHCR's standby
arrangements. If necessary these officers can be used to supplement UNHCR
Telecom staff.
Telecommunications Infrastructure
10. The existing telecommunications infrastructure of the
country may not support UNHCR's requirements, because the infrastructure may be
either inadequate or damaged. Certain security situations can also result in the
telecommunications facilities being closed down or drastically reduced (in which
case cellular telephone networks would also be unavailable).
11. UNHCR maintains a stockpile of telecommunications equipment
for rapid deployment to emergencies (see Appendix 1, Catalogue of Emergency
Response Resources). This equipment provides emergency response staff with
immediate communication links from even the most remote locations.
Types of Telecommunications
12. The following are the principle means of telecommunication
currently available for use by UNHCR:
i. Telephone. Telephones can be connected
through standard landlines or cellular networks for communications within the
country, and through international or satellite connections (VSAT, INMARSAT -
see Annex 1) for communications with other countries;
ii. Fax. Facsimile (fax) operates over
standard telephone lines, or satellite (VSAT, INMARSAT) connections. Fax
facilities are available to and from most countries, however it is more
expensive and less easily relayed than e-mail;
iii. E-mail. E-mail also operates over
standard telephone lines or satellite connections. In the initial phase of an
operation, e-mail can be obtained through portable satellite terminals, or using
local phone lines if available, and later the SITA network or DAMA satellite
system (see Annex 1) can be used if there is a suitable connection
point;
iv. Radio. Radio can be used for voice and
written communication (including e-mail and electronic data). Installation by
qualified technicians is required. In an emergency it is almost always necessary
to set up radio networks to ensure communications between UNHCR offices and
between UNHCR and other agencies. The radio network will also provide an
emergency backup for communications with Headquarters in the event of landline
communications being cut. Mobile radios (handheld or installed in vehicles)
enable staff in the immediate region to maintain contact with one another and
with the office;
v. VSAT (or Very Small Aperture
Terminal - a slight misnomer as the smallest dish size is 1.8-2.4 metres
in diameter). VSAT is used for telephone, fax, electronic data and e-mail
communication. Installing VSAT is a substantial undertaking and must be carried
out by qualified technicians; vi. Telex. Although telex is used less and less,
it still remains an option where it is
available.
UNHCR Telecommunications Network Field Preparations
13. The need for a UNHCR telecommunications network should be
discussed at the highest appropriate level in the concerned ministry dealing
with UNHCR matters (for example, the Ministry of Home Affairs). The advice of
the technically competent authorities should be sought (for example the Ministry
of Communications or post and telecommunications service). Note that Section IX
of the Convention on the Privileges and Immunities of the United Nations
provides that "the UN should enjoy for its official communications, treatment
not less favourable than that accorded to diplomatic missions in the country".
14. Contact the Telecommunications Unit at Headquarters or the
Regional Telecommunications Officer as soon as the need for a telecommunications
network is known. Give the proposed number and location of offices, and
distances between them, so they can advise on the type of equipment needed.
15. Permission to operate a radio station and frequency
clearance must be obtained - in most countries there is a standard government
application form. In the case of HF and VHF, check with UNDP and other UN
organizations in case they have already received clearance for any frequencies.
The Telecommunications Unit or the Regional Telecommunications Officer can give
advice on completing the government application form.
16. It is also necessary to obtain permission to operate
satellite communications installations. The competent authority will need to
know specific information about operating frequencies and characteristics of the
equipment. This information can again be obtained through the Regional
Telecommunications Officer or the Telecommunications Unit at Headquarters.
Office Accommodation
17. The physical requirements for telecommunications equipment
should be kept in mind when choosing office accommodation (see chapter 20 on
administration). For example, a radio antenna will require space either on the
roof of the building or in an open area at ground level, and a room for the
operating equipment very close to the antenna. Note that for optimum results,
the cable connecting the radio equipment with its antenna should be as short as
possible, and not more than 50 meters if possible.
18. VSAT installations in particular require an uninterrupted
view towards the horizon in the direction of the equator (i.e. towards the
southern horizon in the northern hemisphere, and towards the northern horizon in
the southern hemisphere). The angle of elevation of the VSAT dish above the
horizon will depend on the latitude of the office, the highest angle would be on
the equator. If the VSAT is installed on a building (on a flat roof for
example), the building must be strong enough to bear the weight. If it is
installed at ground floor level, there should be enough space around it for a
safety margin (4 m radius) to avoid the possibility of anyone coming too close
to the transmitting antenna.
Radio Equipment
19. There are two types of radio equipment generally used by
UNHCR in field operations for voice and data transmission: HF and VHF Radio.
20. Generally, HF communications are used for longer distances
than VHF. The distance over which VHF is effective can be greatly extended by
the installation of repeaters. VHF and HF radio would therefore be installed in
the offices and in vehicles as appropriate; depending on the distance from base
the vehicle is expected to travel.
Radio Call-signs
21. Each radio installation will have its own unique call-sign.
The office installation is known as the "Base" station, the vehicle
installations are "Mobiles". It is useful to have a formal naming convention for
the call-signs, in order to provide a logical reference. For example, one letter
can be used to signify the country of operation, one letter to signify the
location, followed by one letter for the agency concerned. Remaining letters and
figures may be added to provide additional clarity, if the number of users on
the network is particularly high. (The country letter is normally omitted,
unless cross-border operations are taking place.)
22. For example, a UNHCR office installation in
Ruritania, Townville would be (R) T H Base,
shortened to T H Base. A vehicle installation for the same office would be
(R) T H Mobile 1 (TH Mobile 2, etc.)
23. The phonetic alphabet (see in the Toolbox, Appendix 2) is
used so that the callsigns can be more readily understood over the radio, thus
the above example becomes Romeo Tango Hotel Base (shortened to Tango
Hotel Base), or Romeo Tango Hotel Mobile One.
24. Call-signs for individuals using hand-held radios will
normally follow the structure, for example (for UNHCR Townville, Ruritania):
T H 1
("Tango Hotel One")
Representative
T H 1 1
Deputy Representative
T H 1 2
Other staff member in
Representative's office
T H 2
Senior Administrative Officer
T H 2 1
Administrative Assistant
T H 2 2
Other administrative staff member
T H 3
Senior Logistics Officer
T H 3 1
Logistics Assistant
T H 3 2
Other Logistics Staff member
25. The phonetic alphabet is set out in Appendix 2, Toolbox.
Further information and other procedures may be found in "UNHCR Procedure for
Radio Communication" (pocket sized reference booklet).
Field - Headquarters Telecommunications
26. E-mail allows the field to communicate directly with
individuals at Headquarters and at field offices where a Local Area Network
(LAN) E-mail Post Office is installed. However, e-mail messages sent directly to
individual staff e-mail addresses may not be read and acted upon immediately if
the staff member is unexpectedly absent. It is better, therefore, to address
messages that require immediate attention to a generic e-mail address, these are
addresses with the form HQxxnn, where xx are letters indicating the
organizational unit and nn are digits denoting a sub unit, e.g HQAF04 is the
generic e-mail address of Desk 4 of the Africa Bureau. Urgent messages may be
copied to the Telecommunications Service Desk at Headquaters, who will alert the
relevant Desk Officer, or Duty Officer, as appropriate.
Telecommunications Unit-Operating Hours
27. The Telecommunications Unit at Headquarters is staffed
between the following local Geneva times:
0700-2100
Monday to Friday
0800-1700
Weekends and Public
Holidays
Telephone
41 22 739 8777
E-Mail
HQTU50
Swiss time is one hour ahead of GMT in winter and two hours
ahead in summer. Arrangements can be made to extend these working hours, as
necessary, in
emergencies.
Key References
Checklist for the Emergency Administrator, UNHCR, Geneva,
1998.
UNHCR Procedure for Radio Communication, UNHCR,
Geneva.
Annexes
Annex 1 - Common Communications Equipment and Terminology
Common name or acronym
Full name
Description and Use
Codan
Manufacturer's name
High frequency radio system using voice
communication, commonly used in vehicles
DAMA
Demand Assigned Multiple Access
Satellite (VSAT) system which allows multiple lines of
telephone, fax and data to be transmitted via satellite
DTS
Digital Transmission System (proprietary
name)
A successor to PACTOR, allowing the transmission of e-mail
messages by radio
HF
High Frequency
Range of frequency of radio waves used for long distance
radio communication
INMARSAT
International Mobile Satellite Organization (originally
called International Maritime Satellite Organization)
Phone system which provides global phone, fax and data
transmission via satellite
Factor
Packetised Telex Over Radio
System whereby printed messages can be sent by radio
SATCOM
Satellite Communications
Generic term for any satellite communications system
SATCOM A, B, C, M, Mini-M
Refers specifically to INMARSAT terminals used by UNHCR
Telephone system used for voice, fax and data communications.
The equipment comes in various sizes, from suitcase size to small laptop and
with varying capabilities from simple telex to video- conferencing
SITA
Soci�t� International
de T�l�communications A�ronautiques
An organization which provides a global communications
network for airline reservations and ticketing. It can also provide a
communications network for non-airline customers (e.g. UNHCR)
UHF
Ultra High Frequency (Higher than VHF)
Range of frequency of radio waves used for short distance
radio communication
VSAT
Very Small Aperture Terminal
Satellite system which allows multiple lines of telephone,
fax and data to be transmitted via geo stationary satellite
VHF
Very High Frequency
Radio waves used for short distance radio communications
(e.g. handsets or walkie-talkies)
VHF Repeater
Very High Frequency Repeater
Equipment used to extend the range of VHF short distance
radio communications to a range of 20 to 80 km, depending on the topography
Annex 2 - Message Identification
The following instructions are for telecommunications operators
who need to keep a formal log of all messages received and transmitted
(including e-mail, fax and PACTOR). The principles are that in each case "HCR"
must appear in the prefix and whatever the type and means of communication, each
message must bear one number unique to that transmission for each addressee.
Components of the message identity are:
· Message from
Headquarters to the Field: HCR/aaaaa/9999
· Message from the
Field to Headquarters: aaaaa/HCR/9999
where aaaaa is the official UNHCR location
(Duty Station) code of the Field Office concerned, and 9999 is a four figure
sequential number starting at 0001 on the 1" of january each year.
· Between field
offices: aaaaa/bbbbb/HCR/9999
where aaaaa is the five letter location code
for the sending field office and bbbbb is the five letter location code
for the addressee, and 9999 = four figure sequential number, starting at
0001 on the 1" of January each year.
· To non-UNHCR
addressees: aaaaa/MSC/HCR/9999
There are two categories of four figure sequential
numbers which may be used:
Category A is used for communications between
Headquarters and field offices and between field offices with a considerable
message exchange. The number used would be the next in the series for
communications that year between the originator and addressee.
Category B is for UNHCR addressees who do not fall into
Category A and for non-UNHCR addressees. If there are many such messages, two
series may be used: UNHCR and non-UNHCR. All series or sequences restart at 0001
on the 1" of January.
Examples
Category A messages:
HCR/ANGLU/0123 means the 123rd message
from Headquarters to Luanda, Angola this year. ANGLU/HCR/0210 means the
210th message from Luanda, Angola to Headquarters this year.
ANGLU/RSAPR/HCR/0097 means the 97th message from Luanda to Pretoria,
South Africa this year (where Luanda and Pretoria use sequential
numbering).
Category B messages:
ANGLU/SENDA/HCR/0024 means a message from Luanda to
Dakar, Senegal, and which is the 24th Category B message this year
from ANGLU (where Luanda and Dakar do not use sequential
numbering).
If there is more than one addressee, a separate message identity
must be used for each. If the message is being sent to some addressees for
information only, this should be indicated in brackets after the respective
message identity. For example messages from Luanda to Headquarters for action,
copied to Dakar for information, would bear the following:
ANGLU/HCR/0124 ANGLU/SENDA/HCR/0024 (SENDA for
info)
In order that the system can work effectively any missing
sequential number in Category A must be reported to the other category A
addressee as soon as possible, and the last number of the year (or of a series)
must be reported to each category A addressee. If a category A number is
duplicated by mistake, correct this by allocating the next available number and
reporting this number to the addressee by a service (SVC) message. Note that the
SVC message itself should also be numbered. Indicate the date or subject to
avoid any danger of
confusion.
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
22. Coping with Stress
(introduction...)
Introduction
Identifying Stress Symptoms
Techniques for dealing with Stress
Key References
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
22. Coping with Stress
Figure
Introduction
1. Stress is a feature of life which can be both protective and
harmful. Unfortunately "stress" is too often viewed in a negative context when,
in fact, it enables us to cope with change. Protective stress is part of a
natural process - when threatened, the body always reacts with the same general
adaptive mechanisms. The physical symptoms that occur when we are under stress
enables us to "flee" or "fight" the threat. This response is a basic life
protecting mechanism, enhancing physical and mental defences and preparedness -
it focuses attention, and mobilizes the energy and resources necessary to be
able to take appropriate action. Stress therefore allows us to remain productive
even in the face of changing and challenging situations. Stress reactions are
dependent on our personality, our professional experience and our physical and
emotional well-being.
In an emergency, reactions to stress are normal.
2. However, when the circumstances inducing the stress are
excessive, very intense or continuing over a period of time, stress may begin to
negatively affect an individual's personality, health and ability to perform.
3. Stress takes up an enormous amount of energy. Being in a
stressful situation is physically and mentally exhausting. However, once out of
the crisis environment and given time to rest, people usually recover their
normal equilibrium.
4.
Understanding normal reactions to stressful situations,
knowing how to handle these and early attention to symptoms can speed recovery
and prevent long-term problems,
Identifying Stress Symptoms
5. Emergency personnel are exposed to many types of stress and
what is needed is to have the "ideal" level. Too little causes boredom, lack of
stimulation and fatigue, too much and we become overwhelmed physically and
mentally. The names given to the harmful types of stress are cumulative stress
and traumatic stress.
Cumulative stress
6. Cumulative (or chronic) stress builds up slowly as a result
of the magnitude and multi plicity of demands, lengthy working hours and daily
frustrations and difficulties of living and working in emergencies. Because
stress reactions develop so slowly and imperceptibly it is quite often difficult
to notice them in oneself, they are, however, usually noticeable to close
colleagues.
Once removed from a stressful situation and with the possibility
for rest and relaxation, a person generally recovers quickly and may become
aware of the difference in how one responds to situations when one is not
experiencing stress.
Individuals in emergency work, who are experiencing high
stress levels, are not the best judges of their own ability to cope.
Team leaders need to be particularly observant of individual
reactions during an emergency.
7. Symptoms of stress can be physical and psychological. There
could be changes in ordinary behaviour patterns, such as changes in eating
habits, decreased personal hygiene, withdrawal from others and prolonged
silences. Symptoms of cumulative stress can be seen in every facet of our lives.
The following non-exhaustive list gives an indication of some of the most
observed symptoms:
Physical symptoms:
i. Gastro-intestinal
Dry mouth, impression of having ones heart in ones
mouth, nausea, vomiting, sensation of bloating, heartburn, abdominal pain,
appetite changes diarrhoea, constipation;
ii. Cardiovascular
Elevated blood pressure, rapid heart beat, hot
flushes, cold hands and feet, sweating;
iii. Respiratory problems
Breathlessness, panting, sensation of not being able
to breathe;
iv. Musculoskeletal
Cramps, back pain, trembling, nervous ticks,
grimacing;
v. Neurological
Headache.
Psychological symptoms:
i. Emotional Anxiety, anguish;
ii. Behavioural
Sleep problems, abuse of cigarettes alcohol or
drugs, modification in ones libido;
iii. Intellectual
Concentration difficulties, memory difficulties,
problems with reasoning and verbal expression.
8. The presence of several of these symptoms may mean that a
person's coping ability is diminishing and work performance is being affected.
However, the signs and the degree of stress presented by a person in any given
situation will vary, depending on the level of stress experienced, previous
emotional experiences and the personality of the individual.
9.
If the cyclic causes and resultant symptoms of cumulative
stress are not promptly addressed, exhaustion sets in, leading eventually to
"burnout". Should this happen one needs rest and counselling.
Traumatic Stress
10. Traumatic stress is brought on by unexpected and emotionally
powerful events ("critical incidents") that overwhelm the individual's usual
coping abilities. Critical incidents may arise in the context of a major
disaster or emergency, and could be, for example, injury or death of a
colleague, hostage taking, deaths of children, undergoing great personal risk,
being a powerless witness of violence, or seeing or being associated with a
tragic event accompanied by intense media coverage (especially if this is
inaccurate).
11.
Staff might experience acute reactions during a critical
incident or a delayed stress reaction minutes, hours or days after the event. In
rarer cases reactions may come after a few months or years.
12. The reactions after a critical incident can resemble those
of cumulative stress but they can be much more pronounced. Vomiting instead of
nausea as an example. The following are mental survival mechanisms that allow us
to deal with the event:
Emotional numbing, changes in the perception of time, along with
a sense of ones live flashing before ones eyes, highly focused attention or
tunnel vision, hyperarousal with sharpened senses.
These initial responses can be replaced in the period of time
immediately after the incident by:
Hyperactivity, exaggerated humour, argumentativeness, social
withdrawal, fear, anxiety, sadness, grief, memory problems, poor concentration,
slow thinking and loss of perception in addition to the physical symptoms
mentioned above.
13.
It should be emphasized that these symptoms are normal
reactions to abnormal events and in most cases will disappear.
14. However, occasionally a serious condition termed Post
Traumatic Stress Disorder (PTSD) can result from critical incidents. The risk of
PTSD can be considerably reduced by preparation, on-site care, and post incident
defusing or debriefing.
15. The diagnosis of PTSD is made by a psychiatrist or
psychologist based on the presence of various elements which include:
i. Invasive memories (flashback);
ii. Nightmares and sleep disturbance;
iii. Repeated reliving of the event;
iv. Detachment;
v. Avoidance of trigger persons or
situations;
vi. Hyperarousal;
vii. Anxiety, depression, grief, anger;
viii. Suicidal thoughts;
ix. Reactions intensifying over time;
x. Clear alteration of personality;
xi. Withdrawal from others;
xii. Continued rumination about event;
xiii. Constant expectations of a new
disaster;
xiv. Persistent sleep difficulties;
xv. Total absence of reactions;
xvi. Phobia formation;
xvii. Reactions continuing for 3 to 4
weeks.
Techniques for dealing with Stress
Preventing and Minimizing Harmful Stress
16.
It is important to recognize that it is impossible to take
care of others if you do not take care of yourself.
17. Being well prepared, both physically and psychologically, is
an important way to reduce the chances of harmful stress. This preparation not
only includes understanding stress and how to handle it, but also educating
oneself in advance on the living conditions, job, likely problems, local
language and culture. It is important to be both physically and psychologically
fit to work in a particular situation.
18. To prevent stress overload during an emergency, firstly,
know your limitations. In addition, there are several practical steps to take:
i. Get enough sleep;
ii. Eat regularly;
iii. Control intake of alcohol, tobacco and
medicines;
iv. Take time for rest and relaxation;
v. Take physical exercise. Physical exercise
releases tension and helps maintain stamina and good health (any sort of
exercise for at least 20 minutes per day). Beneficial exercise for stress
reduction also includes deep breathing and muscle relaxation
exercises;
vi. Give expression to the stress: Put words to the
emotions you feel - find a colleague whom you trust to talk with;
vii. Keep a diary, it may not be as effective as
talking, but it can help.
The expression of emotion has proved to be an effective
technique in reducing stress.
19. Other ways of reducing stress are:
i. Inward coping: When a person performs
difficult work in physically and emotionally threatening conditions, internal
dialogue can add to the stress if it is highly negative and self-critical. To
remain focused on the task, avoid unhelpful internal dialogue such as, "I'm no
good at this. Everything I am doing is making things worse". Instead make
positive helpful statements to talk oneself through difficult moments. For
example, "I don't feel like dealing with this angry person right now, but I have
done it before, so I can do it again";
ii. Peer support: Use the "buddy system":
staff members may agree in advance to monitor each other's reactions to identify
signs of excessive stress and fatigue levels;
iii. Setting an example: Supervisors in
particular have an important role to play as they can provide an example in the
way they handle their own personal stress, e.g. by eating properly, resting and
taking appropriate time off duty. The team leader who tells a colleague, "Remind
me to eat, and get me out of here the moment you notice any sign of fatigue. I'm
no good when I'm tired", is setting a positive example for the
staff;
iv. Permission to go off duty: In a crisis
many staff members need to be given permission to take care of themselves.
People do better in difficult situations when they feel that other people care
about them. Team leaders are responsible for giving such specific permission to
themselves and to their staff, for example, by giving permission to take the
afternoon off, etc. The correct use by staff members of Mars and Vari can serve
to alleviate stress.
Dealing with Critical Incidents (Traumatic Stress)
20. Stress defusings and debriefings are ways of protecting the
health of staff after crises. The person or people who experienced the critical
incident talk about the incident, focusing on the facts and their reactions to
it. They should take place in a neutral environment, and never at the scene of
the incident. They should be led by a trained professional. The information
given below is intended to illustrate these processes and does not give
sufficient detail to enable an unqualified person to perform either a debriefing
or a defusing.
Defusing
21. Defusing is a process which allows those involved in a
critical incident to describe what happened and to talk about their reactions
directly after the event. A defusing should take place within a few hours of the
event, its format is shorter than that of a debriefing. It consists of three
steps:
i. Introduction
Introduction of everyone present, a description of
the purpose of the defusing, and stimulation of motivation and
participation;
ii. Exploration
Discussion of what happened during the
incident;
iii. Information
Advice to the participants about potential reactions
to the incident, guidance on stress management, practical information, questions
and answers.
Confidentiality is important. It should be possible to
express strong emotions, secure in the knowledge that this will stay within the
group.
22. Angry feelings can be a normal reaction to an upsetting
event and staff should be able to "let off steam". This is not the time for
criticism of professional performance - this should be dealt with at a separate
meeting.
Critical Incident Stress Debriefing (CISD)
23. In cases where staff have to deal with intense distress,
defusings may be insufficient and need to be followed by a formal debriefing
from a mental health professional. Debriefing is a process designed to lessen
the impact of a critical incident. It occurs in an organized group meeting and
is intended to allow those involved in a critical incident to discuss their
thoughts and reactions in a safe, non-threatening environment. The team leader
or a responsible member of the emergency team should request the Division of
Resource Management at Headquarters to provide or help identify a mental health
professional to conduct a debriefing. Sessions are normally held for groups of
staff having undergone intense stress. They aim to integrate the experience,
provide information on traumatic stress reactions, and prevent long-term
consequences including Post Traumatic Stress Disorder, and help staff manage
their own personal reactions to the incident.
24. If a debriefing or defusing is not offered spontaneously
after a trauma is suffered, request one. Information on individual consultations
for UNHCR staff members and workshops on stress related issues can be obtained
from the Staff Welfare Unit, HQ Geneva.
Telephone: 00 41 22 7397858
Confidential Fax: 00 41 22
7397370
Key References
An Operations Manual for the Prevention of Traumatic Stress
among Emergency Services and Disaster Workers, Jeffrey T. Mitchell and
George Everly, Elliot City Maryland, 1995.
Coping with Stress in Crisis Situations, UNHCR, Geneva,
1992.
Humanitarian Action in Conflict Zones - Coping with
Stress, ICRC, Geneva, 1994.
International Handbook of Traumatic Stress Symptoms
Edited by John P. Wilson & Berverley Raphael, 1993.
Managing Stress, Terry Looker, Olga Gregson,
London,1997.
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
23. Staff Safety
(introduction...)
Introduction
The UN Security System
Essential Plans
Security
Security Management
Key References
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
23. Staff Safety
Figure
Introduction
· The primary
responsibility for the safety of staff members, their dependants and property
and that of the organization, rests with the host government;
· Every effort
should be made to facilitate the tasks of the government in the discharge of its
responsibilities by making appropriate supporting arrangements and through
regular liaison and exchange of information with the host country security
officials;
· All of the
recommendations below should be considered in addition to, and complementary
with, actions taken by the host country security officials;
· Every office
should have a security plan and a medical evacuation plan;
· The cardinal rule
for landmines is that when in doubt, stay away. Inform the host country
military. Any suspicious object should be treated as a landmine or booby
trap.
The UN Security System
1. UN system-wide arrangements are described in detail in the UN
Field Security Handbook (see references) and outlined here.
UN organizations have agreed to system-wide arrangements for
the safety of UN staff and property in the field.
The UN Security Co-ordinator (UNSECOORD), based in New York,
acts on behalf of the Secretary-General to ensure a coherent response by the UN
to any security situation. UNSECOORD produces monthly publications on security
conditions on a country by country basis. In addition, the Field Safety Section
at Headquarters can provide country specific information and advice.
2.
The primary responsibility for the security and protection of
staff members rests with the host government.
This responsibility arises from every government's inherent role
of maintaining law and order within its jurisdiction.
3. UNHCR and other UN organizations may lend assistance, when
possible and to the extent feasible, to protect other people such as staff of
NGOs working in co-operation with them. UNHCR has no legal obligation towards
others working with refugees.
4. In each country, a senior UN official called the Designated
Official (DO) is the person in charge of the security management arrangements of
the UN system. The DO is accountable to the Secretary-General through UNSECOORD
for the safety of UN personnel.
5. The principle responsibilities of the DO include:
Liaising with host government
officials on security matters;
Arranging a security plan for
the area and including provision for relocation of National staff and evacuation
of International staff;
Informing the
Secretary-General (through UNSECOORD) of all developments which may have a
bearing on the safety of staff members;
Carrying out relocation or
evacuation where a breakdown in communication makes it impossible to receive the
Secretary-General's prior approval;
Forming a Security Management
Team (SMT);
Informing the senior official
of each UN organization of all security measures.
6. The DO will form an SMT, the function of which will be to
advise him or her on security matters. The SMT is normally composed of: the DO;
field security officers; a medical officer; an internationally recruited staff
member familiar with local conditions and languages; a staff member with a legal
background and any agency staff who by training, background or experience will
contribute to the team.
7. In large countries with regions separated from country
headquarters in terms of distance and exposure to emergencies, a UN staff member
may be designated as the Area Security Co-ordinator (ASC). The ASC acts on the
DO's behalf and will normally have responsibilities for staff safety similar to
those of the DO, but within that region of the country. UNHCR may be requested
by the DO to undertake this role.
8. The ASC (or DO where there is no ASC for the region) will
appoint security wardens who will have responsibility for security within
particular predetermined zones. A separate warden system for nationally
recruited and internationally recruited staff may be required. The warden system
should include all humanitarian agencies.
9. The primary tool for security preparedness is the security
plan, which is the key feature of the UN security
system.
Essential Plans
10. In addition to the basic security plan, UNHCR offices must
have a medical evacuation plan, and may have a movement control plan and routine
radio checks.
The Security Plan
11. The security plan will be country specific and have five
phases. The DO may implement measures under Phases One and Two at his or her own
discretion, and notify the Secretary General accordingly. Phases Three to Five
will normally be declared by the DO only with the prior authorization of the
Secretary-General. However, if there is a breakdown in communications, DOs may
use their best judgement with regard to the declaration of phases Three to Five,
and report to the Secretary-General as soon as communications allow.
12. The UN security phases are:
Phase I: Precautionary
In this phase, clearance from the DO is required prior to
travel.
Phase II: Restricted Movement
This phase imposes a high level of alert on the movements of UN
staff members and their families. During this phase all staff members and their
families will remain at home unless otherwise instructed.
Phase III: Relocation
This phase is declared by the Secretary General, on the advice
of the DO. It includes concentration of all international staff members and
their families, relocation of non-essential staff and families elsewhere in, or
out, of the country. Deployment of new staff must be authorized by the Secretary
General.
Phase IV: Programme Suspension
This phase is declared by the Secretary General, on the advice
of the DO. It allows for relocation outside the country of all international
staff not directly involved with the emergency, humanitarian relief operations,
or security matters.
Phase V: Evacuation
This phase is declared by the Secretary General, on the advice
of the DO. The evacuation of all international staff should be carried out
according to plans prepared beforehand.
13. The person responsible for security at each location (DO,
ASC) should draw up a security plan within the framework of the country security
plan. This will need to be regularly updated. Each situation will be different
and will require different levels and structuring of the plan. Guidelines for
drawing up the plan are in the Field Security Handbook, and copied in the
Checklist for the Emergency Administrator.
14. The following are typical headings in a security plan:
A. Summary of the security situation at the duty
station.
B. Officials responsible for security: those
in the local area, in Geneva and in New York, with their call signs, phone and
fax numbers.
C. List of internationally recruited staff
members and dependants. This will need to be updated constantly, and should
include basic details such as full name, nationality, date of birth, passport
and laisser-passer numbers with date and place of issue. A means of tracking
visiting missions should be established. The UN Field Security Handbook contains
annexes to record this information in a standard format; copies of these are
also found in the UNHCR Checklist for the Emergency Administrator.
D. List and details of locally recruited staff
and their dependants. This will need to be updated constantly.
E. Division of area into zones. Zones should
be marked on a map with the numbers and residences of staff-members clearly
marked. The map should indicate the warden responsible for each
zone.
F. Communications. This should include
details of phone numbers, call-signs and radio frequencies of all staff,
including those of offices in neighbouring countries.
G. Selection of co-ordination centre and
concentration points. The plan should indicate a number of co-ordination
centres and concentration points, and should indicate the stocks and facilities
which should be available at these points. It may not be possible for all
staff-members to reach the same concentration point and alternatives should be
foreseen.
H. Safe haven and means for relocation and
evacuation. The plan should include information on all possible means of
travel -by air, road, rail and ship as applicable. Normally only internationally
recruited staff can be evacuated outside the country. Under the UN security
system, the provisions for evacuation outside the country may be applied to
locally-recruited staff members in only the most exceptional cases in which
their security is endangered, or their property is lost or damaged as a direct
consequence of their employment by UN organizations. Under the UN security
system, a decision to evacuate locally recruited staff can only be made by the
Secretary-General (based on recommendations by DO and UNSECOORD). However,
during phases 3, 4 or 5, the DO may exceptionally either a) permit locally
recruited staff to absent themselves from the duty station on special leave with
pay or b) may relocate them to a safe area within the country and authorize
payment of DSA for up to 30 days. Up to three months salary advance may be paid
and a grant to cover transportation costs for the staff member and eligible
family members. Arrangements to pay locally recruited staff these various
amounts should be included in the plan.
I. Essential supplies: The plan should
include estimates of the requirements for essential items of food, water, fuel
etc. which will be needed by the community for a reasonable period of time.
Individual items to be kept ready should also be listed. These include:
passports, laissez-passers, vaccination certificates, travellers cheques and
cash.
J. Plan for handing over the running of the office
to the National Officer in charge.
Planning for evacuation
15.
The security plan should note who will take what actions at
the UNHCR office in the event of evacuation.
These actions include how to deal with confidential documents
and individual case files (including those on computer files), financial data,
cash, radios, computers and vehicles.
16. Any paper files which need to be destroyed in the event of
sudden evacuation of the office should have been marked in a manner agreed-upon
and understood by all staff. Such files would include: individual case files,
local staff personnel files, etc. If time permits, the shredding and/or burning
of these files should be a top priority. Emptying sensitive files onto the floor
and mixing their contents with others will afford some protection if there is no
time to burn them. Staff should be sensitive to the security situation and bear
in mind when creating paper or electronic documentation that it might have to be
left behind.
17. It should be agreed in advance which electronic files
(including electronic mail files) should be deleted first. In order to truly
destroy confidential electronic records from a computer disk (regardless of
whether it is a hard disk or a floppy disk), it is necessary to use special
software designed for this purpose. Merely deleting the file(s) does not remove
the information from the disk, it only marks the space which the file occupies
on the disc as being available for re-use.
1Contained in IOM/104/94
FOM107/94.
Medical Evacuation Plan
18. Every office should have a medical evacuation plan to cover
evacuation from that office. The plan should include information about the
nearest medical facilities inside and (if appropriate) outside the country, what
types of service they provide and to what standard, means of transport to these
facilities in case of evacuation, and types of evacuation scenarios (the
Checklist for the Emergency Administrator includes a format for a Medevac Plan,
as well as flow charts1 for decision making for evacuation).
19. All heads of UNHCR country offices (i.e. representatives,
chiefs of mission or, in their absence, the officer in charge) may authorize,
without reference to Headquarters, medical evacuation of staff in the
circumstances set out in detail in IOM/104/94FOM/107/94, New Medical Evacuation
Scheme, and IOM/FOM 26/95, Medical Evacuation in Extreme Emergencies - SOS
Assistance. These IOM/FOMs are included in the Checklist for the Emergency
Administrator. Briefly, medical evacuation can be authorized:
i. For all international staff and consultants and
eligible family members, in order to secure essential medical care which cannot
be secured locally as a result of inadequate medical facilities (and which must
be treated before the next leave outside the duty station);
ii. For local staff and eligible family members, in
situations of great emergency when a life-threatening situation is present, or
in cases of service-incurred illness or accident.
In addition, evacuation can be arranged in extreme emergencies
through SOS Assistance (a private company which provides 24 hour world-wide
emergency evacuation). However, this is very expensive and not covered by UN
insurance. It can be used in life threatening situations, and where an
evacuation by normal means cannot be organized in view of the gravity of the
illness or injury. A password is needed before SOS Assistance takes action for
UNHCR - heads of offices should ensure they obtain this password from the
Division of Human Resource Management. The password should be known by the Head
of Office and the Deputy Head of Office.
20. The medical evacuation plan should be written with close
reference to the relevant IOM/FOMs, and the advice of the UNHCR programme health
coordinator should be sought, as well as that of any medical NGOs. When an
evacuation may be necessary, a UN Examining Physician should assist in decisions
as to the degree of urgency and facilities required.
Movement Control Plan
21. A movement control plan should be prepared when there is a
need to track the movement of vehicles, and should provide a means to determine
the current location of the vehicles and passengers and whether they are overdue
from a trip. The plan usually consists of a fixed schedule of radio calls to the
vehicle from the base station (e.g. every 30 or 60 minutes) in order to report
the current location of the vehicle to the base station. This information should
be updated on a white-board following each radio-call. The driver of every
vehicle should confirm safe arrival at the end of the trip.
Routine Radio Checks
22. Routine radio checks should be instituted when the current
location and welfare of staff-members needs to be known. Radio calls from the
base station can be made on a fixed schedule or
randomly.
Security
23. Keys to effective security are:
i. First and foremost, personal awareness on the
individual level;
ii. Appropriate behaviour to diminish the risk of
security incidents;
iii. Appropriate response by the individual to
security incidents.
Personal Security
24. For personal security, bear in mind the following:
Be aware of and alert to your
surroundings;
Observe the behaviour of
other people living in the area. Local people will probably know more about
general security threats than you do;
Don't travel
alone;
Don't carry large amounts of
money;
Don't travel after dark if it
can be avoided. Most security incidents occur after dark;
When leaving base, make sure
someone knows where you are going and when you are expected back;
Lock vehicle doors and keep
the windows rolled up when travelling;
Park vehicles to allow for
fast exit;
Don't take photographs around
military personnel or military installations;
Have cash, documents, and an
emergency bag packed and ready to go at all times;
Always be polite: be aware
that your behaviour to local officials, police or military can rebound
negatively on other staff.
Residential Security
25. Several steps can be taken to improve residential security:
Make sure there are good
solid doors. Never have glass doors on the exterior;
Install a peep hole, a safety
chain and a security bar;
Keep the entrance door locked
at all times, even when at home;
Install bars and grills, at
least on the ground floor;
All windows should have
locks;
Draw curtains at
night;
Install outside
lighting;
Have emergency power sources,
candles and torches;
Keep a watchdog or other
animals like goats, geese or peacocks;
Install a telephone or
walkie-talkie.
Depending on the circumstances and if authorized by UNSECOORD
from the UN system, UNHCR can cover the costs of some of the improvements
listed.
Base Security
26. Base security should be improved by:
Hiring guards:
The host country authorities
sometimes provide guards. Guards hired by UNHCR are not permitted to carry
lethal weapons while on duty. Guards should be trained and briefed, and should
wear a uniform or some identifying garment;
Ensuring there are
lights:
Lights should be powerful and
should light up an area outside the perimeter fence, providing a barrier of
illumination in which intruders can be detected.
Installing fences and
controlling access:
Double fences with razor wires form an effective
barrier. There should be more than one entrance/exit. Sensitive locations (for
example, the accommodation area, communications room, generators and fuel store)
may need to be surrounded by a barrier of sandbags. Procedures to control access
to the compound need to be established. The fenced compound should be
self-contained and equipment (e.g. spare tires, jacks, fire extinguisher, first
aid kits, generators, water pumps), should be checked and maintained on a
routine basis.
Field Security
27. Several steps should be taken by relevant staff and heads of
office to improve field security:
Develop a movement control
plan (see above);
When planning to travel,
check the latest security situation with the DO, others who have been there,
host country officials other UN agencies, NGOs, traders;
Get all required
authorizations, from the DO and host country authorities;
Ensure that all staff know
what to do in case of accident or breakdown - simple procedures should be
established;
Ensure that vehicles are
properly equipped with extra food and water, sleeping bags, mosquito nets,
tents, water filters, fuel, tow rope, jumper cables, spare tire, tire jack,
flashlight, batteries, first aid kit, travel documents, radio, vehicle insurance
papers, shovel and maps;
Ensure that vehicles are in
good mechanical condition and are checked regularly. Certain items, such as
brakes, tire wear, fluid levels, lights, installed radios, should always be
checked prior to every field trip;
Ensure that all staff know
what to do at checkpoints - establish procedures for staff to follow. It is
against UN policy to allow anyone carrying arms in UN vehicles.
Cash Security
28. Ideally staff members should not carry large sums of money
in cash. If there is a functioning banking system in the area, then this should
be used to the maximum extent possible.
29. If it is necessary to transport cash then arrangements
should be made with the host country authorities for protection of the funds.
Cash in large amounts should be kept on hand for the shortest possible time, and
should either be deposited in a bank or be disbursed quickly to pay salaries or
meet other legitimate expenditure. Advance payments could be considered to
reduce amounts of cash being stored (provided financial rules are adhered to).
30. Measures which can contribute to security while transporting
cash include making use of:
i. Professional couriers;
ii. Armoured vehicles;
iii. Armed guards;
iv. Deception. There should be no regularity in the
arrangements: The timing, route, and other details should change every
time;
v. Discretion.
The number of people knowing about the movement of
cash, the identity of persons carrying cash, their routes and timetables, should
be kept to the barest minimum necessary.
Crowd Control and Security
31. If crowds cannot be avoided:
Ensure that clear information
is provided to the crowd, so that they know what is going on and what to
expect;
Work with representatives of
the people to organize the crowd into small groups and get them to sit
down;
Do not engage in unruly group
discussions;
When discussing grievances,
meet with a small number of representatives of the crowd, never with the mass
meeting;
Provide sanitary facilities,
water, shade and shelter;
For crowd control, use
monitors from among the people themselves;
If confronted by a crowd when
in a vehicle, do not get out. Check that the doors are locked and drive away
carefully;
Maintain poise and dignity if
confronted by a hostile crowd, do not show anger.
Mine Awareness
32. In countries with high risk of mines, all offices should
ensure there is appropriate training and reference materials (see references)
-the information contained here is not sufficient, but provides only broad
guidance.
33. It is extremely difficult to spot a mined area, so the first
priority is to ensure you have up to date information about possible mined areas
from local residents and de-mining organizations. Travel with a map marked with
this information and update it by checking with local residents.
34. Be aware of the following:
Signs: learn which signs
indicate known mined areas (whether local signs, UN or other
signs);
No-go areas: avoid areas
which are avoided by the local population;
Visible mines or indicators:
some mines are visible. There may also be evidence of mine
packaging;
Disruption in the local
environment: for example disturbed soil if recently laid, and depressions in the
ground in an old mine field;
Trip wires;
Mine damage (e.g. dead
animals) which could indicate the presence of other mines.
35. When driving, the following precautions should betaken:
Wherever possible stay on
hard surfaced roads.
Always follow in the fresh
tracks of another vehicle, at least 50 m behind the vehicle in
front.
Flak jackets can be used as a
seat cushion and as a foot protection.
Wear the seat-belts, and keep
windows rolled down and doors unlocked.
36. If you encounter a mine:
Keep away, do not touch
it;
Do not try to detonate it by
throwing stones at it;
Stop the vehicle
immediately;
Stay in the vehicle, even if
it is damaged and call for assistance.
37. If you have to leave the vehicle:
Notify your location by
radio;
Do not move the steering
wheel;
Put on any protective gear
available;
Climb over the seats and
leave the vehicle by the rear, walk back along the vehicle tracks. Never walk
around the vehicle;
Leave at least a 20 m gap
between people;
Close the road to other
traffic.
38. When travelling on foot:
Never walk through overgrown
areas: stick to well used paths.
39. If there is a mine incident:
Do not immediately run to the
casualty. Stop and assess the situation first. There may be other antipersonnel
mines in the vicinity, and administering first aid to one victim could result in
another victim;
Only one person should go to
the casualty, walking in his exact footprints, to apply first aid;
Do not attempt to move the
casualty unless absolutely necessary, call for mine-clearing and medical
assistance.
40. Within the UN system, mine clearance and related issues are
primarily the responsibility of DPKO. Chapter 19 on voluntary repatriation
contains some information about programme aspects of mines.
Protection Equipment:
41. Typical equipment that has been used by UNHCR includes:
i. Bullet proof vests for protection against most
bullets;
ii. Flak jackets for protection against
shrapnel;
iii. Helmets for protection against
shrapnel;
iv. Ballistic blankets fitted in vehicles, for
protection against hand grenades and antipersonnel mines;
v. Armoured cars;
vi. Shatter resistant windows;
vii. Military combat rations for concentration
points;
viii. Metal detectors for body
searches.
42. These items can be ordered through the Supply and Transport
Section in co-ordination with the relevant Bureau and Field Safety
Section.
Security Management
43. Heads of offices, whether at field or branch level should
take action to ensure the security and safety of staff members. In addition to
the responsibilities implicit in the above sections, appropriate security
management measures also include:
Ensuring both you and your
staff have access to relevant, accurate and up-to-date information;
Providing systematic
briefings with all staff on the security situation and on the security plan
itself. Bear in mind that some staff, particularly national staff, may provide
valuable input into these briefings because of their local
knowledge;
Encouraging staff awareness:
a key to effective security is personal awareness and good individual response
to security situations;
Providing training to all
staff on hazards specific to the duty station;
Ensuring the availability of
materials on staff stress management and security in the duty station (see key
references);
Reporting security related
incidents to Headquarters (Field Safety Section);
Ensuring there is good
communication with other organizations and NGOs about the security
situation;
Ensuring the office has a
medical evacuation plan. In addition, the country representative should ensure
he or she (and their deputy) has the SOS Assistance password in the case of
extreme medical
emergency.
Key References
Checklist for the Emergency Administrator, UNHCR, Geneva,
1998.
IOM/26/95-FOM26/95, Medical Evacuation in Extreme Emergencies
- SOS Assistance, UNHCR, Geneva, 1995.
IOM/104/94-FOM/107/94, New Medical Evacuation Scheme,
UNHCR, Geneva, 1994.
Land Mine Safety Handbook, CARE, Atlanta, 1997.
Security Awareness Handbook, UNHCR, Geneva, 1995.
Security Guidelines for Women, United Nations, New York,
1995.
United Nations Field Security Handbook, United Nations,
New York,
1995.
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
24. Working with the Military
(introduction...)
Introduction
Categories of Military Forces
Possible Roles of Military Forces in Humanitarian Operations
Coordination Between Military Forces and Civilian Agencies
Key References
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
24. Working with the Military
Figure
Introduction
· In humanitarian
emergencies UNHCR staff will sometimes work alongside military forces: these
might be UN forces ("blue berets"), national or regional forces acting under
mandate from the UN, or other national or regional forces;
· Humanitarian
agencies must be, and be seen to be, neutral and impartial acting solely on the
basis of need. It is important that these agencies maintain independence even
from UN authorized military activities;
· Each operation
will need to develop a coordinating structure suited to the situation, the type
of forces and the required civil-military relationship;
· The UN Department
of Peace-keeping Operations (DPKO) is responsible for all UN peacekeeping
operations and has overall responsibility for UN relations with military
forces.
1. Working with military forces can bring both opportunities and
challenges for humanitarian agencies.
2. Military forces can support humanitarian agencies only within
the limitations of their own resources and priorities, and within the
limitations of their authority to provide humanitarian assistance, including how
and to whom the assistance is provided.
Legal Framework for International Military Action
3. One of the purposes of the United Nations, as set out in its
Charter, is to maintain international peace and security. The Charter invests
the Security Council with this specific responsibility, and describes the
measures which can be taken to achieve this in Chapters VI and VII of the UN
Charter.
4. Chapter VI, dealing with the peaceful settlement of disputes,
mandates both the Security Council and the General Assembly to make
recommendations upon which the parties in dispute can act. Peacekeeping
operations under Chapter VI take place, at least in theory, with the consent of
the parties to the conflict.
5. Chapter VII, dealing with mandatory measures, allows for
enforced solutions to a dispute where the Security Council has identified "a
threat to the peace, a breach of the peace or an act of aggression". Article 42
provides for the use of armed force "as may be necessary to maintain or restore
international peace and
security".
Categories of Military Forces
6. The military forces with which UNHCR may be involved or
encounter include:
i. UN forces (peacekeeping);
ii. Regional or other forces acting under UN
authority;
iii. Regional military alliances (e.g. NATO and
ECOMOG), ad hoc coalitions;
iv. National forces;
v. Non-state forces.
UN Forces
UN Peacekeeping Forces
7. UN forces ("blue berets") usually fall into the categories of
observer missions or peacekeeping forces. These UN forces are assembled from
countries willing to contribute and who are acceptable to all the parties to the
conflict.
8. Observer Missions are made up mainly of lightly armed
officers whose main function is to interpret the military situation to assist
political and diplomatic mediation.
9. Peacekeeping forces usually contain combat units with
logistics support. In the past, peacekeeping activities have included:
i. Positioning troops between hostile parties,
thereby creating buffer or demilitarized zones and the opportunity to act as a
liaison between the parties to the conflict;
ii. Promoting the implementation of cease-fires and
peace accords by observing and reporting on military activity, assisting in the
disengagement, disarmament and demobilization of forces and prisoner
exchanges;
iii. Assisting local administrations to maintain law
and order, facilitating free and fair elections by providing
security;
iv. Protecting humanitarian relief operations by
securing warehouses and delivery sites and routes, escorting humanitarian aid
convoys, ensuring security for humanitarian aid workers, and providing logistics
support;
v. Supporting humanitarian operations by undertaking
engineering tasks for the maintenance of essential utilities, services and aid
delivery routes in a time of crisis, disposing of mines and other weapons,
delivering humanitarian relief supplies or providing logistics assistance to
humanitarian agencies.
UN Mandated or Authorized Forces
10. Under Chapter VII of the UN Charter the Security Council may
authorize or mandate the deployment of national or regional forces with a
"war-fighting" capability. These forces normally will have tighter security
rules than UN peace keeping Forces and Observer Missions, and UNHCR staff may
find access to facilities or information more difficult. Mandated forces often
do not report to a civilian chief inside the area of operations, and may
therefore see themselves as acting independently of the international authority
directing the civil and humanitarian programmes.
Regional Forces
11. UNHCR may also work alongside regional forces such as
peacekeeping or intervention forces set up under the direction of regional
institutions (for example, the Organization for African Unity, (OAU) or NATO.
National Forces
12. Humanitarian agencies may have to coordinate or negotiate
with host country military, police, gendarmerie, militia or other armed
elements. UNHCR staff should balance the advantages and disadvantages of
accepting assistance or security from such forces, particularly in circumstances
where there is no clear command structure.
Non-state Forces
13. These often consist of rebel groups, militia and other armed
groups which have little or no sense of discipline, a poorly defined chain of
command and often no discernible political
programme.
Possible Roles of Military Forces in Humanitarian Operations
Delivering Humanitarian Assistance
14. In exceptionally large emergencies and as a last resort,
military assets could be used to deliver humanitarian assistance, for example in
the form of an airlift.
15. UNHCR has entered into an understanding with a number of
governments that those governments will provide pre-packaged, stand-alone
emergency assistance modules, called Government Service Packages (GSP).
There are twenty different types of packages providing
assistance in certain technical or logistical areas such as long range airlift,
road transport, water supply and treatment, sanitation and road construction.
GSPs are not designed to be substitutes for traditional implementing
arrangements in these areas, but are to be used only as a last resort in
exceptionally large emergencies, where every other avenue has been exhausted.
16. Due to their extraordinary scale and cost it is assumed that
GSPs, if called upon, will represent additional funding and will not be deployed
at the expense of funds that would otherwise have been available to UNHCR. The
Military and Civil Defence Unit also has arrangements with governments to use
these pre-packaged emergency resources, as well as packages covering other
areas. Within UNHCR, the responsibility for the development and deployment of
GSPs rests with the Director of the Division of Operations Support. Further
information can be found in the Catalogue of Emergency Response Resources (see
Appedix 1).
17. When these assets are deployed the operation must maintain
its civilian character and appearance. The guiding principles of impartiality,
neutrality and independence from political considerations must be carefully
adhered to.
Information Support
18. Military forces usually have a greater capacity to collect
information than humanitarian agencies. This includes aerial reconnaissance
information which may be of value in tracking the movement of refugees and in
site selection. Care must be taken, however, in the interpretation and use of
such material: the information it provides needs to be carefully weighed against
information available from other sources, in particular first hand information
form UNHCR staff on the ground.
Security of Humanitarian Operations
19. The Geneva Conventions of 1949 (see Annex 1 to chapter 2 on
protection) oblige the parties in conflict to grant access for humanitarian aid,
but does not provide for its forcible imposition should access be denied.
Parties to a conflict may be unable or unwilling to control threats to the
safety of humanitarian personnel and operations. Peacekeeping mandates may
therefore include specific duties relating to the security of humanitarian
personnel, including creating the conditions in which humanitarian operations
can be carried out in safety.
20. However, using force to protect humanitarian assistance may
compromise the foundation of those activities, since the actual use of force, by
its nature, will not be neutral. Before using peacekeeping or other forces to
protect humanitarian activities, the priority should always be to negotiate with
all the parties to the conflict to try to ensure humanitarian access. The use of
military force to secure the provision of humanitarian assistance should never
become a substitute for finding political solutions to root causes of the
conflict.
21. Where it is necessary to use peacekeeping forces for the
security of humanitarian operations, it is particularly important to maintain a
neutral stance and to ensure that this impartiality and neutrality is apparent
to all parties.
Evacuation
22. Any plan for evacuation of humanitarian workers should be
coordinated with any military forces present (see Chapter 23 on Staff
Safety).
Coordination Between Military Forces and Civilian Agencies
UN Coordination
23. The Department of Peace-keeping Operations (DPKO) is
responsible for UN peacekeeping. This includes the deployment of its military
and civilian personnel to a conflict area (with the consent of the parties to
the conflict) in order to stop or contain hostilities, and supervise the
carrying out of peace agreements. DPKO therefore has overall responsibility for
the UN's relations with military forces.
24. Where a UN force is deployed, there will usually be a
Special Representative of the Secretary-General with overall responsibility for
all related UN operations, including humanitarian operations.
25. There is a Military and Civil Defence Unit (MCDU) within the
UN Office for the Coordination of Humanitarian Affairs (OCHA). The task of the
MCDU (based in Geneva) is to help ensure the most effective use of military and
civil defence assets in support of all types of humanitarian operations,
including refugee emergencies, where their use is appropriate. Among UN
humanitarian organizations, the MCDU is the focal point for governments,
regional organizations and military and civil defence organizations concerning
the use of these assets.
Establishing Principles and Reconciling Mandates
26. Misunderstandings between military forces and civilian
agencies can be avoided if, at an early stage, time is spent on clarifying:
The objectives and strategies
of the operation as a whole, and of each of its civilian and military
components;
The basic principles, legal
constraints, and mandates (local or global) under which each organization or
force operates;
The activities, services, and
support which the organizations or forces can expect from each other, as well as
any limitations on their ability to deliver;
Which aspects of the
operation will be led by the civilian agencies and which by the military forces,
and when there should be consultation before decisions are made;
The fora in which the
humanitarian agencies make decisions about their operations (e.g. the
coordinating body described in chapter 7, on coordination).
Liaison Channels
27. Proper communication channels need to be developed between
civilian and military organizations in order to deal with the differences in
organizational priorities, structure and size. The risk of civilian agency staff
being overwhelmed by multiple approaches from the military can be avoided by
providing a single point of contact for the military through the designation of
one UNHCR staff member as a liaison officer where the size of the operation
justifies this. The military forces may have specialist civil affairs units.
These units will often be made up of reservists with particular civilian skills
or military specialists and act as the main point of contact between the
humanitarian and military organizations. Within the military, the hierarchy is
as follows: General, Colonel, Lieutenant Colonel, Major, Captain, Lieutenant,
Warrant Officer, Sergeant, Corporal, and
Private.
Key References
A UNHCR Handbook for the Military on Humanitarian
Operations, UNHCR, Geneva, 1995.
Humanitarian Aid and Neutrality, Morris N, UNHCR
Symposium 16-17 June 1995, Fondation pour les Etudesde D�fense, ISBN
2-911-101-02-2.
The US Military/NGO Relationship in Humanitarian
Interventions, Seiple C., Peacekeeping Institute, US Army War College, 1996.
UNHCR IOM/91/9 UNHCR/FOM/96/97, UNHCR and the Military,
UNHCR, Geneva, December 1997.
Working With The Military, UNHCR, Geneva,
1995.
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
(introduction...)
Using the Handbook
Introduction
Abbreviations
UNHCR's Mission Statement
1. Aim and Principles of Response
2. Protection
3. Emergency Management
4. Contingency Planning
5. Initial Assessment, Immediate Response
6. Operations Planning
7. Coordination and Site Level Organization
8. Implementing Arrangements
9. External Relations
10. Community Services and Education
11. Population Estimation and Registration
12. Site Selection, Planning and Shelter
13. Commodity Distribution
14. Health
15. Food and Nutrition
16. Water
17. Environmental Sanitation
18. Supplies and Transport
19. Voluntary Repatriation
20. Administration, Staffing and Finance
21. Communications
22. Coping with Stress
23. Staff Safety
24. Working with the Military
Appendix 1 - Catalogue of Emergency Response Resources
Public Information Section will sell, at cost to the
operation, any subsequent need for caps and T-shirts.
BSU will provide:
-
identification badges
-
UN flags:
Car 30 × 50
Convoy 75 × 100
Small 100 × 150
Medium 150 × 225
Large 200 × 300
-
UNHCR logo stickers for light vehicles
-
extra large logo stickers for trucks
-
rolls of scotch tape with UNHCR logo
How to request
Requests for these items should be made directly to the
respective sections as appropriate (see above). For items purchased from PI
Section an account code must be provided.
Emergency Operations Room
Based on problems experienced in managing past emergency
operations at Headquarters, notably the bottleneck in information flow to and
from Headquarters, it was agreed that an Emergency Operations Room (EOR) should
be made available which would be used as a communications and information
distribution centre during the initial stages of an operation. The EOR should be
the focal point for:
a) the receipt of all communications related to a
particular emergency and
b) the effective distribution of such communications
within UNHCR and, when needed, to other agencies.
Thus, all incoming communications relating to the emergency
would be routed directly to the EOR. The EOR should therefore facilitate the
organization of a systematic flow of information which could subsequently be
integrated into the ongoing operations of the relevant Bureau/Desk. It is
expected that the EOR will become operational at the outset of the emergency
operation and will remain at the disposal of the Bureau/Desk concerned for an
estimated period of three months.
In addition, the EOR may be used as an airlift operation cell
and staffed by personnel seconded from the defence establishments of Governments
for the duration of an airlift.
How to request
At the beginning of an emergency operation the Bureau should
submit a written request to EPRS asking for the use of the Room. The Emergency
Operations Room will be assigned to the Bureau responsible for the emergency At
the outset of the operation, ITTS will liaise with the Bureau concerning the
installation of the required communications equipment, dedicated telephone
numbers, fax numbers and e-mail address. Ideally these numbers should be
redeployed from the Bureau so that when the operation is integrated into the
ongoing operation they may be "repatriated" and continuity ensured.
The Bureau will take full responsibility for supplies
(stationery, photocopy paper, etc.) and running costs (communications charges,
staff costs) during the period it occupies the EOR. It is emphasized that the
EOR will be at the disposal of a given Bureau for the initial stages of an
emergency operation only, in principle, for a maximum period of three months.
Thereafter it should be possible to integrate the emergency operation into the
normal activities of the Desk.
Tents
Tents are not stockpiled. However a system is in place which
allows for tents to be made available without delay when requested. UNHCR's
standard family tent is a double fly centre pole tent (4x4 m) with 2 doors and 2
windows and is made of cotton canvas and provided with a ground sheet. The unit
weight including poles and pegs is about 100 kg and the cost USD$ 200-220.
How to request
Requests for the release of items from the Central Emergency
Stockpile (CES) should be made by the Bureau through the CES Focal Point in STS
and confirmed in writing, preferably by e-mail. After reviewing the request, STS
will initiate form SF(1) which will be forwarded to the Certifying Officer (Head
of Desk or other authorized signatory). The transfer of appropriate funds to the
Central Emergency Stockpile project will be authorized by the Certifying Officer
with availability of funds being confirmed by the DFIS.
Emergency Health Kit
The kit is designed to meet the needs of a population with
disrupted medical facilities in the second phase of a natural or other disaster,
or a displaced population without medical facilities. Its contents are
calculated to meet the needs of a population of 10,000 persons for three (3)
months or for 30,000 persons for one (1) month.
THE BASIC UNIT: 10 identical boxes, each 41 kg.
Total: 410 kg = US$2194
To facilitate distribution to smaller health facilities on site,
the quantities of drugs and medical supplies in the basic unit have been divided
into ten identical units, each for 1,000 persons. The basic unit contains drugs,
medical supplies and some essential equipment for primary health care workers
with limited training. Simple treatment guidelines, based on symptoms, have been
developed to help the training of personnel in the proper use of drugs.
THE SUPPLEMENTARY UNIT: 14 boxes (3 boxes of drugs, 5
boxes of infusions, 3 boxes of renewable supplies and 3 boxes of equipment).
Total: 420 kg = US$ 2752
The supplementary unit contains drugs and medical supplies for a
population of 10,000 persons for three months and is to be used only by
professional health workers or physicians. It does not contain any drugs and
supplies from the basic units and can therefore only be used when these are
available as well. A manual describing the standard treatment regimens for
target diseases, is included in each unit.
How to request
The kits are in stock at supplier's warehouse in Amsterdam.
Requests should be made by the Bureau through the Desk at HQ with a copy to STS
indicating quantity of complete kit, markings needed, project to charge.
One complete Emergency Health Kit is a total of 24 boxes for a
total weight of 830 kgs, volume 3.40 cbm, packed on two pallets. Total cost: US$
4,947 without transport costs. Delivery is within 24/48 hours to the airport of
departure. It must be emphasized that although the standard kit is convenient in
the second phase of an emergency, specific local requirements need to be
assessed as soon as possible and further supplies must be ordered accordingly.
STS has signed for a period of one year (1.9.97 to 31.8.98 renewable) a frame
agreement for the list of UNHCR Essential Drugs. A request for a reasonable
quantity of items listed could be quickly delivered. Please contact STS before
ordering.
Blankets
150,000 blankets of various qualities (wool ranging from minimum
30% or minimum 50% are stockpiled with suppliers in Europe). Additional stocks
are available from regional stockpiles.
Blankets are packed in bales of 30 pieces weighing about 48 kg
depending on the quality of blanket. The cost of each blanket ranges from US$
4.50 to US $5.00 depending on the quality.
How to request
Requests for the release of items from the Central Emergency
Stockpile (CES) should be made by the Bureau through the CES Focal Point in STS
and confirmed in writing, preferably by e-mail. After reviewing the request, STS
will initiate form SF(1) which will be forwarded to the Certifying Officer (Head
of Desk or other authorized signatory). The transfer of appropriate funds to the
Central Emergency Stockpile project will be authorized by the Certifying Officer
with availability of funds being confirmed by the DFIS.
Kitchen Sets
30,000 Kitchen Sets are maintained by suppliers in Egypt. There
are three types of set:
Type A
Type B
Type C
1×7 litre cooking pot
Same as Type A
1x7 litre cooking pot
1×5 litre cooking pot
but does not
5 aluminium bowls
5 aluminium bowls
include knives,
5 cups
5 deep aluminium plates
forks and bucket.
5 spoons
5 cups
The cost is thus
5 knives, forks, spoons
reduced.
1 kitchen knife
1×15 litre steel bucket
Cost US$21.10
Cost US$ 13.60
Cost US$ 10.20
Kitchen sets can be produced at a rate of 20-30 000 per week.
Jerry Cans
50,000 semi-collapsible plastic 10 litre jerry cans are
maintained by a supplier in Amsterdam. Jerry cans are usually packed in cartons
of 100 weighing about 42,5 kg. The cost per jerry can is US$ 1.55
Plastic Sheeting
66,000 sheets of plastic are stockpiled at various locations.
The sheeting, procured by UNHCR is of woven high density polyethylene fibre,
laminated with low density polyethylene on both sides with a reinforced rim and
eyelets along the edges. The standard size is 4 × 5 meters. It is blue on
one side and white on the other with the UNHCR logo on both sides. The cost per
sheet is US$ 6.75. The same material is available in rolls of 4 × 50 m for
USD$ 66.00 per roll.
Note: Kits are constantly being reviewed and updated. The items
listed here for a given kit serve as a sample of the type of items available.
Once reviewed extra items may he added to a given kit or other items removed as
deemed necessary. The same review system also applies to the other standby
arrangements listed here.
Prefabricated Warehouses
10 prefabricated warehouses are held with various suppliers and
others are available from regional stockpiles.
The warehouse, once erected, is 24 metres long, 10 meters wide,
5.8 meters high at the apex and 3.35 meters high at the side. Each end has an
opening allowing through access for heavy vehicles. The average capacity is 500
tons. The unit cost is approximately US$ 13,000 -15,000.
How to request
Requests for the release of items from the Central Emergency
Stockpile (CES) should be made by the Bureau through the CES Focal Point in STS
and confirmed in writing, preferably by e-mail. After reviewing the request, STS
will initiate form SF(1) which will be forwarded to the Certifying Officer (Head
of Desk or other authorized signatory). The transfer of appropriate funds to the
Central Emergency Stockpile project will be authorized by the Certifying Officer
with availability of funds being confirmed by the DFIS.
Government Service Packages
In a number of major emergencies, Government Service Packages
(GSPs) of some form were used: Coalition forces in the Kurdish Operation,
Sarajevo airlift in Former Yugoslavia and various governments in selected
sectors for the Rwandese influx. It was during this last operation that the
concept was recognised as an exceptional response to complex emergencies and
Governments requested UNHCR to take note of the lessons learned and pursue the
development of what then became known as GSPs.
The concept assumes that GSPs are:
- A last resort in exceptionally large
emergencies
- Use of military or civil defence
assets
- Do not replace the traditional response capacity
of NGOs
- Applicable to selected sectors only, where
government assets are necessary
- Normally beyond the capacity of usual funding
arrangements and thus seen as extra-budgetary donations in kind
- Self contained in terms of mobilization and
operation
- Limited in duration of deployment and thus rapidly
replaced by more cost effective arrangements
UNHCR developed 20 GSPs:
Air Operations Cell
Borehole Drilling
Strategic Airlift
Water Treatment
Theatre Airlift
Water Distribution
Airport Ground Handling
Water Storage
Warehousing/Storekeeping
Latrine Construction
Road Transport
Vector Control
Field Hospital
Solid Waste Management
Hydrological Survey
Waste Water Systems
Water Tanker Operation
Site Development
Surface Water
Road Construction
How to request
It will normally be clear at the Headquarters level that an
emergency is of a magnitude that requires the mobilization of GSPs. The Desk
will contact EPRS and request that the mobilization procedure commence. In
coordination with UNOCHA, donor Governments will first be alerted and asked if
they are willing to provide packages. Subsequently, as the requirements become
more clear, implementation, sometimes commencing with a needs assessment
mission, will begin. Any direct contact between UNHCR and the Missions will be
handled by Donor Relations and Resource Service Mobilization in consultation
with EPRS and in liaison with UNOCHA.
NOTE: Meanwhile UNOCHA established the
Military and Civil Defence Unit (MCDU) which has expanded the list of GSPs
(which are called Government Service Modules) and these are to be available for
all agencies. They include the 20 GSPs listed above. The maintenance of GSPs
will be the responsibility of UNHCR or the most appropriate lead agency, while
coordination will rest with UNOCHA.
Emergency Capacities of Non Governmental Organisations
In recent years many of UNHCR's operational partners have taken
steps to develop or enhance their emergency preparedness and response
capacities. These are essential elements in complementing UNHCR's response to
refugee emergencies, since traditionally, UNHCR relies on non governmental
organizations to implement, on its behalf, activities in support of refugees. It
is important that these resources are known and called upon when needed. In
order to do this effectively, UNHCR has, since mid 1996, established a data base
which captures the emergency capacity of important NGOs which work in refugee
programmes. The database identifies standby capacities in the following sectors
and holds data on agency policy, financial resources for emergencies, human
resources stand-by capacity and material stockpiles.
Community Services
Health/Nutrition
Domestic needs
Management
Economic activities
Shelter
Education
Site Planning and Civil Works
Environmental sanitation
Transport/Logistics
Food
Water
On the basis of this data base, UNHCR is able to immediately
determine the capacities of NGOs and call on them to cooperate with UNHCR in
emergency response for refugee programmes.
How to request
In emergencies, Field Offices or Emergency Response Teams may
advise Headquarters of operational needs to be filled by NGOs. The data base
will provide options. Where there is no ERT and country operations have
particular gaps or needs, the Office of the NGO Coordinator should be contacted
and given details for follow-up.
Standby Arrangement for Trucks and Aircraft (EMERCOM of
Russia)
Under a Memorandum of Understanding signed with EMERCOM of
Russia (State Committee of the Russian Federation for Civil Defence, Emergencies
and the Elimination of the Consequences of Natural Disasters) UNHCR is provided
with priority access to airlift capacity and a trucking fleet maintained by
EMERCOM on a standby basis. These standby capacities include the following:
- Two airfreighters IL-76 TD with a payload of 40
tonnes and cargo hull dimensions of 20 × 3.4 × 3.4 metres.
- At least 15×10 metric tonne (6 × 6 or 6 × 4)
trucks (Kamaz type) accompanied by fuel tanker, mobile workshop, escort vehicles
and personnel (drivers and coordinators) to man the fleet during the initial
emergency phase and until such time as local capacities can be trained to take
over the operation of the fleet.
The resources can be deployed within 72 hours of receipt of a
written request from UNHCR. The maintenance of these capacities on a standby
basis is provided at no cost to UNHCR, but the cost of deployment is charged to
the relevant programme.
How to request
The Desk should consult with EPRS and STS on the appropriateness
of the EMERCOM capacities for the specific needs of the operation. Once its
deployment is agreed, EPRS will be the focal point for contact between EMERCOM
and UNHCR. UNHCR will advise EMERCOM in writing (copied simultaneously to the
Government of the Russian Federation through the mission in Geneva) of the type
of the emergency operation, location, duration, type and quantity of EMERCOM
services, equipment and personnel as well as the technical specifications of any
special equipment required. At the time of deployment a "Sub-Agreement" will be
signed between EMERCOM and the relevant Regional Bureau which incorporates the
actual services to be rendered by EMERCOM and the costs to be borne by UNHCR.
Contingency Planning: A Practical Guide for Field Staff
The Contingency Planning Guidelines are designed to assist UNHCR
field staff to plan for refugee related events at country level. These events
may include a refugee influx, spontaneous unexpected repatriation, security
problems in refugee camps, natural disasters affecting refugee camps, camp
relocation etc. There are 4 sections and 6 Annexes in the Guidelines:
Section 1 - The Purpose: covers the "when" and "why" of
contingency planning. It looks at the popular misconceptions surrounding this
activity. It considers the relationship to early warning, operations planning
and needs assessment and identifies indicators which will suggest when it is
prudent to initiate the planning process.
Section 2 - The Process: covers the "how" of contingency
planning emphasizing the importance of the process necessary to arrive at an
effective plan. It describes an approach which is participatory and ongoing and
suggests mechanisms which can be established in-country to update the plan and
maintain the preparedness process.
Section 3 - The Partners: identifies, and considers the
role of the various agencies in the planning process. It is a kind of a
checklist to ensure that the appropriate actors are involved at the right stage.
Section 4 - The Plan: sets out a model format for a
contingency plan. These Guidelines stress that the plan is simply a product of
the process and as such is constantly changing and requiring update.
Nevertheless the plan has an importance as a working tool and thus some guidance
on the best approach to setting out the document is required.
Annexes
A - UNHCR's Standby Resources
D - Example Contingency Plan
B - Early Warning Indicators
E - Overhead Transparencies
C - Questionnaire for Sector Planning
F - Additional Reading
How to request
Copies of the Guidelines may be requested directly from EPRS.
Refugee Registration Package
This package consists of three elements: a Practical Guide for
Field Staff, a Registration Kit, and computer software.
The Guide covers UNHCR's registration strategy, and provides
practical ideas and tips to staff undertaking refugee registration exercises. In
its 110 pages, the Guide describes registration strategies, explains the phases
of registration and explores the various registration scenarios. In doing so, it
deals with such activities as the initial fixing of a population, identifying
vulnerable groups, crowd control, equipment required, estimating populations,
protecting data and verification. Maps of typical reception and registration
areas are included as are examples of tokens, cards and forms. The Guidelines
were field tested in 1993 and the first document published and distributed in
May 1994.
The Registration Kit is designed for 30,000 refugees (10,000
families), and includes an appropriate supply of wristbands, fixing tokens,
temporary cards, registration cards, control sheets/passenger manifests,
registration forms, Guidelines, code sheets, hole punches for cards, UNHCR caps
and marker pens. The Kit is valued at approximately US$ 11,000.
In conjunction with the standard UNHCR registration form, the
Field Based Registration System (FBARS) has been developed and field-tested.
Introduction to the software is supported through, inter alia, regional training
activities. The software, specifically designed to handle large caseloads, is
fully supported by UNHCR.
How to request
The Food and Statistical Unit of PCS at Headquarters manages the
stocks of Guidelines and Kits. All requests should be made directly to PCS/FSU.
The Software may be requested by contacting PCS or ITTS. Except in emergency
situations, requests should be made well in advance stipulating the estimated
number of persons to be registered. Budgetary allocation will need to be made
for the supplies requested. Additional supplies required which are not in the
kits, such as files, megaphones, arm bands, UNHCR stamps etc. should be budgeted
for and requested separately by the Desk to BSU.
Handbook for Emergencies
The Handbook For Emergencies was first published in December
1982 and is available in English, French, Spanish and Russian. The Handbook is
intended as a managers' guide to setting up emergency operations for large-scale
influxes and provides advice in a non-technical manner on how to tackle various
aspects of emergency response. Managers would need to seek further advise for
more technical information.
The Handbook, which is in a convenient A5 format with 400 pages
of text and diagrams, will be useful, not only for UNHCR staff, but also for
government officials and NGO staff.
The chapter headings are as follows:
1. Aims and principles of response
2. Protection
3. Needs assessment and immediate
response
4. Implementing arrangements and
personnel
5. Supplies and logistics
6. Site selection, planning and shelter
7. Health
8. Food and nutrition
9. Water
10. Sanitation and environmental
services
11. Social services and education
12. Field level management
How to request
In principle an adequate supply of the Handbook is available at
every UNHCR field location for the use of UNHCR staff members. It is also
available on the UNHCR RefWorld/RefMonde CD-ROM.
The Handbook can be provided to NGOs and local authorities upon
request. The sum of $15 per copy is charged when more than 10 copies are
required. When requesting copies the name of the recipient organization and the
intended use of the Handbooks should be specified.
Requests should be made directly to EPRS stating the language
required.
Opening an Office: Checklist for the Emergency
Administrator
The Checklist is intended as a practical tool for UNHCR staff
when responding to emergencies, who are assigned to duty stations where there is
no established UNHCR presence or where the existing UNHCR office requires
additional administrative support as a result of a changed refugee situation.
However it is also most useful as a reference tool in established offices, and
for administration training purposes. The Checklist has 3 components all of
which are contained in an A4 ring binder:
1. The Checklist: lists most activities requiring
attention when establishing a (Branch, Sub or Field) Office. The list is broken
down into 5 main sections:
Premises
Communications and
Transport
Personnel, Staff Conditions and
Security
Finance, Equipment and
Supplies
Filing and
Documentation.
The list does not cover administrative procedures and action
required for the ongoing needs of the office but concentrates solely on those
matters related to the establishment of an office.
2. Annexes: extracts from existing documentation, which
have been included for ease of reference and are not substitutes for existing
manuals and instructions.
3. Computer diskette: contains the format for many forms
or documents. These forms or documents can be copied and amended to suit local
needs. The disc also includes a wide range of Printer Action Tables (PATs) and a
standard memo Macro.
One Checklist should be available in all UNHCR Offices. The most
recent version, Revision 6, was issued in March 1998.
How to request
Checklists are available on request from EPRS for new UNHCR
offices. Since stocks are limited, please ensure that copies are not removed
from the field offices.
Commodity Distribution: A Practical Field Guide
This guide outlines the procedures by which UNHCR field staff
and operational partners can design and implement systems for commodity
distribution. The field guide points out important issues on distribution and
offers techniques and ideas based on best current practice. First published in
June 1997, this document was produced through a series of consultations with
agencies with a long involvement in commodity distribution, namely the World
Food Programme, the Red Cross and Red Crescent Societies, and NGO implementing
partners.
The Commodity Distribution field guide begins by acquainting the
reader with a glossary of terms, commonly-used acronyms, and a summary of key
points covered in the document. An overview of commodity distribution follows
with a brief look at definitions, the main actors and their roles, the
relationships between food and non-food items, and programme planning.
Other chapters of the field guide are devoted to the
beneficiaries, categories of distribution and how to select the best for your
particular situation, refugee involvement, and commodity distribution
management. A final chapter addresses special issues in commodity distribution
and provides answers to many of the common questions and problems encountered in
the field.
A series of annexes provide (with some explanatory notes)
commonly-used monitoring and reporting forms for both food and non-food item
distribution.
How to request
Copies of Commodity Distribution: A Practical Field Guide can be
made available by contacting HCDS or by e-mail at hqcs00@unhcr.ch.
UNHCR Emergency Fund
The purpose of the Emergency Fund is to provide:
a) financial resources for assistance programmes for
refugees and displaced persons in emergency situations for which there is no
provision in the programmes approved by the Executive Committee;
and
b) such additional administrative expenditure
resulting from those emergencies as cannot be met from the Regular Budget,
pending action by the Executive Committee or the General Assembly.
The High Commissioner may allocate up to US$ 25 million annually
from the Emergency Fund, provided that the amount made available for any one
single emergency shall not exceed US$ 8 million in any one year and that the
Fund will be maintained at not less than US$ 8 million.
The Fund may be reimbursed if sufficient funds to a given Appeal
are later received.
How to request
Use of the Emergency Fund must be authorized by the Officers
indicated below, subject to prior clearance by the Chief of PCS and the Head of
the Funding and Donor Relations Service. Requests for use of the Emergency Fund
are to be submitted to PCS by the Head of Desk or the Chief of Section for
projects in their area of responsibility. The Director of the Regional Bureau or
Division will countersign all requests for the use of the Emergency Fund. PCS
will attach to all requests for over US$ 2.0 million a status report on
allocations made to date. Copies of all authorizations are to be sent to the
High Commissioner's Office.
Amount
Officer designated by the High Commissioner
Alternate
Below US£ 2.0 million Equal or
above US£ 2.0 million
Director, Division of Operational Support High
Commissioner
1. Deputy High Commissioner 2. Officer in Charge 1. Deputy
High Commissioner 2. Officer in Charge
OCHA Central Emergency Revolving Fund (CERF)
The Central Emergency Revolving Fund (CERF) of the Office of the
Coordinator of Humanitarian Affairs was established in December 1991 to provide
funds within the UN system to respond rapidly to emergencies. CERF, which has a
target level of US$ 50 million, is financed from voluntary contributions and is
used for cash advances to operational organisations and entities within the
system. These advances are to be reimbursed as a first charge against income
subsequently received, usually as a result of consolidated appeals. Under
exceptional circumstances, the rules allow for the non reimbursement on
allocations made under the Fund. CERF is managed by the UN Under Secretary
General for Humanitarian Affairs.
How to request
The Head of Bureau or Chief of Section should address a
memorandum to the High Commissioner, through the Director of Operational Support
& the Head of Funding and Donor Relations Service seeking approval to
request an allocation from the CERF. Once agreed, a letter is to be sent from
the High Commissioner to the Under Secretary General for Humanitarian Affairs,
requesting an allocation from the Fund. This letter should:
- define the purpose and objectives of the
programme
- specify the amount of money requested
- indicate the initiatives which are being
undertaken to raise funds for this programme to allow for the Fund's
reimbursement.
The USG for Humanitarian Affairs will reply confirming that an
allocation can be made available, the conditions under which it is made and the
reporting requirements. These two letters will constitute a formal exchange
between the Organizations. In exceptional circumstances involving particularly
urgent emergencies, the USG may authorize advances prior to the formal exchange
of letters. This must however be followed with a formal exchange within 30 days.
Distance Learning Modules
Beginning in early 1998, EPRS will be pilot testing two distance
learning modules on the UNHCR Infra-Net. These self-study courses follow and
complement the other training and capacity-building initiatives described
elsewhere in this catalogue.
The first two modules will cover two critical aspects of
emergency preparedness and response: contingency planning and operations
planning. EPRS plans to make these courses first available to staff either
electronically or in the conventional paper format. At a later date, operational
partners and/or other UN agencies will be able to access the course materials.
This distance learning initiative is carried out in
collaboration with the University of Wisconson-Disaster Management Center who
will administer the course on behalf of UNHCR. This course has the added
advantage of offering credits towards the UW's Disaster Management Diploma
Program.
How to request
Look for a formal announcement on the opening of this course.
All details on participation in the course will be covered in this announcement.
Emergency Management Training Programme (EMTP)
The first Emergency Management Training Programme (EMTP)
Workshop was held in 1985. In the first 12 years, over 1,500 staff members from
UNHCR, NGOs, Governments and other UN agencies have participated in the EMTP.
The courses are normally geared to mid-career managers and support staff
preferably with some emergency/field experience. The objectives of the programme
are to acquaint the participants with the purpose and goals of emergency
management, illustrate the needs for general management skills and demonstrate
specific applications of emergency management skills to priority areas such as
planning, logistics, health, shelter and nutrition, as well as to offer
operational partners the opportunity to exchange experience and lessons learned.
While courses were initially held at the University of Wisconsin
at Madison USA they have, since 1992, been organized on a regional basis. The
intention is to add a regional focus to the training and discussions. Three
courses are organized each year. Each course normally lasts 11 days and is
attended by some 35 participants. In addition to the standard lecture format,
training methods include case studies, problem solving exercises, group
discussions, films, a review of current disaster literature and sometimes field
visits. Each course includes a one day simulation of a refugee emergency.
Since 1993 courses have been held in the following locations:
Botswana (Gaberone)
Kyrgzstan (Bishkek)
Ethiopia (Addis Ababa)
Nepal (Katmandu)
Ghana (Accra)
Senegal (Dakar)
Guinea (Conakry)
Thailand (Bangkok)
Jamaica (Kingston)
Turkey (Ankara)
Jordan (Amman)
Venezuela (Caracas)
Tanzania (Dar-es-Salaam)
Japan (Tokyo)
How to request
Prior to each course, EPRS will decide on the participating
countries and the number of UNHCR, NGO, government and other UN participants
from each country. UNHCR field offices will normally propose the participants
within these categories. EPRS may also identify a small number of participants
from outside the region, from the headquarters of NGOs or UN agencies. Agencies
and individuals are invited to write to EPRS to express their interest in
participating in future courses. While every effort will be made to accommodate
such requests, the demand is high and not all requests can be met.
Workshop on Emergency Management (WEM/ERT)
The Workshop on Emergency Management (WEM/ERT) is an internal
UNHCR Workshop for members of the Emergency Response Team (ERT) Roster members.
The pilot Workshop was held in October 1993; WEM is now organized on a regular
basis in March and September each year.
The primary aim is to prepare ERT Roster members for deployment.
The Workshop is highly participatory, focusing on providing practical tips,
tools and techniques to equip staff in managing emergency teams or participating
as team members in emergency/repatriation operations. It has a more specific
focus than the EMTP, and while prior participation in the EMTP is not a
prerequisite, it may be an asset.
The 3 main themes of the Workshop are:
1 managing your role
2 managing relations
3 managing oneself
5 stages of emergency deployment are covered:
1 pre-deployment
2 arrival
3 team building & delivery
4 handover
5 return
Workshops are held near Geneva for around 28 participants.
The timing of the Workshops coincides with the beginning of the
six month term of the new ERT roster, currently April and October of each year.
The course is facilitated by an external consultant and normally at least two
EPROs act as resource persons.
How to request
Since participation in the Workshop is dependent on membership
of the ERT it is first necessary to be placed on the ERT roster [see section on
Human Resources]. All ERT members should attend the WEM.
Targeted Training
EPRS complements its two core training activities - the EMTP and
the WEM - by providing support to ad hoc emergency training of three general
kinds:
a) Country or Region specific courses with a
particular focus, for example contingency planning.
b) Workshops for a specific target audience such as
training for external standby staff from agencies such as the Nordic Refugee
Councils, Redda Barnen etc., as well as for staff at HQs (WEM/HQs).
c) Emergency courses organized locally by UNHCR
Branch offices. For these local initiatives, EPRS is unable to provide funds or
resource persons but can offer guidance on course outline and materials to
assist in the preparation of training sessions.
d) Special seminars for senior managers on Emergency
Management (Advanced Emergency Management Seminar (AEMS)).
How to request
Training requests will normally originate from field offices.
Where forward planning is possible, the training sessions should be incorporated
into the annual training plan. Where sudden or changed circumstances are the
basis for a training need, a submission should be sent to EPRS through the
relevant Desk. It should once again be stressed that in doing so, one should not
assume that EPRS can provide resource persons for such
training.
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
(introduction...)
Using the Handbook
Introduction
Abbreviations
UNHCR's Mission Statement
1. Aim and Principles of Response
2. Protection
3. Emergency Management
4. Contingency Planning
5. Initial Assessment, Immediate Response
6. Operations Planning
7. Coordination and Site Level Organization
8. Implementing Arrangements
9. External Relations
10. Community Services and Education
11. Population Estimation and Registration
12. Site Selection, Planning and Shelter
13. Commodity Distribution
14. Health
15. Food and Nutrition
16. Water
17. Environmental Sanitation
18. Supplies and Transport
19. Voluntary Repatriation
20. Administration, Staffing and Finance
21. Communications
22. Coping with Stress
23. Staff Safety
24. Working with the Military
Appendix 1 - Catalogue of Emergency Response Resources
A significant increase of incidence of these conditions should
prompt an immediate response (or the reporting of just one case of
measles)
Table 3 - Common Health Problems
Disease
Major contributing factors
Preventive measures
Diarrhoeal diseases
Overcrowding Contamination of water and food Lack of
hygiene
· adequate living
space · public health education · distribution of soap · good personal and food hygiene · safe water supply and sanitation
Measles
Overcrowding Low vaccination coverage
· minimum living space standards
as defined in chapter on site planning ·
immunization of children with distribution of Vitamin A. Immunization from 6
months up to 15 years (rather than the more usual 5 years) is recommended
because of the increased risks from living conditions
Acute respiratory infections
Poor housing Lack of blankets and clothing Smoke in living
area
· minimum living space standards
and · proper shelter, adequate clothing,
sufficient blankets
Malaria
New environment with a strain to which the refugees are
not immune Stagnant water which becomes a breeding area for mosquitoes
· destroying mosquito breeding
places, larvae and adult mosquitoes by spraying. However the success of
vector control is dependent on particular mosquito habits and local experts
must be consulted · provision of mosquito
nets · drug prophylaxis (e.g. pregnant women
and young children according to national protocols)
Meningococcal meningitis
Overcrowding in areas where disease is endemic (often
has local seasonal pattern)
· minimum living space
standards · immunization only after expert
advice when surveys suggest necessity
Tuberculosis
Overcrowding Malnutrition High HIV prevalence
· minimum living space standards
(but where it is endemic it will remain a problem) · immunization
Typhoid
Overcrowding Poor personal hygiene Contaminated water
supply Inadequate sanitation
· minimum living space
standards · safe water, proper
sanitation · good personal, food and public
hygiene and public health education WHO does not recommend vaccination as
it offers only low, short-term individual protection and little or no
protection against the spread of the disease
Worms especially hookworms
Overcrowding Poor sanitation
· minimum living space
standards · proper sanitation · wearing shoes ·
good personal hygiene
Scabies1
Overcrowding Poor personal hygiene
· minimum living space
standards · enough water and soap for washing
Xerophthalmia Vitamin A deficiency
Inadequate diet Following acute infections, measles
and diarrhoea
· adequate dietary intake of
vitamin A If not available, provide vitamin A fortified food If this is
not possible, vitamin A supplements ·
immunization against measles. Systematic prophylaxis for children, every 4 -
6 months
Anaemia
Malaria, hookworm, poor absorption or insufficient intake
of iron and folate
· prevention/treatment of
contributory disease · correction of diet
including food fortification
Tetanus
Injuries to unimmunized population Poor obstetrical
practice causes neo-natal tetanus
· good first aid · immunization of pregnant women and
subsequent general immunization within EPI · training of midwives and clean ligatures scissors,
razors, etc.
Loss of social organization Poor transfusion
practices Lack of information
· test syphilis during
pregnancy · test all blood before
transfusion · ensure adherence to universal
precautions · health education · availability of condoms · treat partners
1Scabies: skin disease caused
by burrowing mites
Table 4 - Screening of New Arrivals - Reception
Activities
a) HEALTH SCREENING
Nutritional screening
Children 1 to under 5 years: Measure the mid-upper arm
circumference (MUAC). Any children with MUAC below 12.5 cm should
be immediately referred to health or nutrition services for weighing and
measuring and for nutritional assistance if required.
Measles immunization
Children aged 6 months to 12 (or even 15) years: Immunize
entire group and issue "Road to Health" or other immunization record
card. Note: It is often inpractical to vaccinate at the same time as
screening. However screening could be used to evaluate the vaccination
coverage.
Vitamin A prophylaxis
Given along with measles vaccine, but should not
delay measles vaccination if vitimin A is not available.
Basic curative care
As required: On-site first-line care for dehydration,
respiratory infections, presumed malaria, trauma, and other
life threatening conditions.
Referral to existing health care facilities.
b) DEMOGRAPHIC SCREENING
Population estimation
Everyone: Estimate total population broken down by sex and
age (0-4, 5-14, 15-44, and 44 years and over) Estimate numbers of
vulnerable persons such as children up to 5 years old, pregnant/lactating
women, handicapped, female heads of households, single women,
and unaccompanied minors.
Table 5 - Approximate Staffing Levels for Refugee Health and
Sanitation Services for a Population of 10-20,000
Community Health Worker
10-20
Traditional Birth Attendant
6-10
Public Health Nurse
1
Clinic Nurses Midwives
3-4
Doctors/Medical Assistants
1-3
Pharmacy Attendant
1
Laboratory Technician
1
Dressers/Assistants
10
Sanitarians
2-4
Sanitation Assistants
20
Table 6 - Site Planning Figures for Emergencies
RESOURCE
HOW MUCH YOU WILL NEED
Land
30 - 45 m2 per person
Sheltered space (tents, or other structures)
3.5 m2 per person
Fire break space
A clear area between shelters 50 m wide should be provided for
every 300 m of built-up area. A minimum of 1-1.5 m should be provided between
guy-ropes of neighboring tents on all sides
Roads and walkways
20-25% of entire site
Open space and public facilities
15-20% of entire site
Environmental sanitation
1 latrine seat per 20 people or ideally 1 per family sited not
farther than 50 m from user accommodations and not nearer than 6 m. 1 ×
100 liter refuse bin per 50 people 1 wheelbarrow per 500 people 1 communal
refuse pit (2 m × 5 m × 2 m) per 500 people
Water
15 - 20 liters per person per day of clean water
Tap stands
1 per 200 persons sited not farther than 100 m from user
accommodations
Warehouse space
For food grains in bags, stacked 6 m high allow 1.2
m2 of floor space per tonne
Food
2,100 kcal/person/day This will require approximately 36
metric tonnes/10,000 people/ week of food assuming the following daily ration:
350-400 g/person/day of staple cereal 20-40 g/person/day of
an energy rich food (oil/fat) 50 g/person/day of a protein rich food
(legumes)
Table 7 - The Size of Things
Commodity volume per
ton (m3/1,000kg)
Approximate
Standard package stacking height
Typical maximum
Water
1
none
n/a
Food grains/beans
2
50 kg bag
20-40 bags
Flour and blended foods
2
25 kg bag
20-30 bags
DSM in bags
2.4
25 kg bag
20-30 bags
DSM in tins inside cartons
4
20 kg/carton 4 tins/carton
8 individual cartons or 20 if palletized
Edible oil in tins inside cartons
2
25 kg/carton 6 tins per carton
8 individual cartons or 20 if palletized
Oil in drums
1.4
200 liter drum
2 drums upright with wood between the rims or 3 drums
on their sides
ORS
2.4
35 kg carton
3-4 m
Mixed drugs
3.5
45 kg carton
3-4 m
Clinic equipment and teaching aids
4.5
35-50 kg carton
3-4 m
Kitchen utensils
5
35-40 kg cartons
3-4 m
Family tents
4.5
35-60 kg/ unit
4.5 m *
Compressed blankets
4.5
70 units/bale 85 kg/bale
4.5 m*
Loose blankets
9
unit
3-4 m
* where equipment for stacking allows
Table 8 - Capacities and Characteristics of Various
Aircraft
Aircraft make or type
Volume* capacity in m3
Weight* capacity in kg
Required* runway in m
Notes
Antanov AN-12
97
20,000
1,800
Antanov AN-124
900
120,000
3,000
Boeing B.707/320C
165
36,000
2,100
Boeing B.747
460
100,000
3,000
DC-3
21
3,000
1,200
DC-6
80
11,000
1,500
DC.8/63F
302
44,000
2,300
"stretch" version
DC.10/30F
412
66,000
2,500
Fokker F.27
65
5,000
1,200
Hercules L.100-30
120
15,000
1,400
Ramp for trucks, can land on earth/grass airstrips
llyushin IL-76
180
40
1,700
Pilatus Porter
3
950
120
Small door
Skyvan
22
2,100
500
Ramp: can take Land Rover
Transall
140
17,000
1,000
Ramp for trucks
Twin Otter
12.4
1,800
220
Small door
*Note that the minimum length of runway required and
the maximum load capacity both depend on the altitude of the airport and the
temperature. Capacity is reduced for long distances as more fuel must be
carried. Carrying capacity will also vary with the actual configuration of the
aircraft.
Table 9 - Capacities of Various Surface Transport Means
Carrier Type
volume capacity in m3
weight capacity in kg
Standard railway car
52
30,000
Standard sea/land container - 20ft/ 6.1 m
30
18,000
Standard sea/land container -40ft/12.2 m
65
26,000
Large lorry and trailer
Varies
20-30,000
Large articulated lorry
Varies
30-40,000
Medium lorry
Varies
5-8,000
Long wheel base Landrover or pickup
Varies
1,000
Typical water tanker
8
8,000
Hand drawn cart
Varies
300
Camel
Varies
250
Donkey
Varies
100
Bicycle
Varies
100
Table 10 - Conversion Factors
To convert from
To
Multiply by
Length
Yards (1 = 3ft = 36 inches)
Metres
0.91
Metres (1 = 100cm)
Yards
1.09
Miles (1 = 1,760 yds)
Kilometres
1.61
Kilometres (1 = 1,000 m) The international nautical mile =
6,076 feet = 1.825 km
Miles
0.62
Area
Yards2 (1= 9 ft2)
Metres2
0.84
Metres2 (1 = 10,000 cm2)
Yards2
1.20
Acres (1 = 4,840 yd2)
Hectares
0.41
Hectares (1 = 100 acres = 10,000 m2)
Acres
2.47
Miles2 (1 = 640 Acres)
Kilometres2
2.59
Kilometres2 (1 = 100 ha)
Miles2
0.39
Volume
US gallons
UK gallons
0.83
UK gallons
US gallons
1.20
US (UK) pints
Litres
0.47 (0.57)
Litres
US (UK) pints
2.11 (1.76)
US (UK) gallons (1 = 8 pints)
Litres
3.79 (4.55)
Metres3
Yards3
1.31
Yards (1 = 27 ft3)
Metres3
0.77
Weight
Ounces (oz)
Grams
28.35
Grams
Ounces
0.035
Pounds (Ib, 1 =16 oz)
Kilos
0.454
Kilos (kg, 1 = 1,000g)
Pounds
2.21
US short tons (1 = 2,000 Ib)
Metric tons
0.91
US long tons (= UK tons, 1 = 20 hundredweight (CWT) = 2240
Ib)
Metric tons
1.02
Metric tons (MT, 1 = 1,000 kg)
US short tons
1.10
US long tons
UK tons
0.98
Temperature
Centigrade
Fahrenheit
1.8 and add 32
Fahrenheit
Centigrade
Subtract 32 and multiply by 0.56
Weight of water (at 16.7° C, 62° F)
1 litter = 1kg; 1 UK gal = 101 Ib;
1 US gal = 8.33 Ib; 1 ft3 = 62.31 Ib
Table 11 - Radio Communications, Phonetic Alphabet
Letter
Phonetic Equivalent
A
Alpha
B
Bravo
C
Charlie
D
Delta
E
Echo
F
Fox-trot
G
Golf
H
Hotel
I
India
J
Juliet
K
Kilo
L
Lima
M
Mike
N
November
O
Oscar
P
Papa
Q
Quebec
R
Romeo
S
Sierra
T
Tango
U
Uniform
V
Victor
w
Whiskey
X
X-Ray
Y
Yankee
Z
Zulu
Table 12 -Typical Services and Infrastructure Requirements
for Refugee Camps
1 latrine
per
1 family (6-10 persons)
1 water tap
per
1 community (80 -100 persons)
1 health centre
per
1 camp (of 20,000 persons)
1 hospital
per
up to 200,000 persons
1 school
per
1 sector (5,000 persons)
4 commodity distribution sites
per
1 camp module (20,000 persons)
1 market
per
1 camp module (20,000 persons)
2 refuse drums
per
1 community (80 - 100 persons)
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
(introduction...)
Using the Handbook
Introduction
Abbreviations
UNHCR's Mission Statement
1. Aim and Principles of Response
2. Protection
3. Emergency Management
4. Contingency Planning
5. Initial Assessment, Immediate Response
6. Operations Planning
7. Coordination and Site Level Organization
8. Implementing Arrangements
9. External Relations
10. Community Services and Education
11. Population Estimation and Registration
12. Site Selection, Planning and Shelter
13. Commodity Distribution
14. Health
15. Food and Nutrition
16. Water
17. Environmental Sanitation
18. Supplies and Transport
19. Voluntary Repatriation
20. Administration, Staffing and Finance
21. Communications
22. Coping with Stress
23. Staff Safety
24. Working with the Military
Appendix 1 - Catalogue of Emergency Response Resources
James Gustave Speth Administrator of the United
Nations Development Programme
Sadako Ogata United Nations High Commissioner for
Refugees
MEMORANDUM OF UNDERSTANDING between
United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees (UNHCR) and
United Nations Children's Fund (UNICEF)
I. INTRODUCTION
1. This Memorandum of Understanding (MOU) between the United
Nations High Commissioner for Refugees (UNHCR) and the Untied Nations Children's
Fund (UNICEF) is aimed at encouraging and facilitating systematic, predictable,
cooperative action between the two organizations. It seeks to build on the
recognized comparative advantages of each organization and to establish
operational modalities of cooperation which result in "value-added" elements.
2. Underlying this MOU is the recognition of the respective
mandates and responsibilities of each organization.
3. UNHCR and UNICEF agree that their joint and separate actions
on behalf of children (whether with refugee, displaced or returnee populations,
as well as local populations affected by the presence of displaced persons or
refugees), shall be based upon principles contained in the Convention on the
Rights of the Child, in international instruments governing the rights of
refugees and in other human rights instruments, as well as upon the related
policies enunciated by the Executive Committee of the High Commissioner's
Programme and the UNICEF Executive Board.
II. SCOPE
4. This MOU applies in countries where UNICEF has an established
office or programme and covers activities in favour of the following beneficiary
populations:
i) refugees;
ii) returnees;
iii) internally displaced persons;
iv) local populations in the country of origin,
affected by the presence of internally displaced persons or returnees; or in the
country of asylum affected by the presence of refugees.
III. RESPONSIBILITIES IN RELATION TO VARIOUS POPULATION
GROUPS
5. The roles and responsibilities of UNHCR and UNICEF in
relation to the population groups listed in (4) above, while distinct, are
sometimes inter-related. Both UNHCR and UNICEF seek to assist national
authorities with regard to the well-being of children.
(i) Refugees
6. According to the Statute of its Office, UNHCR is mandated to
provide international protection to refugees and to promote durable solutions to
their problems. UNHCR is ultimately responsible for the international protection
and welfare of refugees, which may include the provision of assistance, in
cooperation with host governments and in line with their international
obligations.
7. UNICEF, for its part, has been called upon by its Executive
Board (Resolution 1992/21) "to continue providing emergency assistance to
refugee and displaced women and children, particularly those living in areas
affected by armed conflict and natural disasters... in accordance with its
mandate" and "in collaboration with other relevant United Nations Agencies and
the international community." UNICEF's assistance to refugees, agreed in each
case with the host government and with UNHCR, is selective and subject to the
availability of resources over and above those committed in its Master Plan of
Operations for the relevant country programme.
(ii) Returnees
8. UNHCR and UNICEF will consult with each other to ensure
complementarity of activities for returnees.
9. The involvement of UNICEF with returnee children and women
could be part, or an extension, of a regular country programme; such involvement
may require undertaking new programme activities within the UNICEF-assisted
country programme of cooperation. Normally, UNICEF actions, whether through
reprogramming of existing resources or through mobilization of supplementary
resources, are determined through consultation with government and other
national partners.
10. UNHCR's responsibility for returnees is to ensure that
voluntary repatriation takes place under conditions of safety and with dignity,
assisting, where needed, the return and reintegration of repatriating refugees
and monitoring their safety and well-being on return. The duration and scope of
UNHCR's activities in favour of returnees are limited and vary according to the
specifics of each voluntary repatriation operation. UNHCR's involvement may also
be determined by specific tripartite or bilateral agreements with respective
countries outlining the framework of voluntary repatriation operations.
(iii) Internally displaced persons
11. The interventions of UNICEF and UNHCR in favour of
internally displaced persons are usually part of a broader United Nations
coordinated plan of action.
12. UNICEF will assist governments and other authorities to
fulfil their obligations to protect and aid internally displaced populations.
Within the context of the country programme of cooperation, UNICEF focuses
capacity-building approaches on community-level activities to help women and
children with special needs and to assure their integration into national
programmes for the provision of essential health, education and other social
services.
13. UNHCR's involvement is selective, applying to persons
displaced internally for reasons that would make them of concern to UNHCR if
they were outside their country. This involvement is based on a specific request
of the Secretary-General or a competent principal organ of the United Nations
and is influenced by the consideration of how this might contribute to the
prevention and/or solution of refugee problems.
(iv) Affected local host populations
14. UNICEF, through the assistance interventions in its country
programme of cooperation, will support national authorities to ensure that the
needs and well-being of the local host population are addressed.
15. The involvement of UNHCR with affected local populations is
selective, and normally is focused on those living within the areas of refugee
influx, return of repatriating refugees or internally displaced persons of
concern to UNHCR.
IV. TYPES OF COOPERATIVE ACTIVITIES
(i) Advocacy, promotion and strategy formulation
16. UNHCR and UNICEF will cooperate, whenever appropriate and
feasible, in the advocacy and promotion of the rights and protection of children
of joint concern, particularly in the following areas:
a. the right of the child to a name and nationality;
the preservation of the child's identity;
b. the safety and liberty of children: the
prevention of their recruitment into armed forces and groups; forced labour,
torture, abduction, physical and/or sexual abuse and detention;
c. tracing, family reunification, the special
concerns related to the evacuation of children and adoption.
17. Within the context of the Convention on the
Rights of the Child (CRC) UNICEF and UNHCR will cooperate on the following
issues:
a. promotion of implementation of the
CRC;
b. organization of educational activities, e.g.
seminars, training, or school-based projects, aimed at the dissemination of
knowledge of the rights provided for in the CRC;
c. reporting on the implementation of the CRC to the
Committee on the Rights of the Child, as well as follow-up on the implementation
of the recommendations of the Committee. UNHCR and UNICEF will facilitate the
inclusion of data on refugee children in country reports to the Committee on the
Rights of the Child.
(ii) Operational activities
18. The precise mix of UNHCR's and UNICEF's operational
activities will vary according to situation-specific conditions and needs.
UNICEF's particular strength and contribution arises from its long-term country
presence and perspective, and lies in its ability to focus on relief and
development in a mutually reinforcing manner. UNHCR's challenge is to provide
relief or initial reintegration assistance in such a way that it is an effective
complement to or precursor of development activities.
Contingency planning
19. Both UNHCR and UNICEF contribute to coordinated U.N.
emergency contingency planning, normally undertaken in full cooperation with
national authorities. Within this framework, UNHCR will invite UNICEF to
participate in planning for possible refugee influxes. During such planning
activities, UNICEF will review with national counterparts and UNHCR ways in
which its ongoing country operations may quickly be adjusted to enable UNICEF to
provide emergency assistance in pre-identified sectors.
20. To enhance the effectiveness of a collaborative response to
emergencies, both organizations shall keep each other informed on the
development and maintenance of their emergency response capacities, such as, for
example, emergency staff training and rosters, standby arrangements, material
stockpiles, or development of telecommunications networks.
Assessment and monitoring
21. UNICEF and UNHCR shall jointly agree on guidelines and
specific methodologies for assessing and monitoring the situation of children of
joint concern and will exchange information on programmatic action to be taken.
Support to unaccompanied children
22. Typically, unaccompanied children are found both within the
country of origin and in the refugee population. Within the country of origin,
UNICEF will assist national authorities to develop, coordinate and apply
appropriate policies, standards and strategies for the care and family
reunification of unaccompanied children. UNHCR takes the lead in relation to
unaccompanied children among refugee populations. The two organizations will
collaborate in the further development and use of global programming guidelines
and standards and will ensure the necessary operational coordination and
information-sharing between operations in countries of asylum and of origin.
Both agencies will coordinate with ICRC in relation to tracing and reunification
activities.
23. Where special arrangements for the care of unaccompanied
refugee children are warranted, UNHCR, within its responsibility for overall
coordination, shall consult with UNICEF to determine how UNICEF may participate
in the management and implementation of such arrangements; such assistance may
be provided in the following ways:
i. undertaking assessment(s) of the situation and
needs of unaccompanied children among each refugee population;
ii. assisting in the adaptation of global principles
and guidelines for the care of unaccompanied children, provided in Refugee
Children: Guidelines on Protection and Care (UNHCR 1994) and in Assisting in
Emergencies (UNICEF 1986/1996) and, when required, developing and issuing
situation-specific guidelines in consultation with other organizations directly
involved in the care of such children and/or family tracing;
iii. taking responsibility for coordinating the
setting up and supervision of programmes for the care of unaccompanied children
and for tracing and family reunion.
24. In countries of origin, UNICEF will ensure similar
consultation and cooperation with UNHCR and with national authorities to
facilitate the incorporation of unaccompanied returnee children into appropriate
programmes.
Promotion of psychosocial well-being
25. UNHCR and UNICEF will collaborate in the further development
of guidelines and training materials for activities addressing the needs of
children traumatized by exposure to armed conflict and extreme violence.
26. Where children are exposed to armed conflict, violence,
abuse or other great hardship within their own countries, UNICEF will
collaborate with governments and other national partners to assess the
psychosocial situation of such children, to establish guidelines for care and
counseling, and to implement a national programme of cooperation aimed at
helping traumatized children and at the prevention of further traumatization.
UNICEF support will emphasize national capacity development, community- and
family-based care strategies, and appropriate professional referral for the most
seriously traumatized children. UNICEF will collaborate with UNHCR to facilitate
the integration of returnee children into national programmes.
27. In the case of an influx of refugees similarly exposed to
traumatic events, UNHCR, in consultation with UNICEF and other relevant national
institutions and NGOs, will coordinate an assessment of the psychosocial
situation of refugee children and the preparation of a programme of activities
to help those who are traumatized and to prevent further traumatization. Such
programmes should, to the extent possible, be designed with a view to community
involvement, while for very seriously traumatized children special arrangements
would be needed. A decision on the most appropriate modalities for
implementation and the allocation of responsibilities will be taken by UNHCR
after consultation with UNICEF and other organizations directly involved. UNICEF
may take responsibility, inter alia, for the provision of technical assistance
and the organization of training.
Support to families and children
28. Community-based activities focusing on the general
well-being of refugee children are essential to UNHCR's emergency response. In
case of a major refugee emergency, this response may need to be supported by
additional capacity. At the request of UNHCR, UNICEF shall assist in the design
and development of programme activities to strengthen family and community
coping and self-help strategies and assure as healthy and nurturing an
environment as possible for children.
29. The well-being, protection and healthy development of the
child are best served in a secure, caring and informed family environment. Thus
UNICEF gives priority to strengthening - or reviving -the capacity of the family
to care for the child, to ensuring adequate family access to food and to income
(for the mother especially), to essential knowledge and coping skills. UNICEF
will collaborate with UNHCR to facilitate the integration of returnee families
into appropriate family-support programmes.
Basic education
30. In seeking to provide educational opportunities for refugee
children, UNHCR shall draw on the expertise of UNICEF to help assess and analyze
the educational status and needs of children. UNHCR and UNICEF will jointly
determine how UNICEF may contribute to adapting existing educational material,
including resources for peace education and to the development and provision of
basic supplies and equipment.
31. UNICEF will seek to ensure that in its regular country
programmes of cooperation core educational and teacher training materials are
identified which can form the basis of an early education intervention during an
emergency situation. UNICEF will collaborate with UNHCR to ensure continuity in
approach, content and teacher training between refugee basic education and the
basic education system in the country of origin. UNICEF, in its collaboration
with national authorities to rehabilitate or develop the basic education system
of the country of origin, will collaborate with UNHCR to facilitate access for
returnee children to national schools.
32. Both agencies will coordinate with UNESCO in relation to
basic education activities.
Health activities
33. UNHCR and UNICEF will continue to collaborate to meet the
health needs of women and children (including adolescents) of concern to both.
UNICEF will focus particular attention on support to local populations in the
vicinity of refugee camps, working in conjunction with local authorities.
Specific activities may include the further elaboration of standards, guidelines
or manuals, as for example the production of "Reproductive Health in Refugee
Situations."
34. Measles Immunization. UNHCR will advise UNICEF immediately
of a new refugee situation where measles vaccination is a priority need. UNICEF
will provide measles vaccine (and other antigens that may be required on an
emergency basis) together with related equipment and supplies, including cold
chain equipment, vaccination cards and also Vitamin A supplements. Arrangements
for vaccination with UNICEF supplies will be decided by mutual agreement, taking
into account the implementation capacity of national immunization services, NGOs
and others.
35. EPI. UNICEF will assist national health authorities of the
host country to provide full EPI services, where feasible, to refugee women and
children, and will help health authorities to maintain the standard and coverage
of service provision for host populations affected by refugee influxes.
36. Support to Safe Motherhood Practices. In the context of a
new refugee situation, planning for implementation of maternal and neonatal care
programmes will be undertaken by UNICEF and UNHCR in coordination with host
country authorities, NGOs and other relevant organizations. In addition, UNICEF
will make available clean delivery kits for home and institutional deliveries,
whether assisted by professional birth attendants or not. When required, UNICEF
will provide support to strengthen existing national referral systems for women
experiencing complications.
37. Infant and young child feeding. In stabilized refugee
situations, UNICEF and UNHCR will collaborate to support normal growth and
nutrition in infants and young children. Emphasis will be placed on the
promotion, protection and support of exclusive breastfeeding for six months and
on continued breastfeeding for two years or beyond, while ensuring that children
are given sufficient good-quality complementary food and the necessary care.
Both organizations will ensure compliance with the established UNHCR policy for
the Acceptance, Distribution and Use of Milk Products in Refugee Programmes.
38. Health education in general will also be promoted by both
organizations and UNICEF will support information, education and communication
activities among refugee populations, drawing on, and adapting as necessary,
existing materials available in the host country and the country of origin.
39. Both agencies will coordinate with WHO in relation to basic
health activities.
Water and sanitation
40. At the onset of a refugee emergency, UNHCR may approach
UNICEF to assist in ensuring provision of adequate quantities of safe water and
sanitary services, where feasible, to refugee populations. In the framework of
its country programme of cooperation UNICEF will help national authorities to
maintain the standard and coverage of service provision for affected host
populations, and for returnee populations.
41. UNHCR and UNICEF will jointly review and adapt, as
necessary, existing designs of sanitary facilities used in host countries in
order to streamline approaches to environmental sanitation for refugees with
those in force for host populations.
(iii) Reintegration Activities: Field-level Letters of
Understanding
42. UNHCR will inform UNICEF concerning expected repatriation
operations at an early stage of planning and negotiations for each operation or
whenever large-scale spontaneous movements are expected. In preparation for the
voluntary return of refugees to their country of origin, UNHCR, in consultation
with the relevant government authorities, will agree on complementary
initiatives focused on the areas of return, which will ensure the effective
reintegration of the people, the availability of essential services, and the
inclusion of these areas and their populations in longer-term national
development programmes.
43. In each instance, such planning and proposed initiatives,
whenever appropriate and feasible, shall be the subject of a field-level Letter
of Understanding which reflects the particular circumstances surrounding the
voluntary return and reintegration into the country of origin. In particular,
such Letters of Understanding should set out, inter-alia, the specific
institutional framework for cooperation; the agreed activities of each agency in
support of returnee communities, especially those aimed at the capacity building
of governmental structures and non-governmental organizations; and the intended
linkages between the activities of both organizations.
V. FINAL PROVISIONS
Resource mobilization
44. Each organization is responsible for mobilizing the
resources necessary to discharge the responsibilities set out herein. Should
insufficient resources be available for immediate action, the other organization
shall be consulted. For certain special operations, a decision may be taken to
issue a Joint Appeal. Both organizations will participate in DHA-coordinated
consolidated interagency appeal processes.
Public information
45. UNHCR and UNICEF will share relevant information of interest
to the media, NGOs and the public about children of joint concern. UNHCR and
UNICEF will cooperate, at both Headquarters and field levels, to promote public
awareness of the situation of children of concern and the work of each
organization to address their needs. Where appropriate and feasible, this
cooperation may take the form of joint or coordinated development of public
information materials and activities. Each agency shall designate focal points
at Headquarters for regular consultations in this respect.
Phase-out and handover
46. Prior to the agreed conclusion of any activities pursuant to
this MOU or to a field-level letter of understanding, or where either UNHCR or
UNICEF expects that resources will be insufficient for the purposes intended, a
mutually agreeable plan for phase-out shall be prepared.
47. Each agency shall be responsible for any outstanding
obligations or liabilities that they may have incurred. Assets, inventory or
resources, if any, that remain after the conclusion of the activity of the MOU
shall be considered for free handover to the Agency with a continuing presence
or related operations in the area, to national institutions, or to suitable NGOs
or other institutions responsible for the beneficiary population contemplated by
the activity.
VI. GENERAL CONDITIONS
48. Nothing in this MOU shall effect the relations of either
signatory to its Governing Body, nor the contractual relationship and
administrative supervision of UNHCR and UNICEF to their operational partners.
49. The implementation of this MOU will be in compliance with
the respective administrative and financial rules and procedures of UNHCR and
UNICEF and be subject to the availability of funds.
50. This MOU will enter into force upon signature and shall be
of indefinite duration.
51. This MOU may be terminated by either party upon 90 days
written notice.
52. This MOU may be modified at any time by mutual consent of
the parties.
53. The Executive Heads of both organizations will meet when
necessary to discuss policy issues, and will nominate senior officials to meet
at least annually (or regularly) to review strategic and implementation issues
of particular interest to both organizations and to propose possible courses of
action to address them.
Geneva, 14 March 1996
Signed for
United Nations High Commissioner
United Nations Children's Fund
for Refugees
Sadako Ogata
Carol Bellamy
United Nations High Commissioner
Executive Director
for Refugees
WFP/UNHCR COOPERATION
MEMORANDUM OF UNDERSTANDING ON THE JOINT WORKING ARRANGEMENTS
FOR REFUGEE, RETURNEE AND INTERNALLY DISPLACED PERSONS OPERATIONS
REVISION EFFECTIVE AS OF 31 MARCH 1997
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 Even before the conclusion of the 1985 Memorandum of
Understanding (MOU), UNHCR and WFP had established a very close partnership in
the service of refugees. This was significantly strengthened with the new
working arrangements introduced progressively from the start of 1992. A revised
MOU, reflecting experience with these new arrangements, became effective at the
start of 1994. This 1997 revision reflects the experience in implementing the
provisions of the first revision.
1.2 The MOU sets out its objectives and scope, and establishes
the division of responsibility and arrangements for needs assessment, food
mobilization, logistics, appeals, monitoring, nutritional surveillance,
reporting, and coordination. The last section contains the general conditions
governing the MOU.
1.3 The Statute of UNHCR mandates the Office to assume the
function of providing international protection to refugees and of seeking
permanent solutions to the problems of refugees. Within the United Nations
system, UNHCR is thus responsible for the protection and welfare of refugees,
and for helping to find durable solutions, including voluntary repatriation,
local integration and resettlement in third countries. Subsequent General
Assembly resolutions have given UNHCR certain responsibilities in respect of
stateless persons and returnees. In specific situations, and further to a
request from the Secretary-General or a competent principal organ of the United
Nations, UNHCR may also act on behalf of persons displaced internally for
refugee-like reasons and those threatened with displacement.
1.4 The definition of persons within UNHCR's competence in the
Office's Statute places emphasis on a well-founded fear of persecution.
Additional criteria have been progressively added to accommodate the evolving
nature of refugee flows. In many situations, UNHCR now provides protection and
assistance to refugees fleeing persecution, conflict and widespread violations
of human rights.
1.5 WFP is the food aid arm of the United Nations system. WFP
meets the emergency food needs of refugees and internally displaced persons
(IDPs), and provides the associated logistic support; uses food aid to support
economic and social development; and promotes world food security, defined as
access of all people at all times to the food needed for conducting an active
and healthy life. WFP thus has both an emergency and a developmental role. The
latter is of particular relevance in WFP's cooperation with UNHCR and other
agencies, including financial institutions, in rehabilitation activities in the
country of origin. Within the scope of the MOU, WFP has the lead responsibility
for mobilizing basic food commodities and the resources to deliver them.
1.6 To achieve its objectives, the MOU must be of value to UNHCR
and WFP colleagues in the field, and reflect their experiences. Suggestions to
improve its usefulness are encouraged. Full and open cooperation and exchange of
information at all levels are prerequisites for the success of the vital
partnership for which the MOU provides the framework.
2. OBJECTIVES AND SCOPE
2.1 Through the timely provision of the right quantity of the
right food and related non-food inputs, UNHCR and WFP seek to ensure:
- the restoration and/or maintenance of a sound
nutritional status through a food basket that meets the assessed requirements,
is nutritionally balanced and is culturally acceptable; and
- the promotion of as much self-reliance as possible
among the beneficiaries, through the implementation of appropriate programmes to
develop food production or generate self-employment, which will thereby
facilitate a progressive shift from general relief food distribution towards
sustainable development-oriented activities.
2.2 UNHCR and WFP are committed to ensuring that food aid is
targeted at the household level and reaches the most vulnerable, and that its
delivery respects the guiding principles of humanitarian action. They will also
work together to implement strategies to involve the beneficiary community, and
particularly women, in all aspects of the management of food aid.
2.3 The MOU is a management tool contributing to the achievement
of these objectives by defining clearly the responsibilities and arrangements
for cooperation between UNHCR and WFP. It does so in a way that maximizes the
strengths and comparative advantages of each organization for the benefit of all
concerned, and that ensures the necessary coordination.
2.4 The MOU covers Cooperation in the provision of food aid to
refugees, returnees and, in specific situations as defined in paragraph 1.3,
IDPs, provided that the beneficiaries number at least 5,000. Where the
beneficiaries are located in developed countries (namely countries other than
those listed in the OECD/DAC Annual Report as aid recipient countries that fall
below the threshold for World Bank loan eligibility), the provisions of the MOU
will still apply provided that the availability of the necessary donor resources
would not be at the expense of WFP's relief operations in developing countries.
This will be determined by WFP on a case-by-case basis.
2.5 UNHCR will meet the food needs of persons of its concern but
outside the scope of the MOU as defined above, and those of any persons who,
while falling within the MOU's scope, have been excluded by a situation-specific
agreement with WFP.
3. PLANNING AND NEEDS ASSESSMENT
3.1 UNHCR and WFP will undertake contingency planning and
maintain contingency plans for countries where this is deemed appropriate. Each
will seek to ensure joint participation - with others concerned - in the
process, and share relevant contingency plans where these could not be developed
jointly.
3.2 The indicative energy, protein and micronutrient
requirements established by FAO and WHO, adjusted as necessary to take into
account the demographic composition and other relevant factors specific to the
beneficiary population, will provide the basis for the calculation of food
needs. A common set of agreed nutritional guidelines will be used for assessing
the food needs for both the general and any selective feeding programmes that
may be necessary.
3.3 The Government of the country of asylum and UNHCR are
responsible for determining the number of refugees, while WFP and UNHCR will
jointly assess the number eligible for food assistance. An accurate
identification of beneficiaries and a sound assessment of their needs are
essential for the mobilization and efficient use of the resources made available
to both organizations.
3.4 UNHCR has developed and will maintain appropriate
refugee-registration mechanisms, UNHCR has a joint responsibility with the host
Government for ensuring that refugee numbers are established as accurately and
as soon as possible after a new refugee emergency, and updated regularly
thereafter. The size and the nature of the influx will determine the type of
registration mechanism to be used. Pending registration, the most appropriate
techniques will be used in order to estimate numbers and identify beneficiaries.
In normal circumstances registration/verification will take place within three
months of the start of a major influx. Arrangements must be made to register any
new arrivals thereafter. Registration data should be verified and updated
continuously, particularly during, but not limited to, food distribution.
Verification of data on all beneficiaries should be repeated periodically, as
required by the situation.
3.5 UNHCR will ensure that WFP is fully involved in the planning
and execution of refugee enumeration/registration arrangements for actual or
potential beneficiaries of food aid. Where a satisfactory registration has not
been possible within three months, UNHCR and WFP will jointly determine the
number of beneficiaries in need of food assistance. Operational partners and
local representatives of donor Governments should be closely associated with
this and other aspects of enumeration and registration. Should there be
disagreement between the respective country offices on the number of
beneficiaries to use in the absence of a satisfactory initial registration, the
problem shall be referred to the headquarters level for resolution. Pending such
resolution, WFP will provide food to the number of beneficiaries it estimates to
be in need of assistance.
3.6 In consultation with the relevant government authorities,
operational partners and experts, as appropriate, UNHCR and WFP will jointly
assess the overall food aid and related relief requirements. Both agencies will
agree on the modalities of food assistance, composition of the food basket,
ration size, duration of assistance, as well as on directly related non-food
inputs which may have an impact on the nutritional status of the beneficiaries.
Special consideration will be given to the needs of women, children and
vulnerable groups. The views of the beneficiaries, especially those of women,
will be sought. The proposed food assistance programme will take into account
all relevant factors, including the socio-economic and nutritional status of
beneficiaries, cultural practices, overall food availability, prospects for
self-reliance, availability of cooking fuels, and the need to minimize the
environmental impact of using the cooking fuels selected.
3.7 UNHCR is responsible for determining the nutritional status
of refugees and for the implementation of such selective feeding programmes as
may be found necessary in addition to the agreed general ration. The results of
nutritional surveys will be shared with WFP. The nutritional status of the
refugees will also be examined as part of a joint food aid needs assessment. The
decision to implement selective feeding programmes will be taken in consultation
with WFP on the basis of agreed guidelines. UNHCR will keep WFP informed
regularly on the implementation of such programmes.
3.8 Whenever possible, UNHCR and WFP will promote the use of
food and non-food aid to encourage and support the self-reliance of the
beneficiaries and of their communities, as appropriate. Measures will include
food for work, and the provision of non-food inputs such as seeds and
agricultural tools.
3.9 In a major new emergency, the initial assessment to
determine the number of beneficiaries and the most urgent food needs will
normally be carried out within the framework of the emergency response being
mobilized by both agencies, and would involve the participation of emergency
response teams from UNHCR and WFP, as appropriate.
3.10 In ongoing operations, a review of food needs will normally
take the form of a periodic joint assessment mission, undertaken either with
country-based or outside staff. The composition of the mission will be mutually
agreed. WFP will normally provide the mission team leader and a logistician, if
required, and UNHCR a nutritionist and other specialist staff to help assess
levels of economic self-reliance, if applicable. The participation as full
mission members of selected donor and operational partner representatives will
be encouraged so as to promote donor support for the mission's findings.
The views of the relevant national authorities and of the beneficiaries will be
sought. Jointly established guidelines for food needs assessment missions will
be followed. Changes to the recommendations agreed by a joint food needs
assessment mission shall be made only by mutual agreement, after discussion
between the headquarters.
3.11 WFP will be closely associated with the planning and
implementation of repatriation operations, and decisions on the use of WFP food
will be taken jointly. If a repatriation commission is established by the
Governments concerned and UNHCR, WFP should be a formal or informal observer at
its meetings, whenever appropriate.
3.12 Food aid can also play a key role in the successful
reintegration of returnees after their repatriation, when assistance to
communities or areas is likely to be more appropriate than individual
entitlements. Post-conflict rehabilitation activities are required not only for
returnees but also for the affected population in the country of origin.
Complementary linkages between the short-term reintegration efforts of UNHCR,
such as quick-impact projects, and the development activities of WFP and others
should be built so as to promote sustainable socio-economic recovery and a
successful reintegration of returnees. Whenever appropriate, WFP will promote
community and/or area-based projects in such sectors as food security,
community services, infrastructure and production that would use food for work
or monetized food aid. A joint (or multi-organization) reintegration strategy
will be drawn up accordingly.
3.13 At the field level, joint plans of action setting out the
agreed objectives and implementation arrangements for operations under the MOU
shall be developed and updated regularly.
3.14 Should the UNHCR or the WFP country office consider that
developments since the last needs assessment warrant a change in the agreed
ration or number of beneficiaries, the other organization shall be advised
immediately. The implications of these developments will be reviewed jointly and
a course of action agreed.
3.15 Should the country offices not agree on a course of action,
the issue shall be referred to both headquarters for appropriate resolution.
Pending resolution, food assistance will be provided at the level established by
the last agreed assessment, if applicable.
4. RESPONSIBILITIES FOR FOOD MOBILIZATION AND MILLING
4.1 WFP is responsible for mobilizing the following commodities,
whether for general or selective feeding programmes: cereals; edible oils and
fats; pulses and other sources of protein; blended foods; salt; sugar; and
high-energy biscuits. Where beneficiaries are totally dependent on food aid, WFP
will ensure the provision of blended foods or other fortified commodities in
order to prevent or correct micronutrient deficiencies.
4.2 UNHCR is responsible for mobilizing complementary
commodities. These include: local fresh foods; spices; tea; and dried and
therapeutic milks.
4.3 The joint needs assessment will determine the specific
commodities and quantities required. The assessment will also determine whether
cereals are to be provided in whole grain or as flour. For practical,
nutritional and environmental reasons, it is generally preferable to provide
flour in the early stages of an emergency, but such provision may be difficult
to sustain in protracted operations. If whole grain is provided, local milling
capacity must be available, and the ration should include compensation for
milling costs (normally 10 percent up to 20 percent, if justified), if these
costs are borne by the beneficiaries. WFP is responsible for mobilizing the
necessary resources for milling and will provide milling facilities to the
beneficiaries where feasible.
4.4 WFP will consult UNHCR immediately should it become clear
that WFP may not be able to ensure the timely arrival and/or milling of food to
meet the needs agreed under the MOU, whether because of unavailability of
resources, delayed deliveries, logistical problems, or any other constraints.
Corrective action may include borrowing from the Central Emergency Revolving
Fund of the United Nations Department of Humanitarian Affairs and UNHCR
advancing funds to WFP against later reimbursement.
4.5 In particular cases where micronutrient requirements cannot
be met through the ration, UNHCR will assume responsibility for the provision of
the necessary micronutrients until the ration can be adjusted or fortified to
meet these needs.
5. RESPONSIBILITIES FOR FOOD DELIVERY AND DISTRIBUTION
5.1 WFP is responsible for the timely transport to agreed
extended delivery points (EDPs) of sufficient quantities of those food
commodities it is responsible for mobilizing. WFP is also responsible for
storing these commodities at the EDPs, and for managing the latter. WFP will
keep UNHCR informed of the in-country logistical arrangements made to implement
the agreed programme.
5.2 The location of an EDP will be proposed by the country
offices, in accordance with agreed guidelines, and confirmed by UNHCR and WFP
headquarters. The location selected should minimize overall costs and maximize
management efficiency of the operation as a whole. EDPs should be located where
sufficient warehousing space can be made available to ensure regular final
distribution and the most efficient possible onward transportation, thus
avoiding the need for further intermediate storage or trans-shipment between the
EDP and the distribution location. Management and security considerations are
particularly important. There should normally be a full-time UNHCR and WFP
presence at the EDP location.
5.3 Unless otherwise agreed, UNHCR is responsible for the
transportation of all commodities from the EDP and for their final distribution.
Responsibility will be assumed ex-warehouse (i.e., EDP) or
Free-on-Truck/Free-on-Rail, taking into consideration practice in the country.
UNHCR shall make all logistical arrangements for the food commodities for whose
mobilization it is responsible, and shall keep WFP informed of the logistical
arrangements made to implement the agreed programme.
5.4 Arrangements for the final distribution of food commodities
to beneficiaries will be agreed jointly by the Government and UNHCR, in full
consultation with WFP and in conformity with the UNHCR commodity distribution
guidelines. These arrangements will respect UNHCR and WFP's policy of ensuring
the maximum possible appropriate involvement of the beneficiary community, and
of women in particular, in all aspects of distribution. The final distribution
of food commodities will normally be the responsibility of an implementing
partner of UNHCR, whose designation shall be jointly agreed by UNHCR and WFP.
The distribution modalities and the responsibilities of the implementing partner
for reporting on the distribution and use of food commodities will be the
subject of a tripartite agreement among UNHCR, WFP and the implementing partner.
UNHCR is responsible for ensuring that implementing arrangements also provide
appropriate guidance to beneficiaries on how to prepare food in a manner that
minimizes cooking time and safeguards its nutritional content.
5.5 In targeted feeding programmes such as school feeding, food
for work, and in non-camp situations in the country of asylum or in situations
where food assistance is targeted to both IDPs and refugees, UNHCR and WFP may
agree to transfer the responsibility for distribution to WFP.
5.6 There is no automatic retroactive entitlement when full
distribution of the agreed ration has not been possible. The decision on any
retroactive distribution will be made jointly by UNHCR and WFP, taking into
account the nutritional status of beneficiaries, measures taken by them, and any
liabilities incurred in coping with the shortfall, its economic impact, and the
future availability of resources.
6. RESPONSIBILITIES FOR FUNDING AND APPROACHES TO DONORS
6.1 UNHCR and WFP will each mobilize the cash and other
resources necessary for the discharge of their respective responsibilities.
Thus, WFP will mobilize all international and land transport, storage and
handling (LTSH) costs, milling costs, if applicable, and any other resources
required for the transport of its commodities up to the EDPs, storage at, and
the management of, EDPs. UNHCR will mobilize cash and other resources necessary
for all other aspects of commodity management and distribution from the EDPs
onwards, and for all aspects from mobilization and purchase to delivery and
distribution of the commodities for which it is responsible.
6.2 UNHCR and WFP will ensure that the resource implications for
each organization are set out in all approaches to donors and related
documentation in a manner that makes these responsibilities and their
complementarity clear. Details on country-specific LTSH and distribution costs
will be provided. Approaches to donors will be coordinated, and UNHCR will share
with WFP in advance the text covering food needs in any appeal to donors. Joint
approaches will be made whenever appropriate, both at the start of a new
operation and at any time should it appear that the response of donors will not
ensure the timely delivery of the necessary commodities.
6.3 UNHCR and WFP will urge donors to pledge commodities and
cash for all food requirements under this MOU through WFP, rather than
bilaterally. WFP will manage all contributions channelled through it, and
coordinate and monitor donor pledges and shipments, including bilateral and
nongovernmental donations, of all commodities, seeking to adjust delivery
schedules as necessary. UNHCR will be kept informed accordingly.
6.4 WFP will seek to ensure that bilateral food resources for
refugees, returnees and IDPs falling under this agreement, whether channelled
through WFP or not, are accompanied by the full cash resources needed to cover
LTSH and other related support costs.
6.5 UNHCR will support WFP's specific approaches to donors to
provide cash for local, regional or international purchase, so as to
ensure that the needs of beneficiaries are met in the most timely and
cost-effective manner possible. UNHCR will also support WFP's general approaches
to donors for cash contributions to bring the Immediate Response Account (IRA)
of the International Emergency Food Reserve (IEFR) up to, and maintain it at,
the approved level, and for contributions to any similar fund, so that WFP can
respond swiftly to new emergency food needs.
7. MONITORING AND REPORTING
7.1 WFP will maintain an effective system for monitoring the
food pipeline and keep UNHCR closely and regularly informed, at the field and
headquarters levels, of its status and developments. WFP will immediately alert
UNHCR should it appear that the pipeline may not be able to meet agreed needs.
7.2 UNHCR will organize regular nutrition surveys and maintain,
in consultation with WFP, an effective surveillance system for monitoring the
nutritional status of beneficiaries. The results will be shared with WFP as an
important element to measure the progress and efficiency of the joint feeding
programme.
7.3 UNHCR will establish, in consultation with WFP, an effective
monitoring and reporting system for each operation under this MOU, with special
attention given to qualitative information on the socio-economic status of
beneficiaries as this affects their food needs. The responsibilities of the
Government or other implementing partner entrusted with the distribution of WFP
food will be set out in the tripartite agreement referred to in paragraph 5.4 in
a manner that allows effective programme management and meets WFP's and UNHCR's
requirement to account to their donors. This agreement will require the partner
entrusted with distribution to report directly to both WFP and UNHCR on the
distribution and use of WFP food. UNHCR and WFP field staff will undertake
periodic joint monitoring missions at the food distribution sites.
7.4 UNHCR and WFP will seek to have multilateral donors accept
the documentation provided to their Executive Committee and Executive Board,
respectively, as fulfilment of reporting requirements, instead of requiring
donor-specific reporting.
8. COORDINATION
8.1 Close cooperation, and an open and frequent exchange of
information and assessments between UNHCR and WFP at the field level are
essential. This should also enable the resolution of most actual and potential
problems without referring them to headquarters. Regular and structured meetings
will be held in the field to review progress and developments, and ensure a
coordinated response.
8.2 The UNHCR and WFP country offices, in liaison with the
relevant Government authorities as appropriate, will establish food aid
coordinating mechanisms that allow regular consultation and exchange of
information with multilateral and bilateral donors, the diplomatic community,
other United Nations organizations concerned and NGO partners. UNHCR will ensure
that the necessary operational coordination mechanisms outside the capital are
established in close consultation and with the participation of WFP.
8.3 WFP will share with UNHCR the authorizing documents for
assistance under the MOU before they are finalized. Letters of Understanding
(LOUs) between WFP and the Government will expressly provide for full access to
and monitoring by both organizations of all aspects of the operation covered by
the LOU. The need to associate UNHCR formally in a tripartite LOU will be
considered jointly on a case-by-case basis.
8.4 WFP and UNHCR will collaborate on public information
activities to promote awareness of the food and related needs of beneficiaries,
understanding of each organization's role, and support for the work of each
organization to address these needs. In all joint operations, WFP and UNHCR will
acknowledge the role of the other to both the media and the general public in
order to ensure the common goal of donor and host government support. At the
field level, there should be adequate visibility for each organization.
8.5 At the headquarters level, coordination on
operation-specific matters is the responsibility of the respective operations
managers. Joint field missions will be undertaken when warranted by specific
situations. Coordination on commodity and resource mobilization issues is the
responsibility of respective resource mobilization services. Responsibility for
coordination on overall policies and functional issues lies with the Directors
of UNHCR's Division of Operational Support and WFP's Operations Department, who
will encourage direct contacts among the technical, logistic and programme
coordination staff concerned.
8.6 When either UNHCR or WFP is elaborating or developing
emergency response capacities, systems and guidelines or taking any other action
that could potentially benefit (or duplicate) the work of the other, the
responsible unit in the other organization is to be informed and every effort
should be made to maximize the benefits to both.
8.7 Each organization will develop and maintain its own training
materials for discharging its responsibilities. Joint training courses will be
held, with priority given to the field. These courses will focus on cooperation
in implementing the provisions of the MOU and on a better understanding of the
other organization's responsibilities and constraints. Such courses would
normally use the training materials of each organization in combination. In
addition, each organization will seek to offer the other places on courses with
a more general relevance, such as emergency management training.
8.8 Joint headquarters-level meetings with Governments and
others concerned by specific country or regional operations will be organized as
required. If either UNHCR or WFP organizes a meeting with external bodies on
operations covered by the MOU, the other organization will be invited.
8.9 The evaluation services of UNHCR and WFP will organize joint
evaluations as appropriate, taking into account the scale and complexity of
operations covered by the MOU. When an evaluation of a joint operation is
organized by one organization, the other shall be informed and invited to
participate.
9. GENERAL PROVISIONS
9.1 This revised MOU shall come into effect as of 31 March 1997,
superseding the revised MOU dated January 1994.
9.2 It governs cooperation in all operations covered by its
terms except those, or those parts of, operations as may be specifically
excluded by mutual agreement.
9.3 The MOU may be modified at any time by mutual agreement. It
will be kept under regular review by a joint task force established for this
purpose by the Executive Heads of UNHCR and WFP.
(Signed)
(Signed)
Catherine Bertini
Sadako Ogata
Executive Director WFP
High Commissioner UNHCR
Handbook for Emergencies - Second Edition (UNHCR, 1999, 414 p.)
(introduction...)
Using the Handbook
Introduction
Abbreviations
UNHCR's Mission Statement
1. Aim and Principles of Response
2. Protection
3. Emergency Management
4. Contingency Planning
5. Initial Assessment, Immediate Response
6. Operations Planning
7. Coordination and Site Level Organization
8. Implementing Arrangements
9. External Relations
10. Community Services and Education
11. Population Estimation and Registration
12. Site Selection, Planning and Shelter
13. Commodity Distribution
14. Health
15. Food and Nutrition
16. Water
17. Environmental Sanitation
18. Supplies and Transport
19. Voluntary Repatriation
20. Administration, Staffing and Finance
21. Communications
22. Coping with Stress
23. Staff Safety
24. Working with the Military
Appendix 1 - Catalogue of Emergency Response Resources
An individual whose refugee status has not yet been
determined.
Bureau
Organizational division at UNHCR Headquarters dealing with a
particular region.
Children
All persons under the age of 18 (as defined in the Convention on
the Rights of the Child).
Convention refugees
Persons determined to be refugees by the authorities of States
that have acceded to the Convention and/or Protocol. As such, they are entitled
to claim the rights and benefits which those States have undertaken to accord to
refugees.
EXCOM
The Executive Committee of the High Commissioner's Programme
which currently consists of representatives from 53 states elected on the widest
possible geographic basis from those states with a demonstrated interest in and
devotion to finding solutions for refugee problems.
Financial Rules
The "Financial Rules for Voluntary funds administered by the
High Commissioner for Refugees" (document A/AC/96/503/Rev-6 of 1 February 1996).
Headquarters
UNHCR headquarters in Geneva.
Implementing agreement
Agreement between UNHCR and a partner which defines the
conditions governing the implementation of a project.
Implementing partners
Operational partner that signs an implementing agreement and
receives funding from UNHCR.
Internally displaced persons
See definition in chapter 2 on protection.
IOM/FOM
An Inter-Office Memorandum/Field Office Memorandum originating
from Headquarters and containing management and other instructions.
Mandate refugees
Persons considered by UNHCR to be refugees according to the
Statute and other relevant General Assembly resolutions. This determination is
not dependent upon the state of asylum being party to the 1951 Convention or
1967 Protocol. Mandate refugees can benefit from the High Commissioner's action.
They do not, however, benefit from the rights accorded to Convention refugees,
unless they are also recognized as refugees by a State party to the Convention.
Non-governmental organization
A private voluntary agency created to perform beneficial
activities according to its statutes or constitution.
Operational
This term is applied to the organization directly implementing
an assistance project, e.g. UNHCR becomes operational when it provides
assistance directly to refugees.
Operational partner
Governmental, inter-governmental and non-governmental
organizations and UN agencies that work in partnership with UNHCR to protect and
assist refugees, leading to the achievement of durable solutions.
Refugee
For convenience, the word refugee is used in this handbook to
describe any person of concern to UNHCR. Chapter 2 on protection provides
definitions of the different categories of persons of concern, including
refugees, internally displaced persons and stateless people.
Representative
The High Commissioner's representative in the country where the
emergency occurs (regardless of the representative's official title).
The Field
The area, outside Headquarters, where UNHCR provides protection
and assistance to refugees and which contains UNHCR's Regional Offices, Branch
Offices, Sub-Offices and Field Offices.
The Statute
The Statute of the Office of the United Nations High
Commissioner for Refugees (General Assembly Resolution 428 (v) of 14 Dec. 1950).
"Statutory" should be understood accordingly.
United Nations High Commissioner for
Refugees Case postale 2500 CH-1211 Gen�ve 2
D�p�t